The Victorian Naturalist Would Not Be Successful Without the Enormous Amount of Time Scenes

Th Victorian Naturalist

Volume 116 (1) February 1999 F.N.C.V.

Mfcrri

Published bv The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria since 1 884 From the Editors

The Victorian Naturalist would not be successful without the enormous amount of time scenes. and effort voluntarily given by a large number of people who work behind the

refcrecd. The Editors would One of the most important editorial tasks i s to have papers 1998: like to say thank you to those people who re fereed manuscripts published in

Jenny Barnett Mike Coupar John Hunter Martin Predavec Verna Beilharz David Crosby Jeffrey Jeanes Ross Ramsay Bill Birch Bob Dalgarno David Lindenmeyer Jon Sago Peter Brown Peter Dann Lachlan McKinnon Martin Schulz Malcolm Caldcr Kelvin Dunn Andrew McMahon Peter Tyler Daniel Catrice Ian Lndersby Ian Mansergh Robert Wallis Richard Marchanl Neville Walsh I lelen Cohn Mary Gibson Laurie Conole Alena Glaistcr Peter Menkhorst Jeanette Watson John Conran David Gray Adrian Moorrees Geoff Westcotl Margaret Corrick Gwen Harden Tim New

Leon Costermans Sheila 1 loughton Geoffrey Paterson

The Victorian Naturalist endeavours to publish articles which are written for a wide and varied audience. We have a team of dedicated proof-readers who iclp with the readability and expression of our articles. Thanks to:

Julie Bartlett Alistair Evans Steve Mill Michael McBain Ken Bell Arthur I'arnworth Virgil Hubregtse John McLean Tenia Bennell Sharon Lord John Hunter Geoffrey Paterson Phil Bock Mary Gibson Glen Jamieson Michelle Smith Amis Dzedins Ken Green Genevieve Jones Kathie Strickland

Ian Lndersby Murray 1 laby Peter Kelly Robert Wallis Jennie Epstein Clarrie Handreck Ian Mansergh Gretna Weste

Sincere thanks to our book reviewers for 1998 who provided ii iteresting and insightful comments on a wide range of books and other materials. Malcolm Colder Linden Gilbank Kathleen Ralston John West Tim Doeg Caroline Gross Barbara Sharp Paul Downey Sara Maroske Letitia Silberbauer Cecily Lalkingham Tom May Kathie Strickland

As always we particularly thank our authors who provide us with excellent material for publication.

Our editorial advisory team continue to provide valuable advice and assistance: Ian Lndersby, Ian Mansergh, Pom May and John Seebeck.

On the production side, a thank you to: the computer team - Alistair Evans, Anne Morton. Michael McBain who maintains the internet site (http://calcite apana.org.au/fncv/)

Ken Bell who prepares the annual index ; Felicity (iarde for printing the labels; and

Printers, Brown Prior Anderson Pty. Ltc , especially Steve Kitlo. 1

The Victorian Naturalist

Volume 116(1) 1999 February

Editor: Merilyn Grey

Honours Australian Natural History Medallion 1998 - Peter Menkhorst. by S. Houghton 4 Contributions Plant Ecophysiology: the Quest to Understand How Plants Cope in a Changing Environment, by J. Williams and D. Eamus 6 Leafhoppers in Ant Nests: Some Aspects of the Behaviour of Pogonoscopini {Hemiptera: Eurymelidae), byM.F. DayandK.R. Pullen 12 The Orange Palm Dart Skipper Cephrenes augiades sperthias

(Felder) in Melbourne, by J, Eichler 16 A Fauna Survey of Riparian and Other Revegetation Sites in Eltham. Victoria, by P. Homan 19 A List of Native Mammals of Wilsons Promontory National Park, by P. Menkhorst and J. Seebeck 26 Letters to the From N. Romanowski: Aquaculture of Silver Perch Editor Bidyanus bidyanus 28 From G. Kibria; Response to N. Romanowski 29 Naturalist Notes Some Records of the Fungus Blackfellows' Bread Polyporus mylittae, by E. Lyndon 41 The Cordyceps Update, by R. Barker 42 Book Reviews Flora of Australia, Volume 12 Mimosaceae (excluding Acacia), Caesalpiniaceae, reviewer I. Thompson 1 Climate Change 1995 - Impacts. Adaptations and Mitigation of Climate Change: Scientific-Technical Analyses, editors R.T. Watson, M.C. Zingowerd, R.H. Moss and D.J. Dokken 25 Saving the Environment: What Will it Take? by Ted Trainer 33 A Long Walk in the Australian Bush, by William J. Lines, reviewer RJ. Fletcher 37 George Caley, Nineteenth Century Naturalist, by Joan Webb, reviewer L. Gil/bank 38 New Zealand Fungi: an Illustrated Guide, by Greta Stevenson, 40 reviewer R. Jones 34 Tribute Daniel Ernest Mclnnes. 1906- 1998, by S. Houghton 18 Vale Joan Harry, by N. Schleiger and D. Mahler 36 Norman Stanford, by S. Houghton 5 Lrrata Volume 115(5) ISSN 0042-5 84 Natural History Medallion (see Cover Peter Menkhorst receiving the 1998 Australian Photographies. article p. 4). Photo by Wendy Clark. Empathy

Find us on the WEB: http://calcite.apana.org.au/fncv/ Honours

Australian Natural History Medallion 1998

Peter Menkhorst

'Destruction of habitat* is a phrase heard The status of the Koala is a vexed frequently these days, and it is the reality question. Overpopulation is a problem in behind this that makes the work of this parts of Victoria, and since 1995 Peter has year's Medallionisl so important and valu- coordinated Koala management across the able. For more than twenty-five years. State, including investigation of options for Peter Menkhorst has been involved with fertility control. He represents Victoria on endangered species of birds and mammals, the National Koala Network, which has pre- either by Held survey, research or coordi- pared a National Strategy for Koala nating recovery efforts. As a Wildlife Conservation. Scientist in the former Fisheries and In 1995 Peter represented Australian Wildlife Department, and since 1996 a wildlife agencies at a workshop on Senior Wildlife Policy Officer with the Population and Habitat Viability Department of Natural Resources and Assessment for the Komodo Dragon, in Environment, he has played a major role in Bogor, Java, and later encouraged and improving knowledge of Victoria's wildlife facilitated the Conservation Breeding and developing recovery strategies. Specialist Group of IUCN to conduct the The Orange-bellied Parrot Recovery first such workshop in Australia, for the Project, one of the first intensive recovery Spotted Tree Frog. efforts undertaken in Australia, required The Atlas of Victorian Mammals project the collaboration of the wildlife agencies was set up under Peter's leadership in of the Victorian. Tasmanian. South 1980, and he was responsible for the for- Australian and Federal Governments, mation of a detailed computer database for Birds Australia, and other non-government mammal records for Victoria. This now agencies. Peter Menkhorst has been the includes records of all Victorian verte-

Victorian representative on this recovery brates and is the most comprehensive of its team since its inception in 1983. He devel- kind in Australia. It formed the basis for oped and led the Helmetcd Honeyeater Mammals of Victoria: distribution, ecology Recovery Effort, involving the coordina- and conservation (1995), for which Peter tion of scientists from a variety of disci- was the major contributor and editor. In plines, and in 1993 he was put in charge of 1996 it received a Whitley Book Award the recovery of the Regent Honeyeater, an from the Royal Zoological Society of New ecologically complex project, also requir- South Wales. Other publications include ing the coordination of organisations in contributions to books on the ecology of three States. He has collaborated in the the Mallec, the status of Australia's preparation of recover)' plans and Action scabirds, possums and gliders, Fauna of Statements under the Flora and Fauna Australia, Volume 2 - Aves and the Guarantee Act for the Orange-bellied Handbook of Australian New Zealand and Parrot, Helmeted Honeyeater. Regent Antarctic Birds, and over 100 articles to Honeyeater, New Holland Mouse, Squirrel journals both scientific and popular. Glider and the Koala in New South Wales. Over 130 of Peter's photographs have Peter has been involved in many field been accepted for the Australian surveys, often as team leader. These Museum's National Photographic Index of included investigation of the requirements Australian Wildlife. Some have been used of the Squirrel Glider in northern and cen- in the scries of books published by the tral Victoria, the Smokey Mouse in the Index: others in Mammals of Victoria, and Eastern Highlands, and the feeding ecolo- in R. Strahan's Complete Book of gy of Australasian Gantlets breeding in A ustralian Mammals. Port Phillip Bay, Victoria. Programs for the recovery and management of endangered wildlife rely very

The Victorian Naturalist Honours

heavily on research, and Peter has well as various 'Friends" organisations. He gnc d d c °- su ervi sed projects P at was a committee member of for ™^ , r?n V O R G PhD and BSc Honours level on aspects of twenty years, and a member of the the ecology of the Orange-bellied Parrot Healesville Sanctuary Advisory and the Helmeted Honeyeater. Input from Committee between 1991* and 1995 He amateur groups is also of great value, and has presented over 50 talks to naturalist Peter has been very active in cooperating clubs, and has done much to raise public with them to achieve common goals. awareness of the plight of endangered Peter is a member of Birds Australia, the species, and to involve the wider commu- Bird Observers Club of Australia, the nity in the protection and preservation of Australian Mammal Society, the their habitat. Australian Bird Study Association, the Victorian Ornithological Research Group Sheila Houghton (V.O.R.G.), who nominated him for the 12 Scenic Court, Gisbome, Victoria 3437. Australian Natural History Medallion, as

Errata

In Volume 1 15 (5), Mount Buffalo Centenary Issue, the captions on pictures A and B on Plate 5 were reversed. They should read: A. Oreixenica latialis theddora, a subspecies of the Browns endemic to Mount Buffalo. Photo by David Crosby: B. Common Silver Xenica Oreixenica lathoniella hercens which flies at the same time as O. latialis. Photo by David Crosby. These photographs accompany the paper by David Crosby entitled 'The Butterflies of Mount Buffalo National Park', pages 222-225.

The editor apologises for any misunderstanding this has caused.

Special Issues

The Victorian Naturalist

Mount Buffalo Centenary Issue Volume 115 (5) 1998 Wilsons Promontory Centenary Issue Volume 115(6) 1998

Copies are available for purchase from Parks Victoria offices at the Mount Buffalo and Wilsons Promontory National Parks or the FNCV Office, Locked Bag 3. Blackburn 3130. Victoria.

Send $8.50 per copy (includes postage).

Farewell Message

Ed and Pat Grey wish to thank all the people who have helped make our job as editors of The Victorian Naturalist over the past years rewarding, enjoyable and possible.

There are far too many to list, but suffice it to say, we shall miss the contact with such a range of interesting and stimulating people. We are, however, happy to leave in the knowledge that the new editor - Merilyn Grey - will do a wonderful job.

Ed and Pat Grey

Vol. 116(1)1999 Contributions

Plant Ecophysiology: the Quest to Understand How Plants Cope in a Changing Environment

2 Jann Williams 1 and Derek Eamus

Abstract Plant ecophysiology applies physiological principles and methodologies to organisms living in their natural environment. It is a relatively new field in Australia, but is helping unravel the linkages between pattern and process in a range of environments and vegetation types, and is providing basic information that can be used for managing natural resources. This paper reviews recent progress in the discipline and identifies future directions for research. ( The Victorian Naturalist 116(1), 1 999, 6-10).

Introduction Until recently, much ecological research across the landscape. For example, a into plants has been concerned with the species may only be found in locations description and classification of vegetation where there is a reliable water supply, such types, as well as the long tradition of as along river-banks. By examining the assessing differences within and between processes associated with these patterns, populations of a plant species using mor- the aim is to identify the key mechanisms phological and demographic characters that help explain the distribution of indi- (Pryor 1956; Williams and Ladiges 1985). vidual plants or vegetation types. Using the With the development of new approaches previous example, the plants in question and methodologies, however, we are now- either may not be able to physiologically gaining a greater understanding of the tolerate drier areas or could grow there but processes that underly the distribution and are outcompeted by other species. By abundance of plants. using ecophysiological techniques, there is

A more quantitative approach based on a greater chance of identifying which is the knowledge of mechanisms underlying the most likely explanation. distribution and performance of plants can Recent published examples where eco- further improve understanding, and hence physiological principles are used to link management of systems. Ecophysiology, a pattern and process are studies on the hybrid of physiology and ecology provides dynamics of Mulga woodlands (Anderson this approach. For the purposes of this and Hodgkinson 1997) and some of the paper, ecophysiology is considered to be pioneering work on northern Australian the application of physiological principles savannas (Prior et ai 1997; Myers et ai and methodologies to organisms living in 1997). These studies provide considerable their natural environment, or the study of insight into the functioning of these the influence of the environment on plant ecosystems and provide basic information growth and development. It gives us the that can be used for the management of tools to advance our understanding of how- these landscapes. In addition, modelling plants cope with a changing environment physiological processes, as illustrated by on a daily, seasonal and annual basis. studies on tree growth and nutrient cycling Ecophysiology is a relatively new field in (Kirschbaum et ai 1994) can help predict Australia (albeit a well established field in potential changes in vegetation dynamics Europe and America), and is beginning to as environments change, for example in help unravel the linkages between pattern response to climate change (McMurtrie et and process in range of environments and al. 1992). Models can also inform our vegetation types (Williams and Eamus understanding of successional changes in 1997). Pattern generally refers to the way vegetation after disturbances such as fire. plants are distributed in space and time With the increasing realization of the importance of natural ecosystems to global ( School of Botany, University of Melbourne. environmental health (Mooney et ai 1996) Parkville, Melbourne. Victoria 3052. and the increased focus on sustainable School of Biological Sciences, Northern Territory University, Darwin, Northern Territory 0909. management (Commonwealth of Australia

The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

1996). the demand for information on the deficit (VPD). Survival of species with dif- structure and functioning of ecosystems is ferent patterns of leaf- fall was apparently likely to expand. The challenge is to pro- reliant upon differing 'strategies* and no vide informed opinions of the linkages single strategy appeared to confer a large between pattern and process and how competitive advantage. ecosystems respond to the actions of Some of the variability and complexity of humans (Williams and Earn us 1997). This physiological responses in these savannas paper indicates how the field of ecophysi- include identification of the different ology can help achieve an increased under- responses of saplings and trees of the same standing of the links between pattern and species in the one location (Prior et aL process. 1997; Myers et al 1997) and different physiological responses between different popu- Plant ecophysiology - the links between lations of the same species (Fordyce et al. pattern and process 1997). Complementary studies using stable The production of much of the vegetation isotopes to investigate water-use-efficiency covering the Australian continent is limited of different provenances of River Red Gum by low availability of water, nutrients, or Eucalyptus camaldulensis (e.g. Hubick and both (Pate and McComb 1981). Gibson 1993) have shown that such Superimposed on this axiomatic feature is approaches may be successful. Even so. the the impact of fire upon vegetation structure record of identifying physiological charac- and functioning. Availability of water, espe- ters that may reflect underlying local adap- cially after fire, is a critical factor for plant tation remains modest, even though it has distribution and performance. The challenge long been advocated (Williams et al. 1995). for ecophysiologists is to demonstrate how While both too much and too little water the different strategies used by plants for can limit plant performance (Bell and acquiring, controlling and using water and Williams 1997), under certain conditions tolerating drought can explain observed pat- the amount of light received by a plant can vegetation structure and function. terns of also be a major source of stress. special issue on plant eco- In the recent Environmental factors which disrupt leaf in the Australian Journal physiology of functioning, such as low temperatures, can (Volume competition for Botany 45(2)), induce a light-dependent loss in photosyn- a constant theme across a range water was thctic capacity known as photoinhibition example, competition of ecosystems. For (Osmond 1981). Cold-induced photoinhi- the study by for water was central to bition has been a major topic of biochemi- Hodgkinson (1997), who Anderson and cal and physiological research for the past counter-intuitively, that grazing of showed, fifteen years, but its significance for plant island-bands of perennial grasses around communities, both natural and agricultural, Acacia aneura reduces the water Mulga is still poorly known. Our understanding of shrubs, which then die supply to mulga the role of photoinhibition is slowly during periods of low rainfall, leading to a improving with an increasing number of In south-western dysfunctional landscape. field-based studies, as discussed in the next for water also Australia, competition was section of this paper. important for the survival oY Hakea Considerable benefits can also be gained stage species, especially at the seedling by using ecophysiological techniques to (Richards et al 1997). examine the below-ground dynamics of represents a Pre-dawn water potential plants, as illustrated by recent studies over- water status and soil measure of plant seas (Vogt et al. 1996). In Australia our - the lower that water water availability understanding of this area is still in the potentials are, the more stressed a plant is. 19th century (Williams and I am us 1997) Northern In savanna woodlands in the with Keith (1997) identifying the follow- Territory (Myers et al. 1997; Duff** al ing two areas as critical for future investi- pre-dawn water 1997). seasonal patterns in gation; a) the factors controlling the potential have been related to phenology of amount of carbon and nutrients allocated of the a species, and to the micro-climate within plants to below-ground parts (most- vapour pressure environment, especially ly roots) compared to above-ground

Vol. 116(1)1999 Contributions

(shoots); and b) the transfer of nutrients rather than established plants should be from roots to the soil by living roots exud- more vulnerable to reductions in growth ing substanees or by the death of roots. associated with chronic photoinhibition. Thus, cold-induced photoinhibition may Field-based techniques play a role in limiting regeneration, and Recent technological advances have stim- hence also the distribution, of species ulated rapid progress in the discipline of along climatic gradients. Indeed, recent ecophysiology and hence an increasingly research has established that cold-induced process-based understanding is developing. photoinhibition is correlated with patterns In particular, recent developments in instru- of seedling regeneration by Snow Gum mentation (Pcarcy et ai 1991) have caused Eucalyptus pauciflora at tree line (Ball et

a dramatic expansion of the number of pro- ai. 1991 ) and with poor growth of eucalypt jects involving physiological measurements seedlings planted in pasture revegetation

in the Field, allowing studies at more than programs (Holly et ai 1994: Ball et ai one site and at greater frequencies. Thus, 1997). As the understanding of photopro- portable infra-red gas analysers and leaf dif- tection and photodamage increases, the fusion porometers. coupled with data log- concept of light being a potentially over- gers for micro-climate studies, have allowed abundant resource may receive greater detailed investigations of the relationships attention amongst ecologists. between carbon assimilation, stomatal con- Physiological techniques may be used to ductance and environmental factors. These extrapolate to larger scale ecological ques- instruments allow measurements of, for tions. For example, Battaglia and Williams example, the amount of photosynthesis (1996) showed that the relative abundance occurring in plants in the Held, how much of two eucalypt species at a given site in

water a plant is using and measurements of south-eastern Tasmania could be predicted the environment around a plant such as how by a knowledge of the depth and texture of

much light it is receiving. soil at that site. These authors, in a similar Methods and interpretation of gas manner to that of Eamus and Cole (1997). exchange of terrestrial plants in the Held took observations at the large scale, and have been advanced with the availability then initiated small-scale experiments to of equipment permitting automated control provide a mechanistic understanding of the

of light flux density, temperature and C02 processes generating large-scale patterns. concentration. Whole tree and canopy tran- New technologies such as those described spiration rales have become routinely mea- for terrestrial plants in Williams et at. surable using a range of techniques (sap (1997) and for aquatic organisms in flow sensors: eddy correlation techniques). Westphalen and Cheshire (1997) add to the Indeed, in reviewing the field of ecophysi- growing number of tools that can be used to

ology. it is apparent that measurements at increase our understanding of pattern and the individual tree scale, for above-ground process. The techniques used to measure parts, is adequately serviced by technology hydraulic conductance and positive stem (Williams and Eamus 1997). Furthermore, pressures in seedlings and resprouts in the the even newer sub-discipline of biochemi- Californian chapparal species Aclenostoma cal, or molecular ecology, is gaining fasciculatum could be usefully applied in ground - for example the developments in ecophysiological studies in Australia. the use of genetically transformed plants lo Future Directions investigate whole plant nitrogen allocation Williams and Eamus (1997) identified and carbon gain (Stilt and Schul/e 1994). two major challenges in the discipline of Technological developments in the mea- ecophysiology that are clearly deserving of surement of photoinhibition in situ have attention. also aided our understanding of the mecha- The first was the ecophysiology below-ground parts nisms underlying plant performance (Hall of (mostly, but not exclusively 1994; King and Ball 1998). Physiological roots), while the second was to provide studies indicate that species should be the catchment/regional scale answers most vulnerable to photoinhibition near and predictions that are required by managers and policy chal- their distributional limits and that seedlings makers. Both

8 The Victorian Naturalist ( Contributions

lenges require an understanding of how (canopy, sub-catchment) and large-scale plants respond to changing environments (regional, continental) processes will only at a range of temporal and spatial scales. become accessible when modellers and Furthermore, being able to meet the users of remote sensing and Geographic challenges will depend on the successful Information Systems (G1S) interact with integration of two fields - modelling and eeologists and ecoplnsiologists on research - remote sensing (see Moore et al. 1993) projects at the landscape scale. because experiments at this scale (i.e. thousands of hectares) are not possible, Conclusions In highlighting and measurements of individual plants or ecophysiological research animals would require vast amounts of in Australia, the recent Symposia held in conjunction replication (Williams and Eamus 1997). with meetings of the Society Ecophysiological approaches can, how- Ecological of Australia (see volumes and ever, currently be used to inform manage- 40(2) 45(2) of the Australian Journal ment practices. The diversity of ecophysio- ofBotany) have demonstrated that plant ecophvsiology has a strong base in logical responses in the Australian flora, Australia. It is hoped that which can be put to a wide range of the discipline will continue to grow as the benefits of applied uses, is a good case in hand. The taking this approach become increasingly selection of the best species to plant at a apparent and as new ways are particular site can be greatly improved developed to integrate the impact oi' physiological with good ecophysiological information, as responses on the performance identified by Bell and Williams (1997). of a plant over its life. As the integration of small For example. Walker et al. (1993) high- (leaf, tree), sub-catch- lighted the need for details of water-use medium (canopy, ment) and large (regional, continental) characteristics of species to be used for reclamation of degraded catchments. scale studies increase, the contribution o\" knowledge of processes to explaining, pre- Efforts have been made in this direction dicting and managing patterns in the land- (e.g. Bell et al. 1994). but progress is slow scape will also increase. and the rehabilitation need is great. The lack of knowledge on the type of planting Acknowledgements material, location of plantings and planting We would like to thank the editors of The density have been identified as factors lim- t'ictorian Naturalist for inviting us to write this iting major catchment revegetation pro- review paper and an anonymous referee lor comments. grams in Australia (Sehofield 1992). The need for more ecophysiological informa- References tion is even more pressing in order to max- Anderson, V and I lodgkinson, K (1997) Perennial imise the success of the major revegetation grass-mediated capture of resource flows and the programs currently being promoted in maintenance or mulga banded pattern in a semi-arid

woodland Australian Journal <>! Botany 4S, 33 1 -342 Australia (Commonwealth of Australia Hall. M (.' (1994). The role of photoinhibition during 1997). A recent review of the ecophysiolo- tree seedling establishment at low temperatures In eucalypts (Bell and Williams 1997) Photoinhibition of Photosynthesis from Molecular gy of 1 Mechanisms to the Field Eds N K fiaker and J.R. that greater attention to also concluded Buwyei. pp 367-378 (Bios Scientific Publishers ecophysiological interactions was needed London) Ball, M.C.. Hodges, V.S and Laughlm. G P (1991), to increase our understanding of the genus Cold-induced photoinhibition limits regeneration of natural systems. in both managed and snow gum at tree-line. Functional Ecology 5, 663-668

An additional thrust for the future of cco- Ball. M C , Egerton, SJ.C . Leuning, R . Cunningham, R 13 and Dunne, P. (1997) Microclimate above grass phvsiology lies in its penetration into and affects spring growth of seedlings of Snow Gum development with a range of other, more {Eucalyptus pauclftora) /'hint. < 'ell it ml 155-166 traditional, i.e. older, disciplines (Williams Environment, 20, Battagha. M. and Williams. K. (1996) Mixed species and Eamus 1997). lor example, micromete- stands of eucalvpls as ecolones on a water supply orolegists are concerned with heat and gradient, Oecofngta 108, 518-528.

. I I- ( 1997). momentum exchange between the planetary Bell, D and Williams, hucalvpt ecophj I ologv In 'Eucalypf ecology individuals to ecosvs- boundary layer and canopies and hydrolo- 1" tenisV Ids 4 Williams ami J.C.Z. Wo.narski pp, gists need to know how vegetation influ- 168-196 (Cambridge University Press Cambridge)

Bell, I) I J A , der Moezel, p ences catchment hydrology. Medium-scale , McComb, van G

Vol. 116(1) 1999 Contributions

Bennett, I. J. and Kabay, E.D. ( 1994). Com pan sons of Myers. B A , Duff, G , Eamus, D . Fordyce, I., selected and cloned plantlets against unselected O'Grady, A and Williams, R.J. (1997). Seasonal seedlings for rehabilitation of waterlogged and saline variation in water relations of trees differing in leaf discharge zones in Australian agricultural catch- phenology in a wet-dry tropical savanna near ments, Australian Forestry 57, 21-27. Darwin, northern Australia. Australian Journal of Commonwealth of Australia (1996). 'Australia State Botany 45> 225-240. of the Environment Report 1996V (CS1RO Pate, J. and McComb, A. (1981). 'The Biology of Publishing: Melbourne). Australian Plants' (UWA Press Nedlands). Commonwealth of Australia (1997). 'Natural Heritage Osmond, C.B. (1981) Photorespiration and photoinhi- Tnist. A better environment for Australia in the 21st bition: some implications for the energetics of photo- century*. (Environment Australia and the Department synthesis. Biochemtca et Biophysica Acta 639, 77-98.

of Primary Industries and Energy: Canberra). Pearcv, R.W., Ehlennger, J , Moonev, HA and

Duff, C, Myers, M., Eamus, D , Williams, D., Rundel, P.W. (1991). riant Physiological Ecology:

Fordyce, I and O'Grady, T (1997) Seasonal pat- Eicltl Methods and Instnnnentatian. (Chapman and terns in soil moisture, vapour pressure deficit, tree Hall: London). canopy cover and predawn water potential in north- Prior, L, Eamus. D and Duff, G. (1997). Seasonal and ern Australian savannas. Australian Journal of diurnal patterns of carbon assimilation, stomatal con- Botany 45,211 -224, ductance and leaf water potential in Eucalyptus Eamus, D. and Cole, S. (1997). Diurnal and seasonal tetrodonta saplings in a wet-dry savanna in northern

comparisons of assimilation, phyllode conductance Australia. Australian Journal ofBotany 45, 24 1 -258, and water potential of three acacia and one eucalypt Pryor, ED. (1956). Variation in snow gum {Eucalyptus

species in the wet-dry tropics of Australia. Australian pauciflora Sieb ) with altitude. Proceedings of the Journal ofBotany 45, 275-290. Unnaen Society of New South Wales 81, 299-305

Fordyce, 1., Ramus. D, and Duff, G (1997). The water Richards, MB., Groom. P.K and Lamont, B.B ( 1997) relations of the tree Allosyncarpia ternaia A trade-off between fecundity and drought suscepti- (Myrtaceae) at contrasting sites in the monsoonal bility in adults and seedlings of Hakea species as tropics of northern Australia. Australian Journal of influenced by leaf morphology. Australian Journal of Botany 45, 259-274. Botany 45, 301-309. Holly, C, Laughlin, G P and Ball, M.C. (1994). Cold- Schofield, N.J, (1992). Tree planting for dryland salini- induced photoinhibition and design of shelters for ty control in Australia, Agroforest Systems 20. 1-23. establishment of eucalypts in pasture. Australian Stitt, M. and Schulze. D. (1994) Does Rubisco control Journal ofBotany 42. 139-147. the rale of photosynthesis and plant growth An exer- Hubick, K and Gibson, A (1993). Diversity in the cise in molecular ecophysiology Plant, Cell and relationship between C isotope discrimination and Environment 17.465-487.'

transpiration efficiency when water is limited In Vogt, K.A., Vogt, D.J., Palmiotto, PA., C/Hara, J. and 'Stable Isotopes and Plant C-H20 Relations' (J.R Asbjornsen, H. (1996) Review of root dynamics in Ehrlinger, A E. Hall and G.D Farquhar eds.) pp forest ecosystems grouped by climate, climatic forest 311-325, (Academic Press). tvpe and species. Plant and Soil. 187, 159-219, Keith, H. (1997), Nutrient cycling in eucalypt ecosys- Walker, J., Bullen. F and Williams, B.G. (1993), tems, In 'Eucalypt ecology: individuals to ecosys- Ecohydrological changes in the Murray-Darling tems'. .IE Eds. Williams and J.C.Z. Woinarski pp Basin, I. The number of trees cleared over two cen- 197-226. (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge) turies. Journal of Applied Ecology 30. 265-273. King. DA. and Ball, M.C. (1998). A model of frost Westphalen, G and Cheshire, A. (1997). Quantum effi- impacts on seasonal photosynthesis of Eucalyptus ciency and photosynthetic production of a temperate pauciflora Australian Journal of Plant Physiology. turf algal community, Australian Journal of Botany 25, 27-37. 45. 343-349 Kirschbaum, M.U.F.. King, Comins. DA., H.N., Williams, DG , Mack, R.N. and Black, R A (1995) McMurtrie, R.E., Medlyn. BE, Pongracic, S., Ecophysiology of introduced Pennisetum setaceum Murty, D., Keith, H,, Raison, R.J., Khanna, P.K and on Hawaii: the role of phenotvpic plasticity Ecology Sheriff, D.W. (1994). Modelling forest response to 76, 1569-1580 increasing CO : concentration under nutnent-lunited Williams, J.E., Davis, S.D. and Portwood, K. (1997) conditions. Plant, Celt and Environment 17, 1081- Xylem embolism in seedlings and resprouts of 1099 Adenosloma fasviculatum after fire. Australian McMurtrie, R.E., Comins, H.N., Kirschbaum, M.U F lournai of Botany 45, 29 1 -300. and Wang, Y-P (1992) Modifying existing forest Williams. J E, and Eanius, D (1997). Plant ecophysiol- growth models to take account of effects of elevated ogy: linking pattern and process - a review C02 Australian Journal of Botany 40, 657-678. Australian Journal of Botany 45. 35 1 -357.

Mooney. HA , Eubchenco, J., Dirzo, R. and Sala. K Williams. J.E. and Ladiges, P.Y. ( J985), Morphological (1996). Biodiversity and ecosystem functioning, variation in Victorian, lowland populations of ecosystem analyses. In 'Global Biodiversity Eucalyptus pauciflora Sieb ex Spreng. Proceedings Assessment' Eds V H Hey wood and R T, Watson of the Royal Society of Victoria. 7. 3 1-48. pp 327-452. (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge)

Moore, ID,, Norton, T W. and Williams, J E, (1993) Modelling environmental heterogeneity in forested landscapes Journal ofHydrology 150,717-7-47.

10 The Victorian Naturalist .

Book Review

Flora of Australia Volume 12 Mimosaceae (excluding Acacia), Caesalpiniaceae

Publisher: CSIRO Publishing, P.O. Box 1139, CoUingsvood, Melbourne. RRP $69.95.

This is the fourteenth angiosperm (flow- Victoria, several are cultivated or occur as ering plant) volume to be published in the weeds. Some members of the Mimosaceae Flora of Australia series. Of the 59 volumes (tribe Mimoseae) are serious weeds, e.g. to be published in this major undertaking. Mesquites (genus Prosopis), introduced 46 will deal with angiosperms and the from America for their perceived benefits as remainder with the gymnosperm. fern, soil stabilisers, food sources and stock shel- bryophyte. lichen and oceanic island floras. ter, and Sensitive plants of the genus A number of botanists, illustrators and pho- Mimosa. A few species oiAlbizia (tribe tographers have contributed to this volume in Ingeae) are native to northern Australia and which 169 native and naturalised species are related to the cultivated species of this from 38 genera are described. All of the genus that are grown in Victorian gardens. Australian genera in the Mimosaceae. with Cape Wattle Paraserianthes lophantha is the exception of the largest, Acacia, and all native to southern Western Australia and is 22 genera in the Caesalpiniaceae are widely naturalised and cultivated in described. The majority of species in these Victoria. One of the larger genera in the genera have a tropical to sub-tropical distribu- Mimosaceae treated in this volume is tion although Senna, in particular, is a notable Archidendron which is distributed widely in exception. Asia as well as in north-eastern Australia. The Mimosaceae and Caesalpiniaceae are Familiar introduced species in the two of three legume families, the third Caesalpiniaceae include Honey Locust being the very large Fabaceae (pea family). Gleditsia thacanthos. a fodder plant intro- Some authorities treat these three families duced from North America and widely as sub-families of the Leguminosae. planted and naturalised, and Carob This volume, like all volumes in this Ceratonia siliqua, which is also a useful series, has been written by botanists for food plant. The common garden plant. botanists and the style is formal. A good Caesalpinia gilliesii. has ten relatives that knowledge of plant descriptive terminology are native to northern Australia. and nomenclatural terms and abbreviations A genus in the tribe Cassieae of the is necessary if one is to fully appreciate this Caesalpiniaceae that has been given special book, although the 64 excellent colour pho- treatment in this volume is Senna (mostly tographs add greatly to its attractiveness to formerly known as Cassia). It appears that the amateur. Descriptions and keys to gen- taxonomic resolution of sections of this era and species are very concise but are genus has been thwarted by such reproduc- supplemented with detailed and clear illus- tive strategies as polyploidy, hybridisation trations. Brief notes on distribution, rarity and apomixis and this is discussed. In light taxonomic difficulties, horticultural value, of the lack of certainty about the current weed status etc. are provided after each classification, the authors considered it best species description. For someone wishing to identify some of the more problematic to learn about any of the species in great elements in the complex as 'form taxa* detail, the treatments in this flora will serve rather than as species or sub-species. The as a useful starting point. desert cassias of northern Victoria previous- Distribution maps are placed together near ly known as Cassia nemophila have been the end of the book in the same order as the recognised as Senna form taxa 'coriacea'. taxa appear in the descriptions. This. I think. 'zygophylla', *filifolid and ^petiolaris '. works better than having the maps scattered This book will be an excellent resource throughout the text as has occurred in earli- for professionals and may be useful for er volumes. This volume does not provide a amateur botanists with a special interest in key to angiosperm families or a glossary. the Mimosaceae and Caesalpiniaceae. These are provided in Volume I. Ian Thompson Although very few of the species School of Botany, University of Melbourne. described in this volume occur naturally in Parkville, Victoria 3052

Vol. 116(1) 1999 II Contributions

Leafhoppers in Ant Nests: Some Aspects of the Behaviour of Pogonoscopini (Hemiptera: Eurymelidae)

M.F.Day 1 and K.R.Pullen 1

Abstract Field and laboratory observations on a species of the leafhopper tribe Pogonoscopini have shown that it lives in nests of ants of the genus Camponotus during the day. At dusk it emerges, attended by the ants, to feed on mallee during the night. (We Victorian Naturalist 116(1), 1999, 12-15).

Introduction In the 1920s the north-western Mallee recognised them as one of the district was still a remote part of Victoria Pogonoscopini, a remarkable tribe of when Charles Oke, at that time an amateur eurymelid leafhoppers. entomologist with a particular interest in The Pogonoscopini are poorly studied, beetles, visited the railway siding of distinctive and unusual insects confined, as Gypsum and Hattah Lakes with J.E. far as is known, to the southern and interi- Dixon. He described their excursion in a or parts of Australia. The history of the delightful essay published in The Victorian discovery and description of the species Naturalist (Oke 1926). About this time, a and their association with ants is worth fascinating Australian fauna of insects and recording. In 1909 Jacobi described two other invertebrates living as inquilines leafhoppers from the nests of sugar ants of (guests) in ant and termite nests was being the genus Camponotus from Western brought to light, and Oke had become an Australia; he accommodated the two in the avid collector of the often bizarre inquiline existing eurymelid genus Eutymeioides, as beetles, discovering a diversity of new E. acmaeops and E. Ievis (Jacobi 1909). In species. On this trip Oke found many bee- 1924 China described the new genus tles, but at Hattah Lakes he was also Pogonoscopus for a new species P. intrigued 4 a by kind of froghopper myrmex, and suggested that Jacobi 's two (Cercopidac)* which he encountered in ant species probably belonged to the same nests under the ground. The ant host was genus. China (1926) subsequently revised apparently the 'sugar ant\ Camponotus the group, describing several new genera nigriceps (Smith). Oke slates the froghop- and species to comprise a new subfamily, pers 'were found in all stages, except the the Pogonoscopinae. Evans (1966) later eggs. Little larvae from slightly more than referred to the group as the Tribe

1 up mm to fully matured imagines Pogonoscopini. Representatives of this (adults) were seen in the same nest.. ..On unusual group were subsequently collected rolling over the covering log from one of mainly by myrmecologists and almost the nests sometimes a dozen or 20 of these always in the nests of Camponotus. guests will be revealed". Several froghop- Yet the most basic aspects of pogono- pcrs were found at a depth of 'over 3 feet' scopine biology remained a mystery. They (915 mm) in a large Camponotus nest must have sucked sap like all leafhoppers, covered by log 1 a and a sheet of bark that but where did they feed, and where were Oke excavated. Speculating on the habits the eggs laid? Oke's observations shed no of these inquilines, Oke said Mt would light on these questions. Evans (1931), appear that they spent their lives in these apparently unaware of Oke's observations, nests - unless they are taken out at night to was of the opinion that the pogonoscopines feed on the trees'. However, his brief 'sucked up sap from below ground level'. observations at night did not reveal any basing his comments on the advice of IXC. froghoppers outside the nests. Oke did not Swan, then in South Australia. Later, he identity his inquiline froghoppers. but we slated unequivocally that the Pogonoscopini 'feed on the roots of euca-

1 lypts' (Evans 1946). In a subsequent CSIRO Entomology, GPO Box 1700, Canberra ACT revi- 2601 sion of the Australian leafhopper fauna.

12 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Fig. 1. Mallee atCalperum. Characteristic of the habitat of Pogonoscopus.

Evans (1966) recognised five species of and an adult female in a combination pit- Pogonoscopini in four genera, placing sev- fall/flight intercept trap - dispelled the eral of China's species into synonymy. On view that they passed their lives confined the behaviour of these leafhopers, he quot- to ant nests. ed Mr Peter McMillan of Perth, who had We returned to the Amalia site on 12 frequently collected them with ants in October 1995 with the aim of observing Western Australia. McMillan wrote that the Pogonoscopus and collecting additional ants 'build their nests under logs and stones material. Since previous ant collectors had and have tunnels with large entrance holes found pogonoscopines most commonly in which are smooth and vertical'. The the nests of Camponotus at the base of leafhoppers "walk around with a peculiar cucalypts, the Amalia search was begun by rolling motion and when escaping just fold excavating nests of C gouldianus Forel their legs and tumble down the shaft'. located at the base of mallees. The nest tunnels invariably penetrated between the Field observations on Pogonoscopus mallee roots, allowing only partial excava- myrmex tion, but after several hours five adults and An opportunity to study a pogonoscopinc one nymph of P. myrmex had been found, species under field conditions arose when confirming C gouldianus as a host ant. three leafhoppers identified as This work was carried out during daylight Pogonoscopus myrmex China were caught hours and no leafhoppers were seen out- in traps set in malice as part of a survey of side the Camponotus nests. the invertebrates of the Calperum sector of Appreciating that Camponotus are night Bookmark Biosphere Reserve, South foragers, we returned to the site at dusk. Australia (PuIIen 1997). The collection site We found many ants milling around the (Fig. situated in the old Amalia pad- 1), entrances to their nests and soon one or of the former Calperum sheep station, dock two pogonoscopines were observed. As is dominated by Red Mallee, Eucalyptus darkness fell, more appeared, and eventu- socialis F.Muell. ex Miq. Calperum is ally both nymphs and adults were seen to located north of Renmark and has a semi- be climbing the mallee stems. The temper- arid climate. manner of collection of The ature was approximately 12-I5°C. The the specimens - two nymphs in pitfall traps pogonoscopines were noticeably more

Vol. 116(1)1999 13 Contributions

Fig. 2. A nymph of Pogonoscopus myrmex feeding at night on Eucalyptus socialis and attended by Camponotus gouldianus. affected by the torch beams and moved branchlets were considerably desiccated. faster than the ants, either to the far side of To test the reaction of a local non-host the trunk or more frequently under adher- Camponotus to their presence, several P. ing bark. They were not 'herded*, but myrmex were placed in a previously pre- moved independently of the ants, although pared colony of C.consobrinus Erichson. ants attempted to follow any leafhoppers The leafhoppers were vigorously attacked, they encountered. Finally, at about 1930 with no evidence of any symbiotic rela- hrs, some leafhoppers were seen to begin tionship, inherent or otherwise. to feed, and then they were always attend- Observations on Australoscopus sp. ed by several ants (Fig. 2). During feeding, During our stay at Calperum, a colleague it was observed that the hind legs were Michael Moore Adelaide, returned often elevated and waved; the significance Mr of from a day trip to Waikerie, South of this behaviour is not known. Most of the Australia, with live specimens of a second trees were above 3 m in height, so that, pogonoscopine, identified as a species of without ladders, it was not possible to see Australoscopus. The species is smaller whether the leafhoppers ascended to the than smaller branchlets. All nymphal stages and Pogonoscopus myrmex and was attended adults were present. Although they were by Camponotus terebrans (Lowne) in a nest under cover the more readily collected at night than during on ground. In culture, the ants on the day. they were not easy to capture being disturbed were observed to pick and because of their rapid movements and their up carry the leafhoppers. behaviour noted by aversion to light. The same behaviour was Oke (1926). On uncovering an observed on the following night when the ant nest. Oke insects were photographed. observed that his froghoppers 'seem to be greatly agitated", and that 'any ant meeting

Laboratory observations on one of the guests will immediately seize it

Pogonoscopus myrmex by the thorax and carry it down one of the Some nymphs and adult P. myrmex and holes.... The ants invariably carry the their attendant ants were brought alive to leafhoppers off head foremost and gener- Canberra where they survived for a week ally turn them over with their feet upper- without food. Others were offered most as soon as they take hold of them../ .

Eucalyptus leucoxylon F.Muell., on which To Oke it was evident 'that these froghop- they appeared to feed, even when the pers are used to being carried by the ants'.

14 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

It seems likely that the insect Oke was The observations noted above show that describing was a species of significant differences exist between Australoscopus. We never observed pogonoscopine genera in their behavioural Camponotus gouldianus carry P. myrmex* relationships with their host ants. Much of the life history of these inquiline leaihop- Discussion pers remains completely unknown. We do Our observations demonstrated that not know where or at what time of the year Pogonoscopus myrmex is not confined to the eggs are laid, or where the early instars ant nests and that, while feeding, its behav- live. If the eggs are inserted into the twigs ioural interaction with its ant host is com- or stems of the host plant, as in other parable to that of other eurymelids (Evans eurymelids, how do the nymphs reach the 1931; Buckley 1987). except that P nest of a host ant? We know nothing of the myrmex feeds at night. Diurnal ant behaviour of the other three described inquilinism and nocturnal foraging may be pogonoscopine species. An interesting a strategy that allows Pogonoscopus to study awaits a future student. avoid both predation and the hot. desiccat- ing diurnal conditions where it lives. Acknowledgements In most characters, such as their mouth- We thank Mr Bruce l.ambie. now of the Australian Heritage Commission. Canberra, for parts, antennae, leg structure and fully facilitating access to Calperum and the developed wings, the Pogonoscopini are Bookmark Biosphere Reserve. Or Steve typically eurymeline. However, neither the Shattuck, CSIRO, and Mr Archie McArthur. SA nymphs nor adults arc capable of jumping, Museum, for ant identifications; Dr Michael so that 'leafhopper" is an inappropriate Braby, CSIRO. for photography: and Mr Mike name for these insects. The unusually long Moore. Adelaide, for specimens of Australoscopus. legs of all stages, even 1st instar nymphs, The survey of insects at Calperum. Bookmark have been mentioned in all previous Biosphere Reserve was conducted with support reports, several authors referring to their from the Australian National Parks and Wildlife *spider-like' appearance. The long legs Service (ANPWS). 1994. could be an adaptation to allow an easier References daily trip from the host ants" nest up to the Buckley. R C (1987) Interactions involving plants, mallee branches and return. It would be of Homoptera and ants Annual Review of Ecology and

1 1 1-135 interest to learn whether the young nymphs Systematic* 18.

I China. W 1 1924) A new genus of Bythoseopinae both after travel long distances walking, iJassulac, Homoptera) from Western Australia. Annals. hatching from the egg and to feed: such and Magazine of Natural History (Ser 9) 14, 529-531 China. W.E (19261 Notes on the biology and mor- travel would represent a substantial feat. phology of the turymehJac (Cicadelioulea. no! appear Pogonoscopus myrmex does Homoplcra) I runsuctions of (In- I'.nlomologtcal to exhibit special myrmecophile adapta- Society of London 1926,289-296

Evans, J W ( 1931 ) Notes on the biology and morphol- tions for permanent life in ant nests. ogy of the Purytnelidae (Cieadelloidea, Homoptera). Myrmecophiles typically have the eyes Proceedings of the Ltnnean Society of New South reduced or absent, and the epidermis is Wales 56,210-226

Evans, J.W. ( 1946). A natural classification of leafhop- often unpigmented. To avoid injury by pcrs (Homoptera, Jassoidea). Part 2, Aetaliomdae. their ant hosts they are often rapid runners Hyheidae, Furymetidae. Transactions of Royal h'ntomoloyjcal Society of London 97. 39-54, (e.g. Thysanura. Staphylinidae) or are able [vans, I W (1966) The leathoppers and froglioppeis legs into to retract the antennae and of Australia and New Zealand Australian Museum grooves in the body integument (e.g. many Memoirs 12, 1-347 Jacobi, A (1909) Homopteia hie Fauna Sudwest inquiline beetles). Australians Ergebnl&xe tier Hamburger sudwesr-aus- The fat body of both adults and immature iralischen l-orschunyereise, 1905. Hrsg. v. W. stages of pogonoscopines is very well Michaelsen u R Hartmeyer 2, 337-345.

Oke, C ( 1926) Two entomologists in the Mallee The developed, possibly an adaptation necessary Vt\ tonaii Naturalist 42, 279-294 to hold them over on occasions when, per- f'ullen, K.R. (1997), A Survey of the Invertebrates of Kesfvr haps due to weather conditions, the insects Cafpefum Station. Bookmark Biosphere South Australia Report to Environment Australia unable to leave the host ant nest to feed. are (CSIRO Entomology Canberra).

Vol. 116(1)1999 15 Contributions

The Orange Palm Dart Skipper Cephrenes augiades sperthias (Felder) in Melbourne

John Eichler 1

Abstract This article provides additional locality records of the Orange Palm Dart Skipper Cephrenes augiades sperthias (Felder); Lepidoptera: Hesperiidae, in suburban Melbourne, lists larval food plants and includes observations of its life cycle. [The Victorian Naturalist 116(1), 1999, 16-18).

Distribution and Range Extension noted larval shelters in West Melbourne. The Orange Palm Dart is a relatively Crosby (1994) reported a number of large skipper, whose larvae feed exclusive- observations of the Orange Palm Dart from ly on palms. lis natural range is eastern Melbourne suburbs, including East coastal Australia, from Cape York to the Melbourne and South Yarra, during 1990 lllawarra region of New South Wales to 1993. (Common and Waterhouse 1981). By the Description early 1980s it had become naturalised in Cream coloured eggs are laid singly the Perth region of Western Australia on various parts of palm plants. larval (Hutchison 1983). In 1990, Crosby record- The and pupal stages can be found in cylindri- ed specimens from Camberwcll, Victoria. cal shelters, which He concluded that they had probably the insect forms by joining developed from eggs transported from together the margins of palm leaflets with silk. Larvae observed at Black Queensland on palms and that the Orange Rock are up to 50 long, are light Palm Dart was unlikely to become estab- mm green in colour and often have two yellow spots lished in Victoria. However, subsequent on their back. They have a broad, records from the inner eastern suburbs led cream coloured head with brown stripes. Male Crosby (1994) to conclude that it had and female butterflies are quite different become established in Melbourne. in their appearance, the following descrip- Larvae were first noted on a small tions being Bangalow Palm Archontophoenix cunning- based on Black Rock specimens. Males have a wingspan hamiana in my garden in the Melbourne of approximately 35 and are brightly bayside suburb of Black Rock on 5 mm coloured with February, 1994 and successive generations orange and dark brown patches. Females are an almost uniform of Palm Darts have continued to use that dark brown colour and are larger, having palm. The identity of the insect was estab- a wingspan of lished by raising butterflies from the pupal approximately 40 mm. The source of stage and comparing male and female those insects may be from Queensland, adults with the illustrations and descrip- where females tend to be darker than those from South tions in Common and Waterhouse (1981) New Wales (Common and and MeCubbin (1971). Waterhouse 1981). Later in February 1994, larvae and pupae Larval Food Plants were found in a nearby garden on numer- In Melbourne. Orange Palm Dart larvae ous species of palm. Larvae had been feed on a number of Australian and exotic known from that site since about 1992 palms which are listed in Table I. (David Radford pers. comm.). Subsequent Dunn (1995) records 75 palms that are searches revealed that the Orange Palm larval hosts of the Orange Palm Dart in Dart was present elsewhere at Black Rock, Queensland. Crosby (1994) records 5 at the nearby suburbs of Beaumaris and species of palm that are used in Sandringham and at Mitcham. David Melbourne, of which the introduced Queen Britton (pers, comm.) recorded the Palm Palm Arecastrum romanzoffianum and Dart at Kew in 1992 and 1993 and has Senegal Date Palm Phoenix reclinata, are

additional to the species listed in Table I.

18 Bavview Crescent, Black Rock. Victoria JI93

16 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Fig. 2. Larva in opened Bangalow Palm leaflet shelter.

Fig. 1. Egg on upper side of Bangalow Palm leaflet.

Fig. 3. Pupa in opened Bangalow Palm leaflet Fig. 4. Adult male on Kentia Palm frond. shelter.

Life Cycle Observations and Comments origin. It appears that the lack of suitable The following observations were made of larval food plants has been more of a limit- the Palm Dart's life cycle in Melbourne. ing factor than climatic conditions, at least • Larvae were noted during February, in southern Victoria. Other Australian but- March. April and July. terflies, e.g. the Dingy Swallowtail Papilio • Pupation was observed in February and anactus and Orchard Butterfly Papilio March. The pupation period recorded aegeus aegeus, have also been able to for pupae kept indoors ranged from 19 extend their range southwards into Victoria to 24 days (four observations). because trees have been planted that are • Female butterflies were seen in eaten by their larvae (McCubbin 1971). A January and March. A male butterfly possible explanation for the Palm Dart's was found sheltering in a wood pile in activity during cooler months is that it has May. David Britton (pers. comm.) not yet adapted to climatic conditions in recorded a female in May and a male Melbourne. in April. Conclusions • Freshly laid eggs were found on the The Orange Palm Dart is an adaptable leaflets, crown shaft (frond base) and insect whose spread to Melbourne coin- trunk of a Bangalow Palm in cides with, and presumably is a result of, December, January and March. the increased use of palms in landscaping The Orange Palm Dart is able to survive since the 1980s. Melbourne's winters and is still active Because the larvae feed exclusively on during cooler months. At first this seems palms, it is assumed that this new insect surprising given its tropical to sub tropical

Vol. 116(1) 1999 17 i

Contributions

Table 1. Records of larval food plants, Melbourne.

Australian Palms Exotic Palms

Alexandra Palm Archontophoenix alexandrae European Fan Palm Chamaerops humtlis Cabbage Fan Palm Lrvistona austrahs (Mediterranean) Bangalow Palm Archontophoenix Canary Island Date Palm Phoenix canadensis Cunninghamiana (Africa) Umbrella Palm Hedyscepe canterburyana Canary Island and Senegal Date Palm hybrid (Lord Howe Island) Phoenix canariensis x rectinata (Africa) Kentia Palm Howea forsteriana Dwarf Date Palm Phoenix roebelenii (South East (Lord Howe Island) Asia) Nikua Palm Rhopalostyhs sapida (New Zealand) Chinese Windmill Palm Trachycarpus fortune (Himalayas) Washington Palm Washingtonia robusta (USA)

arrival will have little or no adverse impact References I.F.B. Waterhouse, on indigenous insects or plants in most of Common, and D.F (1981), 'Butterflies of Australia, 2nd ed \ (Angus and Victoria, although it would be interesting Robertson: Sydney). to know whether it is present in the stands Crosby, D.F. (1990). The Orange Palmdart Cephrenes augiades sperthias of Cabbage Fan Palms Livistona australis (Felder) (Lepiodoptera: Hesperiidae) in Victoria. Victorian Entomologist 20, near Orbost 59 -60. Crosby, D.F. (1994). New Distribution and Food Plant Acknowledgments Records for Some Victorian Butterflies (Lepidoptera: Thanks to Pat and Mike Coupar, who tentatively Hesperioidea, Papilionoidea). Australian identified the larvae, later confirmed the identity Entomologist 21, 65-68. of adults and referred me to the 1990 Crosby Dunn, K. L. (1995). Notes on the Biology and New Larval Hosts of Cephrenes (Lepidoptera: Hesperiidae) article, David Radford, who identified many of Part II, Victorian Entomologist 25, 3-12. the larval food plants and was able to recall Hutchison, M. (1983). Occurrence of Cephrenes when larvae first appeared in his garden and augiades sperthias (Orange Palmdart Butterfly) in David Britton, who provided some additional Perth. Western Australian Naturalist 15, 125-126. records and helpful comments on an earlier McCubbin, C. (1971). 'Australian Butterflies'. draft. (Thomas Nelson: Melbourne).

Vale Joan Harry

Joan Harry died on Saturday, October 17, 1998. She suffered from a brain tumour over a nine year period. When Marie Allender retired as General Excursion Secretary in February, 1990, Joan took over the job and served for about six months, when she had to stop for her first brain tumour operation. Dorothy Mahler then acted temporarily as Acting Excursion Secretary for Joan. However, as Joan convalesced over an extended period, she was unable to resume the position. In late 1991, Joan was feeling well enough to serve as Chairperson of the Botany Group, after Margaret Potter who had stepped down after many years in that position. Joan held that position for three years until Tom May (present FNCV President) was elected Botany Group Chairperson in December 1994. Joan was always supportive of working bees, often acting as tea/coffee lady in the kitchen, especially when we were folding the newsletter or after meetings in the evenings at the Hall. She was always a dedicated and helpful club member until she had to drop out over a year ago because of illness. Over the years she also attended most of the excursions and tours organized by the club. Noel Schleiger represented the FNCV at her funeral on Wednesday, October 21, 1998. The Club extends its sympathy to husband Graeme, and family.

Noel Schleiger and Dorothy Mahler

18 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

A Fauna Survey of Riparian and Other Revegetation Sites in Eltham, Victoria

Peter Horn an 1

Abstract A fauna survey of revegetation sites was carried out over a six-month period in 1996 in Eltham. a north-east suburb of Melbourne with eleven mammals, fifty-six birds, eight reptiles and five amphibians being recorded. Results of the study showed an absence of small terrestrial native mammals and invasion of revegetated areas by introduced species. {The Victorian Naturalist, 116(1), 1999, 19-25).

Introduction

Lenister Farm is located in Homestead includes several small gully systems and Road. Eltham. approximately 28 kms three small artificial wetlands, while the north-east of Melbourne Central, within the highest point is on Hohnes Hill, 60 m Melbourne metropolitan area, on the south- above sea level. A large artificial wetland ern edge of Eltham Lower Park, near the has since been constructed on the Hood junction of the Yarra River and Diamond plain beside the Yarra River. Creek. The property was originally a dairy Eltham Lower Park includes two sports farm, but is now owned by the Shire of ovals, the Diamond Valley Miniature Nillumbik and is leased to PEEC Services Railway and a pony club. A public walk- Inc.. a private training provider. ing track leads along the two streams, For some years PEEC Services (formally which attracts large numbers of walkers, Skill Seekers) has conducted horticultural joggers and local residents walking dogs. training at the farm and. since April 1993. Vegetation in the park includes remnant has been involved in a long term riparian mature Candlebark Eucalyptus rubida* revegetation project along Diamond Creek Yellow Box E. melliodora. Long-leaved and the Yarra River in conjunction with the Box E. goniocalyx and Narrow-leaved Shire of Nillumbik. Revegetation work has Peppermint E. radiata. Hollows are also been carried out by Friends of Diamond numerous amongst these mature trees. Creek, a local volunteer group, while other The riparian vegetation along Diamond habitat enhancement work has also been Creek and the Yarra River includes Manna completed including the removal of woody Gum Eucalyptus viminalis. Silver Wattle weeds from Hohnes Hill, a small nature Acacia dealbata, with remnant stands of reserve of about 5 ha on the western edge of River Bottlebrush Callistemon sieberi* the study area. An indigenous plant nursery

is also located at the farm and helps to pro- . .

vide stock for the revegetation program. •ill'i I I INS This survey was carried out to determine which species of mammals, birds, reptiles and amphibians now inhabit the general area around Lenister Farm and. in particular, the revegetation sites along Diamond Creek and the Yarra River and at Hohnes Hill (Fig. 1 ).

Vegetation and topography The study area covers approximately 23 ha and is bounded by Main Road. Eltham to the north. Diamond Creek to the east. Yarra River and Homestead Road to the south and Jayson Avenue to the west. Much of the study area is on a flood plain at the junction of the two streams and also Fig. I. Location of survey area and trapping

sites. Melway Map 2 1 , J 1 1. 8 Bayfield Diive, Ellham, Victoria 3095

Vol. 116(1)1999 19 ( Contributions

trapping (Type A); pitfall trapping (plastic buckets, 380 mm in depth and 285 mm in

. f diameter); an artificial nest box program and general observation and collection. Baits consisted of oats, peanut butler, honey and vanilla essence. Artificial shelters were also used to survey amphibians. ""Wm These were made from 23 mm treated pine and measured 600 mm * 400 mm and were raised off the ground by slats of pine of the same thickness along three edges, there- the shel- Fig, 2. Grassy cuc;ilypt woodland, I lohncs (fill. fore allowing frogs to move under ter from one side. These shelters were Tree Violet llvmenanthi'ta dentata, placed around several wetlands with the Burgan Kumea ericoides. Kangaroo Apple entrance facing the water and were turned Solatium laciniatum, Dogwood Cassinia over for inspection daily. aculcitta, Mop Goodenia Goodenia ovata. Only a minimal amount of spotlighting Spiny-headed Matrush Lomandra tongifo- was carried out (a total of six spotlight Ua and Poa cnsiformis. All of these species hours) and general observation and collec- have been used extensively in the rcvege- tion took place on a daily basis. tation program along boll) streams. Trapping took place on Monday, Unfortunately various introduced species Tuesday and Wednesday nights only. On have infested the riparian zone including various occasions trapping was not under- Spider Wori Tradescantia fluminensts, taken due to inclement weather and ihe

Angled I >nion Allium triquetrum. water level in both streams, trapping Blackberry Rubus procerus* Hawthorn along the Yarra River and Diamond (reek Crataegus monogyna^ Crack Willow Salix look place in a narrow riparian corridor fragitis and H'atstmia hulhtlli/cra. between each stream and the public walk- Holmes Hill Flora Reserve is an area Of ing track (Fig. I). Because much of the grassy woodland (Fig. 2) with Yellow llo\ area is used extensively by the public. £. mellioduru, Long-leaved Box £ gontfr traps were set randomly and in a somewhat cutvx. Candle bark E. rubtda. Red clandestine fashion, so as to avoid possible Stringy bark £. macrorhyncha. Manna theft or interference with equipment. Gum /. viminaliSt Burgan K. ericoides, Consequently on some nights only small Swcel Hursaria liursaria spinosa* Golden numbers of traps were set. Wattle Acacia pyenantha. Hedge Wattle A. Overall 707 trap-nights and 293 pil- Violet, Uallart paradoxa, Tree Cherry nighls were completed. Table I shows the Exocarpus cupressiformis and Clematis trapping methods used and effort for each microphytla. Grasses include Tussock section of the study area. (irass Poa sichi'runut. Wallaby Grass Artificial nest boxes were designed to Oanthonia spp, and a range of introduced survey the presence of Sugar Gliders in the grasses that have invaded large areas of the area and to provide breeding records for reserve. Various native orchids including small parrots. Four Sugar Glider boxes Greenhoods and Spider Orchids persist in were placed in Holmes Hill and seven were reasonable numbers in ihe southern end of placed along Diamond (reek. Five small- Holmes Hill. Many of the Fuealypts are parrot boxes were placed in the southern mature with numerous hollows. section of ITtham Lower Park and along Diamond (reek. Survey methods All nest boxes were constructed of 19 mm The survey was conducted between Mas exterior grade ply with an internal diameter and November 1996. from Monday to of 240 mm and a depth of 420 mm. Friday of each week. Entrance holes, which were 50 mm for Survey methods included: cage trapping Sugar Gliders and 70 mm for small par- (Wiretainers standard bandicoot trap) rots, were 300 mm above the floor. placed on the ground and in trees; Elliott

20 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Table 1.

Trap-nights Pit-nights Total Cage traps Cage traps Elliott traps on ground in trees on ground

Hohnes Hill nil 23 59 178 260 Diamond Creek 182 nil 54 80 316 Yarra River 320 nil 69 35 424

All Sections 502 23 182 293 1000

Results 3. Glider, Sugar Petaurus breviceps, S. Since intensive surveys such as this are Three individuals were disturbed from a unusual, particularly within the metropoli- stag at Hohnes Hill on 15/5/96. No ani- tan areas of large cities, the results of this mals were captured during trapping in survey therefore give a fair indication of trees at Hohnes Hill and none were seen those species that may exist in other urban during spotlighting on 8/10/96. Nest areas with suitable habitat, especially those boxes were not used by this species dur- areas that have undergone revegetation ing the survey. projects. 4. Mouse, House, Mus musculus, T. A total of eighty vertebrate species were Twenty-one house mice were captured in recorded during the survey. These were Elliott traps, seventeen in the oldest reveg- made up of eleven mammals (five euther- etation site (1993) along the Yarra River, ian, five marsupial, one monotreme: seven one in revegetating Poa ensiformis along native, four introduced) fifty-six birds Diamond Creek and three in grassy wood- (fifty-one native, fwc introduced), eight land at Hohnes Hill. Two house mice were reptiles and five amphibians. Fourteen also caught in pitfall traps along the Yarra species of birds were also recorded as (capture rate 5.7%) The capture rate for breeding in the study area. Because the Elliott traps along the Yarra River was bulk of the survey took place during the 24.6%, along Diamond Creek was 1.8% winter months no harp-trapping for insec- and for Hohnes Hill was 5%. tivorous bats took place and a number of 5. Platypus Ornithorhynchus anatinus, birds that would be expected to visit areas 5. Platypus were seen in the Yarra River such as this during the warmer months at the same location near its junction with were also not recorded. Diamond Creek on three occasions, at Cogger (1996). Menkhorst (1995) and 2.55pm on 4/9/96, at 10.30am on 5/9/96 Simpson and Day (1996) were used for and at 1 1.00am on 23/10/96. species names. 6. Possum, Common Brushtail Survey codes are the same as used by the Trichosurus vulpecula, T. This was the Atlas of Victorian Wildlife: most common native mammal encoun- B Breeding confirmed (birds; nest with eggs; tered during the survey, fourteen individ- or dependent young out of nest) uals were caught in cage traps set on the S Seen ground along the Yarra River. Cage trap H Heard capture rate overall was 3.8% and along Trapped and released T the Yarra River was 4.4%. At Hohnes I Indirect evidence eg. Tracks or traces, Hill the capture rate in cage traps set in including scats, burrows, diggings. trees was 8.7%. However, other substan- Mammals tial indirect evidence occurred including

/. Bat, White-striped Freetait Tadarida scats and scratch marks on trees. Several australis, H. One individual was heard animals were also seen during the day in flying above trees along Diamond Creek hollows throughout the study area. Seven whilst spotlighting on 8/10/96. adults and two juveniles were seen dur- 2. Fox, Red Canis vulpes, S. One ing six spotlight hours on 8/10/96. sick/injured individual was seen near 7. Possum, Common Ringtail, Hohnes Hill on 4/6/96 and subsequently Pseudocheirus peregrinus, S. Many seen in one, presumably it. was found dead on individuals of this species were 5/6/96. dreys during the day along both streams.

21 Vol. 116(1)1999 Contributions

Creek. Weight for males varied from 630 g to 1060 g (average 786 g) and for females, from 650 g to a pregnant animal (caught 25/9/96) weighing 1000 g (average 747 g). 11. Wombat, Common Vombatus ursi-

nus, /. No Wombats were seen during the study, however, substantial indirect evidence was found regularly in the form of active burrows, scratchings and scats.

Birds Fig. 3. Water Rat Hydromys chrysogaster capture site on the Yarra River. Table 2 lists the birds that were recorded in the study area.

however, none were captured in cage Reptiles traps during the survey. Eight Ringtails /. Lizard, Blotched Blue-Tongued were seen during six spotlight hours on Tiliqua nigrolutea, S. One individual 8/10/96. was found at Hohnes Hill on 1/8/96. 8. Rabbit Oryctolagus cuniculus, S. 2. Lizard, Eastern Blue-Tongued Many individuals were seen in all parts Tiliqua scincoides, 5. One individual of the study area, with a marked reduc- was found near Diamond Creek on tion in sightings during the second half of 28/8/96.

the study. A number of dead animals J. Skink, Garden Lam prop hoi is were found during September and guichenoti, T. This was the most com- October. mon and widespread reptile encountered 9. Rat, Black Rattus rattus, T. This was during the study. Individuals were sight- the most common terrestrial mammal ed during each month of the survey, in caught amongst the riparian vegetation particular on sunny days. Twelve Garden along both streams. Twenty individuals Skinks were captured in pitfall traps, five were caught along the Yarra River, and at Hohnes Hill (capture rate. 2.8%), five thirteen along Diamond Creek. Overall along Diamond Creek (capture rate. 6%) capture rate for these sites was 5.9%, with and two along the Yarra River (capture 6.3% for the Yarra River and 7% for rate, 6%). Diamond Creek. Individuals were caught 4. Skink, Water Eulamprus sp„ S. One in both degraded areas and revegetated individual was seen by the Yarra River sites. No captures occurred at Hohnes 1 Fill. on 16/9/96 and two along Diamond 10. Ratf Water Hydromys chrysogaster, Creek on 8/10/96. T. This was the only native rodent record- 5. Skink, Weasel Saproscincus musteli- ed during the survey. Thirteen individu- nus, S. Three found under heavy leaf lit- als, six males and seven females, were ter amongst Spider Wort along Diamond caught in cage traps set along the Yarra Creek, one on 15/5/96 and two on 2/7/96. River (Fig. 3) and Diamond Creek. No individuals of this species were cap- Eleven animals were caught along the tured in pitfall traps. Yarra River adjacent to the oldest revege- 6. Snake, Eastern Brown Pseudonaja tation site, and two animals were caught textilis, S. One individual seen at Hohnes along Diamond Creek near remnant Poa Hill on 11/10/96. ensiformis and Callistemon sieberi. The 7. Snake, Eastern Tiger Notechis scuta- majority of captures along the Yarra tus, S. One individual seen near farm on (nine) occurred in late June and early 16/10/96. July, with the remaining two in late #. Turtle, Eastern Snake-necked September. The two captures along Chelodina longicollis, S. One seen in Diamond Creek took place in late August. Diamond Creek on 7/1 1/96 and three Overall capture rate was 2.8%, with 3.4% more in Diamond Creek on 8/1 1/96. for the Yarra River, and 1% for Diamond

22 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Table 2. Bird species recorded at the study area.

Blackbird. Common Turdus merula, S, B Ibis, Straw-necked Threskiornis spmicollis, S Bronzew ing. Common Phaps chakoptera, S Kingfisher. Azure Alcedo azurea, S Butcherbird, Grey Cracticus torquatus. S, B Kingfisher. Sacred Todiramphus sanctus, S Cockatoo, Yellow-tailed Black Calyptorhynchus Kite, Black-shouldered Etanus axillaris, S funereus, S Kookaburra, Laughing Dacelo novaeguineae, S Cockatoo, Gang-gang Calhcephahn fimbriatum, S Lapwing, Masked Vanellus miles, S Cockatoo, Sulphur-crested Cacatua galenta, S Lorikeet, Rainbow Thchoglossus haematodus, S, B Corella, Long-billed Cacatua tenuirostris, S Magpie. Australian Gymnorhma ttbicen. S» B Cormorant, Little Pied Phalacrocorax Magpie-lark Gralltna c\'anoleuca. S, B melanoleucos, S Miner, Bell Manorma melanophrys, H Cormorant, Great (Black) Phalacrocorax carbo, S Miner. Noisy Manorma melanocephala. S, B Cormorant. Little Black Phalacrocorax Moorhen, Dusky Gal/inula tenebrosa, S sulcirostrts, S Myna. Common Acrtdotheres tristis, S, B Cuckoo, Fan-tailed Cucuius flaheUiformts, S Oriole. Olive-backed Onolus sagittatus. S Cuckoo-shnke, Black-faced Coracina novaehol- Pardalote. Spotted Pardalotus punctatus, S landiae, S Parrot. Australian King Alisterus scapulars S Curraw ong. Pied Strepera graculina, S Parrot, Red-rumped Psephotus haematonotus. S Currawong, Grey Strepera versicolor. S Raven, Australian Corvus coronoides, S Darter Anhwga melanogaster, S Rosella, Crimson Platycercus elegans, S Duck, Pacific Black Anas superctliosa, S Rosella, Eastern Platycercus eximius. S, B Duck, Australian Wood (Mancd) Chenonetta Scrubwren. White-browed Sericornis frontalis. S, B jubata, S, B Shrike-thrush, Grey Colluricincla harmonica, H Fairy-wen, Superb Malurus cyamm, S Starling. Common Sturnus vulgaris, S, B Fantail, Grey Rhipidura fultginosa, S Swallow. Welcome Hirundo neoxena, S Frogmouth, Tawny Podargus strigoides, S Teal, Chestnut Anas castanea, S Galah Eolophus (Cacatua) roseicapilla. S Thornbill. Brown Acanthiza pusilla, S, B Goshawk, Brown Acciptter fasciatus. S Thrush, Song Turdus philomehs, S Heron, White-faced Egretta (Ardea) novaehol- Turtle-Dove, Spotted Streptopelta chmensts, S, B landtae, S, B Wagtail, Willie Rhipidura leucophrys, S Heron. Rufous Night Nycticorax caledomcus. S Wattlebird, Red Anthochaera carunculala, S Ibis. Australian White (Sacred Ibis) 'Threskiornis Whistler, Golden Pachycephala pectoralis, S molucca (T. aethiopica), S Amphibians common amphibian encountered during

/. Frog, Brown Tree Litoria ewingi, S. the study, and readily occupied the artifi- Several individuals were found amongst cial amphibian shelters placed around plant pots at nursery adjacent to the farm. wetlands. Common Eastern Froglets One also found at new wetland at were heard calling on many occasions in Miniature Railway on 17/9/96. all wetland areas and individuals were 2. Frog, Eastern Banjo Limnodynastes found covering the various colour ranges. (iumerilii, T. Several individuals found Nest box program results near farm and others heard calling on Hohnes Hill: Four nest boxes designed numerous occasions in several man-made for sugar gliders were placed at this site on and natural wetland areas. Six Eastern 3/6/96. They were first checked on 1/7/96 Banjo Frogs were captured in pitfall traps and were unoccupied, however, each at Hohnes Hill (capture rate. 3.3%). One entrance hole had been marked. They were was also found under an artificial checked again on 8/10/96 and each box amphibian shelter on 2/10/1996. was found to contain a nest of the 3. Frog, Spotted Grass Limnodynastes Common Starling. tasmaniensis, T. Two individuals were Diamond Creek and Eltham Lower Park: found in new wetland near Diamond Twelve nest boxes were placed in these Creek on 6/6/96. and one was caught in a areas, four on 5/6/96, four on 1/8/96 and pitfall trap at Hohnes Hill on 4/9/96 (cap- four on 19/8/96. Five of these boxes were ture rate, 0.5%). designed for small parrots and seven for 4. Frog, Verreaux's Tree Litoria ver- sugar gliders. All twelve boxes were reauxii, S. One individual found near the checked on 9/10/96 and seven were found farm on 28/8/96. to contain Starling nests, one contained the 5. Frogiet, Common Eastern Crinia sig- nest of a Common Mynah. one contained nifera, S> This species was the most

Vol. 116(1)1999 23 Contributions the nest of an Eastern Rosella (one egg) heavy litter amongst Spider Wort, and and three were unoccupied. none were found in the revegetation areas. Water Skinks were observed close to both Discussion streams at two sites, one degraded and one The study site is typical of areas very rehabilitated. There were no amphibians close to suburban housing that have recorded for any of the riparian revegeta- become heavily degraded by a range of tion sites, however. Eastern Banjo Frogs, invasive weeds. Much of the original Spotted Grass Frogs. Common Eastern understorey, shrub layer and ground cover Froglets and Brown Tree Frogs were found has disappeared and in most of the study in, and heard calling at, artificial wetlands. area only the tree cover remains. No small terrestrial native mammals The avifauna in the area is dominated by were recorded for the study area and the the aggressive Noisy Miner. Dr. Douglas only native rodent recorded was the aquat- Dow, Queensland University (Pizzey ic Water Rat. The introduced Brown Rat 1991), found the Noisy Miner's unpleasant Ratlus norvegicus was not found during trait of directing loud, concerted aggres- the survey. On several occasions Koalas sion against almost every other bird unfor- Phascolarctos cinereus were observed in tunate enough to enter its territory makes it Manna Gum on the Templestowe (south) unique among birds and possibly among side of the Yarra River, however, none all known animals. Noisy Miners were were seen in the study area. No evidence seen to chase and harass nearly every other of Echidnas Tachyglossus aculeatus was species observed during the survey, As found during the survey, although this with other areas dominated by this species, species has been recorded in other parts of no small honeyeaters were recorded during Eltham (Menkhorst 1995). the study. The White-plumed Honeyeater. The large number of hollows in the area a species common throughout Melbourne, are used extensively by the introduced was not seen during the study. This species Common Mynah and English Starling. is also absent from other parts of Eltham Several trees and hollow limbs fell during where Noisy Miners occur in numbers. the time of the survey, many of which con- Small birds such as the Superb Fairy-wren tained disused Mynah nests constructed and the White-browed Scrubwren were with plastic and other man-made materials, confined to the few areas with thick under- items commonly used as nesting material growth along the banks of the two streams. by this species (Beruldsen 1980). Starlings The Rufous Whistler Pachycephala were seen to enter several hollows during rufiventris, a species that would be expect- the breeding season and their dominance ed to arrive in areas such as this during of the artificial nest boxes was overwhelm- early spring (Simpson and Day 1996), was ing. European bees were also seen to occu- not recorded during the study. py several hollows. However, all the par- The oldest revegetation site (1993) along rots (except the Yellow-Tailed Black the Yarra River is inhabited by the Black Cockatoo) observed during the survey Rat, House Mouse and Common Wombat. were seen entering hollows at various A drey, occupied by a ringtail possum, was times, but breeding could only be con- also found at this site in an old "free Violet firmed for the Eastern Rosella (nest box) and Superb Fairy-wrens. White-browed and the Rainbow Lorikeet (dependant Scrubwrens and Brown Thornbills were young out of nest at Hohnes Hill). often seen at this location. Several Noisy Miner nests and one Blackbird nest were Acknowledgements found in revegetated areas and Brown The following people assisted with the survey: Thornbills with dependant young were Jan Heald, Fred Kartnig, Mark Korttineh, Steven Milne, Wayne observed in a revegetation area along Sibbing, Jason Stevens and Janine Werner, Funding for the project was Diamond Creek. Jute-matting has been provided by the Department of Employment, used extensively to suppress weeds in the Education. Training and Youth Affairs under the revegetation sites and many Garden Skinks New Work Opportunities Program. The survey were found under this material, however. work was carried out under Flora and Fauna Weasel Skinks were only found under permit number RP-96-006 issued by the Department of Natural Resources and

24 The Victorian Naturalist Book Review

Environment. The Shire of Nillumbik. as the Littlejohn, M. (1987). 'Calls of Victorian Frogs'. local land manager, provided important advice (Department of Zoology: University of Melbourne). and assistance. Equipment for pitfall traps was Melway Greater Melbourne. (1997), Edition 25 (Melway lent by the Fauna Survey Group, FNCV. and Publishing Pty Ltd: Glen Iris). Menkhorst P. (1995). 'Mammals of Victoria'. (Oxford several members of the group including Ray University Press: South Melbourne). White. Russell Thompson and Ray Gibson pro- Pizzey,G.(l99l), 'A Garden of Birds' (Collins Angus vided valuable advice. & Robertson: North Ryde) Simpson. K and Day, N (1996) 'Field Guide to the References Birds of Australia'. (Penguin Books: Ringwood). Adams, G. (1980). 'Birdscaping Your Garden". (Rigby: Srrahan, R. (1995). 'The Mammals of Australia'. (Reed Sydney). Books: Chatswood). Beruldsen, G. (1980). "A Field Guide to Nests and 'Nest Boxes for Wildlife' Land for Wildlife: Note No. Eggs of Australian Birds'. (Rigby Sydney). 14, October 1991. (Department of Conservation and Cogger, H.G (1996) Reptiles & Amphibians of Environment/Bird Observers Club). Australia' (Reed: Port Melbourne). 'The Nest Box-Making a Home for the Little Aussie Battlers' Hero, J,. Littlejohn, M. and Marantelli, G. ( 1 99t ). (Board of Works/Healesville Sanctuary, 'Frogwatch Field Guide to Victorian Frogs' Education Service). (Department of Conservation & Environment: Melbourne).

Climate Change 1995 - Impacts, Adaptations and Mitigation of Climate Change: Scientific-Technical Analyses

Editors Robert T. Watson, Marufu C. Zingowerd, Richard H. Moss

and David J. Dokken

Publisher: Cambridge University Press, Melbourne. Paperback, 880 pp. ISBN 0521564379. RRP $57.95

This comprehensive volume provides a the range of adaptation and mitigation roadmap for navigating the sometimes options, and offer exciting opportunities divisive public debate about the conse- for reducing emissions, but are not cur-

quences of climate change. It reviews what rently available in all regions of the is known, unknown, uncertain and contro- world. versial about the potential impacts of cli- This volume will be of great value to mate change and finds that: decision-makers, the scientific community • the composition and geographic distribu- and students. tion of many ecosystems will shift; The Intergovernmental Panel on Climate some regions, especially in the tropics Change (IPCC) was set up jointly by the and subtropics, may suffer significant World Meteorological Organisation and adverse consequences for food security, the United Nations Environment Program even though the effects of climate change to provide an authoritative international on global food production may prove statement of scientific opinion on climate small to moderate; change. The IPCC prepared its first •there could be an increase in a wide comprehensive assessment report in 1990, range of human diseases, including mor- with subsequent supplementary reports in tality, and illness due to heat waves and 1992 and 1994. Climate Change 1995 is extreme weather events, extensions in the the first full sequel to the original assess- potential transmission of vector-borne ment. Several hundred scientists and con- diseases, such as malaria, and regional tributors, recognised internationally as declines in nutritional status; experts in their fields, were brought togeth- • some countries will face threats to sus- er in three working groups to assess cli- tainable development from losses of mate change for this Second Assessment human habitat due to sea-level rise, Report. During drafting, the chapters were reductions in water quality and quantity, exposed to extensive review by many other and disruptions from extreme events; independent experts, and subjected to full • technological advances have increased governmental reviews.

Vol. 116(1)1999 25 Contributions

A List of Native Mammals of Wilsons Promontory National Park

Peter Menkhorst 1 and John Seebeck 1

This list of native mammal species recorded from Wilsons Promontory National Park is derived principally from the Atlas of Victorian Wildlife, a database maintained by the Department of Natural Resources and Environment, Victoria, and which was used to prepare the distribution maps and species accounts in Mammals of Victoria (Menkhorst 1995). Much of the information concerning the native mammals of Wilsons Promontory was gathered during surveys carried out by the Department of Natural Resources and

Environment (under earlier names) during the 1970s, but it has been enhanced by recent additions from incidental sightings and special surveys. The bat fauna is poorly documented and further survey is warranted. The list is arranged as follows: vernacular name; scientific name; year of most recent record in the Atlas; our subjective assessment of the animal's status at Wilsons Promontory and comments. Details of introduced mammals found at Wilsons Promontory are provided by Seebeck and Mansergh (1998).

References Menkhorst, P.W. (ed )(1°95), 'Mammals of Victoria; Distribution, ecology and conservation'. (Oxford University Press: Melbourne) Seebeck, J,H. and Mansergh, I.M (1098). Mammals introduced to Wilsons Promontory. The Victorian Naturalist 115,350-356.

Species Most Status Comments Vernacular name/ Scientific name recent record MONOTREMATA Short-beaked Fchidna Tachvghssus 1998 Common aculeatus Platypus Orntthorhynchus anatinus cal940 Presence doubtful Only records are literature reports MARSOPIALIA Dasyuridae Agile Antechinus Antechinus agitis 1998 Common Formerly Brown Antechinus A, stuartii Swamp Antechinus A. minimus 1997 Locally common Abundant on Great Glennie and Rabbit Islands; unconfirmed reports from Kanowna Island Dusky Antechinus A. swainsonii 19% Uncommon Spot-tailed Quoll Dasyurus maculatus Presence unconfirmed Literature records only White-footed Ounnart Sminthopsis 1992 Uncommon teucopus Peramclidae Southern Brown Bandicoot Isoodon 1994 Uncommon obesutus Kong-nosed Bandicoot Perametes 1997 Rare nasuta I'halangcridae Common Brushtail Possum 1997 Locally common Trichosurus vulpecula Mountain Brushtail Possum 1974 Presence unconfirmed Single sight record only T. caninus Pseudocheiridae Common Ringtail Possum 1998 Common Pseudocheirus peregrinus

1 Flora and Fauna Program, Department of Natural Resources and Environment, 4/250 Victoria Parade, East Melbourne 3002.

26 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Petauridae Sugar Glider Petaurus breviceps 1998 Rare Acrobatidae Feathertail Glider Acrobates 1986 Uncommon pygmaeus Burramyidae Eastern Pygmy-possum Cercartetus 1996 Locally common nanus Phascolarctidae Koala Phascolarctos cmereus 1995 Uncommon Significant remnant population NOT derived from translocated stock Vombatidae Common Wombat Vombatus 1998 Common ursinus Potoroidae Long-nosed Potoroo Poiorous 1998 Uncommon tndactylus Macropodidae Eastern Grey Kangaroo Macropus 1998 Locally common giganteus Tasmanian Pademelon Thy/ogale cal850 Extinct Wholly extinct in Victoria billardieru Black Wallaby Wallabia bicolor 1998 Common CHIROPTERA Molossidae White-striped Freetail Bat 1998 Uncommon Tadarida australis Vespertilionidae Chocolate Wattled Bat Chalinolobus 1997 Uncertain status mono Common Bent-wing Bat 1971 Rare Only a single record Mimopteris schreibersii Lesser Long-eared Bat Nyctophilus 1997 Common geoffroyi Gould's Long-eared Bat 1983 Uncertain status N. gouldi status Large Forest Bat I 'espadelus 1990 Uncertain darlingtoni Southern Forest Bat V. regulus 1997 Uncertain status Little Forest Bat V. vulturnus 1997 Uncertain status RODENTIA Bush Rat Rattus fuscipes 1998 Common Animals on Great Glennie Island very large Swamp Rat R, lutreolus 1997 Locally common Water Rat Hydromys chrysogaster 1998 Rare Broad-toothed Rat Mastacomys 1990 Rare fuscus New Holland Mouse Pseudomys 1996 Rare, but may One of only four novae hoi'iandiae be locally common Victorian populations CANIDAE Dingo Canis latrans Probably extinct Replaced by feral Dog, Canis familians OTARIIDAE Victorian Australian Fur Seal Arctocephalus 1998 Common One of four colonies occurs pusillus breeding on Kanowna Island PHOCIDAE Leopard Seal Hydrurga leptonyx 1996 Rare visitor

27 Vol. 116(1)1999 Letters to the Editor

The following letter was received from a member, Nick Romanowski, in reponse to an article in The Victorian Naturalist 115 (2). 1998. 56-62 by Golam Kibria and co-authors. The paper reviewed the biology and aquaculture of Silver Perch Bidyanits bidvanus. Golam KibriVs response follows Nick's letter. The editorial policy of The Victorian Naturalist is to publish a wide-range of papers touching on all aspects of natural history. We are always interested to receive comments from members on the content of the journal. Editor

Dear Editor bodied, almost scale-less Mirror Carp What is an article on aquaculture of Silver Cyprinus carpio to any wild fish of the Perch Bidyanus hidyanus (Kibria et al. same species for an example of changes 1998) doing in The Victorian Naturalist*? It under domestication in less than a century, could be justified if it really was a summa- for just one obvious example. ry of the biology of this species, but like All documented captive breeding pro- many aquaculture articles this one deals grams for fishes, whether aquaculture-ori- almost entirely with growth responses ented or not, have started from a very limit- under highly unnatural conditions - from ed genetic base - often as few as a half- spawning induced by injection of hor- dozen adult fish (Romanowski 1996: mones, to growth rates on artificial diets at Caughey et al. 1990). The stocks produced stocking rates far in excess of anything ever by such programs are already a long way recorded in the wild. from being representative of their species, What little mention is made of natural and reintroducing their offspring into natur- history in the article does not even report al waters on a large scale will only dilute earlier work accurately. For example, whatever variability still exists in wild pop- 'competition for food from introduced ulations. This can also be a way to release cyprinids. and predation by English Perch new disease strains such as the piscine Perca fluviatilis, have probably [my ital- tuberculosis now common in probably all ics] played a part in [Silver Perch] decline* captive-bred Australian and New Guinea (Cadwallader and Backhouse 1983) Rainbowfishes (Melanotaenia, Glossotepis remains an unsubstantiated, though plausi- and Chilatherina) (Tappin 1998). ble, guess. However, this has been com- The most irritating aspect of the article in pletely rephrased as 'its population has question is that it is not an unbiased been greatly reduced due to competition appraisal of the future of Silver Perch in from introduced cyprinids [and| predation aquaculture at all, but a selective promo- by the English Perch'. tion of the species. A close look through The suggestion that aquaculture might the apparently exhaustive reference list have a role to play in rehabilitation of this shows that the authors have omitted any species is spurious. All domesticated ani- that don't support their contention that mals change both genetically and behav- 'demand to cultivate the species is increas- iourally from wild populations, although ing both in Australia and in nearby Asia". such changes not may be obvious in the first Silver Perch is certainly the best prospect few captive generations. In the case of Silver available for Australian freshwaters, unless Perch, captive many populations are derived we are prepared to take the potentially dis- from the original aquaculture stocks devel- astrous risks with introduced fish that have oped in southern NSW around forty years already destroyed a variety of indigenous ago (Lake 1967). These were bred from fisheries overseas. small initial populations collected from a rel- However, 1 have long warned atively small part of the range of the species, (Romanowski 1994) that Silver Perch ideal conditions for initiating genetic drift. would not be so readily accepted overseas If overseas aquaculture stocks of long as its promoters would have us believe. standing are any guide. Silver Perch will More recent information from Taiwan gradually change in appearance from wild (Walker 1996) makes it plain that the fish, becoming fleshier and less active, Taiwanese have already rejected this as a among other changes. Compare the thick- quality fish, with production there falling

28 The Victorian Naturalist Letters to the Editor

from a peak of 500 tonnes in 1994, to 100 where it really belongs in an aquaculture tonnes in 1995. Prices of around $5 per magazine. kilogram at the time make it clear that this is regarded as a middle-quality fish only, All the best and that acceptance was poor against the Nick Romanowski wide variety of comparably priced species already available there. References Other obvious biases in the article Cadwallader, PL and Backhouse, G.N (1983) "A guide to the Freshwater Fish of Victoria" (Victorian include a claim that Silver Perch "represent Government Printing Office;Medbourne). the main endemic freshwater aquaculture Caughey. A , Hume, S and Wattam, A (1990) Melanoataema eachamensis - History and industry in Australia'. With a peak produc- Management of the Captive Stocks. Fishes of.Sahut 6 tion of around 50 tonnes for the entire (I). 241-247. country in 1994/1995 (Kibriaef a/., 1998). Ktbria, G,, Nugegoda, N., Faiclough, R and Lam, P (1998) Biology and Aquaculture of Silver Perch, this seems insufficient to compete with the Btdyanus bidyanus (Teraponidae); A Review. The 300 plus tonnes of freshwater crayfish pro- Victorian Naturalist LIS (2), 56-62. duced in Western Australia alone Lake, J S (1967). 'Freshwater fish of the Murray- Darling River System' Stale Fisheries of New South (O'Sullivan 1995) in approximately the Wales Research Bulletin 7 same time span. O' Sullivan, D (1995) Yabby enhancement to Power There have been some excellent articles Further Production in the West'. Au stasia Aquaculture 9 (5), 10-12. on the biology of native fishes in The Romanowski, N. ( 1994) 'Farming in Ponds and Dams:

Victorian Naturalist over the years, and I an Introduction to Freshwater Aquaculture in Australia' (Melbourne; Lothian Books). would certainly like to see more of them. Romanowski, N (1996) Fishes for Victorian Wetlands ! don't feel that aquaculture adds However, and Dams Part 3. Wetland Ways, Newsletter of the anything of value to a natural history mag- Victorian Wetland Trust 8 (4) Tappin, A.R. (1998), TB or not TB - That is the azine. If the word 'Biology* had been Question! Australia New Guinea Fishes Association taken out of the title 'Biology and Bulletin 35 (February) 1-5, Aquaculture of Silver Perch* it would have Walker, T. (1996) Sustainabiliry and Family Farms; Take-home lessons for Silver Perch. Austasia a accurate statement of what it been more Aquaculture 10(1)5-9. was reallv about, and also made it clear

Dear Editor Response to Nick Romanowski regarding our review paper Biology and aquaculture of Silver Perch - A review* (Kibriae/a/. 1998).

This is a review paper of an Australian 1. Causes of decline: we have combined native fish. Silver Perch Bidyanns bidyanus the three main reasons for the decline of based on published information of the the Silver Perch population: (a) competi- species. The paper reviewed 'biology and tion for food from introduced cyprinids. aquaculture of Silver Perch* in the context (b) predation by the English Perch and (c) of its natural history, natural habitats, biol- the construction of dams that has prevent- ogy, natural food and feeding habits, aqua- ed upstream migration, affecting the repro- culture and pollution potential. The review ductive success. However, the last and could be of interest to a wide of range of most important point, which is the main readers from naturalists to conservationists, cause of decline of Silver Perch popula- aquaculturists, biologists and environmen- tions in the wild, has been omitted. talists. This paper was refereed and the 2. Rehabilitation through aquaculture is summary of referee's comments may spurious?: This statement is incorrect. b reflect the intention of the review; the Fisheries and aquaculture arc interrelated aquaculture has prac- paper is a comprehensive review of the cur- disciplines, and been rent status of Silver Perch in terms of its tised world wide not only to increase fish known biology, conservation status and production but also to enhance natural aquaculture". Regarding the comments of fisheries through stocking with fry and fin- Nick Romanowski about the paper, we gerlings into dams, reservoirs and open suggested that the would like to submit the following: waters. Rowland (1995)

Vol. 116(1)1999 29 Letters to the Editor

stocking of hatchery reared fingerlings can American Shad in USA, where induced significantly enhance Australian native breeding, and a program for the release of tlsh stocks (including Silver Perch) in nat- hatchery -produced larvae and juveniles has ural waters whose populations have been carried out to supplement the stocks in

declined due to modification of freshwater rivers (Hanping 1996). Salmon larvae, fry. environments. To rehabilitate native fish. fingerlings. and smolts are stocked to State Government hatcheries in NSW and restore populations destroyed by acid pre- Vicloria annually produce fish for stocking cipitation and hydro-electric facilities in public waterways for both recreation and Norway (Torrissen^/ al. 1995). To increase conservation purposes (Goo ley and the marine resources in Japan, several mil- Rowland 1993). Furthermore, to establish lions of fry of Kuruma Shrimp Penaeus and maintain recreational fisheries. NSW japonicus are released every year, whereas

fisheries have so far stocked I i million in the USA salmon enhancement programs Silver Perch. Golden Perch and Murray have been based on hatchery production of Cod fingerlings into impoundments since juveniles (Pillay 1990). In short, aquacul- 1976 (Rowland 1995). Additionally, fin- ture can play a significant role in conserva- gerlings of native endangered Trout Cod tion of aquatic biodiversity and genetic (Maccultochella macquariensis) and resources (Anon 1998a). Eastern Freshwater Cod (M. ikei) produced 3. About 'initiating of genetic drift*; The from hatchery were also stocked into high costs of keeping aquatic organisms waters where they had become extincl encourage farmers to use small brood- (Rowland 1995). However, it was men- stock populations which can lead to tioned that aquaculture of Silver Perch is inbreeding and negative consequences for not a solution to rehabilitate the species. If farmed or released slocks. This problem aquaculture is not a solution, what are the could arise due to lack of knowledge of the solutions? Unfortunately there was no solu- basic principles of the brood stock mainte- tion given in the letter. If there are no mea- nance. However, the majority of aquatic sures taken then the Silver Perch popula- species used in aquaculture today are little tion will continue to decline in the wild and changed from their wild relatives with the will soon reach the "endangered* category possible exception of Common Carp and from the present 'vulnerable* category. ornamental fish (Anon 1998b). Most Secondly, it is widely accepted that over- hatchery populations of Rainbow Trout exploited and depleted fisheries can be Salmo gairdnerii have approximately the rehabilitated through programs of artificial same amount of genetic variation as natur- breeding, rearing and restocking in natural al populations (Allendorf and Utter 1979: habitats (New 1991; Casvas 1995; Busack et at, 1979). Despite all. there has Gjedrem 1997). The captive breeding pro- been considerable progress on fish genetics grams are useful in conservation of aquatic to tackle the inbreeding problem. Research organisms, in particular commercial done overseas suggests that by maintaining species, since artificial breeding creates the effective breeding numbers it (N e ). is pos- opportunity to preserve ova or embryos sible to avoid inbreeding or genetic drift (cryopreservation) and the establishment problems (Douglas 1992). For example. of gene banks for future use. Therefore Ryman and Stahl (1980) suggested thai Ne these programs can be the basis for main- could be at least 60 whereas the Food and taining biodiversity of aquatic organisms Agriculture Organisation of the United that are most threatened by the impact of Nations (FAO) recommends that N be at human e interventions (Pullin 1993; Purdom least 50 for short term work and 500 for 1993). Furthermore, androgenesis tech- long term work (FAO/UNEP 1981). niques open the way for germ plasm main- Allendorf and Ryman (1988) and Tavc tenance and the conservation of endangered (1993) have given a specific Ne of fish to fish species (Thorgaard 1986; Thorgarrd et be stocked in rivers and lakes for fisheries al. 1990). Aquaculture has brought hope management programs or ocean ranching. for the restoration and conservation of The follow ing publications deal with N e of endangered fish species in many countries, different species: Common. Chinese and for example. Reeves Shad in China, and Indian Major Carp (Jhingram and Pullin

30 The Victorian Naturalist 9

Letters to the Editor

1988). Tilapia (Tave 1986: Smitherman If the cultured stock escaped into the wild, and Tave 1987; 1988) and Brown Trout their larvae and juveniles from wild (RymanandStahl 1980). spawning would die. This technology will 4. About 'dilution of the wild population improve fish production and will not pol- and disease concern': There has been lute wild stocks (Anon 1998c). much development in the field of fish 5. About 'most irritating aspect and selec- genetics for sustainable aquaculture and tive promotion of the species': It appears fisheries production. Through selective from the above comment that we wrote the breeding or genetic transformation (trans- review to promote the species and perhaps genic species) of fish and crustaceans, it we are running a fish selling business! This has been possible to produce strain resis- was further linked to an exhaustive refer- tance to diseases and parasites (Gjedrem ence list. Silver Perch is a well known 1995: Bachere et al. 1997). Therefore endemic freshwater species with a high genetic transformation or selective breed- aquaculture potential and does not need ing is also a solution to eliminate the any promotional drive, and this fact was spread of diseases at regional or interna- also acknowledged in the letter 'Silver tional levels (Bachere et al. 1997). Some Perch is certainly the best prospect for selection experiments have shown genetic aquaculture in Australia*. The impression improvements for disease resistance was also expressed that we have omitted against dropsy disease in Common Carp some references but the list of those refer- (llyassov 1987). furunculosis in brown ences was not given. However, referees trout (Cipriano and Heartwell 1986: who reviewed the paper commented that Dunham 1987) and Brook Trout (Embodv "it is clear that the authors have conducted and Hay ford 1925: Dunham 1987). an extensive literature review'. Moreover, the creation of sterile transgenic 6. About 'represent the main endemic fresh- aquaculture species will avoid any spread- water aquaculture production": The first line ing of the strains in the natural environ- of our paper clearly indicated that 'the ment (Bachere et al 1997). Aquaculture Silver Perch Bidyanus biayanus is the most creates the opportunity to produce triploids important fish contributing to major endem- which are sterile fish that can be cultured ic freshwater aquaculture production (see on farms or used in natural resources man- the first line of the abstract in our paper). compared agement. This process is an excellent way Secondly, production has been native fish, but lo utilise even exotic fishes for fisheries with Silver Perch and other management while minimising adverse not with crustaceans (see Table 2 in Kibria environmental impacts (Tave 1993). etai 1998). Triploids have been an important fish for

stocking public waterways in the USA. Tabic I, TopieS covered in Kibria et al. quoted. For example. Striped Bass is one of the (1998) and number of references premier sport and commercial species in Title Number of the USA. Fishing pressures, pollution, and references quoted destruction of spawning grounds and nurs-

ery areas caused the dramatic depletion of I. General biology of silver perch many stocks of Striped Bass. Sterile (a) history, natural habitats, status 10 biological characteristics of silver perch 1 Striped Bass {produced by crossing Striped (b) (c) natural food and feeding with White Bass) are being stocked in Bass 3ti around USA to help rivers and lakes 2. Environment relieve the fishing pressure on Striped Bass (a) salinity tolerance and distribution and to help restore local fisheries, without in salt water 4 adverse environmental consequences (b) pollution potential 3 7 recently ( lave 1993). It has been reported 3. Aquaculture of silver perch the Commonwealth Scientific and that (a) aquaculture of silver perch 15 Organisation (CSIRO) Industrial Research (b) artificial breeding 3 10 is researching on a transgenic technology (c) nutrition production in to develop aquaculture species which will (d) growth and 38 complete their life cycle only on the farm.

31 Vol. 116(1)1999 Letters to the Editor

7. About "taking out the word biology already the basis of important aquaculture from the title': This paper was reviewed by and enhanced fisheries with no evidence of referees, accepted by the editor and pub- their having caused significant environ-

lished and no suggestion was put to us to mental harm, then it would be reasonable

change the title. Table 1 gives a break to pursue further development of such down of the areas covered and the number aquaculture or fisheries. We believe in of references quoted. ecologically sustainable development (ESD) as set out in the National strategy 8. Conclusion for ESD (NSESD) (Deville et al 1995) We hope from the above discussion, that and the same view has been reflected in it is clear that aquaculture has a significant the conclusion of our review. role in natural stock enhancement conservation of aquatic biodiversity and genetic Thank you. resources, endangered species restoration, Sincerely yours, and aquatic resource management. Dr Golam Kibria Aquaculture is currently providing much References needed support to recreational and com- Allendorf, F. W. and Ryman, N. (1988). Genetic man- mercial fishers. Our review on the 'biology agement of hatchery stocks. In 'Population Genetics and Fishery and aquaculture of Silver Perch' dealt with Management' (Eds N. Ryman and F Utter). Washington Sea Grant Program. (University a native species, a species which is vulner- of Washington Press; Seattle, WA). able and is of interest to recreational and Allendorf, F W. and Utter, F. M. (1979) Population genetics. In 'Fish Physiology'- Vol. VIII Bioenergetics commercial fishers. The species is being and growth. (Eds W. S. Hoar, D J Randall, and J. R. stocked in Victoria's natural waterways Brett). (Academic Press: New York).

with flngerlings produced from aquacul- Anon (1998a). 'Saving biodiversity ; Characterising Tilapia Genetic Resources' (International Centre for ture in order to enhance the state's fish- the Living Aquatic Resources Management eries. Aquaculture is an infant industry1 in (ICLARM). Philippines. Research Highlights Australia and therefore much of its bene- ICLARM Internet News). Anon (1998b). The need for genetics in aquaculture. fits may not be known. Agricultural and Aquatic Systems Program (AASPi The primary threats to fish species are Newsletter 3 (2) 5-7. (Asian Institute of Technology mainly due to destruction of habitat essen- (AIT) Thailand), Anon (1998c). Genetic wins on farm and in the wild tial for reproduction and recruitment and Newsletter of the fisheries Research

32 The Victorian Naturalist Book Review

Embody, G C. and Hayford, C D. (1925). The advan- modified organisms in aquaculturc and enhanced of rearing brook trout fmgerlings tage from selected fisheries : ICLARM's position. Naga. ICLARM breeders. Transactions American Fisheries Society Quarterly 17 (4), 19-24. L 55, 135-148. Purdom, C E. (1993). Genctics and fish breeding' FAO UNEP (1981). 'Conservation of genetic resources (Chapman & Hall Australia Thomas Nelson 1 of fish Problems and recommendations Report of Australia: South Melbourne).

the expert consultation of the genetic resources of Rowland, S .1 (1995) 'Stocking of freshwater fishes fish, Rome, 9-13 June 1980. FAO Fisheries and policy in New South Wales' Fisheries Technical Paper No. 217_ Management Paper. Fisheries Department of Western Gjedrem, R. (1995). 'Genetic improvement of resis- Australia Translocation issues in Western Australia tance to diseases and parasites in fish'. ICLARM Proceedings of a seminar and workshop held on 26- Publication Philippines 27 September 1994 pp 50-61. Gjedrem, R (1997) Selective breeding to improve aqua- Ryman, N and Stahl. G. (1980), Genetic changes in culture production. World Aquaculturc 28 (I), 33-45. hatchery stocks of brown trout (Salmo irutta), Gooley. G and Rowland, S (1993) Murray-Darling Canadian Journal ofFisheries and Aquatic Sciences Finfish - Current developments and commercial 37,82-87 potential. Austasia Aquaculturc 7 (3). 35-36. Ryman, N. and Utter, F (1988) 'Population genetics

Hatiping, W. ( 1 996) Status and conservation of Reeves and fishery management' Washington Sea Grant Shad resources in China. Naga, l( I.ARM Quarterly Program (University of Washington Press: Seattle). I9(l),20-22. Smithennan, R. O. And Tave, D, (1987). Maintenance

Ilyassov, Y I (1987). Genetic principles offish selec- of genetic quality in farmed Tilapia. Asian Fisheries

tion for disease resistance In Proceedings World Science l( I), 75-82. Symposium on Selection, Hybridization and genetic Smitherman, R. O. And Tave, D, (1988) Generic con- Engineering in Aquacullure, Bordeaux, pps 455-469. siderations on acquisition and maintenance of refer-

- Jhmgram. V. G and Pullin. R. S V. (1988). A hatch ence populations of Tilapia. Aquahytc I { I ), 2. erv manual for the common, Chinese and Indian Tave, D (1986) A quantitative genetic analysis of 19 ( Carps' ICLARM Studies and Reviews 1 1, 191 p. phenotypes m Tilapia niloiica 'opeia 1986, 672-679 Tave, "Genetics for fish Kibna, G., Nugegoda, D. : Fairclough, R. and Lam, P. D. (1993) hatchery managers'. (1998), Biology and aquaculturc of Silver Perch Second edition

Buhanys hulyanus (Mitchell l838)(Teraponidae) ; A Thorgaard, G. H (1986) Ploidy manipulation and per- Review. The Victorian Naturalist 115 (2), 56-62. formance. Aquaculturc 57, 57-64.

New, M. B. ( 1991 ) World aquaculiure 22 (3>, 28-49. Thorgaard, G H , Schcerer, P, D., Hershbcrgcr, W K Pillay, T. V R (1990) 'Aquaculture - Principles and and Myers, J. M (1990) Androgcnctic Rainbow Practices' (Blackwell Science Pty Ltd Victoria) Trout produced using sperm from tetraploid males Pullin, R. S. V. (1993). hx-snu conservation of the show improved survival Aquaculturc 85, 215-221.

germplasm of aquatic organisms. Naga, ICLARM Torrissen, O-J , Holm, J. C. and Hansen, T, (1995), Quarterly 16 (2-3), 15-17 Aquaculturc in Norway World Aquaculturc 26 (3), Pullin, R S V. (1994). Exotic species and genetically 12-20.

Saving the Environment: What Will it Take?

by Ted Trainer

Publisher: University of Sew South Wales Press, Sydney. Paperback, 64 pp. ISHS 86840 648 T RRP $9.95

The environmental movement has been ments from the real social and cultural claimed to be the most significant social causes of environmental decline. We are movement to have occurred internationally over-producing and over-consuming, he since the emergence of socialism. Ted argues, and solutions to the environmental Trainer argues that environmental policies problem will fail unless we recognise this in the 1990s are failing to deal with the fact. underlying causes of environmental A US study shows that the average per- decline, and presents key arguments for son consumes 20 tonnes of new material limiting economic growth. every year. I rainer argues that our society Most people, including those who staff is more than "somewhat* unsustainable: it the government and non-profit environ- is far beyond the levels of resource con- mental agencies, such as the Australian sumption and environmental impact that Conservation Foundation, assume that we could be sustained'. can solve the environmental problem by Or Ted Trainer teaches at the School of more recycling, greater energy efficiency. Social Work at the University of New stricter anti-pollution legislation, more South Wales. He has published extensive!) national parks and greener codes for build- on environmental issues, and his books and ing, planning and producis. Trainer argues include The Conserver Society that this emphasis is distracting govern- Towards a Sustainable Economy.

Vol. 116(1) 1999 33 Tribute

Daniel Ernest Mclnnes 1906-1998

It was with great sadness that we learned Club has been without a Treasurer since the that Dan Mclnnes had died on 24 last Annual General Meeting but Mr September 1998, just short of his 92 nd Mclnnes (being Mr Mclnnes) has continued birthday. It was also difficult to compre- to see us through although officially he was hend. Dan had been such an active mem- merely a "bookkeeper"'. The Club was very ber for so long that one could not believe dear to Dan's heart and he would not let it that he would not be found, still busy, falter for want of a helping hand. From somewhere in the Club. 1977-1983 he was Book Sales Officer, pro- Dan Mclnnes was elected a member of viding a much-appreciated service, as well the Club at the AGM on 7 June 1954 when as making a considerable profit for the the Microscopical Society of Victoria was Club, and he continued looking after the incorporated with the Field Naturalists sale of back issues of The Victorian Club of Victoria. In 1957 he became a Naturalist stored in his old shop at 129 member of Council, and from 1958 to Waverley Road until 1995. December 1995 Dan is listed, in one Dan may not have been in favour of the capacity or another, in The Victorian incorporation of the Microscopical Society Naturalist. He was Vice-President with the Club, but from the outset he threw 1958-1959. President 1959-1962. and himself into the life of the FNCV. The Immediate Past President from 1962-1967. Microscopical Group was formed immedi- A break from official duties might have ately, Dan was the Excursion Leader, and been expected, but in September 1967 the the first excursion was to Albert Park Treasurer resigned and, typically, Dan Lake, one of his favourite hunting grounds. offered to carry on until a new Treasurer Pond life was his abiding interest, and was appointed. At the AGM in 1968 Dan many times members will have heard him became Treasurer, and in effect held this say at a General Meeting that he had position until 1980, although at intervals popped down to the lake for a jam jar full during this period the position was officially of water because he knew there was bound vacant. In the Annual Report 1979/80 the to be something of interest in it for him to President. Dr Brian Smith, paid tribute to exhibit under a microscope. Most likely the retiring Treasurer for his untiring work nothing new to him, but it enabled him to for the Club: 'His advice on Club matters in pass on some item of knowledge to others, general as well as his sound financial guid- and that was equally important to him. He ance has been of incalculable value to the was never at a loss to find something to Club/ When the appointment of a new exhibit, and the breadth of his interests is Treasurer was announced six months later revealed in the variety of specimens he dis- the Club Reporter commented 'Actually the played: the blood circulation of a tadpole;

34 The Victorian Naturalist Tribute

a nautilus shell, the animal and its eggs, lem with cheap commercial microscopes, found at Middle Brighton: rock sections, which were unsatisfactory for both chil- the proboscis of a blowfly; fossil coral dren and adults starting to use them, and from Lilydale Quarry: rotifers: live cheese explained his design which had been con- mites from matured cheese (probably found structed by W.C. Woollard, an engineer in his delicatessen stock): Wolfifia and liver- and keen microscopisl, who had developed worts to name but a few. His exhibits were the original idea into "a really practical. always accompanied by notes, and he would first-class microscope'. So popular was frequently draw members' attention to fur- this microscope, sold at a very reasonable ther information to be found in books in the price, that over 140 of them were made for

library. In this connection it is interesting to members. Dan and W.C. Woollard both read the report of the meeting of the received Honorary memberships in May Microscopical Group which was held in the 1964 in recognition of this work. Herbarium Hall in January 1955, when 'Mr One of the major Club events from very D. Mclnnes stressed that all members earl) days was the annual Nature Show, attending a future meeting should bring a held in the Lower Melbourne Town Hall. microscope, irrespective of whether they During the 1960s and 1970s Dan was have a specimen or not at the time. A slide chairman of the Nature Show Committee, will be supplied, and if the member is diffi- and Jim Willis, in his centenary history of dent about making the few necessarx the FNCV. described Dan's indefatigable remarks relevant to the slide, then arrange- leadership* in organising these Shows. ment will be made for a substitute to do this Each one featured a particular theme. The for him.' People were to be involved and Hawthorn Juniors played a significant pan. encouraged, and one of the things that and as an indication of the amount of work impressed Ray Power was Dan's 'ability to involved the report on the 1967 Show put on a talk at a moment's notice'. states 'D. Mclnnes and the Hawthorn Besides his involvement with the Juniors are the proprietors of Instant Caves Microscopical Group, Dan was also a Ltd: the caves come in assorted sizes com- member of the hntomology and Marine plete with stalactites and stalagmites. We Biology Group, the Geology Group, and in understand that with modern methods the time, the Day Group. This latter was manufacturing lime has been cul from sev- formed in 1972 to cater for leisured and eral million years lo 26 weeks." In 1964 retired members who did not want to the Hawthorn Juniors mounted a 'realistic attend meetings at night. Their inaugural beach scene' and demonstrated making

excursion was to the Botanic Gardens. It rock slides under the FNCV microscope, was reported that 'Mr Mclnnes took us to On another occasion a geological scale see an unusual Chinese Oak tree.* model of the Yarra Valley was constructed Although not a founder of the Hawthorn under Dan's guidance- Junior Field Naturalists Club, Dan was Dan wrote a number of articles for The

closely connected with it for many years, Victorian Naturalist* and the one called A and was President from April 1962. step- fond Hunter's Dream, published in 1990, ping in after the sudden death of their wonderfully transmits his abiding interest President, until August 1971. Many mem- in pond life. He describes the pond hunter bers, and future Office Bearers of the as "that odd person who may be seen occa- FNCV, had their interest in natural history sionally, dipping with his pond net into a fostered by Dan, and for one member at lake' and says that "pond hunters in their least there has been the recent jo\ of hav- rambles always have that dream of the ing her child inspired by Dan. as she was. pond that has all the interesting forms of In 1969 he was made a Life Member of the life they read about but never come across Hawthorn Junior FNC. in their samples of pond life." He goes on Dan was essentially a practical man. and to describe such a dream pond. The article nowhere is this revealed more clearly than conveys the excitement of finding all sorts in the construction of the FNCV micro- of fascinating life, and also contains much scope. In a scries of articles in The practical advice on equipment and meth- Victorian Naturalist he outlined the prob- ods. It is not written to show off some

Vol. 116(1) 1999 35 Tribute

everyone obscure knowledge, but to make others members at meetings. He wanted r part of aware of the subject, and to assist anyone to to feel involved, and he saw it as at General develop an interest of their own. An inter- his job to talk to people appeared in the esting article on Wolffia australiana was Meetings. A revealing item meeting in 1960 the result of his being asked whether he had report of the January people who arrived ever seen this tiny duckweed in flower. He when he appealed for micro- hadn't, so he investigated. Dan's keen early to help set up tables, lights, could have more time interest and sharp eye finally led him to the phone etc. so that he members. This discovery in 1983 of a species previously to greet and get to know unrecorded for Australia, a foraminiferan, says as much about Dan's activities in the Shepheardella taeniformis, in material col- background as about his view of his lected from Black Rock. Subsequent trips responsibilities as President. He was appreciation of to Port Phillip Bay revealed more speci- always very generous with mens, which led Dan to speculate that this other people's efforts. When in 1985 a pre- Al lender Tor foram was fairly plentiful; but it had taken sentation was made to Marie com- his keen observation and wide knowledge Outstanding Service' it was Dan who excursions Marie had to identify it. piled a list of The fact that Dan was never Club arranged, and spoke of her record in this Librarian, nor Editor of The Victorian capacity and as a Councillor. 1, too. have Naturalist did not mean that he had no reason to be grateful to Dan. It was he who involvement in these aspects of the Club. recommended to Council that as 1 had been He was always willing to lend a hand in the Club Librarian for eleven years, as well as library, he looked after the binding, and holding various other offices from time to when the library went into storage he listed time, 1 should receive an Honorary mem- all the books kept out for use by the bership. That was when Dan was 90, and Microscopical Group. The geological map his interest in Club affairs was still as keen and reports collection also bears witness to as ever. Delve into the Club's activities will his organisation. As time went on it became anywhere in the last 44 years, and you increasingly obvious that a supplement to almost certainly find Dan, contributing. He the cumulative indexes to The Victorian will be greatly missed. Naturalist, which covered issues only to Our sympathy goes to Chriss Mclnnes. 1978, was necessary. Dan. embracing new herself a member for the last 40 years, and technology, acquired his own computer, to the family. and in collaboration with Pat Grey, pro- Sheila Houghton 12 Scenic Court, duced an index covering the next ten years. Gisborne, Victona 3437. When Dan became President in 1959 he introduced the idea of name cards for I am indebted to Tom May for assistance with this obituary.

(Photo ofPan taken at the FNCV Centenary- Meeting, 5 May 1980)

Vale Norman Stanford

We regret to announce the death of Norm Stanford on 26 November, 1998. Norm was elected to the Club in February 1983, and was Subscription Secretary from 1986 to 1988. Microscopy was his chief interest, and although he resigned from the Club when he and Helen moved from Melbourne, he continued to attend some meetings of the Microscopical Group as a member of an affiliated Club. Norm was re-elected to the FNCV in July 1997, and attended meetings until shortly before his death. Our condolences go to Helen Stanford, who was Book Sales Officer for several years. Sheila Houghton

36 The Victorian Naturalist Book Reviews

A Long Walk in the Australian Bush

William J. Lines

Publisher: University of New South Wales Press Ltd, 1998. RRP $19.95.

The vexed question of land utilisation in walk progresses. Complete utilisation of general and forestry in particular has exer- the forest appears to be the aim of foresters cised the mind of Bill Lines since he was a and. in 1968, the then conservator of boy growing up at Gosnells. near forests in Western Australia saw wood- Fremantle in Western Australia. His for- chipping as the realisation of this dream. In mative years are described in his publica- addition, the damming of rivers and tion 'Taming the Great South Land* (Allen streams and their pollution by agricultural & Unwin Ltd. 1991). As a boy he watched and industrial run-off have added to the the sand track on which his parents lived destruction. As in so many other parts of become the Fremantle Road as bush was the continent, salinisation has occurred on cleared, swamps drained and the land a large scale, particularly where the forest became yet another subdivision. has been cleared for broad-acre farming. The work under review is concerned with Distinctions are made between natural a physical and philosophical journey along calamities and those visited upon the forest the Bibbulmun Walking Track, undertaken by human interference. In particular, much in the spring of 1993. The Bibbulmun reference is made to the differences in land Track commences at Kalamunda, only a utilisation by the original inhabitants and few kilometres from Gosnells, in an area those who displaced them. The author is at Lines has been familiar with all of his life. pains to emphasise the importance of the The track, covering a distance of 650 kilo- forest for its own sake and not for utilitari- metres, followed mainly along old logging an purposes, however laudable. He and fire roads, and the various sections implores nature lovers to base their efforts provide the story of the forest during the at preservation on the fundamental ethic past 170 years. The first logs were taken in that plants and animals have a right to exist 1829, when timber was required for repair- and to be left alone because they exist. ing HMS Sulphur. The British Admiralty Although dealing with a relatively small was so impressed with the work that 200 part of the south west of Western tons of timber were ordered in 1831. fol- Australia, a narrow belt of very distinctive lowed by further orders in 1837. Over the land between Perth on the west coast and next few decades intermittent logging Walpole on the south coast, the implica- occurred, but began in earnest during the tions of the story have universal applica- 1870s as the 'inexhaustible abundance' tion. As David Suzuki said in another began to be exploited. Baron Ferdinand place, "we assault the planet as if it is lim- von Mueller visited the region on two itless and endlessly self-renewing". This occasions during this period and recom- emphasises the fact that the story Bill mended that a bureaucratic structure be Lines tells is not unique to the south west, established to exercise surveillance, pre- or even to Australia, but is being repeated vent waste and encourage the natural over and over in different parts of the upgrowth of young trees. world. As Lines and his companion travel along The book, a paperback of about 200 the track it is made abundantly clear lhal pages, is recommended for the important rather than exercising such care, much of observations made concerning the use and the forest has been used rather as a quarry. abuse of the planet. Although it makes no That clearing for agriculture, some selective difference to the message that Lines is con- logging for timber, and a great deal of clear veying, it is noted that the track that he and felling for wood-chipping for the Japanese his companion walked is not now in use. A market occurred becomes apparent as the new. purpose built and recently completed

Vol. 116(1)1999 37 Book Reviews

Bibbulmun Track, to the east of their route niences to make the long walk more plea- and mainly through conservation areas, is sureable. Whether it has the same impact is now the official route and extends the track another story. a further 180 kilometres eastwards to R.J. Fletcher Albany. It has numerous campsites, each 28 Marjone Avenue. about a day's walk apart and with conve- Belmont, Victoria 3216.

George Caley, Nineteenth Century Naturalist

by Joan Webb

Publisher: Surrey Beatty & Sons, 1995. 185 pp., many illustrations (black & white, colour). R.R.P $37.95.

Not far from the Botanic Gardens in the lected with Caley in the vicinity of Sydney Blue Mountains, NSW. a peak carries the and the Blue Mountains. Brown's influen- name Mount Banks. It was given by an tial role in Australian botany is widely English botanist. George Caley, to com- recognised. But Caley, who collected in memorate Joseph Banks, for whom he col- New Holland over a longer period of time lected many Australian plants early in the and may have foot-slogged a greater total nineteenth century. Caley was explorer as land distance, published nothing, and is well as botanist and is commemorated relatively unknown. physiographically and botanically -mainly Assisted by botanists and librarians, Joan in NSW. Three peaks, one genus and sev- Webb investigated herbarium specimens as eral species of Australian plants still carry well as correspondence, journals, maps and his name. Robert Brown, another of reports at the present herbarial home of Banks' botanists, gave Caley's name to an Banks" and Brown's botanical collections orchid genus - Caleana - and described - the Natural History Museum in London - Caley as 'botanici periti et accurate - a and other European, American and skilful and accurate botanist. Non- Australian herbaria. In George Caley, Victorian species of Banksia, Grevillea Nineteenth Century Naturalist, the product and Eucalyptus, retain the specific name of her extensive detective search for Caley, caleyi. Victoria's swamp violet, Viola Webb discusses his Australian botanical calevana G. Don. also commemorates work between April 1800 and May 1810, Caley. and the botanical consequences of that George Caley collected only very fleet- work. ingly on the coast of what would later In 1795. Caley wrote to the great botanist become the colony of Victoria, but because Banks to introduce himself and enquire his recent biography is of general botanical about employment. Caley mentioned that interest I think it deserves mention in The he was born on a memorable day for Victorian Naturalist. My more detailed Banks - in June 1770, when Captain review is published in Historical Records Cook's Endeavour was almost wrecked on ofAustralian Science, vol. 12. June 1998. the Barrier Reef and Banks feared for the During Flinders" coastal survey of New survival of the rich plant collection from Holland (1802-5), Brown collected thou- the aptly named "Botany Bay'. Later Caley sands of plants for Banks and named many accepted Banks" offer of employment and in his substantial Prodromus Florae Novae collected for him in New Holland. Of the Hollandiae et Insulae Van Dieman (1810) relatively few Australian plants described and supplement - Supplementum Primum by 1800, Caley had studied those cultivat- Proteaceas Novas (1830). Some he col- ed in English gardens and described in

38 The Victorian Naturalist Book Reviews

botanical publications. Caley provided specimens and names for Caley made three sea voyages from other botanists to use. Some of Calcy's Sydney. One was an exploratory expedi- many Australian specimens, especially in tion in 1801 to survey Bass Strait and the Proteaceae and Orehidaeeae. are type Western Port on the Lady Nelson under specimens for taxonomic names published Lieutenant James Grant. Webb could find b\ others, usually Robert Brown. no Caley journal for this expedition. Furthermore, some of the published names although he wrote to Banks that are Caley's manuscript names. Webb

when I have nothing to do I shall write found evidence of the publication of out my voyage to Western Port, but had eleven of Caley 's manuscript names. Some it been more interesting I should have are for species indigenous to Victoria, done so long ago. including four published in Brown's Webb mentions that Caley found few Prodromus Leucopogon junipeririKS plants he had not already seen, but not R.Br., Thelymitra pane iflora R.Br., whether any of Calcy's expedition speci- Scutellaria mollis R.Br, and Xanthorrhoea mens survive. minor R.Br. - and one in his Profeaceas In 1805. Brown took his massive New r Novas - Persoonia rigida R.Br. On his Holland collection, including some Caley herbarium label Brown wrote ^Persoonia specimens, back to Banks and began docu- rigida Caley*, but because he rather than

menting it. In his Prodromus Brown estab- Caley published that name. Brown's rather lished many new genera, including two than Calcy's name remains attached to that orchid genera, Caleana and Pterostvlis. for plant name. which he named and described many Webb's book includes maps and illustra- species, including Caleana major. Caleana tions including Bauer's exquisite depiction minor and about a dozen species of of Caleana major, which are clear and Pterostvlis, which are now recognised as informative; there are useful appendices, Victorian. Meanwhile, in the antipodes. including 'Plants named after Caley' and Caley was using a taxonomic system being "Calcy's Kucalypts". and a good bibliogra- discarded by Brown and genera established phy. Unfortunately, the index lacks taxo- before 1801. Caley was more than a mere nomic names - not even Brown's genus

collector and provided new specific names Caieanal I admire Webb's persistent for genera he recognised and sometimes detective effort in her search for clues ventured to create new generic names. He about Caley and his collections and recom- had a substantial orchid collection and mend George Caiev, Nineteenth Century recognised that certain hooded orchids Naturalist to Vic, Sat. readers who share could not be accommodated in any estab- my interest in Australian botanical history. lished genus and deserved their own genus. Linden Gillbank Because they reminded him of the hooded Department of History and Philosophy of Science, Druids, he called the new genus Druid's University of Melbourne. Cap. which Brown latinized and used until Parkville, Victoria 3052 he established the genus Pterostvlis.

The Victorian Naturalist

All material for publication to:

The Editor, The Victorian Naturalist, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, P.O. Blackburn,

Victoria 3 1 30.

Vol. 116(1)1999 39 Book Review

New Zealand Fungi: an illustrated guide (Revised edition)

by Greta Stevenson

Publisher; Canterbury* University Press, 1994. Paperback, 126pp., 15 colour illustrations. RRP $19.95.

These are indeed fortunate times for orders of the Gasteromycetes. as well as a those field naturalists whose interests few illustrations and the 15 coloured include fungi. The appearance over the plates. The book concludes with a reason- past decade or so of several excellent able glossary and index. mycological publications, as well as initia- The overview provided above presents a tives such as the Fungimap project, are book that seems to contain most of the top- indicative of a positive period in mycologi- ics sought after in a publication of this type. cal research in Australasia. This review of A more critical look, however, reveals sev- Greta Stevenson's publication New eral features of considerable concern. Zealand Fungi: an illustrated guide is The publisher's note at the opening of the placed within this context. book acknowledges that a number of fungi First published in 1982, under the title have undergone taxonomic revision since Field Guide to Fungi, this book includes a the first edition in 1982. There seems to table of contents that would have presum- have been no attempt to accommodate ably been eagerly sought by field mycolo- these changes in the revised edition of gists. The introduction and following chap- 1994. In fact, no editorial changes seem to ter attempt to define fungi in terms of their have been made at all in the revised edi- position in a broad hierarchy, and by some tion. This may be a result of adhering to explanation of fungal life cycles and repro- Stevenson's conservative line of classifica- duction. Information is provided on detri- tion, expressed in Chapter 9. Although mental and beneficial roles of fungi, some explanation of the author's choice of including the important concept of mycor- classification is welcomed, the divisive rhizal associations. discussion dealing with this issue could Two very brief chapters on finding and well have been expressed through a more collecting fungi are followed by a more appropriate forum. detailed series of chapters dealing with the The use of a wide left margin to com- recording of information, and preservation ment on points of classification, and for of collected specimens. These chapters specific referencing, is to be commended. utilise illustrations of both macroscopic and However, the overall referencing style microscopic detail, as well as providing a lacks consistency and informative detail. scheme for compiling notes on specimens. A lack of attention to grammar and sen- After a skeletal explanation of the tence structure is reflected in a somewhat process of nomenclature, a brief descrip- clumsy style of writing, and results in a tion of the four classes to be dealt with, loss of clarity in the text. This lack of and a blunt explanation of the author's attention to editorial detail is also exempli- choice of classification, there is a hiatus fied in the entry for Gomphus, where created by the insertion of a short chapter Stevenson acknowledges that 'two new on reference literature plus a bibliography. species have been described recently by Dr The remaining one hundred pages of the Barbara Segedin in Auckland Fig. 14.1*. book contain descriptions of taxa from No reference is given as to where to find only two of the classes mentioned above. these descriptions; no illustration of This section includes a key to some genera Gomphus appears in Fig. 14.1. which illus- of the Agaricales (with a table-format trates Podoserpula pusio, Schizophyllum guide to genera of gilled fungi), a key to commune, Stereum hirsutum and S. pur-

40 The Victorian Naturalist Naturalist Notes

pureum; and both Podoserpula and seem to be specific to one species of tree', Schizophyllum are misspelt! and *in the Nothofagus forests they The colour plates are a welcome addition abound', and yet no species of Cortinarius to the revised edition and, although half of gets a mention anywhere in the book. A those presented are very small, the quality coloured plate depicting an unidentified allows recognition of the main diagnostic species of Cortinarius was selected to rep- features. Once again, however, the editori- resent the genus. al standard could be improved. The colour To conclude, expectations of an improve- plate of Morchelta conica is not supported ment in quality in the revised edition of by a description in the text, and does not this book have certainly not been fulfilled. appear in the index. If a reliable, modern field guide is what A redeeming feature of this publication is you're looking for, New Zealand Fungi: an the numerous descriptions of both genera illustrated guide is regrettably a publica- and species. It is unfortunate that here too tion that should be overlooked by discern- there are issues of concern. For the large ing field naturalists in Australasia.

and important genus Cortinarius* it is acknowledged by Stevenson that "the Rod Jones School of Botany, University of Melbourne, majority of species are mycorrhizal and Parkville, Victoria 3052.

Some Records of the Fungus Blackfellows' Bread Polyporus mylittae

Travelling along the Grand Ridge Road farmer began to cultivate a paddock that through the Eastern Strzeleckis in May had not been broken for a generation. The

1970. I stopped to take a look at a freshly- plough turned up dozens of large sclerotia, cleared area, clear-felled, behind the cathe- many in the soft, fresh stage when they dral arches of the tall Mountain Ash that resemble coarse sponge or honeycomb. In

fringed the roadside. It was a scene of des- the hard stage this polypore is shiny and olation, the southern hill slope was devas- hard like a lump of horn. In another tated save for a small group of enormous instance, a nurseryman at Leongatha old trees that the bulldozer wouldn't tack- North moved onto a bush block and began le. They stood forlornly open to the four to clear an area for an orchard. He too winds. The good earth had been torn to turned up many big hard sclerotia which pieces, bashed and pounded and left in makes me think that in our high rainfall deep holes and humps. There had been part of Victoria at least, this fungus must some rain since the felling, and on any be quite plentiful under forested or long- bruised but unbroken stretch of this moon- untiiled earth. It would not be noticed scape a crop of big white mushrooms, each unless it fruited.

the edibility of this fungus I one solitary, g i 1 led and tough, had Questioning

appeared. I knew them for the fruiting bod- once asked an Aboriginal man from the ies of Blackfellows* Bread and a little Western District if the native peoples real- delving in the soil confirmed this. ly had used it as a food item. His reply. Evidently the disturbance of the soil, or the My word yes! When we could get it removal of the overhead cover, combined fresh", makes me wish to try it myself. with the overnight rain had induced all this Ellen Lyndon fungus to fruit. 7 Steele Street, On a long-cleared and grassed-down Leongatha, Victoria 3933. farm at Nerrena, in the autumn of 1968 the

Vol. 116(1)1999 41 Naturalist Notes

The Cordyceps Update

Well, another Cordy season is just about ed species of ground living goat-moth' over - and just as well, too, seeing as how caterpillars (family Hepialidae). They I've foolishly become a student again and 'recognise" this as a place to grow, and this year's 'peak' coincided nicely with germinate, producing an array of enzymes semester one's assignments! I keep think- and using mechanical action to penetrate ing 'this year there won't be many - surely into the larval haemocoel (the sloppy they've wiped out the caterpillars by now*. insides of an insect). If successful, the fun- And each year, for the last five years, up gus then reproduces asexually. attempting they've come! to avoid the insects' fairly primitive For those rapidly reaching the conclusion immune response. There may or may not that we have here a raving lunatic, you are be a 'wait period" involved here, depend- most probably right, but what I'm raving ing on exactly when the caterpillars are about is the common vegetable caterpillar first penetrated. The fungus only appears fungus, Cordyceps gunnii (Figs. 1, 2). to be active in 'full-sized* caterpillars, but

Cordyceps is a genus of some 300 I have no idea as to whether they are only species, the large majority of which are attacked late in their life cycle (perhaps as predators of various arthropods, mostly they prepare their burrows for pupation insects, during the 'sexual' phase of their and eventual exit), or earlier. The latter life cycle. They are represented worldwide seems to imply a wait and also a trigger to in temperate and particularly tropical envi- activate the fungus, which could be the ronments, with several species known in hormonal surges associated with pupation. Victoria, of which C. gunnii is probably The fungal mass eventually completely the most common. I was delighted to see tills the haemocoel - in effect, the entire the inclusion of this and C. hawkesii as tar- body of the caterpillar is consumed and get species in the updated fungimap pro- becomes fungus (Fig. 3). Most other ject. My observations and records suggest species of Cordyceps also consume the this species will be found over a wide body of their victim in this manner. Thus. 1 range of habitats, usually in the 'wet' sea- suggest that these organisms be more cor- son. At my place, outside Healesville, they rectly classified as predators. are in evidence from March to July (some- Beginning late summer-early autumn, the times a bit earlier and/or later), although fungus begins growing upwards through no individual specimen lives that long. the caterpillars tunnel. They usually begin

You will remember that I described these to appear above ground in numbers after bizarre organisms as predators, rather than the first good rains, but some appear, albeit as parasites, their usual description. usually small, even in drought conditions. Consider the probable lifecycle of C. gun- There is a surprisingly large variation in nii. Their spores in the soil encounter the both the life span and size of the fertile cuticle of either one species or a few relat- stroma - the dark olive to black, finger to

•TOM*.' « -4^fc^.'-v- Fig. 1. Cordyceps gunnii Healesville. 1995. The Fig. 2. Cordyceps gunnii Healesville. 1996. A specimen is approximately 60 mm high and 'double-header'. 10 mm in diameter.

42 The Victorian Naturalist 5

Naturalist Notes

Fig. 3. Cordyceps gimnit Healesville, 1996. The 'double-header' exhumed, clearly showing the caterpillar's remains. club shaped part of the fungus we actually scratched out by an assortment of mam- see. Some last for only a week or two. oth- mals and birds. The fertile layer will keep ers for several months. Some may reach 1 producing spores regardless, until it has mm, others 150 mm, though most are exhausted its food supply, or becomes food around 50 mm high by 10-15 mm wide, itself for other fungi. The soil around here and are generally smaller when it is drier. must be saturated with spores - it's amaz- Unlike some of the other local species, for ing any caterpillars escape! example C. robertsii and C. taylori, that Entomopathogenic fungi have not been produce stroma for several years from the seriously investigated in mainland same caterpillar, C. gunnii converts the Australia. Nor have there been many long- caterpillar to as many spores as possible term ecological or population studies of within a single season, probably using one any fungi. The same can be said for a num- of several strategies. These range from the ber of other phyla, let alone genera and tortoise - long life, slow spore production, species. It took me a long time to realise to the hare - short life, fast spore produc- that a good place to look was in your own tion. After a period of fine weather, some yard and Fm not even going to be able to specimens can be found with a cotton wool work out the entire life cycle of just this covering of millions of spores, which will one fungus. There's plenty to do! all be 'gone" after the first rain - into the Cheers, Rod. soil, to await the arrival of the next genera- P.S. Fve accumulated a fair amount of lit- tion of unfortunate insects. For the past five erature on entomopathogenic fungi, partic- years, roughly half the caterpillars in my ularly Cordyceps, and may be able to help study area have become such unfortunates. others in this area. The best publication in Sometimes more than one stroma can be English is Samson, Robert A., Evans, observed growing from a single caterpillar. Harry C. and Lalge. J. P., Atlas of ento- Fungi can have some complex mating sys- mopathogenic fungi, Berlin: Springer- tems, and it may be that such 'multiple- Verlag. 1988. headers' represent the end result of incom- patible mating types 'fighting" for their Glossary share of the caterpillar - intraspecific com- entomopathogenic - organisms that cause petition at very close quarters! Some pre- disease in insects; in this case, fungi but liminary DNA analyses were Suggestive", they are also attacked by bacteria and but unfortunately my technique did not viruses. prove equal to a final resolution at that haemocoel - fluid-filled body cavity of an time. 1 hope to complete this study with a insect. specialist in this area at a future date. stroma - the fertile or spore-producing part All parts of the fungus except the fertile of a fungus, usually a 'mushroom' or layer of the stroma are eventually attacked 'toadstool*, in this case a 'club*. by the larvae of fungus gnats and an Rod Barker assortment of other tiny arthropods, The P.O. Box 536. or stroma may break off the stipe, be Healesville. Victoria 3777

Vol. 116(1)1999 43 The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc. RegNoA0033611X

Established 1880

In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria

OBJECTIVES: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian flora and fauna.

includes Membership is open to any person interested in natural history and beginners as well as experienced naturalists.

Australia. Registered Office: FNCV, 1 Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3 1 30,

Postal Address: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. Phone/Fax (03) 9877 9860; International Phone/Fax 61 3 9877 9860.

Patron His Excellency, The Honourable James Gobbo, The Governor of Victoria

Key Office- Bearers 2319 President Dr TOM MAY, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra 3141. 9252 Vice Presidents: DrNOEL SCHLE1GER and MR JOHN SEEBECK 8408 Acting Hon. Secretary: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, I Astley Street, Montmorency 3094. 9435 Hon Treasurer: Mr ARNIS DZEDINS, PO Box 1000, Blind Bight 3980. 5998 7996 Subscription-Secretary: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. 9877 9860 Editor, The Vic. Nat.: Mrs MER1LYN GREY, 8 Martin Road, Glen Iris 3146. 9889 6223 Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. AH 5428 4097 Excursion Coordinator: Mr DENNIS MELTZER, 8 Harcourt Ave, Caufield 3162. 9523 1853 Book Sales: Dr ALAN PARKIN, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. AH 9850 2617 Book Brokerage: Mr RAY WHITE, 20 Alfred Street, Essendon 3040. 9379 3602

Newsletter Editor: DrNOEL SCHLEIGER, 1 Astley Street, Montmorency 3094. 9435 8408 Conservation Coordinator: Ms JENNY WILSON, 206 Pascoe Vale Road, Essendon 3040. AH 9370 6434

Group Secretaries Botany: Mr RAY MACPHERSON, 8 Jean Street, Lower Templestowe 3107. 9850 4319 Geology: Mr ROB HAMSON, 5 Foster Street McKinnon 3204. 9557 5215 Fauna Survey: Ms SUSAN MYERS, 17A Park Street, Hawthorn 3 1 22. 9819 2539 Marine Research: Mr MICHAEL LYONS, 2/18 Stonnington Place. Toorak 3142. AH 9822 8007 Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 Schotters Road, Mernda 3754. 9717 35 H MEMBERSHIP Members receive The Victorian Naturalist and the monthly Field Nat News free. The Club organises several monthly meetings (free to all) and excursions (transport costs may be charged). Field work, including botany, mammal and invertebrate surveys, is being done at a number of locations in

Victoria, and all members are encouraged to participate.

SUBSCRIPTIONS RATES for 1999 Year Half-Ycar First Member Metropolitan $40 $20 Concessional (pensioner/student/unemployed) $30 $15 Country (more than 50km from GPO) $30 $15 Junior (under 18) $15 $7

Additional Members Adult $15 $15 Junior $5 $5

Institutional Australian Institutions $55 Overseas Institutions AU$65 Schools/Clubs $35

Send to: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia.

Printed by Brown Prior Anderson, 5 Evans Street, Burwood, Victoria 3 125. r^7 Th Victorian Naturalist

Volume 116 (2) April 1999

Published bv The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria since 1 884 Book Review

Emperor: the Magnificent Penguin

by Pauline Reilly

Publisher: Kangaroo Press (Simon & Schuster), Sydney 1998 32 paperback RRP $9. 95 ppt

"This is a story of outstanding endurance aspects of the lives and habitats of the pen- in the coldest, windiest driest place in the guins. The map of Antarctica on page six world/ So begins Pauline Reilly's book is not particularly useful and is, in my 'Emperor; the Magnificent Penguin', an opinion, a missed opportunity to give some account of the lives of Emperor Penguins indication of where 'Emperor" breeds and

Aptenodytes forsteri in Antarctica. Living feeds. It would also have been helpful to and breeding in these conditions. Emperor include a map of known breeding colonics Penguins appear to have a woeful exis- and perhaps plots of where individual pen- tence until one becomes aware of some of guins have been tracked by satellites on the adaptations acquired through 55 mil- their foraging trips. lion years of evolution (the estimated age The author of this book is an interesting of the earliest fossil penguin). Emperor story in herself and well-qualified to write penguins standing on ice with young sit- about penguins. Born in Adelaide, she ting on their feet arc one of the most worked as a secretary until the outbreak of durable of Antarctic images and indicative World War II and then as a censor before of the sorts of intriguing physiological and going to Army intelligence and finally in behavioural adaptations to environmental anti-aircraft duties. After raising a family extremes which are a part of Emperor she commenced ornithological studies and, Penguins' lives. At first glance much of over a 40 year period, has achieved an what these birds are capable of doing impressive list of honours and publica- appears to be more science fiction than tions. She was the first female President fact. They can fast for five months, dive to and first female elected fellow of the Royal depths of 400 metres, survive temperatures Australasian Ornithologists Union (now of minus sixty degrees Centigrade, raise Birds Australia), has been to Macquarie young in the darkness of the Antarctic win- Island twice and carried out research stud- ter and travel up to 200 kilometres across ies of both Little Eadyptula minor and ice to their breeding colonies. The author Gentoo Pvgoscelis papua Penguins. Her weaves these feats into the annual cycle of study of Little Penguins on Phillip Island 'Emperor', the focal male of this account began in 1968 and continues today under as he and his mate successfully rear an off- the co-ordination of the Penguin Study spring. The acknowledgement of Drs Group. It has become one of the longest Barbara Wienecke and Roger Kirkwood in running studies of a bird in Australia. the text (two of the world's leading author- I think 'Emperor: the Magnificent ities on this species) is testimony to the Penguin' will open the eyes of many peo- factual authenticity of the account. ple to this beautiful bird and its remarkable The book is well written in a style aimed adaptations at a time when its future may at a wide section of the community with a be determined by processes resulting from benign level of information and complexi- our activities such as global warming and ty. There are colour photographs on every the exploitation of marine resources. It is page and these provide a spectacular com- an interesting and attractive production plement to the narrative. Some of the pho- that should appeal to readers of all ages tographs are particularly compelling; and interests. 'Moonlight in winter' (by D. Murphy). 'A small huddle', and 'A thriving colony' the Peter Dann centrepiece (by G. Robertson) and another. Phillip Island Penguin Reserve, P.O. Box 97, Cowes, erroneously captioned, 'Moonlight in win- Victoria 3922. ter* (by R. Kirkwood) beautifully depict

46 The Victorian Naturalist The Victorian Naturalist

Volume 116(2) 1999 F.N.C.V. April

Editor: Merilyn Grey

Index to Volume 115, 1998 is in the centre of this issue

Research Reports Patchiness of a Floral Resource: Flowering of Red Ironbark Eucalyptus tricarpa in a Box and Ironbark Forest,

by J. WilsonandA. Bennett 48 Effect of a Flood Retarding Basin Culvert on Movements by Platypus Omithorhynchus anatinus, by M. Serena, G. Williams, J Thomas and M. Worley 54 Contributions Sperm Competition: a Marsupial Perspective. by D. Taggart and G. Shimmin 58 A Rare Sighting of the Common Dolphin Delphinus delphis in Port Phillip Bay, Victoria, by C. Scarpaci, S. Bigger,

T. Saville and D. Nugegoda 65 Calomnion complanatum: an Endangered Moss found in Victoria, by D. Meagher 68 The Biography Behind the Bird: Grey Honeyeater Conopophila whitei (North 1910), bv T. Kloot 70 Tribute Jean Galbraith, 28 March 1906-2 January 1999: A Tribute, by H. Aston 73 Book Reviews Emperor: the Magnificent Penguin, by Pauline Reilly, reviewer P. Dann 46 A Rich and Diverse Fauna: the History of the Australian

National Insect Collection 1 926- 1 99 1 , by Murray S. Upton,

reviewer I. Endersby 76

Information Kit Endangered Ecosystem Series, published by Review Victorian National Parks Association, reviewer B. Sharp 77 - Legislation Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 1988 Updates to Schedules 2 and 3 79

ISSN 0042-5184

Cover: Miss Jean Galbraith (1906-1999), in later years. Jean's book. Garden in a Valley, republished in 1985, is on her lap. (See Tribute on page 73.) Photo kindly supplied by Ian Hyndman, Beechworth.

Find us on the WEB: http://calcite.apana.org.au/fncv/ email: [email protected] Research Reports

Patchiness of a Floral Resource: Flowering of Red Ironbark Eucalyptus tricarpa in a Box and Ironbark Forest

Jenny Wilson' and Andrew F. Bennett 1

Abstract Red Ironbark Eucalyptus tricarpa is considered an important winter food resource for nectar-feeding birds which are a characteristic component of the fauna of Box and Ironbark forests. However, little is known of the flowering patterns of eucalypts within these forests. This study describes a snapshot' survey of flowering of Red Ironbark in a Box and Ironbark forest at a single point in time during the peak annual flowering period for this species. The flowering status of trees was assessed across several spatial scales; including individual trees (of different size classes), forest stands and geographic areas within the Rushworth, Redcastle and Costerfield State Forests, Victoria. Flowering showed high levels of heterogeneity, or patchiness, at each level and was recorded in only three oT five geographic areas. In these areas, the percentage of trees observed flowering along transects ranged from 0-42%. There was a significant difference between size classes of trees, with more larger trees flowering than smaller trees. Flowering occurred in a greater proportion of trees with access to free-water (within 5 metres of a dam edge) than for those trees without access to free-water. In most box and ironbark forests, large, old trees have been replaced with many, relatively densely- packed, smaller trees and this shift in age structure, along with the apparent patchiness of flowering in these forests, may have important implications for the movements and ecology of nectar- feeding animals. (The Victorian Naturalist 116(2), 1999,48-53).

Introduction

Despite the dominance of eucalypts in the and Briffa 1982; Paton 1985; MacNallv Australian environment, and the importance and McGoldrick 1997; cf. Pyke 1983). A of many eucalypt species to nectar-feeding better understanding of the ways in which animals, relatively little is known of the nectar-feeding birds respond to the distrib- flowering patterns of species within this ution of resources may come from a better genus. Our current knowledge of the repro- understanding of spatial variation in flow- ductive biology and ecology of Eucalyptus ering patterns. spp. is based on a small number of species The distribution of box and ironbark (House 1997). Studies of the flowering pat- forests is defined by altitude, geology and terns and floral morphology of eucalypts climate (Muir et al 1995; Environment have largely been confined to species used Conservation Council 1997), In Victoria, for timber, such as Mountain Ash E. reg- these dry forests and woodlands encompass nans (e.g. Ashton 1975; Griffin 1980), and. the inland hills of the Great Dividing Range occasionally, rare species have been studied and the Northern Plains (Environment (e.g. Fripp 1982; Sampson etai. 1989). Conservation Council 1997). Here we refer Nectar-feeding birds are thought to be primarily to forests on the inland hills of important pollinators of many Eucalyptus the Great Dividing Range. These forests species, and in turn, the trees provide nec- have undergone major changes due to tar for birds (Paton and Ford 1977; Ford et clearing, logging and mining, resulting in a al. 1979; Hopper and Burbidge 1982). fragmented forest system that now covers Flowering also attracts invertebrates, pro- approximately 15% of its former area viding a secondary source of food. The (Robinson 1993). Exploitation of natural distribution of nectar-feeding birds is often resources over many years, such as logging patchy, and their abundance within an area for fence posts and firewood, has lead to a may change greatly through time (e.g. change of age structure within these forests Keast 1968; MacNally and McGoldrick in that older, large, widely-spaced trees 1997). There is some contention concern- have been replaced by younger and rela- ing the extent to which the distribution of tively dense stands of smaller trees nectar-feeding birds results from their (Newman 1961: Environment Conservation movements to track floral resources, or Council 1997). Several authors have specu- whether other factors contribute to the lated that large trees may be a particularly observed distributions (Ford 1979; Collins important source of nectar for birds (Traill 1995; Webster and Menkhorst 1992). Deakm University, School of Ecology and However, the relationship between tree size Environment, 662 Blackburn Road, Clayton, Victoria and flowering has not been quantified for 3168.

48 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

eucalypts in these forests. and ironbark forest in central Victoria. Muir et at. (1995) record 29 species of covering approximately 25.000 hectares, Eucalyptus in box and ironbark forests of in an area between the towns of the inland hills in Victoria, with Red Rushworth. Heathcote and Nagambie Ironbark E. tricarpa, Mugga Ironbark E. (here. "Rushworth Forest' is used to jointly sideroxylon* Grey Box E. microcarpa. refer to these three State Forests). These Yellow Gum £. leucoxyfon and Red Box forests lie between latitudes 37°35* to E. polvanthemos being dominant. The 37°52"S and 144°45' to 145°10'E. Ironbarks £ tricarpa and E. sideraxv/on Rushworth forest, like much of the box (previously subspecies) are geographically and ironbark ecosystem, is characterised separated with E. tricarpa occurring in by open-forest on soils which have low central Victoria while E. sideroxylon fertility and poor water holding capacity occurs mostly in inland New South Wales (Environment Conservation Council 1997) (Costermans 1994). The diversity of euca- with a mean annual rainfall of around 430 lypt species within these forests is believed mm in the north to 560 mm in the south of to be important in providing a year-round the forest (Land Conservation Council source of nectar for a suite of nectar-feed- 1978). Eucalyptus tricarpa and E, micro- ing birds, some of which arc resident, carpa dominate much of the forest, over an some nomadic, and others migrator} open shrubby undcrstorey, generally includ- (Environment Conservation Council ing Golden Wattle Acacia pycnantlni. 1997). Common nectar-feeding birds in Twiggy Hush-pea Pultenaea largt/lorens. these forests include the Fuscous and Shin) Everlasting Hracteantha vtsco- Honey eater Lichenostomus fuse us. sum (Muir et al. 1995). The ground layer is Yellow-tufted Honcyeater L. melanops. sparse, with common species including Black-chinned Honeyeater Melithreptus Black-anther Flax-lily Dianella reyoluta. gularis. Musk Lorikeet Glossopsitta Bristly Wallaby-grass Danthonia sctacea. concinna. Little Lorikeet G. pustlla. and Spiky Guinea-flower Hibbertia dxuta- Purple-crowned Lorikeet G porphyro- cies (Muir et al. 1995). The forest is man- cephala. Red Wattlebird Anthochaera aged primarih for the production of fire- carunculaia and Noisy Friarbird Philemon wood, railway sleepers and fence posts, but corniculatus. At times, these species may also for honey production, gold mining and occur in dense aggregations when trees are the production of eucalyptus oil. Around flowering heavily. E tricarpa, in particu- 10% of the forest is managed as historic or lar, is an important winter food source for conservation reserves (Environment many birds (MacNally and MacGoldrick Conservation Council 1997). 1997). This includes threatened species Methods such as the Swift Parrot Lathanms The survey was carried out in July 1997, discolor, which arrives from Tasmania to at the apparent peak flowering time of E, overwinter in these forests. tricarpa in Rushworth Forest. The forest This study describes a "snapshot* survey was divided into five areas of approxi- of flowering of £ tricarpa in a Box and mately equal size (about 5000 ha ): 'north*, Ironbark forest in July 1997. during a peak north-east*, 'central*, 'south' and south flowering period for this species (Goodman west*. In each area, stands of trees domi- 1973). The aim was to provide an initial nated by /: tricarpa were mapped by dri- description of the extent of spatial variation ving along major roads and within these in flowering of E tricarpa trees in a forest mapped areas, starling points of 25 tran- by sampling across several spatial scales; sects (5 in each geographic area) were ran- individual trees (including different size- domly selected. From each starting point a classes of trees), forest stands, and geo- 400 m transect was surveyed by walking graphic areas within a forest block. The along a compass bearing approximately survey also examined whether trees with perpendicular to the road and the si/e class ready access to water flower more intense- and flowering intensity of all /:. tricarpa ly and in greater frequency than those with Irecs within 5 m on cither side of the tran- limited access to water. sect line were recorded. Due to the random Study Area nature of selecting ihc iransecls. there may Rushworth. Redcastle and Costerfield have been greater distances between tran- State Forests are a contiguous area of box sects within geographic areas than

Vol. 116(2)1999 49 Research Reports between "edge' transects in adjacent geo- Transects graphic areas. Of the twenty five transects, 13 contained Si/c classes of trees were based on the trees that were flowering while 12 had no diameter at breast height (DIJII) as fol- trees flowering. In those transects with - lows: very small, 5 to <20 cm; small, 20 flowering, the percentage of trees flowering - * 40 cm; medium. 40 - <60 cm; large 60 + ranged from 1.2% 42.2% (Fig. 2) and in cm. Flowering intensity was estimated on each geographic area in which flowering the basis of the area of foliage covered by was recorded, there was a signillcant differ- fresh flowers (staminodes bright and ence between transects in the proportions of 2 tests, i\f = < .001 ). " Huffy'). The categories were: trees (lowering (% 4, p no flowers, Geographic areas within the forest 0.5 1 flower to 5% foliage cover, Trees were recorded flowering only in 1 5-10%, the 'north', 'north-east' and 'central' areas 2 10-20%, within Rushworth Forest. When all five 3 20 - 30%, areas were compared there was a signifi- 4 30 - 40%. cant difference in the overall proportions - 5 40 50%. : of trees flowering in each area (x 99.8, 6 50 - 60%. df 4, p < 0.0005) but when comparing In addition, the size class and flowering only the three geographic areas where intensity for every E. tricarpa tree within 5 flowering was recorded the proportions did recorded metres of the edge of a dam were 3 not differ = 3.34, df 2. p > 0.15). for two dams within each geographic urea. Oc These dams were selected opportunistically. Trees associated with dams One hundred and thirty six E, tricarpa Results trees growing within 5 metres of a dam Individual trees edge were sampled and, of these. 59% A total of 2040 E. tricarpa trees was (81/137) were flowering. This was a sig- recorded from the 25 transects surveyed in Rushworth Forest (Tabic I). Over 90% of trees were less than 40 em DHI 1, while the overall average tree density was 204 slems/ha. Across all transects in the forest, 6,7% (137/2040) of £ tricarpa trees were (lowering. 1 shows the percentage of trees Fig. S » in each si/c class that were (lowering compared with the percentage of trees present in all transects. There was a highly signifi-

Mi'iimni cant difference between size classes, an™ I lh]'- whereby a greater proportion of larger Size clans of tree

i itii..i|i' ni iinwonncj trees were flowering than smaller trees (%- iPan trees bPhk entage ol I present 48.75, df 3. p< 0,0005). However, for those trees that were flowering, there was Fig. I. The percentage of E, tricarpa trees in no significant difference in flowering each si/e class that were (lowering compared intensity between size classes (ANOVA with the percentage of trees recorded for all F = 2.67.df=3,p = 0.29). transects over Rushworth forest

Table 1. The number and perc :nlage of is*, tricot pa trees in each size class for ive geographic areas in Rushworth forest.

1 rcc size class (l)Bll) Geographic Very small Small Medium Large Total area <20 cm >20 - 40 em >40 - 6( cm 60+ em n % n % n % u % n %

North 199 SO 156 40 31 8 7 2 393 19.2 North-east 263 60 142 33 2K 6 3 / 436 21.4 Central 219 53 161 39 29 7 3 / 412 20.2 South 292 61 129 27 43 9 15 3 479 23.5

South-west 184 55 123 38 12 3.7 1 3 320 15.7 Total 1157 (57) 711 (35) 143 (7) 29 (1) 2040 100

50 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

North North-east Central South South-west

Geographic area

Fig. 2. The percentage of E. tricarpa trees in each transect that were flowering in each geographic area within Rushworth Forest.

larger trees associated with dams. Table 2. The number of trees and the percent- However, when (lowering was compared age off. tricarpa trees recorded flowering for trees of the same size class, the propor- within 5 m of a dam edge, and from forest transects, for each of live geographic areas within tion of trees flowering was greater for trees Rushworth Forest. Key: No., total number of associated with dams than for those sam- : trees; %, percentage of trees flowering. pled along forest transects (x 413.5. < Area Da lis Transects df= I, p 0.0005) (Table 3). The mean No. % No. % flowering intensity for flowering trees associated with dams and forest transects North 64 62.5 393 10.9 - North East 21 61.9 436 9.2 did not differ (t-test p 0.74) (Table 3). Central 20 52.3 412 13.1 Discussion South 20 40.0 479 South West 11 320 This survey has revealed marked spatial variation, or patchincss, in the dowering of for trees nificantly greater proportion than /:. tricarpa in Rushworth Forest in central 2 sampled along forest transects (% = 360, Victoria. During the peak flowering period df = l.p< 0.0005). In each area a greater for this species in 1997, flowering was proportion of trees around dams were widespread in three geographic areas in the flowering than trees on transects (Tahle 2). northern parts of the forest but was not In the 'south-west', no flowering was recorded in two areas in the south. In the recorded for trees on transects or at dams. areas where Powering was recorded, there while in the 'south' no trees on transects was marked variation in the percentage of were recorded flowering, but one dam had trees flowering along each transect, rang- trees flowering nearby. ing from 0-42% of trees per transect. When a comparison was made between Finally, at the level of individual trees. the size classes of trees on dam edges and there was significant variation between those on transects, a significant difference si/e classes of trees in the proportion that = was evident (// - 39.8. d\ 3, p < 0.0005), were flowering, with greater likelihood of small" trees and more with fewer 'very flowering for larger trees (Fig. I ).

Vol. 116(2) 1999 51 Research Reports

Tabic 3. Comparisons between E. tricarpa trees within 5m of a dam edge and trees on transects in

Rushworth Forest in relation to numbers of trees, si/e class distributions, percentage o I trees (lowering and mean flower cover of flowering trees.

Tree Size (lass Number of trees Percentage of trees Percentage of Mean flower cover

(OBI I cm) in each size class: trees flowering (+ I S.K.) Dams Forest Dams Forest Dams Forest Dams Forest

Very small (5 - <20) 46 1157 33.8 56.7 58.7 3.5 0.7(0.1) 0.7(0.1) Small (20 - <40) 57 711 41.9 34.9 49.1 9.7 0.9(0.1) 0.9(0.1) Medium (40- < 60) 27 143 19.8 7.0 74.1 14.7 1.0(0.2) 1.05(0.1

Large (6(H) 6 29 4.4 1.4 100 20.7 I 0(0.5) 1.0(0.2)

Is a snapshot survey such as this study the initiation of flowering for this species. representative of the overall (lowering pat- Water deficits can cause inhibited growth tern of a tree species? Could the absence of at all stages of tree reproduction flowering be an artifact of a single sample (Kozlowski 1982). Better knowledge of the in time, with flowering of certain trees factors that determine the initiation, liming occurring either later or earlier than the sur- and frequency of tree flowering is central to vey? Other evidence from the study area developing an understanding of the poten- suggests that the patchiness shown in this tial availability of nectar resources for birds snapshot survey is not an artifact but is typi- in these forests. It is likely that flowering is cal of the flowering of this species. Regular influenced by genetic attributes and also by monitoring of flowering at a number of environmental features such as soil types, other forest stands in the southern section of access to moisture, tree health and condi- the forests showed an almost total absence tions in previous years (Florence 1964; of flowering of E. tricarpa throughout 1997 Ashton 1975; Bolotin 1975; Porter 1978; (J. Wilson. A. Bennett, unpubi). Similarly, Griffin 1980; Potts and Wiltshire 1997). ongoing monitoring of the flowering of Porter (1978) reported that temperatures individual trees in this forest (J, Wilson. and rainfall in the two to \)ve years before unpubi) has also revealed Significant differ- flowering influenced tree growth and ences in flowering in relation to tree si/e. honey production of £. tricarpa (reported

Variation in flowering between si/e as /:. shieroxvlon). and that a wet winter classes Of trees adds support to previous two years prior to (lowering encourages the contentions that large trees are particularly initiation of a large bud crop. Two years important as sources of nectar for nectar- prior to this study (i.e. 1995), lleathcote. feeding birds (e.g. Webster and Mcnkhorst Rushworth and Nagambic all received 1992; Traill 1995). Two factors appear to higher than average rainfall over the w inter contribute to the importance of large trees. months (Bureau of Meteorology 1998). First, because a significantly greater pro- However, in July 1997 flowering was not portion of large trees flower than small heavy or widespread, and variation in rain- trees (Fig. I ). forest stands with large trees fall does not account for the geographic are likely to be a more reliable source of patchiness in flowering between different nectar from year to year. Second, although parts of the forest. no significant difference in intensity of Box and Ironbark forests in Victoria have flowering was evident (measured as % experienced profound changes in the past foliage cover), large trees have a greater 200 years of settlement with obvious area of canopy foliage than smaller trees impacts being the clearing of the majorit} and will, for the same flowering intensity, of the ecosystem and the degradation of support a larger number of flowers per most remaining forest fragments tree. For example. Ashton (1975) reported (Environment Conservation Council /•'. that mature regrtan trees produced 1997). Although historical data are sparse. 1.6-15.5 between times as many flowers as available evidence indicates that there has small trees fpole* and 'spar* stages). been substantial change in forest structure A significant difference between trees and tree density (Newman 1961; close to dams and those along forest tran- Environment Conservation Council 1997). sects in the proportion of trees flowering The effects of altered forest structure on (Table 3) suggests lhat availability of the availability of suitable hollow-bearing moisture may be an important influence on trees for birds and mammals that arc oblig-

52 The Victorian [Naturalist .

Research Reports

Armstrong, ate hollow-users has received some atten- 'Pollination and Evolution'- Eds J A J M. Powell and A J, Richards pp 07-75 (Royal Traill 1991; Bennett tion (Meredith 1984; Botanic Gardens: Sydney). 1993). However, the present results sug- House. S M (1997). Reproductive biology of euca- Individuals to gest that forest structure also has implica- lypts. In 'Eucalypt Ecology ' Ecosystems Eds J, Williams and J. Woinarski pp. tions for the presence and abundance of 30-55. (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge). nectar as a resource for nectar-feeding ani- Keast. A, (1968) Seasonal movements in the Houcyeaters (Meliphagidae) and their mals. Many birds and mammals, including Australian ecological significance l.inu 67. 159-209. threatened and migratory species, arc Ko/lowski. T.T, (1982). Water supplv and tree growth. dependent on eucalypt nectar in box and Forestry Abstracts 43 (2), 57-95 Land Conservation Council (1978). "Reporl on the ironbark forests. This study has obvious North-Central Study Area* (Land Conservation implications for wildlife conservation and Council of Victoria, Victoria) forest management. Spatial and temporal MacNally, R. and MacGoldrick, J. (1997). Mass flowering and landscape dynamics of bird communities in patterns in flowering of eucalypt species in some eucalypt forests of central Victoria, Australia. box and ironbark forests, and processes Journal of A vtatt Biology 28, 171 -83 1 influencing these patterns, are being inves- Meredith, C.W. (1984). Possums or poles' the effects of silvicullural management on the possums of further in ongoing studies. tigated Chiltern State Park, northeast Victoria In "Possums

gliders.* P, Smith and 1 D Hume 575- Acknowledgements and Eds A pp 577 (Australian Mammal Society Sydney). This is a contribution from the Landscape Ecology S A. and Dickins, M J. (1995) Mutt, A M , Edwards, Deakm University We gratefully Research Group, Description and Conservation status of the Vegetation financial support towards field costs acknowledge of the Box-lronbark Ecosystem in Victoria'. Flora and Resources Research and from the Land and Water Fauna Technical Report no. 136 (Department of and Development Corporation (LVVRRDC) Conservation and Natural Resources: Victoria) to Bennett. R Bushcare (Grant No DU 2 A Newman, LA. (1961), 'The Box-lronbark Foresis of MacNally and A. Yen)Thanks to Andrew Duffel I Victoria. Australia.' Bulletin of the Forests who assisted in the field Commission of Victoria 14. (Forests Commission Victoria) References Paton, DC. (1983) Food supply, population structure Ashlon, D.H. (1975) Studies of flowering behaviour in and behaviour of New Holland Honcyealers, Eucalyptus remans F Muell. Australian Journal of Phylidonyris. novachoilondiae, in woodland near Botany 23, 239-252 Horsham, Victona. In 'Birds of Eucalypt Forests and ' Bennett, A.F. (1993) Fauna conservation to box and Woodlands. Ecology, Conservation, Management Victorian ironbark forests a landscape approach. The Eds A Keast. 11 F Recher, H Ford and D. Saunders Naturalist 110, 1503 pp 79-96 (Royal Australasian Ornithologists Union: Bolotin, M. (1975). Photoperiodic induction of preco- Melbourne). in species Eucalyptus acch cious flowering a woody Paton. D C and Foid, H.A. ( 1977). Pollination by birds 358-65 dentate Endl Botanical Gazette 136, Of native plants in South Australia, limu 77, 73-85. (Bureau Bureau of Meteorology (1998) Weathercall Porter, J.W, (1978). Relationships between flowering of Meteorology. Melbourne) and honey production of Red Ironbark Eucalyptus (1982). Seasonal variation Collins, B.G. and Britfa, P suhroxvlon (A Cunn ) Benth , and climate in the of abundance and foraging of three species of Bendigo district. Australian loumal of Agricultural Australian Honeyeaters Australian Wildlife Research 29,815-829. Hewurch 9, 557-569 Potts, B.M and Wiltshire. .I.E. (1997) Eucalypt genet- Costermans, L (1994*. Native Trees and Shrubs of ics and genecologv /" hucalvpt Ecology Individuals )' South-eastern Australia. (Rev. ed (Lansdowne 10 Ecosystems ' Eds J Williams and 3 Woinarski Publishing Ply Ltd: Sydney) pp 56-9'|. (Cambridge University Press Cambridge) Council (ECCj (1997) pattern of abundance of Environment Conservation Pyke. G H 1 1983 | Seasonal Box-lronbark Forests and Woodlands Investigation hone) enters and their resources in heathland areas near Resources Issues and Reporl ' (Environment Svdne\ Australian Journal of Fcology 8. 217-233. Conservation Council: Victoria) Robinson, (1993) LtSI we forget to forge The Florence. RG (1964) A comparative study ol floi Victorian Naturalist 110(1 1,6-10. Blackout! {Eucalyptus pilu* IE (1989). and seed production in six Sampson, J F , Hopper. S D. and James. S Australian Forestry 28, 23-33 structure Ions Sin ) forest stands The mating system and population genehe in Ford. HA (1979). Interspecific competition of m a bird-polhnaled malice, Eucalyptus rodantha Australian honey-eaters depletion of CO! /fefttftvtt.W-93 145-164, resources Australian kntrnOi *log} 4, TraiB, B (1991) Box-ironbark forests, tree hollows, Forde, N (1979) Birds as of Ford II A . Paton. DC and wildlife and management In 'Conservation pollinators of Australian plants. New Zealand Australia's Foresl Fauna.' Ed I) Lnnney. (Royal Tourtval ofBotany 17,509-519. Zoological Society of New South Wales: Sydney) Fripp. Y.J (1982) Allozyme variation and mating sys- Traill, B (1995) Competition and coexistence in a tem in two populations of Eucalyptus kitsoniana community of forest vertebrates. PhD thesis (uupub). Australian lores! Research (Leulini ) Maiden dffb Monash University 1-10 Webster R and Menkhorst. P. (1992). The Regent 13. „ . Goodman. R D (1973). "Honey Flora of Victoria lloueveater {Xanthomvza pfirygfa) population status Victoria) South Wales t Department of Agriculture and ecology in Victoria and New Griffin, A R (1980) Floral phenology ol a Stand pi Arthur Rvlah Institute for Environmental Research

I Muell in Mountain Ash {Uucalyptus regnam ) Technical Report Series No. 126 (Department of island, Victoria Australian Journal of Hotttin Conservation and Environment; Victoria) 28. 391-404 Hopper. S D and Burb.dge, A. A. (1982) Feeding behaviour of birds and mammals on flowers ot Banksia grandfa and Eucalyptus cutguiosa In 53 Vol. 116(2)1999 Research Reports

Effect of a Flood Retarding Basin Culvert on Movements by Platypus Omithorhynchus anatinus

1 1 1 Melody Serena , Geoff Williams ', Janelle Thomas', and Marianne Worley

Abstract Live-trapping and radio-tracking methods were used to investigate the movements of Platypus Omithorhynchus anatinus through a sizeable concrete culvert (45 metres long), which was built under a soil embankment as part of a flood mitigation system in Melbourne's southeastern suburbs. Five adult or subadult males were recorded crossing the embankment, demonstrating that the culvert does not constitute a barrier to movements by the animals. However, available evidence suggests that Platypus may avoid entering the culvert when engaged in routine foraging, presumably because there is little or no prospect of obtaining food (in the form of aquatic invertebrates) along its length.

{The YwUman Naturalist 1 16 (2), 1999, 54-57).

Introduction

By definition, streams and rivers arc long confluence in 1980. The basin includes two and thin. As natural corridors, they serve to lakes which are sufficiently large to hold facilitate travel, both routine and occasion- much of the extra water generated by nor- al, by a wide variety of species (Bennett mal storm run-off. If the capacity of the 1990). Creating barriers along linear lakes is surpassed after extremely high waterways may be correspondingly detri- rainfall, surplus water is contained by a mental insofar as natural patterns of dis- large grassy embankment located immedi- persal or migration are restricted (Koehn ately downstream. In both dry weather and and O'Connor 1990) or populations after storms, water flowing along the become separated into smaller units that Monbulk Creek channel is conveyed are more vulnerable to local extinction through the embankment by means of a than would otherwise be the case (Shaffer concrete culvert, circular in cross-section, 1981). measuring 45 metres in length and 1.35

Concrete culverts are one of the com- metres in internal diameter (grade = 1 in monest types of man-made structures 87.5 or 1.1%). Except in the wake of major found along waterways. We report here on rainfall, the depth of water flowing through the results of mark-recapture and radio- the culvert is typically less than 25 cen- tracking studies undertaken to assess the timetres (Fig. I). potential of a relatively long culvert, built Methods as part of a flood mitigation system, to act as a barrier to Platypus Omithorhynchus Seventeen trapping sites for Platypus anatinus. were established along Monbulk Creek between Dandenong Ranges National Park The Study Area and the Ferny Creek confluence, at sites Monbulk Creek is a perennial waterway located both upstream and downstream of rising on the forested slopes of Dandenong the retarding basin embankment. The ani- Ranges National Park in the Dandenong mals were captured in fyke (or eel) nets. Creek catchment. Once outside the park, it set with the length of each net partly sus- flows for about 15 kilometres through pub- pended out of the water (Serena 1994). lic reserves, horse and cattle paddocks, Nets were set in pairs in the afternoon, market gardens, and tracts of residential with one net facing upstream and the other housing before merging with Ferny Creek facing downstream, and checked through- to form Corhanwarrabul Creek. To reduce out the night. Captured Platypus were held the risk of Hoods occurring along the lower in dry calico bags until they could be reaches of Monbulk Creek, a flood retard- released at the exact point of capture. Each ing (or retention) basin was built about 9 Platypus was permanently identified with a kilometres upstream of the Ferny Creek Trovan transponder tag (Grant and Whittington 1991). Sex and age class were 1 Australian Platypus Conservancy, P.O. Box 84 assigned according to spur characteristics, Whitllesea, Victoria 3757.

54 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

mals (five males and eight females) were recorded only at sites upstream of the flood retarding basin embankment, while six animals (five males and one female) were recorded only downstream of the embankment. The remaining five Platypus (all males) were encountered at sites located both upstream and downstream of the embankment culvert. The locations where these five animals were captured are described in Figure 2 and below: Male A. Given that Platypus eggs are believed to hatch from September to November in Victoria (Griffiths 1978), A was estimated to be 15-17 months old when first captured as a subadult at Birds Land Reserve in Belgrave (about 2 km upstream of the culvert) in February 1996. subsequently encountered in Fig. 1. Upstream end of the culvert conveying water He was from Monbulk Creek through the flood retarding basin Rowville (at Karoo Road, about 8.5 km embankment. downstream of the culvert) in June 1997. which enabled juveniles (<1 year old) to and then again in Belgrave (at Mount be distinguished reliably from older ani- Morton Road, about 3 km upstream of the

mals. In the case of males, it was also pos- culvert) in February 1998. sible to distinguish second-year animals Male B. B was first captured as a (subadults) from mature individuals subadult at Birds Land Reserve in January (Temple-Smith 1973). 1997, at the age of 14-16 months. He was To provide detailed information on the next recorded at Karoo Road in June 1997. movements of animals living near the followed by a site located along embankment culvert, radio-tags were fitted Corhanwarrabul Creek in to two Platypus (an adult male and a juve- Rowville/Scoresby (about 11 km down- nile female) captured within 0.3 kilometres stream of the basin embankment) in of the culvert on the evening of 16 May November 1997, and at Blackwood Park 1997. Briefly, fast-setting epoxy resin was Road (about 4.6 km downstream of the used to attach a miniature radio-tag culvert) in September 1998. ( (Biotrack TW-4 transmitter) to the outer Xfale '. C was first captured as a mature guard fur of the rump (Serena 1994). adult in March 1996. at a site located Diurnal searches for radio-tags were about 3 km downstream of the flood undertaken each day, with burrow loca- retarding basin. In May 1997. he was tions marked on the bank. Activity was recaptured about 0.3 km upstream of the being radio- monitored at night by standing near the embankment culvert. After travelled down- bank and flagging an animal's position at tagged and released, he culvert to occupy a 5-10 minute intervals, using a TRX-1000S stream through the km receiver (manufactured by Wildlife burrow near Lysterfield Road (3.3 of the retarding basin) by Materials). Great care was taken not to downstream early the following morning. C was locat- alarm active animals, e.g. by ensuring that ed in burrows on 30 of the next 34 days torch beams were shielded at all times and and tracked for 7 hours while active in the by remaining still when a Platypus was at water. Throughout this time he invariably the surface. was found downstream of the retarding Results basin, although on one occasion he moved From February 1996 to November 1998, to within 50 metres of the embankment 24 adult or subadult Platypus were cap- before turning around and travelling back tured on two or more occasions in the the way he had come. C was again cap- Monbulk Creek study area. Thirteen ani- tured at a trapping site located about 3 km

55 Vol. 116(2)1999 Research Reports

Retarding Bgsm Lakes

Fig. 2. Locations where male Platypus were captured in fyke nets upstream and downstream of the retarding basin culvert (Melway Map 83, J2). The dates when animals were captured are in brackets. Closed circles, male A (1=02/96, 2=06/97. 3=02/98); closed squares, male B (1=01/97, 2=06/97, 3=1 1/97, 4=09/98); open squares, male C (1=03/96, 2=05/97, 3=01/98, 4=09/98); open circles, male D (1=03/97, 2=02/98); stars, male E (1=01/97, 2=05/97, 3=09/97, 4=08/98, 5=11/98). The dark arrow marks the location of the upstream end of the culvert.

downstream of the retarding basin in ure, and assuming that the animals use the

January 1998, and at a site located about 1 area as frequently as other parts of the km downstream of the retarding basin in creek, the probability of not encountering September 1998. Platypus at the culvert site in five nights of Male D. D was first captured as an adult survey work is less than 0.7%. in March 1997, at a site located about 2 km (2) As described previously, there was no downstream of the retarding basin. He was evidence that male C travelled through the

next encountered about 0. 1 km upstream of embankment culvert in the five weeks fol- the embankment culvert in February 1998. lowing the night he was radio-tagged. Male E. E was first encountered as an Similarly, after being captured and adult in January 1997. upstream of the released 0.2 km upstream of the embank- retarding basin in Birds Land Reserve. He ment, female E was not found downstream was subsequently captured at Mount of the culvert in the 50 days that her radio- Morton Road in May 1997 and September tag was functional, although she spent 3.5 1997, at Blackwood Park Road in August hours (of the 22 hours she was tracked 1998, and again at Mount Morton Road in while active) feeding within 0.1 km of the November 1998. culvert entrance. As well, E occupied bur- While the observations summarised above rows located within 0.1 km of the culvert clearly demonstrate that the culvert through on 30 of the 49 days she was located diur- the flood retarding basin embankment does nally, with her most downstream burrow not constitute a barrier to Platypus travel- (occupied on 7 days) located just 25 metres ling along the length of the creek, there is from the entrance. some evidence to suggest that the animals Discussion may tend to avoid entering the culvert in the Despite its substantial length, the culvert course of routine foraging: through the Monbulk Creek flood retarding (1) No Platypus were captured at a trap- basin embankment clearly does not prevent ping site located 20 metres downstream of Platypus from travelling in either the the culvert in five nights of surveys under- upstream or downstream direction. One- taken over a 17 month period. In contrast, third (5/15) of the adult and subadult males at least one Platypus was trapped at each in this study are known to have crossed the of the 16 other survey sites established embankment on one or more occasions, in along Monbulk Creek in the same period the course of travelling up to 1 1 kilometres (sampled for 2-7 nights), with one or more from the retarding basin. animals captured on 46 of the 73 occasions At the same time, evidence from this that nets were set at these locations (63% study suggests that Platypus may avoid trapping success rate). Based on this fig- using the culvert when engaged in routine

56 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports foraging, presumably because there is little Acknowledgements or no prospect of obtaining food along the Platypus studies along Monbulk Creek were funded h\ Melbourne Water as part of the Urban Platypus tunnel in the form of aquatic invertebrates Program We also thank Central Animal Records for (Faragherw a/. 1979. Grant 1982). providing Trovan transponder tags, the managers of When Plat\ pus are not in the water, they Belgrave Lake Park Cottage and the Rowville Community Centre for letting us use their are generally found resting in underground facilities, and the SHire of Yarra Ranges. Auxilium Salesian burrows (Grant et at. 1992, Serena 1994, College and R&N Nursery for facilitating our Gardner and Serena 1995, Gust and access to the creek Research activities were autho- rised bv NRC Wildlife Research Permits Handasyde 1995. Serena et al. 1998). It is RP-95- 208, 96-244 and 98-008 and Fisheries Permits FSP- therefore not surprising that the animals will CW-l07and303 enter man-made culverts and pipes, although more work is needed to identify specific References Bennett, A F. (1990). Habitat conditions which may limit their use by Corridors' (Department of Conservation and Environment; Melbourne) Platypus. In particular, we believe that the Faragber, R A . Grant. T R. and Carrick. F N. (1979). following factors merit consideration: Food of the platypus [Ornilharhynchus anannus) Minimum diameter. Platypus have been with notes on the food of the brown trout {Salnm initio) in the Shoalhaven River, N S W Australian known to enter pipes with a diameter of 10 Journal of Ixologv 4, 1 7 1 -1 79. centimetres, although some circumstantial Gardner, J.L. and Serena, M. (1995). Spatial organisa- evidence suggests that the animals may not be tion and movement patterns of adult male platypus, Ortiithorhynchus anal in us (Monotremata: able to exit from (i.e. back up or turn around Qrpilhorhynchidae). Australian Journal of Zoology in) such a narrow space if it becomes blocked 43,91-103. Grant. R. at one end (Taylor et al. 1991 ). T (1982). Food of the platypus. Ornnfio- rhxnchus anaiinu\ (Monotremata: Ornitho- Maximum length. We are unaware of any rhyuchidae), from various water bodies in New South accounts of Platypus utilising longer cul- Wales Australian Mammalogy 5. 235-236 verts than the one described in this report. Grant. I R and Whitlington. R 1 (1991), The use ol (Additional information would be extreme- freeze-branding and implanted transponder tags as a permanent marking method for platypuses, ly welcome in this regard.) Ornifhorlnmfws anannus (Monotremata Water flow rate. Platypus will walk Omilliorliyiicliidac) Australian Mammalogy 14, 147-50 Gram, across dry land to reach favoured feeding T R , Gngg. G C . Beard, LA. and Augee, M I. 11992). Movements and burrow use by platypuses, sites (Taylor et al. 1991, pers. obs.) and so Ormihorlnmhus anatimis. in the Thredbo River. presumably will travel through dry pipes New South Wales In Platypus and Echidnas" Ld connecting aquatic habitats. At the other ML. Augee (Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales: Mosman). extreme, very strong flows through rela- Griffiths, M. (1978). "The Biology of the MonoiremtV tively constricted pipes may well preclude I Academic Press New York).

(or at least discourage) travel by Platypus, Gust, N. and Handasyde, K ( 1995). Seasonal variation in ranging behaviour of the platypus particularlv in the upstream direction the (OrmthorhynchvA anatimis) on the Goulburn River, (Tyson 1980). Victoria. Australian Journal of Zoology 43, 193-208.

Structural barriers. In Tasmania. Koelm, J.D. and O'Connor, W G ( 1990) Threats to Victorian freshwater fish, Naturalist Platypus have been killed by cars at stream the Victorian 107,5-12, vertical rise crossings where a sharp made Melway Greater Melbourne (1997). Edition 25 it difficult for the animals to enter a culvert (Melwav Publishing Ptv Ltd: Glen Ins) leading under the road (Tyson 1980). A Otley, H M and le Mar, K. (1998) Observations of the avoidance of culverts by platypus The Tasmaman vertical rise of as little as 20 centimetres Naturalist 120, 48-50. from the water surface to a culvert lip can Serena, M (1994) Use of lime and space by platypus apparently preclude entry in the absence of {Omuhorhvnchus anatimis: Monotremata) along a 17- Victorian stream. Journal ofZoology, London 232, 1 materials (e.g. rocks or an adjoining gravel 31. bank) which assist climbing into the cul- Serena, M , Thomas* J L, Williams, G.A., and Officer, vert (Otley and le Mar 1998). R C.E. (1998), Use of stream and river habitats by the platypus {Omtthorhvnchus anannus) in an urban Disturbance (e.g. noise). Platypus have fringe environment Australian Journal of Zoology to travel routinely under a been observed 46, 267-282, dual-lane road carrying on average 2-7 Shaffer, ML (198!) Minimum population sizes for vehicles per minute (Serena et al. 1998). species conservation. HioScwruc 31, 131-134.

Taylor, R = Mooney, N, and Lange, K (1991). Obser- The effect of more severe disturbance (e.g. vations on platypus fasmanian Naturalist 105, 1-3 from multi-lane freeways) on the animals' Temple-Smith, P.D (1973) Seasonal breeding of the use of culverts remains to be assessed. platypus. Ornithorlnmhus anatimis (Shaw. 1799), with special reference to the male. Unpuh. PhD Thesis, Australian National University, Canberra Tyson, R.M. (1980). Road killed platypus Tasmanton Naturalist 60. 8

Vol. 116(2) 1999 57 Contributions

Sperm Competition: a Marsupial Perspective

David A.Taggart 1 and Glenn A. Shimmin 2

Abstract This paper examines the concept of sperm competition between males within a female oestrus period and the effects of this competition on male paternity success. The relationship between a species mating system and testes mass, epididymal sperm number and sperm length are discussed. The likelihood of sperm competition occurring in the marsupials is reviewed based upon available reproductive and behavioural data. The influence of copulatory behaviour, mate guarding, presence or absence of mating plugs and sperm transport and storage in the female tract, on the outcome of

sperm competition events, are outlined for this group. (The Victorian Naturalist 1 16 (2). 1999, 58-64)

Introduction Morphological and Behavioural The theory of resource competition and Correlates of Sperm Competition natural selection in vertebrates was origi- In males, Parker ( 1970) suggests that the nally proposed by Darwin in the 1800's evolutionary result of such competition is and since that time has generated consider- that males have evolved larger testes rela- able interest among biologists. Much atten- tive to body mass, and produce greater tion has been focussed on the significance numbers of spermatozoa. Evidence for this of differential success in competition for has been found in eutherian mammals and resources (food, shelter and mates) and its in many other vertebrate groups where effects on an animal's ability to contribute there is a clear positive relationship genes to the next generation. More recent- between the testes mass of adults and body ly, however, the debate has grown to mass. For example, in primates, testes include discussions of sperm competition mass correlates with the number of sperm and the factors that determine the amount ejaculated both within and between species of investment a male makes in sperm pro- (Short 1979; Harcourt et at, 1981; Harvey duction and its relationship lo mating and Harcourt 1984; Kenagy and strategies and siring success. Much of this Trombulak 1986). Over and above this theory was developed from studies of relationship in primates, there are signifi- insects and birds with relatively few stud- cant species differences in relative mass of ies conducted in mammals (Birkhead the testes, with species that have relatively 1995). large testes generally occurring in multi- Sperm competition occurs when more male breeding groups. Within these groups than one male mates with a female within a a female is likely to mate with two or more single oestrus period (Parker 1970). This in males during a single oestrus period com- turn leads to competition among the sperm monly resulting in sperm competition of rival males to fertilise a female's eggs within the female reproductive tract. following ovulation, with Parker's theory Conversely those species that occur in predicting that the male inseminating the monogamous pairs or as single male greatest number of spermatozoa will be breeding groups tend to have relatively most successful at fertilising a female's smaller testes due to the unlikely occur- eggs and ultimately at siring progeny rence of sperm competition and lower cop- (Parker 1970). Morphological and behav- ulatory frequencies (Short 1979; Harcourt ioural correlates of sperm competition have et at. 1981). In some species this has been been identified in both males and females taken a step further with animals having which suggest that both sexes have evolved relatively large testes in relation to body mechanisms which maximise their own mass found to produce ejaculates of high reproductive fitness (Birkhead 1995). sperm counts, high sperm motility and a Address for correspondence; greater proportion of motile sperm "(M oiler 1 Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne 1988. 1989). Recently it has been claimed Parkvillc, Victoria 3052. that not ' only relative Department of Anatomy, Monash University numbers of sperm Clayton, Victoria 3168, produced, but their relative size too, may

58 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

relate to an animal's mating system body mass and testes mass (Rose et ai

(Gomendioand Roldan 1991). 1997; Taggart

rates and sperm competition (Birkhead and within these species is high. In contrast, Moller 1993). Structures such as the cervix the Mountain Pygmy Possum Burramvs and utero-tubal junction in eutherian mam- parvus. Sugar Glider Petaurus breviceps* mals act as selective barriers to sperm wombats and Koala Phascolarctos advancement up the reproductive tract cinereus have small testes relative to body (Hunter 1988). In addition, females of mass. As might be expected, epididymal many invertebrate and a number of verte- sperm counts for some of the representa- brate species, store sperm in specialised tives of the macropod lineage (e.g. the structures before using them to fertilise Western Grey Kangaroo Mactopus fuligi- their eggs (Birkhead and Moller 1992). In nosus and Red-necked Wallaby Macropus some species the number, design and si/e rttfogriseus) with a large testes-body mass of these receptacles or the mode of sperm ratio are correspondingly high relative to release from them have also been implicat- body mass whilst epididymal sperm counts ed in patterns of sperm precedence of the Southern Hairy-nosed Wombat (Birkhead and Moller 1992). Lasiorhinus latifrons. which has a low A wide range of behavioural adaptations lesles;body mass ratio, are likewise low which help prevent competition by sperm relative to body mass (Taggart et ai. 1998). from another male have also been identi- In contrast to the data for testes mass and fied (Birkhead 1995). These include the sperm number, a negative relationship has presence or absence of mating plugs, pro- been found between sperm tail length and longed or frequent copulation and the body mass across all marsupial species. In instance and duration of mate guarding. In species like the Honey Possum, which has a similar manner females of some species the distinction of having the largest mam- have evolved lengthy periods of oestrus malian spermatozoa (Cummins and which increase the likelihood of multiple Woodall 1985). and the Dusky Antcchinus mating and would appear to actively pro- Antechinus swainsonii for example, the mote sperm competition between males value for sperm tail length relative to body (Birkhead 1995). mass is higher than would be expected for The reproductive fitness of many species animals of that weight, thus supporting

is therefore affected by the mechanisms previous data which suggested that sperm which determine sperm competition suc- competition may occur in these groups. In cess. Some of these will now be reviewed contrast the data for Petaurids indicates for the Marsupialia. that sperm from this group are short relative to body mass, suggesting the existence Studies In Marsupials of a monogamous type relationship in Sperm Testes Size, Sperm Number and species within this group (Rose et at. 1997, Length Taggart^fl/. 1998). little information was Until very recently, As mentioned, a variety of behavioural available on sperm competition in any and morphological factors also influence Renfrec marsupial (Tyndale-Biscoc and the outcome of sperm competition events. 1997: 1987; Dickman 1993; Rose et ai. Comparisons of how testes mass, sperm like euther- I aggart et at. 1998). However, number and sperm length compare with groups, ian mammals and other vertebrate these other factors allows relatively accu- found recent studies in marsupials have rate predictions to be made of the likeli- that there is a positive relationship between hood of sperm competition occurring with-

Vol. 116(2)1999 59 Contributions

in a particular species and the mating sys- duration of mating. Furthermore, mating tem employed. Some of these additional behaviour varied significantly during the factors are considered below. extended period of copulation. Males pursue females and tolerate high levels of Coputatory Behaviour female and subdominant male aggression the of dasyurid and With exception whilst maintaining intromission and ensur- macropod marsupials few detailed obser- ing mating success. Females, however, can vations have been made on copulatory prevent male mating access in a similar behaviour in marsupials (Table 1). In manner to which they initiate the final dis- dasyurids the length of copulation varies mount, through massive bouts of kicking from 2-18 his depending upon the species and fighting. Subdominant males rarely (Table 1). In general, the semelparous force the dominant male to dismount dasyurid species, like the Agile Antechinus (Shimmin 1998). Antechinus agilis have the longest copula- Amongst macropods the Tarn mar tion (^7.7-18 hours). Lengthy copulations Wallaby Macropus eugenii has been the have also been reported in some didelphids most extensively studied (Tyndale-Biscoe (>6 hours). In contrast, the macropods and Rcnfree 1987). Female tammars come mate for between 5-50 minutes, wombats into oestrus within hours of giving birth, for approximately 30 minutes, and other whereas in the Swamp Wallaby WaUabia didelphids for 4-40 mins (Table I). The bicolor oestrus occurs 3 days before birth shortest copulation (less than 30 seconds) and in the Red Kangaroo Macropus rufus 2 has been reported for bandicoots (Table 1) days after birth. In some other macropod (Taggart et al. 1998). species it does not appear to be related to During detailed studies on copulatory birth. In tammars. Whip-tailed Wallabies behaviour in the Agile Antechinus (previ- Macropus parry i and Red-necked ously Brown Antcehinus/Brown Marsupial Wallabies, females are vigorously pursued Mouse Antechinus stuartii) (Shimmin by the males within the group following 1996, 1998) it was found that the time at birth and the initiation of oestrus. Intense which males were given access to females inter-male aggression results from these within the oestrus period dramatically mating chases and, in the tammar at least, influenced the length of copulation. results in delaying the time of the first suc- However, factors such as order of mating cessful ejaculation until 1-2 hrs post-par- and delay between two rival males secur- tum (Rudd 1994). The first ejaculation is ing mating access had little effect on the

Table 1. Maximum length of copulation in various marsupial species. Marsupial Family Species Maximum Duration of Copulation Dasyuridae (Semelparous) Agile Antechinus Antechinus agilis 1 8.0 hrs Dusky Antechinus Antechinus swainsonii 9.5 hrs

Yellow-footed Antechinus Antechinus flavipes 1 1 .0 hrs Dasyuridae (Iteroparous) Fat-tailed Dunnart Sminthopsis crassicaudata 1 1 hrs Kowari Oasyuroides bymei 3.0 hrs Stripe-faced Dunnart Sminthopsis macroum 2.5 hrs

White-footed Dunnart Sminthopsis teucopus 1 .8 hrs Pcramelidae Long-nosed Bandicoot Perameks nasuta <30 sec Potoroidae Long-nosed Potoroo Potorous tridactylus 2 min Macropodidae Eastern Grey Kangaroo Macropus giganteus 50 min Parma Wallaby Macropus parma 5 min Red Kangaroo Macropus rufus 15-20 min Red-necked Wallaby Macropus rufogrise us 8 min Tammar Wallaby Macropus eugenii 8 min Vombatidae Southern Hairy-nosed Wombat Lasiorhinus latifrons 30 min Didelphidae Grey Short-tailed Opossum Monodelphis domestica 4-40mins Mouse Opossum Marmosa robinsoni >6hrs

- Semelparous all offspring produced at one time: Iteroparous - offspring produced in successive groups.

60 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

usually secured by the dominant (alpha) occurs -2 hours later when about 13 male, which is usually the largest male mounts with intromission follow in quick within the group. Bouts of thrusting activi- succession. This is followed by a steady ty are observed in the tammar throughout waning in attraction (Stoddart 1966, 1977). copulation with males ejaculating after W r hether multiple ejaculation occurs dur- each bout (although the components of ing this period has not been determined. A each ejaculate are not known). similar pattern of multiple, but brief, copulations has also been reported in members Mate Guarding of the Potoroidae (Seebeck and Rose 1989) In antechinus. pelvic thrusting by the and is also thought to act as a type of mate male during the extensive copulatory peri- guard. od is greatest early in the mount lime and For the Grey Short-tailed Opossum declines towards the end of copulation. Xfonodelphis domestica, only a single This reduced activity in the later hours of intromission/ejaculation per male has been copulation is consistent with contact male observed, whereas in the Woolly Didelphis guarding behaviour which has been report- albiventris and Virginia Opossums ed for other vertebrate species. Mate Didelphis xirginiana there are multiple guarding of this nature also assists in intromissions and/or ejaculations ensuring efficient sperm transport and stor- (Devvsburv 1972). Locking at the conclu- age, and therefore increases the likelihood sion of mating immediately prior to dis- of siring success (Shimmin et al 1997). mount is also a feature of copulation in In the Tammar Wallaby, the dominant many didelphid opossums and has also male always copulates and ejaculates first been observed in the Yellow Footed (Jarman 1983), and subsequently guards Antechinus Antechinus flavipes and Agile the female from the advance of other males Antechinus. (by chasing, biting and kicking) for up to 8 hours. In macropods. subordinate male Prevalence ofMating Plugs lammars. Red-necked Wallabies and Red Copulatory plugs have been observed in the urogenital sinus and/or lateral vaginae Kangaroos that arc not involved in mating. following mating and ejaculation in opos- respond to the mating activity by the domi- sums, macropods. phalangerids. nant male by biting and kicking the copu- vombat- ids, dasyurids and the lating male until he releases his hold on the Numbat female (Sharman and Calab\ 1964: A/i rmecobius fasciaius (Hughes and Rodger 1971; Tyndale-Biscoe Rodger Johnson 1989; Rudd 1994). After the dom- and 1978; Taggart al. 1997; Taggart and inant male has finished guarding the et friend unpubi obs,). copulatory plug female, some subordinate males may mate The is thought to result from the mixing of with her. In tammars and Red-necked semen and vaginal secretions, however Wallabies the dominant male has consider- coagulation can occur in the absence of able mating advantages over subordinate female tract secretions in macropods. In males in terms of timing, and is probably Tammar Wallabies the mating plug is the most reproductive!) successful. As devoid of spermatozoa soon after ejacula- ovulation does not occur until 40 hours tion (Tyndale-Biscoe and Rodger 1978). It after birth in the latter species, it is likely appears as a pale creamy coloured rubbery that the copulatory plug deposited by the mass, and in macropods can often be seen dominant male plays a significant role in protruding from the urogenital sinus for up ensuring a high rate of paternity success to 24 hours after mating. Copulatory plugs (Tyndale-Biscoeand Rodger 1978). in marsupials may prevent leakage of sper- In Long-nosed Bandicoots Perameles matozoa, act to retain spermatozoa in the rtasuta, males closely follow the females vaginae close to the cervical canal thus for several nights preceding copulation. ensuring maximal access for spermatozoa and, although length of copulation is short to the cervix, and/or perhaps act as a tem- (<30 seconds), the frequency is quite high porary physical barrier to subsequent mat- with successive mounts occurring at inter- ings by other males. vals of several minutes. A peak in activity

Vol. 116(2)1999 61 Contributions

Sperm Transport in the Female Paternity Studies Reproductive Tract The best evidence for sperm competition In marsupials, upon ejaculation, semen is within marsupials has come from studies deposited in the upper part of the urogeni- of captive colonies of two dasyurid tal sinus and sperm travel rapidly to the species, the Agile Antechinus (Shimmin cervix, which may act as a reservoir for 1998; Shimmin et ai 1997) and the Brush- spermatozoa as well as a selective barrier tailed Phascogale Phascogale tapoatafa to further sperm transport. In didelphid and (Miilis et ai 1995). Both studies examined dasyurid marsupials there appears to be paternity within litters associated with trials extremely efficient transport of ejaculated competitive mating between two spermatozoa from the urogenital sinus to males. These studies indicate that spermatozoa than can con- the lower isthmus region of the oviduct (-1 from more one male currently occupy the sperm storage crypts in 7) suggesting little if any barrier to in lower oviduct prior to ovulation, and sperm transport up the female reproductive the also that multiple paternity can occur with- tract in species from these groups. This in the one litter. Fertility studies undertak- contrasts dramatically with the small peren in the Agile Antechinus suggested that centage of ejaculated spermatozoa (-1 in spermatozoa from second and third insemi- 10.000) which reach the oviduct in most nations can contribute spermatozoa for fer- macropods studied (Bedford et ai, 1984; tilisation. In studies on the Agile Tyndale-Biseoe and Rodger 1978; Taggart Antechinus. of the 61 young on which and Temple-Smith 1991). paternity was assigned 72% were sired by Sperm Storage and Release in the Female the second mating male when both matings Reproductive Tract occurred early in oestrus. 62% were sired Sperm storage in the female reproductive by the second mating male when one mat- tract is a relatively common phenomenon ing occurred early and one in mid oestrus in insects, lower vertebrates, reptiles and and 58% were sired by the second mating birds. In eutherian mammals, as fertilisa- male when both matings occurred in mid tion generally occurs within 24 hours of oestrus. Overall, 64% of young were sired mating, spermatozoa only survive for short by the second mating male. Importantly, periods in the female tract. Long term however, large numbers of the litters (7/1 were sired by both males given sperm storage in this group is therefore 1) extremely rare, with insectivorous bats access to the female (Shimmin 1998; being the most well-known exception Shimmin et ai 1997). This result proves that effective storage of each male's sperm (Racey 1979). In marsupials, extended occurs and that males securing mating periods of sperm storage in the female tract access early in oestrus are also gaining (up to 2-3 weeks) have been reported for some siring success. Production of mixed three families. In the Dasvuridae (Bedford paternity litters significantly increases the et ai 1984; Sclwood and McCallum 1987: genetic diversity of the litter and, com- Breed et ai 1989: Taggart and Temple- bined with the sex-biased dispersal of Smith 1991) and the Didelphidae (Rodeer young, ensures that high levels of genetic and Bedford 1982: Bedford et ai 1984) heterozygosity are maintained in the popu- sperm storage occurs in specialised crypts lation. Support for these findings also in the lower oviduct, whereas in per- come from field studies of the Agile amelids (Lyne and Mollis 1977) it occurs Antechinus in which radionuclide labels, in the vaginal caeca. Observations on the individually recognisable by their spectral release of spermatozoa from the isthmic properties, were injected into males at the storage crypts have been studied in the Fat- beginning of the breeding period. Labels tailcd Dunnart Sminthopsis crassicaudata passed to females during ejaculation were using transmitted light and suggest that identified and counted following female those located closest to the ovary are the capture to determine male mating success. first to be released from the crypts follow- and subsequently demonstrated that males ing ovulation (Bedford and Breed 1994), and females did indeed exhibit a promiscu- and are perhaps therefore more likely to ous mating strategy in the wild (Scott and successfully fertilise any ovulated eggs. Tan 1985).

62 The Victorian Naturalist The Victorian Naturalist

Index to Volume 115, 1998

Compiled by K. N. Bell

Australian Natural History Medallion Lichler, J. and Jeanes, J., 87 Mcdallionist, Peter Menkhorst, 264 Endersby, L, 26

Fairclough, R.. Lam, I*.. and Authors Kibria, G. Nugegoda. I).. 56 Adams, R.. Macreadie, .1. and Wallis, R. Falkingham, C. 108 (book review) 120 Fallavollita, E„ Hunter, V.I I. and Hunter. Allen,!.. 146 LT.,9 Bain, G.. Steller. P. and Belvedere, M., 142 lleieher, R.J.. 21. 192 Beasley, K., 40 Ford, S., 210 Belvedere. M., Bain. G. and Steller. P., 142 Gillbank. I,. 29, 34 (book review), 266, 286 Birch. W.D., 306 Gillbank. I,, and Maroske, S.. 188 Braby, MR, 4 Grey, r:.. 27 Briggs, E., Cardwell. T., Hein/.e, I), and Griggs, J. and Shicl, R., 226 O'Neill. G., 205 Gross, C. 65 (book review) Brown, G., Brown, P. and Clemann. N., 81 Gueselin. P. Du. 83 Brown, P.. Clemann, N. mid Brown. G., 81 Hawking. J.. 215 Brown, S., Ldney, G., Ilowlett, S., Love, lleinze, D. and Williams, L., 132 P. and Lawler, S.. 201 I lein/e. D., O'Neill. G., Briggs, E. and Calder, J. and Calder. M.. 164 Cardwell. T., 205 Calder, M.. 66 (book review), 70 (obituary) llingston. A.B. and McQuillan, P.B.. 1 16 Calder, M. and Calder, .!., 164 I loughton. S. 38 (obituary), 160, 279 Cardwell. T., lleinze, D.. O'Neill. Ci. and Ilowlett, S., Love, P., Lawler, S., Brown. Briggs, I-.. 205 S. andLdney, G., 201 Chesterfield. I-. A., 310,337 Hunter, J. T., 94. 322 Claridge, A.W., 88 Hunter, J.T., Fallavollita, E. and Hunter, Clemann, N.. Brown. G. and Brown, 1*., 81 V.H., 9 Crichton, G., 76 Hunter, V.H., Hunter, J.L and Croome, R. and Mikrjukov. K., 239 Fallavollita, E.,9 Crosby. D. I\, 222 Jacobs. P.. 245 Coupar, P. and Van Bockel. I).. 124 Jeanes, J. and Lichler. J., 87 Dashper, S., Thompson. R. and Myers, Jordan, C, 106, 145 (letter) S.. 343 Kibria, G., Nugegoda, D., l'airclough, R

Doeg, I ., 30 (book review) and Lam, P., 56 Douglas, J., 105 Lam, P., Kibria, (i., Nugegoda, I), and Downev. P. O., 32 (book review) l'airclough, R., 56 Duckcr, S. C. 292 f Lawler, S., Brown, S., Ldney, (i., Editors, The Victorian Naturalist, 38, 74, Ilowlett, Sand Love, P., 201 119, 123,299 Love, P., Lawler, S., Brown, S., Edney, Edney, G., Uowlett, S., Love. P.. Lawler, G. and Howled, S, 201 S. and Brown, S., 201 1

Lyndon, P.. 68, 93, 107 Book Reviews MeBain. M., 242 "A Conservation Overview of Non-

McQuillan, P.E and Kingston, A.B., 1 16 marine Lichens, Bryophyles. Algae Macrcadie. J., WallLs, K. and Adams, R., and Fungi", G. Scott, T. May. T. 120 Knlwisle and N. Stevens (C. Gross). 65

Manscrgh, I. and Sccbcck, J.. 350 A Natural History of Australia*. T. M. Marion, A.. 169 Berra(C Falkingham), 108 Maroske, S., 147 (book review) 'Colour Ciuide to Invertebrates of Maroske, S. and Gillbank, L, 188 Australian Inland Waters', J.H. May, T., 62 (book review), 158 Hawking and FJ« Smith (T. Doeg), 30 Meagher, DA, 357 'Eucalyptus: an illustrated guide to

Meagher, DA and Scott, G.A.M., 325 identilleatioiT, I. Brookerand Meisterlleld, R. and Tan, Lor-wai, 23 D. Kleinig(P.O. Downey). 32 Mikrjukov. K. and Croome, R., 239 flora of Australia vol. 28. Gentianales*. 2 Moir, E, and Ralston, K., 50 "Freshwater Algae in Australia. A guide Myers. S.. Dashper, S. and Thompson, R. to Conspicuous Genera", T.J. 343 Knlwisle, J. A. Sonncman and S.H. Norman. R.J. dc B., 18 Lewis {J. West). 31 Nugegoda, I).. Fairclough, R., Lam, P. "Fungi of Southern Australia'. N.L. and Kibria,

G., 1 O'Neill Briggs, E., Cardwell, . and "Hunters and Collectors. The Antiquarian llein/e, D.,210 Imagination in Australia', T. Griffiths Ralston. K... 255 (book review) (L Gillbank), 34 Ralston, K. and Moir, F,, 50 'Improving Nature? The Science and Sacco, F., 104 Fthics of Genetic Fngineering', Sago. .1.. 84 M.J. Reiss and R. Straughan (L. Sddeiger, N.. 175 Silberbauer), 1 14 Scott, (J. A.M. and Meagher, I). A.. 325 'John Gould in Australia. Letters and Seebeek. .1. and Mansergh, I., 350 Drawings*. A. Datta (S. Maroske), 147 Serena. M. and Williams, (i., 47 'Planting Wetlands and Dams. A Sharp, B., 28 (software review) Practical Guide to Wetland Design, Shiel. R. and(iriggs, J., 226 Construction and Propagation'.

Silberbauer, I,., 1 14 (book review) N. Romanowski (K. Strickland), 149 Stcller, P., Belvedere, M. and Bain, G„ 142 'Seashells of Central NSW\ P. Jansen Strickland. K., 149 (book review) (E. Tenner), 33 Tan. lor-wai and Meisterlleld, R., 231 "Sub-alpine Flora of the Baw Baw Tenner, I*,.. 33 (book review) Plateau, Victoria', K. and P. Thompson, R., Myers, S. and Dashper, Strickland (M. Caldcr). 67 S.. 343 "The Biology of Australian Weeds. Traill, B.J. , 135 volume 2\ F.D. Panetta, RTF Groves Valladis, P., 100 and R.C.I I. Shepherd. 67 Van Boekel, I). and Coupar. P.. 124 The Mount Buffalo Story: 1898-1998'. I). Wallis. (i., 300 Webb and B. Adams (K. Ralston). 255 Wallis. R., 264 Botany Wallis, R. and Wood, M.S.. 78 Acacia dealhata. defoliation of, 27 Wallis, R., Adams, R. and Maereadie. J.. Acacia phlebophvlUh Ml. 120 Buffalo. 205 Buffalo Sallee. lire, drought adapted Walsh, N., 186 alpine species, 201 Wescott, G., 296 Botanical bridge or island. Mt. Buffalo, 186 West, .1.. 3 I (book review) Bryophyte flora, Wilsons Prom N.P., Weste. G.. 274, 331 addition to, 325 Williams, G, and Serena, M., 47 Diebaek at Wilsons Prom, is battle Williams, I., and Ileinze. 1).. 132 won? }} 1 Wood, M.S. and Wallis, R, 78 Epacris impressa, nectar robbing by

Birds bumble bee, las, 1 16 Fire history at Wilsons Little Raven, taken by red fox. 83 Prom N.P.. 337 Granite outcrop vegetation. Wilsons Prom N. P.. 322 Lichens. Mt Buffalo, preliminary report, Invertebrates 210 Aquatic mierofauna. Lake Catani and Muehlenbeckia costata, ecology of, 9 environs. 226 Muellerian memoir of Wilsons Prom, 286 Freshwater maeroinvcrtebrates. Mt. Olearia allenderae, at Wilsons Prom Buffalo N.P., 215 N.P., 299 Heliozoans from ice-covered ponds. Mt. Old Orbost Rd.. 21 Buffalo N. P.. 239 Orchid tlora. Warrandyte S.P., 1991-97. Lacinularia sp. colony, 104

124 ( htopus nuioruni. behaviour, 100 Orchids, rare. Nyora. 87 Testate amoebae. Mt. Buffalo N.P.. 231 Pseudocephalozia pa/udicola. Localities biogeography of, 84 Bunvip S.l\. small mammal community, Sallow Wattle. Mt Buffalo. 205 120 Silver Wattles, defoliation of, 27 FNCV Buffalo Excursion 1978. 214 Tin Granite tlora. Howell. NSW, 94 Gippsland Style. A Day's Rambling. 146 Vegetation at Wilsons Prom N.P.. 310 Glenburn Pond, revegetation project, 50 Conservation Glynns Reserve, Warrandyte, defoliation Glenburn Pond, urban regeneration of Acacia dealbata, 21 project, 50 Glynns Reserve. Warrandyte. Special Protection Zone Management. Lacinularia colony, 104 Mt. Buffalo N.P.. 169 Howell, NSW, botany of, 94 Swordgrass Brown Butterfly project. 142 Melbourne Aoo, seal rehabilition. 40

Mt. Buffalo, special issue. 1 Entomology 15(5). devoted to. 154-260 Bombus tetrestris. nectar robbing in Acacia phlchophvlla, 205 Epacris impressa. las, 1 16 Aquatic mierofauna, L Catani and Butterflies at Mt. Buffalo N.P.. 222 environs, 226 Feral honeybees and sugar gliders, nest Botanical bridge or island?. 186 box competition, 78 Buffalo Mountains (book review. Hesperiidae. Lycaenidae, biology of in 1908). 174 SE Australia, 4 Buffalo Sallee, fire, drought adapted Lycaenidae. Hesperiidae, biology of in species, 201 SE Australia, 4 Buffalo Sallow Wattle. 205 Swordgrass Brown Butterfly project. 142 Butterflies. 222 Tatra Inn Insect displays, 225 FNCV Campout, 1 903-4, 163 Errata FNCV Buffalo excursion. 1940. 185 Buffalo excursion, 1978. Vol 1 14 (6) 1997. p 283, 284, figure FNCV 214 captions 2 and 3. 38 FNCV role in protection, 160 Freshwater maeroinvcrtebrates. 215 FNCV F. von Mueller's taxonomic imprint role in Mt. Buffalo N.P., 160 Historical on flora, 188 Historical role in Wilsons Prom N.P., 266 Heliozoans from ice-covered ponds, 239 Fish History and Natural I listorv in pictures, Bidyanus bidyanus % review of biology. 242 aquaculture, 56 Historical perspective, 245 Silver Perch, review of biology. Introduction. 158 aquaculture. 56 Lichens of Mt. Buffalo N.P.: A Fungi Preliminary Report. 210 Autumn fungi. 93 Mt. Buffalo and Percival R.I I. St. Gymnopaxillus, rare Gasteroid. first John. 192 record for Australia. 76 Pond life. 1903-4.238 Lepista nudch Wood Blewitt, 107 Scientific value, 164 Special Protection /one Management, Geology 169 Geology of Wilsons Prom. 300 Structure of Ml. Buffalo granite, 175 Minerals on Wilsons Prom. 306 Testate amoebae, preliminary notes. Granite structure, Mt. Buffalo, 175 231 1

ML Buller, discovery of Mountain Small mammals. Bunyip S.P.. 120 Pygmy Possum at, 132 Squirrel gliders and Sugar gliders, New England, Muehlenbeckio costata. identification of, 135 ecology of, 9 Sugar gliders and feral honeybees, nest Nyora, rare orchids at, 87 box competition. 78

Orbost Road, Old, botany, 2 i Sugar gliders and Squirrel gliders. Tower Hill S.G.R., honeybee, sugar identification of, 135 glider nest eompetition, 78 Vertebrate species, post-fire colonization,

WarrandyteS.R, orchid llora 1991-97, 124 Wilsons Prom N. P., 343

Wilsons Prom N.I*., speeial issue, ! 15(6), Miscellaneous devoted to, 261-376 A day's rambling, (iippsland-style, 146 Annolaled bibliography, Vict Nat. A man with a many track mind, 105 artieles, 279 Autumn peeper, 26 Bryophyte flora, additions, 325 Author guidelines, 1 10 Daisy Rush, Olearia allendcrae, 299 Parly overland expedition to Wilsons I )ieback, is battle won? 33 Prom N.P., 292 Early overland expedition, 292 Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 1988, FNCV CampOUt 1912-13. 273, 349 updates to Schedules 2 and 3, 71 I NCV role in establishment, 266 Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 1988, Fire history, 337 Recent action statements, May 1998. (ieology of, 300 150 Introduction to speeial issue, 264 I listory and Natural I lislory in pictures, Mt Mammals introduced at, 350 Buffalo N.R, 242 Minerals at, 306 Muellerian memoir, 286 Historical perspective, Mt. Buffalo N.P., 245 Origin of geographic names at, 357 Natural History, 29 Scientific importanee of, 296 Origin of geographic names, Small vertebrates, post-lire Wilsons Prom N.P., recolonization, 343 357 Rabbit Control. 119 Vegetation at, 310 Robert Dick, Vegetation of granite outcrops, 322 Geologist and Botanist, 106 Tatra Inn Insect displays, 225 Walking, 75 years at Prom. 274 The Victorian Naturalist - shortlisted for Mammals 'Review Publication of the Year", 123 Butramys parvus, discovery on Mt. Obituary Buller, 132 Ruth Clarke (S. Houghton), Colonization, post-fire, small vertebrates, 38 John Roslyn Wilsons Prom N.P„ 343 Garnet (M. Calder). 70 Eastern Marred Bandicoot, reptiles and Reptiles birds in diet, 18 Colonization, post-lire, small vertebrates. Echidna visits farm, 68 Wilsons Prom N. P., 343 Introduced mammals, Wilsons Prom Egernia coverUryU bait selection for trap- N.P., 350 ping, 81 Introduced predators, tracks and trails, 88 Swamp skink, bait selection for trapping. 81 Isoodon macrourus, reptiles and birds in Vertebrate species, post-fire diet, 18 recolonization, Wilsons Prom N.P., 343 Mountain Pygmy possum, discovery on Mt Buller, 132 Software Reviews 'Aust. Northern Brown Bandicoot, reptiles and Museum Information Discs'. birds in diet, 18 W.D. Rudman (B. Sharp), 28

Ornithorkynchus anatinus, suburban Special Issues hazards, 47 Mount Buffalo Centenary Issue, 154-260 PerameUs gunnit, reptiles and birds in Wilsons Promontory Centenary Issue, diet, 18 261-376 Platypus, hazards in suburban habitats, 47 Red fox takes Little Raven. 83 Seal rehabilitation, Melbourne Zoo, 40 Contributions

The relationship between male domi- Evolutionary causes and consequences. Reproduction Fertility and Development 7, 755-75 nance and paternity has been examined in Birkhead, T R, and Moller, A. P. (1992)- Numbers captive colonies of Red-necked and Wallabies size of sperm storage tubules and the duration of and Tammar Wallabies using elec- sperm storage in birds: a comparative study. Biological Journal of trophoretic and DNA fingerprinting tech- the Lmnean Society 45, 363- 372, niques. Within groups of Red-necked Birkhead, T.R and Moller. A.P, (1993). Sexual selec- Wallabies the dominant male sired at least tion and the temporal separation of reproductive events sperm storage data from reptiles, 70% of young surviving to the age of birds and mammals. Biological Journal of the Llnnean Society pouch emergence with 30% or less young 50,295-311 Breed, Leigh. surviving being sired bv subordinate males W.G , CM. and Bennett. J.H. (1989). Sperm morphology and storage in the female (Watson et ai 1992). reproductive tract of the fat-tailed dunnart, SmmthopMs crassicaudato (Marsupialia:Dasvundae) Gamete Conclusion Research 23, 61-75. Sperm competition is an important selec- Cummins, J.M and Woodall. PF. (1985). On mammalian sperm dimensions. Journal tive force which affects the reproductive of Reproduction and fertility 75. 153-175. fitness of many invertebrate and vertebrate Dewsbury, DA. (1972). Patterns of eopulatory behav- species. Unfortunately the comprehensive iour in mammals. Ihe Quarterly Review of Biolog\ 47. 1-33 testing of many of the predictions associat- Dickman. C.R (1993). Evolution of semelparity in ed with sperm competition theory remains male dasyund marsupials. A critique and an hypothe- to be done. As the behavioural, morpho- sis of sperm competition. In The biology and management of Australasian carnivorous marsupials', logical and quantitative correlates of sperm pp 25-38. Eds M Roberts, J. Camio, G Crawshaw, and competition vary dramatically across the M. Hutchins (American Association of Zoological Parks and Aquariums Publishers. marsupial fauna, the study of this group of Toronto). Gomendio, M. and Roldan. E.R. (1991 ), Sperm compe- mammals offers a unique opportunit> to tition influences sperm size in mammals. test many of the predictions which remain Proceedings of the Royal Society of London 243, 181-185 unresolved in mammals and will help Harcourt, A.H., Harvey, P.H , Larson, S G. and Short, determine how the various factors that R.V. (1981). Testis weight, body weight and breed- influence the outcome of sperm competi- ing system in primates. Nature 293, 55-57. Harvey. P.H. and Harcourt, AH. (1984) Sperm com- tion events affect male and female repro- petition, testes size and breeding systems in primates. ductive fitness. In 'Sperm competition and the evolution of animal mating systems pp 589-600, Ed R.L. Smith. Furthermore, when data on relative , (Academic Press: Orlando), testes-body mass and sperm number-body Hughes. R L, and Rodger. J.C. (1971), Studies on the mass are examined with other behavioural vaginal mucus of the marsupial. Vrithavurus vulpecula. Australian Journal of Zoology 19. 19-33 and morphological data for a particular Hunter. R HP ( l988).Transport of gametes, seleclion species, this information can be useu to of spermatozoa and gamete lifespan m the female help assess the likelihood of inter-male tract. In 'The fallopian tubes Their role in fertility and infertility '. Chap IV. pp, 53-74. Ed. R.H. Hunter sperm competition occurring within a par- (Springer- Verlag: London) ticular species and thus predict the likely Jarman, P. (1983). Mating system and sexual dimor- mating system in operation (for example phism in large terrestrial, mammalian herbivores Biological Review* 58, 485-520. monogamy, promiscuity). In addition, a Johnson. K A (1989), Thylacomyidae. In Fauna of better understanding of paternity within Australia. Vol lb. Mammalia', pp. 625-635 Eds mating systems and the natural strategies D.W Walton and B.J Richardson (Aust ralian Government Publishing Service; Canberra). for intraspecific diversi- enhancing genetic Kenagy, G.J. and Trombulak. S C (1986). Size and ty will assist conservation objectives and function of mammalian testes in relation to body size Journal of Mammalogy 1-22. provide a new. useful and potentially rich 67, Lyne.A.G and Mollis, D E (1977) The early develop- area for further investigation. ment of marsupials, with special reference to the bandicoots. In 'Reproduction and evolution', pp References 293-302 Eds J H Calaby and C.H Tyndale-Biscoe. of Bedford, J M . Rodger. J.C and Breed, W.G. (19*4) (Australian Academy Science Canberra) - Why so main mammalian spermatozoa a clue from Millis, A , Taggart, DA, Phelan, J.. Temple-Smith, marsupials'7 Proceedings »f the Koyal Soptety of P D and Sofrouidis, G. (1995) Investigation of mul- London 221, 221-233 tiple paternity within Inters of the brush-tailed Bedford, J M and Breed. W.G. (1994) Regulated stor- phascogale (Rhascogale tapoatafa). Proceedings of age and subsequent transformation of spermatozoa in the Jlst Annual Meeting of the Australian Mammal the fallopian tubes of an Australian marsupial, Society, Townsville. Queensland S'unnthapsis vrtvcHfatutlata ftiofogy of Reproduction Moller. A P. (1988). Ejaculate quality, testis stM and

50, 845-54 I nil competition in primates. Journal of Human Birkhead, T R (1995) Sperm competition Evolution 17.479-488

Vol. 116(2)1999 63 .

Contributions

Mollcr, A. P. (1989). Ejaculate quality, testes size and transport, male siring success and reproductive fit- sperm production in mammals. Functional Ecology ness in the brown marsupial mouse (Antechinus stu- 3,91-96 artii), 2Hth Meeting of the Australian Society for Parker, G.A. (1970). Sperm competition and its evolu- Reproductive- Biology, Canberra. ACT tionary consequences in insects, Biological Reviews Short, R.V. (1979). Sexual selection and its component 45, 526-567. parts, somatic and genital selection as illustrated by the great apes. Advances in the Study of Raecy, PA ( 1979). The prolonged storage and sur- man and vival of spermatozoa in ( hiroptera. Journal of Behaviour 9, 131-158. Reproduction and Fertility 56, 391-402. Stoddart, E. (1966) Management and behaviour of Rodger, J.C. and Bedford, J.M. (1982) Induction of breeding groups of the marsupial I'erameles nasuta oestrus, recovery of gametes and the timing of fertili- Geoffroy in captivity. Australian Journal of Zoology sation events in the opossum, Didelphts virgimana 14,611-623 Journal ofReproduction and Fertility 64, 159-169. Stoddart, E. (1977) Breeding and behaviour of Rose, R.W., Nevison, CM. and Dixson, A.F. (1997) Australian bandicoots. In 'The biology of marsupi- Testis weight, body weight, and mating systems in als', pp. 179-191 Eds B. Stonehouse and D marsupials and monotremes. Journal ofZoology 243, Gilmorc. (MacMillian Press: London). 523-532. Taggart, DA. and Temple-Smith, P.O. (1991) Rudd. CD, (1994). Sexual behaviour of male and Transport and storage of spermatozoa in the female female tammar wallabies (Macropus eugenu) at post- reproductive tract of the brown marsupial mouse,

- 1 stuartii Journal partum oestrus Journal ofZoology 232, 1 5 1 62 Antechinus (Dasyuridae). of Scott, MP. and Tan, T.N. (1985). A radio-tracer tech- Reproduction and Fertility 93, 97-1 10. nique for the determination of male mating success in Taggart, D.A., Steele, V.R., Schultz, D., Temple- natural populations. Behavioural Ecology and Socio- Smith, P.D., Dibben, R. and Dibben, J. (1997). hiology 17, 29-33. Semen collection and cryopreservation in the south- Seebeck, J.H. and Rose, R.W. (1989), Potoroidae. In: ern hairy-nosed wombat Lasiorhinus tatifrons; impli- 'Fauna of Australia Vol lb Mammalia', pp. 716-739. cations for conservation of the northern hairy-nosed Hds D.W, Walton and B.J. Richardson, (Australian wombat Lasiorhinus krefftii. In 'Wombats'. Chap 17, Government Publishing Service: Canberra). pp. 195-206. Eds R. Wells and PA. Pridmore Sclwood, L. and McCallum, F, (1987). Relationship (Surrey Beatty and Sons: Chipping Norton), between longevity of spermatozoa after insemination Taggart, D.A.. Breed, W.G., Temple-Smith, P.D., and ihe percentage of normal embryos in brown mar- Purvis. A. and Shimmin, G. (1998). Reproduction, supial mice (Antechinus stuartii). Journal of mating strategies and sperm competition in marsupi- Reproduction and Fertility 79, 495-503. als and monotremes. In \Sperm competition and sex- Sharman. G.B. and Calaby, J.H (1964) Reproductive ual selection'. Chap 15, pp. 623-665 Eds T.R. behaviour in the red kangaroo, Megaieia nifa.m cap- Birkhead and A. Moller). (Academic Press: London). tivity Wildlife Research 9, 58-85. Tyndale-Biscoe. CH. and Rodger, J.C (1978) Shiminin, G.A. (1996). Mating behaviour in the brown Differential transport of spermatozoa into the two marsupial mice (Antechinus stuartii). 42nd sides of the genital tract of a monovular marsupial, Australian Mammal Society Meeting, Melbourne. the tammar wallaby (Macropus eugenu). Journal of Victoria. Reproduction and Fertility 52. 37-43, Shimmin, G.A. (1998). Sperm competition in brown Tyndale-Biscoe, CH, and Renfree, M.B. (1987) marsupial mice (Antechinus stuartii; southern form): 'Reproductive physiology of marsupials". An investigation into reproductive fitness, mating (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge). behaviour, sperm transport and siring success. Watson, D.M., Croft, D.B. and Crozier, R.H. (1992). (Unpublished PhD Thesis, Monash University, Paternity exclusion and dominance in captive red- Clayton, Victoria, Australia.) necked wallabies, Macropus rufogrtseus

Shimmin, G.A,, Taggart, DA and Temple-Smith, P.O. ( Marsupial ia: Macropodidae). Australian (1997) The effects of mating behaviour on sperm Mammalogy 15, 31-36.

SUBSCRIPTION RATES for 1999 Year Half-Year First Member Metropolitan $40 $20 Concessional (pensioner/studentAmemployed) $30 $15 Country (more than 50km from GPO) $30 $15 Junior (under 18) $15 $7 Additional Members Adult $15 $15 Junior $5 $5

Institutional Australian Institutions $55 Overseas Institutions AU$65 Schools/Clubs $35

Send to: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia.

64 The Victorian Naturalist ( 'ontribvtions Contributions

A Rare Sighting of the Common Dolphin Delphinus delphis in Port Phillip Bay, Victoria

1 Carol Scarpaci', Stephen W. Bigger . Troy A. Saville V4 and Dayanthi Nugegoda"

Abstract This paper reports a sighting of two Common Dolphins Delphinus delphis off Blairgowrie in Port Phillip Bay, Victoria. Once the dolphins were sighted thc> were oontinousl) observed using an instantCOUS sampling technique to document focal group activity. The Common Dolphins were con- tinousK observed tor a total of four hours ! he preferred shore distance of these Common Dolphins was 150 m in a water depth of 10-15 m. The most common behaviour observed was feeding behaviour (87.5%) followed b\ social behaviour (10.4%) and travel behaviour (2.1%) I'wo whistles and

were recorded the I one ceholocation pulse during observation period [The fctoriot} Notwolist 116 I I) 1999,65-07)

Introduction

On 15 th November 1995. an opportunistic the interior part was a cream ish-tan color; sighting of two adult Common Dolphins (iii) the body size o\' each o\' the two Delphinus delphis w as made off Common Dolphins was considerably Blairgowrie in Port Phillip Bay, Victoria smaller than that of the Bottlenose Dolphin , (38*21 .5*S, I44°46 E) (Fig, I). The sight- observed in the area, the rostrum was ing occurred during a field stud) on longer and the dorsal fins were relatively Bottlenose Dolphins Tursiops truncatus higher than those o\' the Bottlenose (Scarpaci 1997) in the vicinity of the Dolphin. Data collected from a total o\' 10 Blairgowrie Yacht Club, which is recog- Strandings off the Victorian coast indicate nized by the local fishermen as a relative!) body lengths oi Common Dolphins range good fishing spot. The Common Dolphins from 1.7- 1.9 m (Warnekc 1995) whereas were observed continousU between 1000 the typical si/e o\' adult Bottlenose and 1400. All observations made in this Dolphins in Australian waters ranges from paper are within the Australian Whale Watching Regulations. A minimum distance of 100 m was maintained b\ the research boat from the dolphins unless the dolphins approached the vessel of their Melbourne own accord.

Identification The dolphins were identified as the species Delphinus delphis (Fig. 2) on the basis ot the following criteria: (i) a dis- ft-r^i Port Phillip l',i\ tinct, triple coloration was observed on their body (Aguayo 1975) and this consist- 1 ed of a 'criss-cross pattern as proposed by Baker (1983); (ii) the dorsal sector of the cross was dark grey, the ventral sector was white, the posterior sector was grey and

1 School of I ifa Sciences and Technology. Victoria University of Technology* Si Albans Campus, P.O Box 14428. MCMC. Melbourne, Victoria 8001 Author for correspondence RM1T University, Department of Applied Biolog) and Biotechnologj Victoria Gpi I Box 2476V, Melbourne, 3001 Moonrakcr Charters, 2 St Aubins Way, Sorrento, lig. 1. Map ol Port Phillip Hay. Victoria, show- Victoria 3943 ing the region where the Common Dolphins * Current Address Pet Porpoise Pool Pry Ltd.. P.O were observed Box 532, Cons Harbowr, NSW 2450

Vol. 116(2)1999 65 ( Contributions

Fig. 2. Common Dolphin Delphimts delphis, showing the distinct 'triple colouration' of the hotly. Note: these animals are not the individuals described in this paper. Photo kindly supplied by David Donnelly and sourced by the Dolphin Research Institute Inc.. 1'rankston.

1 78 3.26 m (Ross and Cockcroft 1990). defined by Shane (1990). Data on their the largest o\' which arc found in location, distance from shore and water Tasmania, southern Victoria and South temperature were also noted. Australia. These distinct features were eas- Vocalizations by the Common Dolphins ily observed due to good water clarity and w ere recorded using a hydrophone the frequent approaches made by the dol- attached to a preamplifier. A standard tape phins towards the research vessel. recorder with a tape speed of 19 cm/sec According to Jefferson ct ai (1993) two was used. Recordings were later trans- types of Common Dolphin exist: a long- formed into a frequency time wave (spec- beaked (coastal) and a short-beaked (off- trograph) on a computer work station with shore) variety. Unfortunately, we were the aid of specialized computer software unable to distinguish if these dolphins (Avtsoft®) co-ordinated to a printer. were short-beaked or long-beaked. The dolphins spent most of their time feeding (87.5%) in the area with little indi- Behaviour and Vocalisations cation of social (10.4%) or travel behav- Once the Common Dolphins were iour (2.1%). This is unlike the behaviour of observed an instantaneous sampling tech- the Bottlenose Dolphins studied bv nique (Shane 1990) was used to document Scarpaci (1997) in Port Phillip Bay. The the focal group. The two Common Dolphins dolphins remained an average distance were defined as the focal group. Focal from the shore of 150 m, in a water depth group activity was documented at five of 10-15 m; the water temperature was minute intervals. The behavioural activities I9°C. A study conducted by Silber ct a!. of the dolphins were grouped into three cat- (1994) showed that Common Dolphins egories: travel, social and feeding, as normally inhabit relatively clear regions at

66 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions a distance greater than 15 km from the 1995). However, unlike the Bottlenose shore where water depths are usually Dolphins they do not appear to be resident greater than 30 m. The typical group size of in Port Phillip Bay but rather a casual visi- the Common Dolphin can range from sever- tor (Warneke 1995). al dozens to over 10 000 animals (Jefferson The two Common Dolphins reported et a(. 1993). However, on this occasion only here were observed on only one occasion. two dolphins were sighted. Possible reasons No further sightings of these or any other for this may be: (i) the dolphins dispersed Common Dolphins occurred in the period from their main group to forage; (ii) the dol- from September 1995 to March 1996 and phins dispersed from the main group for January 1997 to November 1998 during reproductive purposes: (iii) the dolphins which continuous field observations of may have formed a solitary group of their Bottlenose Dolphins were recorded in Port own; (iv) this was not a typical dolphin Phillip Bay. group, or (v) Common Dolphins may not always be in large groups. Acknowledgements Two whistles and one echolocation pulse Moonraker Dolphin-Seal Swim Charters for the essential provision of a research vessel were recorded during the observation session, with one whistle being clear enough to References analyze. The duration of the whistle was 0.3 Aguayo, A.L. (1975). Progress report on small see over a frequency range of 2.7 kHz to 4.0 cetacean research in Chile. Journal 1-ish Research kHz (Fig. 3). Generally, whistles of Board ( crnada 32(7), II 23-1 1 43 Altmann, J (1974). Observational study of behaviour: Dolphins start at 4 kHz and can Common sampling methods. Behaviour 49, 227-267. sweep as high as 15 kHz, with harmonics to Baker, A.N. (1983) 'Whales and Dolphins of New 30 kHz (Evans 1994). Fxholocation pulses Zealand and Australia, An Identification Guide* (Victoria University Press: Wellington). of Dolphins are extremely short in Common Evans, W.E (1994) Common Dolphin, White-bellied duration (20-50 usee), with energy levels Porpoise Deiphinus delphis Linnaeus 1758. in s ' 'Handbook Marine Mammals, Vol 5 The I between 15 and 100 kHz (Evans 1994). of Handbook of Dolphins'. Eds S.H. Ridgway and R Harrison. (Academic Press: London). Comments Jefferson, T.A., Leathervvood, S. and Webber, M.A The Common Dolphin is widely distrib- (1993). 'FAO Species Identification Guide. Marine the World'. (FAO: Rome). uted (Evans 1994) in all tropical and tem- Mammals of Ross, G J.B. and Cockcroft V.G. (1990), Comments on perate seas (Warneke 1995). Common Australian Bottlenose Dolphins and the Taxonomic Dolphins are found both in shallow coastal Status of Tursiops aduncus. In 'The Bottlenose 101-128. Eds S. Leatherwood and R environments and in deep oceanic water Dolphin'. pp Reeves. (Academic Press: London). (Warneke 1995). Common Dolphins have Scarpaci, C (1997). The Distribution and Population been widely recorded in Australia, includ- Structure of the Bottlenose Dolphin {Tursiops (run- catus) in Port Phillip Bay, Victoria. (Unpublished ing Victoria, where it is the second most Honours Thesis, Victoria University of Technology, frequently stranded cetacean (Warneke Melbourne) Shane, H. (1990). Behaviour and Ecology of the Bottlenose Dolphin at Sanibel Island, Florida, hi kHz 'The Bottlenose Dolphin', pp 245-266 Eds S. R Reeves. (Academic Press: 5- Leatherwood and London) Silber, G.K., Newcomer M W, Silber PC, Perez- Cortes, II. and Ellis, G.M. (1994) Cetaceans of the Northern Gulf of California: distribution, occurrence, 0-2 0.4 and relative abundance. Marine Mammal Science 10, 283-298. Seconds Warneke, R.M. (1995). Common Dolphin. In 'Mammals of Victoria, Distribution, Abundance, spectrogram of whistle emission Fig. 3. Sound Ecology and Conservation', pp 282-283. Ed. P.W. by a Common Dolphin, Deiphinus cletphis. in Menkhorsi. (Oxford University Press; Melbourne). Port Phillip Bay, Victoria.

Vol. 116(2) 1999 67 Contributions

Calomnion complanatum: an Endangered Moss found in Victoria

David Meagher 1

A collection of bryophytes from wet for- leaf margins are irregularly denticulate to est on Wilsons Promontory has yielded entire. Cells in mid-leaf (similar in all specimens of the moss Calomnion com- leaves) are smooth and thin-walled, shortly planatum (Wilson) Lindberg, one of only rectangular to pentagonal but tending to be four mosses that are endangered in square or over-square near the leaf mar-

Australia (Scott et ai. 1997). This species is gins. I have not seen sporophytes. but they apparently common in suitable habitat in are described in detail in Sainsbury (1955). New Zealand (Beever et ai. 1992). but is Scott et at. (1997) gave this species a '3E' known in Australia with certainty only conservation status. That is, it is consid- from two previous collections: by W.W. ered to be in danger of extinction in Watts in New South Wales in 1903, and by Australia or is unlikely to survive if the lima Stone near Stanley. Tasmania, in 1980 factors that threaten its survival continue to

(Stone 1990). An earlier record attributed operate, and it is highly localised but has a to Tasmania (Whittier 1976, page 181) is range of more than 100 km. As the thought to be an error (Stone 1990). Victorian population appears to be con- The habitat in Tasmania and Victoria is fined to small colonies on only five tree- the trunks of Soft Tree-ferns Dicksonia ferns in an area where there is a consider- antarctica, and in New Zealand also almost able risk of natural or unnatural distur- always on certain tree-fern species (Beever bance, this status is still appropriate. et at. 1992). Because the shoots grow almost horizontally out from the tree-fern Acknowledgements Thanks to lima Stone for an enlightening discus- trunk, they are easily mistaken at first sion on her collection of Calomnion complana- glance for other tree-fern mosses of a simi- tum from Tasmania; Phil Wierzbowski of the lar size habit, and especially Rhizogonium Arthur Rylah Institute for helping to find and dtstichum, R. novaehollandiae, Hymenodon map the population: Paddy Dalton of the pilifer and young shoots of Lopidium University of Tasmania for advice on his own collection and that of concinnum. Calomnion. though, is unique Gunn; and the rangers at Wilsons Promontory National Park for in having a row of almost circular leaves on their support and assistance. the dorsal (upper) side of the stem (Fig. 1). Sainsbury (1955) mistakenly described this References row as 'ventral". Beever, J., Allison. K.W. and Child, J (!992>. The Mosses of New Zealand. Second edition. The yellow-green shoots are 10 to 15 mm (University of Otago Press: Dunedin). long, erect, unbranched and very delicate, Sainsbury, G.O.K.. (1955). A Handbook of the Musses arising from creeping caulonema. The of New Zealand. Bulletin No. 5. (Royal Society of New Zealand: Wellington). leaves are in three ranks, little altered Scott. G A.M., Enrwisle, T.J., May, T.W_ and Stevens, when dry. Two rows (the lateral rows) are G.N. (1997). A Conservation Overview of Australian almost opposite on the stem. The ovate to Non-marine Lichens, Bryophytes, Algae and Fungi. obovate leaves of these lateral rows (Wildlife Australia: Canberra). Stone, I.G. (1990). Nomenclatural changes and new increase in size towards the stem apex, moss records in Australia: including a description of widely spaced on the lower stem but more the protonema of Calomnion. Journal of Bryology 16:261-73. closely arranged and rather oblong at the Whittier, II O (1976). Mosses of the Society Islands. apex. The leaves of the third (dorsal) row (University Press of Florida: Gainesville, USA). are roughly circular all the way up the stem and are very variable in size, but tend Addendum to be larger towards the stem apex. The Since I prepared this article for publication- tips of these leaves are turned upwards. Paddy Dallon has told me that Whittier's Tasmanian record is probably All leaves are strongly nerved, the nerve attributable to a collection by R.C. Gunn held by the New York reaching the apex in the lateral leaves and Botanic Gardens (NY). Paddy lias also recently shortly excurrenl in the dorsal leaves. The found another population in Tasmania, near Cryplogamic Herbarium, The University of Slrahan (see Papers and Proceedings of the Melbourne, Parkville, Victoria 3052. Royal Society of Tasmania 132; 41-5).

68 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions *&2

20 \xxn cells in mid-leaf

0.5 mm

(a) lateral and (b) dorsal leaves whole shoot

Fig. 1 Calomnion complanatum (Wilson) Lindberg: shoot (dorsal view), cells of lateral leaf in mid- leaf, lateral leaf (ventral view) and dorsal leaf (drawn from herb. D.A. Meagher 01636}.

For assistance with the preparation of this issue, thanks to the computer team - Alistair Evans and Anne Morton. Thanks also to Felicity Garde (label printing) and Michael McBain (web page).

Vol. 116(2) 1999 69 Contributions

The Biography Behind the Bird:

Grey Honey eater Conopop ft ila white! (North 1910)

less Kloof

Abstract This paper describes the naming of the Cirey lloneyeatcr Conopophila whitei, the part played in its naming by ihe field Naturalists Club o( Victoria and a brief biography of Alfred Henry Ebsworth

J No/umlisi 1 70-72). White after whom the bird was named. ( The 'nionan 16 (2), 1099,

Introduction Naming the Bird Over ninety Australian birds commemo- 'Description of a new genus and species of rate individuals who have made a valuable honey-eater from Western Australia.' contribution to our ornithology. Tracing (Read before the Field Naturalists' Club of the original publication thai named and Victoria, 13* December, 1909). described a particular species is a fascinat- Remarks ... Lacustroica inconspicua ing aspect of bird lore. The scientific nam- would fittingly designate this modestly ing of a species is equally absorbing, as is plumaged little Honey-eater inhabiting the the translation of the Latin and Greek vicinity of Lake Way. but in response to a names (sec glossary). request from the owner of the specimens Priority is paramount in the naming of a |II.L. White], who has done so much new species, hence publication of the find, recently to advance Australian ornithology. description of the species and explanation I have associated with it the name of his of its name are all important. The Grey son, Mr Alfred Henry Ebsworth White,

Honey cater Conopophila whitei, with its who, although yet young in years, 1 am stronghold in Western Australia, inhabits informed is worthily following in his dense spinifex and thickets of mulga and father's footsteps. Although generically Other acacias. An inconspicuous little bird. allied to Entomophila^ White's Honey- occupying mainly inaccessible areas, it cater is an entirely new and distinct was discovered at Lake Wa\. East species, having no near ally, and may easi- Murchison District, on 19 July 1909 by F. ly be distinguished from any other member Lawson Whit lock. It was officially named of the family Meliphagidae inhabiting by Alfred J. North, Ornithologist to the Australia.* (North 1910).

Australian Museum. Sydney, in The We now know it as the Grey Honeyeater Victorian Naturalist in 1910. Conopophila whitei (Christians and Roles

This article is No. 7 in a series reproduc- 1994) (Fig. I). ing the actual published note naming the bird and including a brief biography of the person after whom the bird was named. Previous biographies in this series cover George Arthur Keartland (Kloot 1997). Thomas Carter (Kloot 1997/1998). John

Latham (Klool 1 998). Edwin Ashby and James Robert Beattie Love (Kloot 1*998). Elizabeth Gould (Kloot 1998) and Keith Hindwood (Kloot 1999).

As the naming of the Grey lioncyeater is associated with the Field Naturalists Club Fig. I. Grey Honeyeater whitei, of Victoria it might be of interest to mem- Conopophila Reproduced from 'Atlas of Australian Birds' bers to learn something of its story. (1984). M. Blakers. S.J.J F Davics and P.N Reilly (Royal Australasian Ornithologists Union. MUP Melbourne), By Richard Weatherlv. with permission from the artist and 8/ 1 14 Shannon Street, Box Hill North, Victona3l2<> Birds Australia

70 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

The Biography. at Geelong Grammar School until 1921. ALFRED HENRY EBSWORTH WHITE then went on to attend Jesus College. (1901-1964) Cambridge. By this time his prowess in the Alfred Henry Ebsworth White (Fig. 2) cricket world was well known. He played slipped into the history of Australian for Cambridge against South Africa, taking ornithology on the crest of the wave of his vital wickets and at the conclusion of the father's fame. His father was Henry Luke match was 53, not out. For his splendid White (1860-1927). the noted collector of efforts on behalf oi^ the team he was birds' eggs and skins. The H.L.White awarded his cricket blue. Returning to Collection of eggs and skins, in their very 'Belltrees* in 1924. his father put him fine cabinets made expressly for the pur- straight to work. The property was now a pose, were donated by him to the Victorian well established pastoral concern and with Museum where they remain todav the increased work load H.L.White was (Whittell 1954). very happy to have his son beside him. A If, as he was known, was born at Alf married Judy Coombe on 20 'Belltrees". New South Wales, on 18 September 1926. but by this time his father

October 1901. After two daughters his was too ill to attend the wedding (White

father was so delighted at his birth that he 1981 ). Four children were born to the cou- decided to build a new homestead, the pre- ple, one son and three daughters. sent day 'Belttrees*. After the death of H.L.White in 1927 the Wanting his son to follow in his own full responsibility for *Belltrees" fell on footsteps. H.L.White enrolled him in the Alfs 26-year-old shoulders, and from then [Royal Australasian Ornithologists' Union on he devoted his life to the property. A J at the age of eight, the youngest member strict, but just man. he earned respect from ever. Alf attended Geelong Grammar both friends and employees. Despite the School and although he did well scholasti- depression of the 1930s he drove his staff eally his real love was cricket, a sport al to maintain high standards. Dictatorial and which he excelled. He also acquired a rare impulsive he rejected criticism. However, knowledge of world geography. A reli- this stern facade concealed his shyness and gious lad. Alf was awarded a divinity gentle manner. prize. At school during the 1914-1918 war A stickler for tidiness. Alf was constantly he wanted to enlist but his father refused to engaged in clearing away such things as allow him to put up his age. He stayed on unused workmen's cottages and sadly. valuable ornithological data from his father's library. On the other hand he realized the historic value of some of the early buildings, and employed one of the best bush workers, a fencer who understood round timber and was brilliant with a mor- tising axe and adze, to restore an old slab store. 1 Ultimately, 'Beiltrees carried sheep, cattle and horses. During the 1950s, seasonal prices were good and the family enjoyed great prosperity, Over the desk in his office Alf had pinned his motto, 'The best fertiliser of any country is the footsteps of the owner' (White 1981). H. L.White had been strict with his children and Alf carried on this tradition with his own. although he mellowed in later Fig. 2. Master Alfred H.E While of Helltrees year! When his eldest daughter asked her Scone, September 1909 Reprinted from "The father's permission to announce her White iarnilv oi Belllrees' (1981), by Judy he suddenly realized how White (The Seven Press, Sydney), with permis- engagement 1 sion from the author Photo by S W Jackson, "Beiltrees had been his first concern to the

Vol. 116(2)1999 71 ,

Contributions

neglect of family life. By about 1952 the Glossary: - conops: gnat, phtlos: fond "despotic camouflage" (White 1981) start- Conopophila whitei of, whiter, after Alfred H.E. White son of H.L. ed to disintegrate and revealed a much White. kinder approachable person. very and A Lacustroica - lacus: lake, oicos: house. proud grandfather, he fired a twenty-one iticonspicua - inconspicuous. gun salute from the top balcony of the Eniomophila - entoma, insects, philos: fond of homestead to announce the arrival of the Meliphagidae - melr honey, phagein: to eat (Wolstenholme 1926). first White grandson! The last ten years of Alf s life were filled References with contentment. ^Belltrees' had reached Chnstidis, L. and Boles, WE (1994). The Taxonom> and Species of Birds of Australia and its Territories', a very high standard of excellence; the RAOU Monograph 2. (Royal Australasian stock, property, buildings and fences were Ornithologists Union: Melbourne.) in immaculate condition. He had attained Kloot, T. (1997). Keartland, George Arthur. VORO Notes 32, 19-21. felt dele- his goal and that he could now Kloot. T. (1997/1998). Thomas Carter. Hint Observer gate responsibilities to his only son. 781, 10-11. Kloot, (1998). Dr John Latham (1740-1837) Bird Michael. He and his wife travelled widely, T Observer 785, 18-19. both within Australia and overseas. Kloot, T. (1998). Gibberbird Ashbvia lovensis [Edwin Christmas, when the entire family gathered Ash by and James Robert Beattie Love] Australian Birdwatcher 17,297-300. at 'Belltrees' were perhaps his happiest Kloot, T. ( 1998) Elizabeth (Eliza) Gould (1804-1841). times. Hint Observer 791, 12-13 Alfred died suddenly on 6 March 1964. Kloot, T. (in press). Eungella Honeyeater [Keith Hindwood]. Australian Hints 31 Although he made no real contribution to North, A.J, (1910). Description of a new genus and ornithology and will be remembered as the species Of honey-eater from Western Australia The son of the famous Henry Luke White, he Victorian Naturalist xxvi, 138-139. White, J. (1981). 'The White Family of BELLTREES" deserves a place in our ornithological his- (The Seven Press: Sydney.) tory, with his name perpetuated in the Whittell, H.M. (1954). 'The Literature of Australian Grey Honeyeater Conopophila whitei. Birds". (Paterson Brokensha: Perth.) Wolstenholme, H. (1926). Appendix: Scientific names - notes and pronunciation. In 'The Official Checklist of Birds of Australia' (Royal Australasian

Ornithologists Union : Melbourne.)

One Hundred Years Ago

NOTES ON THE BIRDS OF THE BOX HILL DISTRICT

By Robert Hall

(Read before the Field Naturalists' Club of Victoria, 1 3th February, 1899)

Mn this, the concluding paper of the series on the birds of the Box Hill district, 1 wish to bring under your notice the introduced birds of the district, which number in all seven species. Six of them, viz., the Thrush, Blackbird. Goldfinch, Greenfinch, Sparrow, and Starling, are imports from Western Europe, while the seventh is the Indian Myna. All are town birds, and pass their time in close proximity to the little townships of the district, especially Box Hill proper

'I will conclude with a brief recapitulation of the birds dealt with in these notes. Altogether 113 species, including the introduced birds, have been referred to, besides which there are some 10 species which are only very casual visitors. Approximately, 43 of these reside with us all the year round, while 70 are migrants, arriving here with the advent of spring. Sixty species have been found breeding here. Grouping them accord-

ing to their rarity. I would say that 42 are common. 43 less common, and 28 rare. Birds prey are of represented by 8 species: passerine birds, 88; patrols, 9; pigeons. 1; game birds, 2; hemipodes, I; and waders, 5.*

The Victorian Naturalist XV, pp 156-159. April 1899,

72 The Victorian Naturalist Tribute

Jean Galbraith 28 March 1906 - 2 January 1999 A Tribute

1 Helen I. Aston

The death of Jean Galbraith. aged 92 tained until prevented by age. She wrote years, marks the end of a lifetime of ser- about it. showed people through it, and vice to botany, naturalists, natural history treasured both its plants and the many birds organisations and gardeners, and the pass- which came to it. Although 'Dunedin' had ing of a truly loveable and remarkable to be sold out of the family in February woman. 1997, it is a titling tribute to Jean that it is Jean was born at Tyers, near Traralgon, now restored and maintained by the local Victoria, on 28 March 1906 and lived there purchasers. Max and 01 he Arehbold, under for most of her life. Tor 79 years she lived the name "Garden in a Valley*, and opened in her beloved home of 'Duncdin', only to the public at weekends.

leaving it in July 1993 with great reluc- Jean's knowledge of botany and tance but with full acceptance of her need Australian native plants developed apace for care in advancing years. She moved after she met the noted amateur botanist first to a unit at 'Yallambee' village in ll.B. Williamson at the FNCV wildflower Traralgon and then in 1996 to 'Olivet' show in 1922. when she was only 16 years nursing home at Ringwood, Melbourne, old. Struck by her keeness. Williamson where she died peacefully on 2 January offered to help and in The Victorian this year. Naturalist 97: 1 16 (1980) Jean wrote how

From early childhood Jean displayed a ... for the next ten years he identified great love of the natural world and a sensi- plants for me almost every week and intro- tivity and wonderment at its beauty and duced me to Mueller's Key, which I slow ly diversity. Her enjoyment of natural things learned to use." and of life in general was intense, her Jean joined the Field Naturalists Club of enthusiasm infectious, and her hospitality Victoria as a country member in December legendary. Friends and visitors alike were 1923. She soon became a frequent contrib- welcomed to her home and those in trouble utor of articles to The Victorian Naturalist. or in sorrow turned to her. She held a deep contributing a total of 128 from 1925 Christian (Christadelphian) faith which onwards over a span of filly-six years, sustained her at all times and shines Most of these have either birds or plants as through in her writings. their subject, but a smattering of titles Although Jean had limited formal educa- encompassed other topics such as local tion, leaving school at the age of 14. she areas, spiders, tree-frogs, and mammals. read avidly on wide-ranging topics from Particularly notable is a contribution of 43 the classics to science. By the age of 19 articles on Australian Wattles which she herself was already a published author, appeared during 1959 to 1964. Fach article although her major works were still to demonstrates Jean's 'plain English' ability come. Her enthusiasm for writing never in descriptions and her own enjoyment and waned, and besides the main gardening capacity in enlivening text with the feeling and botanical publications mentioned she held for her subject. Short notes which below she wrote poetry and several books help to bring each plant delightfully to the and many articles for children. reader's eye follow each description. For Both of Jean's parents were keen garden- example, for Acacia alpina she wrote (Vic. ers, and gardens were also a major passion Nat. 79: 65; 1962) \..On the few high

alone it grows ... it looks in Jean's life. It was Jean and her parents mountains where who designed and developed the garden at completely and cheerfully at home', and T)unedin\ which Jean tended and main- for Acacia glandulicarpa (Vic, Nat. 79: 166: 1962) 'the blossom is so abundant 7/3 Hazel Street, Cainberwcll, Victoria 3124

Vol. 116(2) 1999 73 Tribute that whole hushes look golden, like gay and more latterly, Irom 1985-1992, for The clouds along the dry roadsides'. Her final Ige newspaper, Melbourne. Those which contribution to The Victorian Naturalist appeared in the Harden Lover between was an important historical article titled August 1943 and June 1946 were repub-

BotQnktS and (he I- NCI' - the fust W lished as the book A Garden Lover's *>7 years.{Vlc Nat 1 M-120, I9K0) Journal in 19X9. each telling joyfully of When field naturalist's clubs were garden happenings at 'Dunedin' and of (lie formed in Sale, llairnsdnle ami the Lalrohe country life around. Ihe full Story of Valley, ihey increased the opportunities for 'Duncdiif is beautifully told in .lean's participation with local naturalists. Jean hook Garden in a Valley, first published played a key role in the establishment Of in 1939, it was republished in 19X5 to Ihe the Lalrohe Valley Field Naturalists Club delighl ol many.

(lust known as the (iippsland I\N,( ,) in Undoubtedly lean's landmark botanical

i i )()0. ami was a founding member of it, publication appeared in 1950, when her She became a valued speaker, excursion Wildflowers of Victoria lust came off the leader, and mentor, and hei Involvement press Irom ( 'olorgravure Publications, will) litis Chili from its inception onwaid , Melbourne. With short, simple-language was greatly instrumental in its develop* descriptions of approximately 1000 species ment and growth, she was also a sometime and 175 close-up, black and white pho- lecturei iii the Mi Beaut) summer schools tographs, it filled a great void for natural- run by the Council of Adult Education. ists Ihe earlier work of E.E. Pescott, Although she had no ear. offers of trans- Native I lowers of Victoria (1914), had port were rcadil) forthcoming and she become unobtainable and that of A.J. travelled widely within Australia. She was I wart. Flora of Victoria (1931), was rare a prolific correspondent with her man) and expensive. In addition, neither ol" these contacts, fell kecnls ihe need foi conserva- works had the same easy-to-use text and tion of natural areas, and was active in the Illustrations of Jean's volume, which was preparation ol conservation submissions to published in two further editions in 1955 government authorities, As a practical and I9n7 before being superceded by her measure foi conservation, she donated land grcatl) expanded and equally popular at lyers lor the Brsl wildllower sanctuary Field Guide ti> the Wild Flowers o/ South* established, in 1936, b\ the Native Plants East Australia {1977), Preservation Society of Victoria. Jean Galbraith was elected a foundation lean formed hei own reference herbari* life member of (he Society for Growing inn of plants collected both locally and on Australian Plants at its formation in 1957 hei travels in all Slates. She shared her and was also honoured with life member- knowledge with both amateurs and profes- ship of Ihe Victorian National I'arks sionals alike and any planl which appeared Association, the Native Plants Preservation UnUSUal to her disccrninc, e\ c was sent to Society, and ihe Latrobe Valley Field Ihe National Herbarium ol Victoria for Naturalists tint). In April 1959 she was assessment. Main ol hei collections are elected an honorary life member o\' Ihe there lodged pcnnanculh She hei. ell WBS I N( V and in 1970 she was awarded Ihe a frequent visitor to ihe National Australian Natural llisiorv Medallion foi

Herbarium* working through the collec- having conveyed ' interest in natural histo- tions as she complied information for her id and conservation to the general commu- botanical writings, and never arriving nity, and stimulated people to a grealei without a boiled fruit cake or similai offer- awareness of our natural heritage". She ing lo add to Ihe staff lea lable. was only Ihe fourth woman to receive ibis Writing WttS essential to .lean, who rev- aw aid since its inception in 1939. Her elled 111 I u lei man) contributions to The alertness has been responsible for the dis- Victorian Vamralist have already been cover ol new plant species and of exten- mentioned. She wrote gardening articles sions of Ihe known range of rarer ones, foi The lustralian Garden Lover from fWO species of plants have been named 1976 undei the name of Voirca". for alter her. naineh Dampiera galbralthiur (iar,/en lor some \ears from 1954 (Lelorea v 204; 1988) and Boronia gal-

74 The Victorian Naturalist Tribute braithiae (Muetleria 8: 24; 1993). In Further Reading describing the latter species the author Anonymous (1999). In memory of Jean Galbraith.

I.atrobe I'allev Naturalist 416; 1 * acknowledged Jean with this tribute: ... Baines, J.A. (1976). Galbraith, (Miss) Jean. In The doyenne of Victorian botanists. ... whose Victorian Naturalist. Author Index 1884-1975 collections and writings have contributed (FNCV; Melbourne) pp 128-133 Galbraith, J. (1977), A Field Guide to the Wild Flowers much to our knowledge of flora of the Of South-East Australia (Collins London) Gippsland region*. Galbraith, J. (1985). Garden in a Valley (Five Mile Much more could be written on Jean Press: Hawthorn) Galbraith, J (1989) A Garden Lover's Journal 1943- Galbraith the person, her life, and her con- 1946. (Five Mile Press Fjtzroy).

1. (1997). Galbraith, a brief tribution to others. I treasure the memories Hyndman, Jean account of her life and work, In Andrew and Sarah Galbraith I have of her and feel very privileged to and Family Pioneers of Beechworth and Tyers. have known such a unique and selfless per- (Bethel Publications: Beechworth). pp. 146-151. son. Warm and friendly, joyful in her Landy, L. (Oct. -Nov. 1992). The lore of nature Australian ( ountn Style, pp 90-93 Christian faith, generous, cheerful, com- Latreille, A (14 Jan 1999). Botanist radiated enthusi- passionate and caring, yet ever-modest, she asm. Obituary Jean Galbraith The Australian, p 10 Nieholls, J (1986) Gippsland naturalists had a remarkable and endearing personali- Two Gippsland Heritage Journal I: 33-37, ty will not be forgotten by all those which Swain, A J. and Willis, J 11. (1970) Award of the who knew her. Australian Natural History Medallion Tin- Victorian Naturalist 87:297-298

lean Galbraith. surrounded by the flowers she loved so much, in her garden at M)unedin Ian Ikechworth. the Garden in a I alley). Photo kindly supplied by Hyndman.

Vol. 116(2) 1999 75 Book Review

A Rich and Diverse Fauna: the History of the Australian National Insect Collection 1926 - 1991

Murray S. Upton

Publisher: CSIRO Publishing. Collmgwood, Victoria. 1997. xx + 385 pp. RRP $59.95

From its inception, CSIRO's Division of ulately preserved while others were in poor Entomology has concentrated on agricul- array but containing valuable type speci- tural problems and pest species; ils first mens. This is the chapter that contains the two projects involved cattle ticks and ter- stories of theft and mislaying of loans. mites. It is a consequence of such applied Numerous departmental reviews, interna- research that a large collection of insects is tional pressures and interstate rivalries fill accumulated, bringing with it a strong chapter 10, culminating in the recognition demand for taxonomic work. As it is now of ANIC and its place within CSIRO. called, the Australian National Insect Chapter 14 produces the new building and

Collection (ANIC) is housed within the moves the collection into it. Division of Entomology and comprises Taxonomy is intimately connected with about eight million specimens. This book applied research and the housing and use tells the story of its first 65 years but, in of the collection. There are examples in spite of its subtitle, it imbeds the story of this book of biological control programs ANIC within the story of the Division, which did not work, or were not necessary. mirroring real life. It was not until 1962 because the target pest was incorrectly that the name ANIC was gazetted and it identified. Chapter 5 contains lots of early took until 1980 before it moved into a ded- taxonomic research projects while those icated building. undertaken after about 1961 are detailed in first The three chapters describe the chapter 13. Also included in this chapter inception of CSIR; its first Chief are the publication of CSIRO journals and Entomologist, the brilliant but tempera- the monumental Insects of Australia. A mental R.J. Tillyard; and the establishment lengthy discussion of the debate concern- of the entomological laboratory in ing the resting place for holotypes takes up Canberra. Thereafter the author arranges all of chapter 15. In the context of the the chapters, not chronologically, but by whole history of the Division and the topic and this can lead to some repetition. Collection it probably takes too much For review perhaps it is best to group the space but the author's personal involve- chapters into 'collecting', 'curating*. 'tax- ment is probably the reason for the bias. onomy ' and 'staff. Finally, 'staffing' matters are covered in Early 'collecting* is covered in chapter 6. chapters 4 and IE with the end of World with chapter 7 being devoted to Bill War 2 marking the separation. Comings Brandt's heroic efforts in Papua New and goings of taxonomists and major Guinea. Chapter 12 details the collecting events are faithfully recorded. expeditions since 1960. Each trip lists the Between each chapter, throughout the staff involved, the route taken, the hard- book, are valuable archival photographs of ships encountered and, occasionally, some personnel and places. Ten appendices of the important specimens found. detail staff, donated collections, standing 'Curating' in very a general sense starts in orders, grants, publications and surveys. A chapter 8 when the laboratory was set up. a comprehensive bibliography is included. curator appointed, policies established and This is an important history to have been the detail of storage problems overcome. written and, as it was the author who gath- Chapter 9 emphasises the debt which the ered and systematised the ANIC Archives collection owes to gifts from both amateur during his term as curator and manager of and professional collectors over the years. - the collection, he was probably best suited Absolute numbers are astounding with to produce it. Nevertheless, some of his donations of tens of thousands of speci- biases show. It is not difficult to see his mens from individuals. Some were immac- contributions to ANIC and CSIRO were in

76 The Victorian Naturalist Information Kit Review

the leading of field trips, manufacture of by the rule that it must be a direct refer- unusual equipment, and the minutiae of ence to the CSIRO. Peripheral people and euration techniques. Close reading will institutions miss out. reveal his subtle but political comment on If you have any interest in Australia's the vicissitudes of both Collection and entomological history then you should read Division. Three last comments on style: this book, all the famous names are there the book does demonstrate a curator's and their struggles (against bureaucracy mentality: a reluctance to throw out any and funding cuts) and triumphs are repeat-

item (e.g. the travel allowance for the use ed periodically. It might be of some com- of a member's own bicycle was 2 '4d per fort to know that current difficulties are not mile in 1930). Secondly, the first lime a unique, and the fit tend to survive. The new player is introduced a potted biogra- book has received a Whitley Award in the phy of qualifications and prior experience history of Australian zoology category, is included. Perhaps they would be better

included as another appendix as it does Ian Endersby break the flow of reading. Finally, inclu- *>b Looker Road, Montmorency. Victoria 3094 sion of an item in the index seems to work

Endangered Ecosystem Series

Publisher: Victorian National Parks Association. 10 Parliament Place, East Melbourne, Victoria 3002

RRP $ 1 0. 00 each or $24. 00 full set (postage included)

Looking after mation could be rewritten to suit younger Native Grasslands and Grassy students. The kit itself would be an excellent Woodlands resource for levels 5-7 secondary school studies in SOSE and Science key learning It is not often as a teacher you can pick areas. The plant lists are an excellent basis up a kit and get all the information you for classification activities and would lend would need to prepare a teaching unit. This themselves to excursion activities such as kit satisfies that requirement. As a primary writing dichotomous keys. The action sec- teacher I find that this kit would satisfy my lion could be used as a stimulus for the for- learning needs to guide students through mation of an environmental club practising the investigative process of establishing a grassland conservation, or as a unit of work sound basis of grasslands education. The concentrating on grasslands. action section. 'What You Can Do* is a VCK students would find this kit an particularly valuable resource. Many docu- excellent resource in the biology, environments suggest to take action but few give mental studies and geography areas. The practical ideas of how to do this. The information is excellent and the Contact in action activities this document are rea- and Resources list invaluable as a resource sonably simple to do and are readily avail- for further research. able for most teaching situations. The As is, the kit could serve as an excellent Native Grassland Site Visit Sheet would be resource document for student research and difficult for most younger students. A would be great addition to any school or teacher could easily adapt the ideas how- home library. I recommend this kit to any- lor their ever, and produce a sheet suitable one who is involved in, or is considering students. The site visit information grasslands as a teaching unit. It has excel- brochures included in the kit are an excellent information, great action ideas and lent excursion resource and relevant infor- what's more doesn't take an eon to read.

Vol. 116(2)1999 77 Information Kit Review

Looking after Looking after Marine and Coastal Areas Box and Ironbark Forests and Woodlands This kit is one of the most concise docu-

ments I have read on the state of Marine Did you know that if there are enough Ecology in Victoria. At times it is rather trees to form a canopy that shades 30% or depressing. As a resource document it more of the ground it is a forest. If the area would be excellent for teachers or older is less than 30% shade, the plant community students studying the marine area. For is called a woodland? This fact and many VCE it would be a valuable starting point more you will read in the Box and Ironbark for research. The contacts and reference Information Kit. Written in a similar man- section is excellent. ner to the Grasslands and the Marine and As a teacher I would use this kit more as a Coastal Kits, this I feel is an essential resource for myself rather than using it as a resource to any school library. Teachers kit for students. While the information is from Prep to VCE would find this kit use- excellent and students need know the facts, ful. A particularly interesting section I feel I feel some parts of the document are all for older students was Information Sheet 9. 'doom and gloom' and would be better This section covered some of the govern- interpreted by educators. Students need to ment legislation involved in the Box and be empowered to act, not to feel action is a Ironbark Forests. While the information was lost cause. If not interpreted properly some minimal, it gives a good overview of some students may only see the negatives of this of the legislation involved in conservation document. processes in Victoria.

I found information sheets 1 and 2 partic- I found that 1 read this document with ularly informative. The concise descrip- bird and flora identification books beside tions of the terms and the types of habitats me. This made Sections 3 and 5 far more were simply written and easily understood. meaningful. Even though there is a refer- These would be an excellent starting point ence list in the document 1 would suggest a for any marine study. list of readily available guides to flora and Unfortunately, unlike the other kits in fauna in Victoria would be beneficial and this series, the Marine kit did not include a should be used along with the kit. site visit sheet. These sheets may not The Box-lronbark Site Visit Sheet is always be suitable for all levels of students extremely helpful and could be used as an but serve as a guide for educators to pro- excursion guide for any teacher. The infor- duce their own sheet. The information in mation sheets for the four park areas are the document and the site visit brochures excellent resources and could be utilised are sufficient for teachers to produce their by teachers in many ways. own sheets however. My immediate reaction to this kit was I would recommend this kit as a valuable one of I don't know enough about these resource for all teachers and VCE students areas and need to do some more research, and it would be a suitable resource to have visiting and teaching about these limited in the teachers' resource section in any and threatened areas of Victoria. For this library. reason, plus the fact that this, like the other kits in this series is excellent, 1 would recommend that it be purchased as an important resource in any teachers and school library.

Barbara Sharp Education Unit, Melbourne Zoo. P.O. Box 74. Parkville, Victoria 3052.

78 The Victorian Naturalist 8 1

Legislation

Flora and Fauna Guarantee Act 1988

The following Flora and Fauna Guarantee Scientific Advisory Committee

Recommendation Reports have been received. The number following each listing is the nomination number. Final Recommendations Reports No. 458 Supported for listing on Schedule 2: Leek-orchid. Fragrant Prasophyllum Flora suaveolens -No. 451 Daisy, Yellow-tongue Brachyscome Liverwort Pseudoeephalozia paludicoia - chrysoglossa - No. 449 No. 462 Fauna Spider-orchid. Dwarf Caladenia pumila - Bittern. Black Ixobrychus flavicollis aus- No. 455 tralis - No. 450 Spider-orchid, Short Caladenia Bittern. Little Ixobrvchus mimttus - brachyscapa - No. 454 No. 439 Sun-orchid, Basalt Thelvmitra gregaria Crake, Bailloivs Porzana pusilla - No. 463 No. 447 Sun-orchid. Winter Thelvmitra hiemalis ~ Kite. Square-tailed Lophoictinia isura No. 464 No. 444 Swainson-pea, Downy Swainsona swain- Rail, Lewin's Drvolimnas pectoralis sonioides - No. 452 No. 446 Water-shield Brasenia schreberi - No. 437 Shark, Great White Carcharodon car- Fauna

char ias -No. 419 Albatross. Sooty Phoebetria fusca - No. Terru Caspian Sterna caspia - No. 443 442 Tern. Gull-billed Sterna nilotica - No. 438 Shark, Grey Nurse Carcharias taurus - Communities No. 420 Devonian Limestone Pomaderris Communities Shrubiand Community - No. 429 Coastal Moonah {Melaleuca lanceolata Grey Box - Buloke Grassy Woodland subsp. lanceolata) Woodland Community -No. 434 Community - No. 460 Limestone Grassy Woodland Community Lowland Riverine Fish Community of the -No. 428 southern Murrav-Darling Basin - No. Semi-arid Herbaceous Pine Woodland 459 Community -No. 432 Not supported listing: Semi-arid Herbaceous Pine- Buloke for Fauna Woodland Community -No. 433 Albatross. Black-browed Diomedea Semi-arid Northwest Plains Buloke Grassy melanophrys -No. 441 (Threatening Woodland Community -No. 43 process occurs in oceanic waters beyond Semi-arid Shrubby Pine - Buloke Woodland Victorian jurisdiction) -No. 430 Albatross, Shy Diomedea cauta - No. 440 Not supported for listing: (Threatening process occurs in oceanic Gum. Yellow Eucalyptus leucoxylon subsp waters beyond Victorian jurisdiction) connata - No. 448 (significance of Albatross. Wandering Diomedea exulans - threats to the survival of the species not No. 423 (Threatening process occurs in sufficiently demonstrated) oceanic waters beyond Victorian jurisdic- Preliminary Recommendations Reports tion) Supported for listing on Schedule 2: Items considered invalid for listing: Flora Flora Daisy. Dookie Brachyscome gracilis Swainson-pea. Red Swainsona plagiotro- subsp. gracilis - No. 4 1 pis - No. 139 (Already listed on Donkey-orchid Diuris tricolor - No. 457 Schedule 2, No. 109) Duck-orchid. Grampians Caleana sp. aff. Fauna nigrita - No. 456 Frog, Giant Burrowing Heleioporus Greenhood, Robust Pterostylis valida -

Vol. 116(2)1999 79 australiacus -No. 241 (Already listed on Other Documents Schedule 2, No. 114) A list of flora (including communities) Invalid Nomination protected under the Flora and Fauna Promotion and protection of environmental Guarantee Act 1988. weeds - No. 445 (Subject considered to Schedule 2 - list of taxa and communities be covered by The Invasion of Native of flora or fauna which are threatened. Vegetation by Environmental Weeds Schedule 3 - list of potentially threatening Schedule 3, No. 360) processes. An index of items nominated for listing Preliminary Recommendation Reports that have been considered by the Supported for listing on Schedule 3: Scientific Advisory Committee and the Potentially Threatening Processes status of the nomination. Human activity which results in artificially Items added to schedules of the Flora and elevated or epidemic levels of Myrtle Fauna Guarantee Act 1988. Wilt within Nothofagus-domimted Cool Temperate Rainforest - No. 453

Incidental catch (or by-catch) of seabirds Copies of all FFG documents are held in during longline fishing operations - No. the FNCV library. 424

The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc. RegNoA00336llX '

Established 1880 In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria

OBJECTIVES: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian flora and fauna.

Membership is open to any person interested in natural history and includes beginners as well as experienced naturalists.

Registered Office: FNCV, 1 Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. Postal Address: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, P.O. Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. Phone/Fax (03) 9877 9860; International Phone/Fax 61 3 9877 9860.

Patron His Excellency, The Honourable James Gobbo, The Governor of Victoria

Key Office-Bearers President: Dr TOM MAY, c/- National Herbarium, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra 3141 9257 2319 Vice Presidents: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER and MR JOHN SEEBECK Acting Hon. Secretary: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, 1 Astley Street, Montmorency 3094 9435 8408 Hon. Treasurer: Mr ARNIS DZEDINS, PO Box 1000, Blind Bight 3980 5998 7996 Subscription-Secretary: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. 9877 9860 Editor, The Vic. Nat: Mrs MERILYN GREY, 8 Martin Road, Glen Iris 3146 9889 6^23 Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCV. Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130 AH 54^8 4097 Excursion Co-ordmator. Mr DENNIS MELTZER, 8 Harcourt Ave, Caufield 3162 95^ 1853 Book Sales: Dr ALAN PARKIN, FNCV. Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130 AH 9850 ?6t7 Book Brokerage: Mr RAY WHITE, 20 Alfred Street, Essendon 3040. 9379 3602 Newsletter Editor DrNOEL SCHLEIGER, 1 Astley Street, Montmorency 3094 9435 8408 Conservation Coordinator: Ms JENNY WILSON, RMB 2930, Euroa 3666. 5798 5535

Group Secretaries Botany: Mr RAY MACPHERSON, 8 Jean Street. Lower Templestowe 3107. 9850 4319 Geology: Mr ROB HAMSON, 5 Foster Street, McKinnon 3204. 9557 5215 FaunaSurvey: Ms SUSAN MYERS, 1 7A Park Street, Hawthorn 3122 98W539 Marine Research: Mr MICHAEL LYONS. 2/18 Stonnington Place, Toorak 3 142 AH 98">2 8007 Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 SchoUers Road, Mernda 3754. 9717 3511

Printed by Brown Prior Anderson, 5 Evans Street, Burwood, Victoria 3125. Th Victorian Naturalist

Volume 116 (3) June 1999

Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria since 1884 Naturalist Note

A Bizarre Ant

A most unusual-looking ant was collect- (Collembola) which it hunts with its ed at Wilsons Promontory during the mandibles wide open. Sensory hairs on the research weekend in October 1998. It was inner part of the mandibles are triggered found in one of the traps set in the burnt when they touch the prey and the jaws heath site (38°54'21" S, 146°21W E). close on the Collembola (Brown 1953). The distinctive features of this moderately- The strike is, of necessity, extremely rapid sized (c 5 mm), rust-coloured ant include: since the escape response of a Springtail the form of the mandibles {parallel sided species has been measured at 4 millisec- and very elongate), the spines and other onds (four thousandths of a second) protuberances on the trunk, and the heart- (Holldobler and Wilson 1994). If the shaped head with strongly developed Springtails preyed on by O. clarki behave occipital lobes. The antennae are also in a similar way, then this ant has to sense unusual in that they only have five seg- its prey and close its jaws within this time ments instead of the usual 1 I or 12. Erich - speed indeed! Sacco has drawn the specimen (front cover References of this issue) which illustrates these char- Andersen. A.N. (19-91). 'The Ants of Southern acteristics. Australia - a Guide to the Bassian Fauna". (CS1RO: The ant keyed out to the genus Australia). Brown. W.L. Jr, (1953). A Revision of the Dateline in the sub-family Orectognathus Anl Genus Orectognitthus. Memoirs of the Myrmicinae. Additional information indi- Queensland Museum 13, 84-104. cated that only one species of this genus Holldobler. B. and Wilson. E.O. (1994). 'Journey to the Ants'. (Harvard University Press: Cambridge. Victoria - was known from O. clarki Massachusetts, USA). (Andersen 1991).

While the appearance of this anl is E.J. Grey bizarre, its feeding habits are remarkable. 8 Woona Court, The species feeds on Springtails Yallambie. Victoria 30X5.

Corrigendum

The editor has received correspondence pointing out the following misdetermination which should be corrected. The determination o( the liverwort referred to in 'The Biogeography o( Pseiidovephahzla puludicola R.M. Schuster; an Endemic Australian Liverwort' by

Jon SagO, (The Victorian Naturalist 115 (3), 1998, 84-86) is incorrect. The liverwort has now been assigned as Lepidoziu laevifolia. Also, please correct the perianth mea-

surement in Para. I , p. 84 o\' the article to 2 x 0.25 mm. The drawing on p. 85 is of Pseudocephalozia paludicoia R.M. Schuster, but the magnifications are incorrect. The correct magnifications for the drawing o\^ the leaf

and undeiieaf are \ 1 00.

82 The Victorian Naturalist 25 T Victorian Naturalist

Volume 116(3) 1999 June

Editor; Merilyn Grey

Research Report Effect of Fire Frequency on Plant Composition at the Laverton

North Grassland Reserve, Victoria, by /. Lttnt and J. Morgan 84

Contributions Thin-skinned Tectonics: its Application in Western Victoria, by D. Taylor ..92

An Australian Sea Lion on Phillip Island, Victoria.

/?v R. Kirkwood 7. Hibble and I. Jerret ..98

Hydroids from Ricketts Point and Black Rock, Victoria,

by J. Watson and the late D. Mclnnes 102

The Booroolong Frog Litoria booroolongensis Moore (Anura: Hylidae): an Addition to the Frog Fauna of Victoria,

by G. Gillespie and D. Hunter 1 1

Naturalist Notes A Bizarre Ant, by E, Grey 82

The Beetle Gondwanennebous minutissimus Kaszab (Coleoptera: Archeocrypticidae) - a First Record for Victoria, byE. Grey 91

Book Reviews A Forester's Log: the Story of John La Gerche and the Ballarat-Creswick State Forest 1882-1897, by Angela Taylor, reviewer L. Gillbank 97

Dawn Till Dusk: In the Stirling and Porongurup Ranges,

by Rob Olver and Stuart Olver, reviewer C. FalMngham I 1

Corrigendum Volume 115 (3), 1998. pp. 84-86 82

114 Erratum Volume I 16 (2), 1999, p. 46

ISSN 0042-5184

Cover: A bizarre ant, Orectognathus clarki. This ant is about 5 mm long. (See Naturalist Note on p. 82.) Drawing by Erich Sacco.

Find us on the WEB: http://calcite.apana.org.au/fnev/ email: [email protected] Research Report

Effect of Fire Frequency on Plant Composition at the Laverton North Grassland Reserve, Victoria

Ian D. Lunt 1 and John W. Morgan-

Abstract The pkmt composition ol two adjacent /ones with different fire histories was documented at the Lav- erton North Grassland Reserve, in western Melbourne. One area remained unburn! for 17 years, from 1978 until 1995. The other /one was burnt six times during this period. Both /ones were burnt JO months before sampling in November 1996. The two /ones were superficially similar in 1978,

but differed substantially in 1990. In 1 996. the rarely burnt /one was dominated by exotic species

(49% cover e.f. 407f- native cover), whereas the frequently burnt /one was dominated by native ( species \12'/f cover) with just 7 /f exotic cover. Nearly half of the species recorded (22 species) differed significantly in cover between the two fire /ones. The largest differences were for the exotic Cat's Far Hypochoeris radicala (t^Wc mean cover in the rarely burnt /one e.\\ \'/< in the frequently burnt /one) and Kangaroo Grass Tlwmeda triantlm (22' f in the rarely burnt /one e.f. 63% in the frequently burnt /one). The density of live Kangaroo Grass tussocks in the rarely burnt area was only 30% of [hat in the frequently burnt /one. These differences are assumed to reflect different fire histories rather than underlying environmental patterns. The long-term absence of burning has caused the death of many Kangaroo Grass tussocks and promoted many perennial exotic weeds. The need for frequent biomass removal in productive Kangaroo Grass grasslands is emphasised. (Tke Victorian Naturalist 116 (3). I<)99. pp. S4-90).

Introduction

It has long been known that extended assessed. There were no obvious differences intervals without grass removal (by burn- between the control and adjacent areas ini- ing, light grazing or slashing) can lead to tially (Bob Parsons, pen. comm., July substantial losses of native plant diversity 1998). The control area remained unburn! in many grasslands dominated by for 17 years, until it and surrounding areas Kangaroo Grass Themcda Iriandra in were burnt in March 1995. south-eastern Australia (Stuwe and Despite its small size and the lack of repli- Parsons 1977; Scarlett and Parsons 1982. cate controls, the long-unburnl area at 1990). For this reason, most grassland Laverton provides a valuable opportunity to management plans incorporate the need for document the impacts of the prolonged frequent biomass reduction (e.g. Craiaie exclusion of bunting and grazing, especially and Stuwe 1992; DCE 1992). However. given the existence of detailed knowledge despite the widespread acceptance of this about the management history of the plot recommendation, feu studies have docu- and surrounding areas. In this paper, we mented the long-term outcomes o{ failing describe and contrast the plant composition to regularly remove grass biomass. o( the long-unburnt area and an adjacent The Laverton North Grassland Reserve. area which was burnt six times during the n 20 km southwest of Melbourne (37 5TS, past 17 years, and we discuss the relevance , I44°48 r3) has been managed for grassland of these results for grassland conservation. conservation since 1978. Grazing stock have been excluded during this period and Methods the reserve has been intermittently burnt. Two adjacent areas within the Laverton From 1978 to 1995, all disturbances (inc- North reserve were examined. The 'fre- luding fire) were intentionally excluded quently burnt" zone was burnt six times from one small, triangular area of about 2.5 after 1978: in March 1980. March 1983. ha, which acted as a 'control* plot against March 1985, February 1987. 1990 (month which the effects of burning could be unknown) and March 1995 (McDougali 1989; J. Morgan unpitbi. data). By con- the JnhnMiiNL- Ccnin.-, Charles Slurl University. P() trast, the rarely burnt zone was burnt only BOx 7H9 Albury. NSW 2040. School of Botany, ha Trobe University, Bundoom. once during this period, in March 1995. 17 Victoria 5083

84 The Victorian Naturalist Research Report years after reservation. Both zones were Results sampled in Novembei 1996, 20 months The classification analysis clearly sepa- after the most recent fire. rated all frequently burnt quadrats from all Five, parallel, 50 m long transects were laiely burnt quadrats, indicating that the located 40-50 ro apart in the frequently vegetation of both /ones was substantially burnt /one. and five in the infrequently different. The percentage covei o\' native burnt zone. Transects in the two /ones and exotic species differed between the were approximately ISO m apart. A I m two /ones (Table I). The frequently burni quadrat was sampled every 5 m along each /one was dominated by native species 50 m transect, giving 100 quadrats in all (72 ( y cover) with relatively little cover o\ r (50 in the frequently burnt zone and 50 in exotics [l >, ), whereas the rarely burnt the rarely burnt /one), In each quadrat, all /one was dominated by exotic species {-4o<, vascular plant species were identified and cover) with just 40' ; cover of native the cover of each species was visually species (Table I ). estimated to the nearest 5%. For data Almost half oi the species recorded l at analysis, species with less than \ /i COVC1 ( lov 22 species) occurred significantly were assigned a cover value ol 0.5%. greater cover in one of the two /ones (al

To assess whether the vegetation compo- P< 0,01; Appendix I ). Only one species. sition of the two /ones was markedly dif- Kangaroo Grass, exceeded Vv mean cover ferent, the quadrat data were classified in the frequently burnt /one, where rl J l averaged 639f covei. contrast, five usiii'j the ATN analysis package I Belbin By 1994). In this program, quadrats with the species exceeded v; mean cover 111 the

! same species are grouped together, whilst rarely burnt /one: Cat's I ai Hypochnerh those with different species are grouped nuliidid. Kangaroo Grass, Rigid Panic separately, ("over data were first range Homopholh ptoluta, Squirrel-tail Fescue standardised, and the Bray-Cunts associa \'ti!l>ia bramoides and Spear-grasses tion index was calculated, The flexible Stipa species The exotic Cat's I a 1 doimn Unweighted paired group arithmetic avei ated the rarely burnt area with a mean only I'/? age (1 IPGMA) procedure was used to clas- cover ol 33%. but reached mean the burnt /o\k\ Despite sify data, with default |i = -0,1 (Belbin I nvei in frequently 1994)4 To identify species and species dramatic differences between the two fire groups which occurred more frequentl) in /ones in the mean cover ol dillerent eithci /one. mean percentage covei was species, the mean number of species in compared lor each species and group each quadrat (1 e. species richness) was between the two /ones using the non para similar in both /ones (Table I). On avei occurred in each quadral metric Mann-Whitney I 'test (Sokal and age- 10.5 species rarely burnt area, to 9.6 in HoJilf I9SI ). in the compared To determine how lire manat'ement the frequently burnt area; although small, affected tussock attributes ol the dominant this difference was statistically significant mass, the number Of live tussocks, live (/' 0.05; Table I). Oilers and inflorescences of Kangaroo Surprisingly, given the substantia] dil ter- Grass (scientific names ate given in ences in management history, there was no (/' 0.05) between Appendix I) wen- counted in five 0.25 m' significant difference > richness or plots randomly placed in each /one on 23 the two /ones in Ihe species species November 1*996- Total plant biomass was COVei ol all annual when pooled assessed indi- recorded by harvesting all plant mattei to together, Furthermore, when most annual species Occurred al ground level In six 0.25 m quadrats, and vidually, both /ones. Only drying lor 72 hrs al 80 C. Significant dil similar frequencies in Terences between these attributes were four species Mediterranean Brome investigated using the Mann Whitney n /iiHinu\ hordeaceus, Oats 'Avena sp„ test All plant name-, follow Ross (1996), Lesser Quaking-grass *Briza minor and

: and asterisks before the scieulilie name Subterraneuin Clovei Tri/oUum subterr- covei indicate exotic species. dtictim had a significantly grcatei in either /one in 1996, and all were more

Vol. 116(3) I9W 85 Research Report

Table 1. Mean species richness and cover of native and exotic species in frequently burnt and rarely burnt /.ones at Laverton North in November 19%. Significance levels using the Mann-Whitney U- test: NS = not significant {P > 0.05); * = P < (105: ***-"/>< o.oo].

Attribute Frequently Rarely Significance burnt burnt (P value) Mean % cover Native species 72.0 40.5 *** Exotic species 6.6 49.0 ***

Mean species richness Number of species 9.6 10.5 * Native species 3.3 3.9 * Exotic species 6.3 6.6 NS

abundant in the rarely burn! zone Grass in the area which remained unburnt

(Appendix 1 ). for 1 7 years.

Only one geophyle was recorded. Statistically, this sampling design is Common Onion-grass *Romulea rosea. termed 'pseudoreplieated' (Hurlbert 1984); This species occurred in all frequently whilst the samples (quadrats) were repli- burnt quadrats (mean cover 0.5%), but cated, the two treatments (fire zones) were none of the unburnt plots. Whilst signifi- unreplicated (i.e. there was only one zone cantly more forb species were recorded for each fire type, rather than replicates of from each quadrat in the frequently burnt both treatments). This problem plagues

/one (5.4 c.f. 4.0, P < 0.0001 ), forb cover many observational and experimental stud- was significantly greater in the rarely burnt ies in ecology (e.g. Wahren el al. 1994). /one {37% c.f. 6%, P < 0.0001), owing to This means that, whilst significant differ- the abundance of Cat's Ear. ences in plant composition between the Quadrats in the rarely burnt /one had sig- /ones can be formally demonstrated, the nificantly fewer Kangaroo Grass tussocks reasons for these differences cannot be for- and tillers than those in the frequently mally identified from the data gathered.

burnt /one (Table 2). However, there was Since only one unburnt area exists, it is no significant difference between the zones possible that the differences between the in the number of inflorescences or tillers burnt and unburnt /ones were not necess- produced per tussock (P > 0.05). Mean arily due to burning history, but could per- biomass 20 months after burning was sub- haps be due to underlying differences in stantially greater in the frequently burnt soil type or initial plant composition. Such /one, but this difference was not signifi- a problem highlights the value of including cant (P = 0.0549); however the P value is more than one 'control' site in a reserve, to close to 0.05 and suggests that a Type I increase the confidence that any differ- error might be likely, and that significant ences between the control and other areas difference may have been reported had were due to different management treat- more samples been collected. Many dead ments, rather than to intrinsic site factors. Kangaroo Grass tussocks and tillers Notwithstanding this statistical caveat, occurred in the rarely burnt area, indicating we are confident that the differences substantia! Kangaroo Grass mortality in observed are primarily due to different I he past. burning histories rather than to underlying site factors. Firstly, there are no obvious Discussion differences in topography or soils between The frequently burnt and rarely burnt the two areas. Secondly, when the 'con- areas at Laverton North Grassland Reserve trol' area was first established in the now have very different plant composi- 1970s, there were no obvious differences tions, despite their superficial similarity at between the control and adjacent areas the time of reservation in 1978. The most (Bob Parsons and Dale Tonkinson. pers. obvious differences are the abundance of comtns, July 1998). Thirdly, the boundary exotic species and the decline of Kangaroo between the two /ones is obvious, sharp.

86 The Victorian Naturalist K . Research Report

Table 2. Comparison of mean tussock attributes of the dominant grass, Thetneda uiamira, between the two fire zones in November 1996. 20 months after burning. Significance levels using the Mann- Whitney U-test: NS = not significant (P > 0.05): * = P < 0.05; ** = P < 0.01

Attribute Frequently Rarely Significance burnt burnt (P value) Biomass (kg/ha) 4640 3490 NS 3 No. tussocks / 0.25m 11. 3.6 ** No. live tillers /0.25nv 406 170 * 2 No. inflorescences / 0.25m 46 28 NS

triangular, and clearly marks the fire until tussocks started to senesce after about boundary between the two zones. The 5 years and eventually died after about 10 long-unburnt vegetation is now distinct- years. The cause of death was assumed to ively different from grassland vegetation be self-shading by old. dead leaves. Areas

throughout the rest of the Laverlon North which had not been burnt for 1 I years sup- Reserve, even though soil and drainage ported extensive swards of dead Kangaroo

( conditions vary considerably in other areas Grass, only 25 r of which survived when of the reserve. Furthermore, the decline in tussocks were belatedly burnt (Morgan and Kangaroo Grass in the long-unburnt area Lunt 1999). follows a similar trend to that observed at McDougall (1989) studied the loag- the nearby Derrimut Reserve, where the unburnt /one at Laverton North in 1986 (8 poor Kangaroo Grass health was directly years after the reserve was proclaimed), related to fire history (Lunt and Morgan and documented the poor health of unburn! 1999a: Morgan and Lunt 1999). Finally, Kangaroo Grass tussocks at that time. the long-unburnt area at Laverton North Whilst McDougall (1989) described the has been observed by many grassland small basal area and poor root development botanists during the past 20 years. All of unbunit plants, which were easily killed those we contacted had no doubt that lire after trampling- he did not record any sub- management was likely to be the principal stantial mortality of Kangaroo Grass and reason for the substantial differences in this appears to have occurred since 1986. plant composition between (he two /ones This mortality has major implications for (Keith McDougall. Bob Parsons. Steve future weed invasions, since areas where Piatt, Neville Scarlett. Dale Tonkinson, Kangaroo Grass has died are likely to be pets* comms, July 1998). For these reasons prone to invasion by exotic species such as we are confident that, whatever minor dif- Chilean Needle-grass *Nassella neesiana ferences in soils and initial plant compos- (Lunt and Morgan 1999b). Elsewhere, we ition might exist between the iwo areas. have suggested a simple method of assess long-term differences in fire management ing Kangaroo Grass health to help prevent are most likely to account for the patterns such mortality occurring in other areas observed. (Lunt and Morgan 1998).

Kangaroo Grass mortality Exotic species - The long-term absence of lire (and other A number of perennial exotic species disturbances! led to a substantial decline in including Cat's Ear, Yorkshire Fog the dominant Kangaroo Grass in the rarely -Hoicus UuuifHs, Paspalum *PaSpaium burnt /one. There were many dead tus- (lilatatiwh Buck's-horn Planiain *PlantOgo

socks in Ihis /one. and the density of live corctnopus and Ribwort ^Plctntago lan- tussocks was only 30% of that in the freq- (coiaiu were abundant in the long- uently burnt /one. A similar decline of unburnt area in 1996. bill were rare or Kangaroo Grass in the absence of fire has absent in the frequently burnt /one also been found at the nearby Derrimut (Appendix I). All of these species have Grassland Reserve (Morgan and Lunt expanded considerably since McDougall's 1999). At Derrimut. dead grass from previ- 19X6 survey (McDougall 1989). For ous years' growth steadily accumulated instance. Cat's Far was recorded from just

Vol. 116(3) 1999 87 Research Report

( \ /f of quadrats in the rarely burnt /one in since 1986, as McDougall (1989) recorded 1986, compared to L0O9J in 1996. the species from 98% of frequently burnt Similarly, Ribwort. Yorkshire Fog and quadrats and 89% oi unbumt quadrats in Buck's-horn Plantain were not recorded 1986. Unfortunately, however, this small from either /one in 1986, but occurred in beneficial outcome was more than com- 92%, 66% and 18% respectively of rarely pensated for by the negative impacts of burnt quadrats in 1996. These perennial Kangaroo Grass death and the promotion weeds grow vigorously in rank, undis- of other perennial exotic weeds in (he turbed vegetation, and their expansion is long-unburnt area. disturbing, since all are likely to be difficult to control. Generality of results By contrast, another group of exotic This study has documented a number o\ species (including the wind-blown daisies. adverse outcomes from long-term fire Aster-weed * Aster subtdatas. Spear Thistle exclusion in a native grassland, including *Cirsium vtilgare and Ox -tongue the decline of Kangaroo Grass and the pro- *Hehninthotheca eehioides) was more motion o\' vigorous, perennial exotic abundant in the frequently burnt /one than weeds. These findings support much of the the rarely burnt area. These three species grassland conservation literature (e.g. have increased in abundance since L986 Stuwe and Parsons 1977; McDougall (McDougall 1989). The reason for this 1989; Lunt 1991) which has stressecfthe expansion is unknown but worthy of fur- need for frequent biomass reduction (i.e. ther investigation. Thus, whilst frequent grass removal) to maintain grassland val- burning did not prevent invasion of all ues. However, whilst earlier recommenda- exotic species, it did result in significantly tions have foeussed on potential losses of less cover of exotic species than did fire native plant diversity, these results show exclusion. little change in native plant diversity, but Many species of exotic annual grasses and instead show an expansion of perennial forbs are abundant at Laverton North (and in weeds and decline of the dominant many other grassland remnants). Kangaroo Grass. Consequently, (he impact of different fire The failure to document major changes in

regimes on this group of species is of some native plant diversity probably reflects the interest. Perhaps surprisingly, given Ihe landuse history of the Laverton North magnitude of the differences between the reserve. When (he reserve was established two /ones, there was no significant differ- in 1978, native plant diversity was low as a ence between the two /ones for most exolic result of past stock grazing (many species annuals. The abundance of exotic annual occurred in the reserve, but few forbs were species in both /ones in 1996 (20 months abundant). By contrast, studies which have

after burning I demonstrates their potential to recorded substantial losses of native plant rapidly re-establish large populations from a diversity beneath dense grass have persistent soil seed bank. Thus, long-term foeussed on intact, diverse remnants (e.g. fire exclusion did not provide a suitable rail and road reserves) or more sensitive method for depleting these exotic species. species (e.g. Scarlett and Parsons 1990: By contrast, long-term fire exclusion Morgan 1997). Presumably such losses proved an extremely successful method of may also have occurred at Laverton North controlling the exotic geophyte. Common had the area been diverse in the 1970s. Onion-grass i: Romitlea rosea. This species How relevant are these findings to other is abundant in many grassland remnants in grasslands dominated by Kangaroo Grass. 1 south-eastern Australia (McDougall and Since this study was conducted at one site

Kirkpatrick 1994) and rcsprouts vigorously only, it is difficult to generalise to other after fire (Lunt 1990). In 1996, Common areas. However, we have observed similar Onion-grass was not recorded from a sin- processes in other Kangaroo Grass grass- gle quadrat in the rarely burnt zone, but lands in western Victoria (e.g. Derrimut was found in every quadrat in the frequent- and Lake Goldsmith Wildlife Reserve). ly burnt zone. This decline has occurred Gippsland (e.g. West Sale) and the ACT.

The Victorian Naturalist Research Report

Conversely, grasslands exist in these and of ecological lie Id experiments. Ecological Monographs 54. 187-211. other regions with a diverse native flora Lunl. (,D. (1990). Impael ol an aulunin lire on a long and healthy swards of Kangaroo Grass, grazed Themeda triandra (Kangaroo Grass) grass- despite not being grazed or burnt for land: implieaiions for management of invaded, remnant Vino/inn extended periods (e.g. MeDougall and vegetations. The Naturalist 107. 45-51. I.unl. I.D. (1991). Management of remnant lowland Kirkpatrick 1994, p. 61). Clearly', further grasslands and grassy woodlands lor nature conserva- work is required to better predict where tion' a review. The Victorian Naturalist ION, 5&-6G. t. Lunt, and Morgan. J. ( l9°-8). Warning; Kangaroo Such problems are likely to occur in the Grass dies from neglect. Lund for Wildlife News future. We would suspect however that 3(1(1). s-y. Kangaroo Grass decline can potentially Lunl. I.I), and Morgan. J.W (1999a). Vegelaii.ni changes alter ten years of grazing exclusion ami occur in many productive sites (of intermittent burning In a Themeda triandra fPoaceac) moderate rainfall and/or soil fertility) grassland reserve in south-eastern Australia. where Kangaroo Grass can grow vigorous- Australian Journal afBotany 47. m press.

Lunt, I.D, and Morgan. J.W. < 1999b). Can competition ly to form a closed sward. Elsewhere, we Er0tn fht.invda triandra inhibit invasion by the peren- would simply encourage managers to nial exotic giass Nnwclla nsexiatta in native grasslands'.' Plant Protection Quarterly 14. 51-56. remain alert to the possibility e>\ future MeDougall, K.I.. (1989). 'The Re-eslablislnneni ol grass mortality, and to assess grass health I heme, la inainlrn (Kangaroo Grass): Implieaiions regularly (Lunt and Morgan 1998). lor the Restoration of Grassland' Arthur Rylah Whilst the lessons learnt from the long Institute lor Environmental Research Technical Report No. 89. (Department of Conservation, Forests unburn! /one at Laverton North are nega- and Lands - Victoria: Melbourne.) tive ones, we do not wish to imply that the MeDougall. K. and Kirkpalrick. .I.B. (l<->94). "Conservation ol Lowland Nalive Grasslands in unburnt 'control' plot should never have South-eastern Australia'. (World Wide bund lor been managed in this way. On the con- Nature Australia: Sydney).

trary. The long-unburnt /one has provided Morgan, J.W ( 1997) The' effect of grassland gap si/e on establishment, growth and flowering of the endan- valuable lessons in a relatively small area.

gered RutidoStS I'fhit I'liMuh-'idcs ( Asteiaeeae). Hopefully these lessons will not have to be Journal ofApplied EcoUtgv 34. 566-576.

re-learnt elsewhere. Morgan. J.W. and lunl, I.D. ( IW')|, Effects ol time- since lire on the tussock dynamics of a dominant grass {Themeda triandra) in a temperate Australian Acknowledgements grassland, liiotoyjcnl ('onset vaiion '». >79- J86, This study was funded h> a grant from the Ross. J.H (IWd). 'A Census ol ilie Vaseular Plants of Victorian Grassy Ecosystem Reference Group, Victoria*. 5th ed. (Royal Botanic Gardens Victoria; Melbourne). to whom we are mos( gratetut. We also wish to

Scarlett, N.H. and Parsons. R.b. ( Rare ol thank the many hotanisls who provided inlmnia 1982). plants die Victorian plains, in "Species al Risk: Research in tion on the history of the Laverton North Australia', pp. X9 105. Ed. R.H. Groves and W.D.I.. Keith MeDougall. Boh reserve, including Ride. (Australian Academy ol Science: Canberra). Parsons. Stephen Piatt, Neville Scarlett and Dale Scarlell. NIL arid Parsons.'R.k I 1990), Conservation Tonkinson. Hob Parsons and Neville Scarlett biology ol the southern Australian daisy Rntido\i\ kindly commented on the manuscript lepiorrhxnehoides. In 'Management ol Small Populations', pp. 195 205. Ed. T.W. Clark and .III, Scebeck. (Chicago Zoological Society; Illinois). References 1 Sukai, k R. and Rohii. KLG9SI), 'Biometry . Med, Bdbin, U (1994). Tecbflfcal Reference PATN Pattern (W.H. Freeman and Co.: New York). Analysis Division oi Wildlife and Package' (CSIRO StUWe, J. and Parsons, R.F. (1977), Themeda atr.nali\ Ecology: Canberra). grasslands on the Basalt Plains. Victoria: llorisiics Craigie, V and Stuwe, J (1992) 'Dernmut Grassland and management effects. Au.strali

Hurlhert, S.I1. ( 1984). pscudoreplicaiion and the design

Vol. 116(3) 1999 89 Research Report

Appendix I. Percentage frequency and mean percentage cover of all plant species in the frequently burnt (lrei|. burnt) and rarely burnt /ones of the l.averton North Grassland Reserve in November 1996. Asterisks before the scientific name denote exotic species. Differences in mean % cover were determined using Mann-Whitney U-tests, Values are highlighted where /'<().(>!. Significance lev- J els: NS = not significant (P>Q.Q5)\ = P<0.05; ** = / <().() I; ***= /' <().()()!.

Species ( OlllllMHI 11,11111 ''/( frequency Moan % cover v l ret|. Kuroly Freq, Rarely Signif. Inn n( burnt burnt burnt (/'value)

Acaena echinata Sheep's Hun 0.00 0.01 NS

|::!' Agrostia aemula Purplish Blown ( irass 16 I.S4 0.00 Agrostis avenacea Common Blown Grass 60 66 4.92 1.29 NS *Anctgaliis minima Chaffweed 4 2 0.02 0.01 NS Asperula scoparia Prickly Woodruff i 0.01 0.00 NS *Aster subulatus Aster-weed 94 36 0.47 0.18 !- + :!- MAvena species Oat 4 66 0.02 0.33 ***

* Hriza maxima I argc Quaking-grass 6 0.04 0.00 NS 1 Hri:tt minor Lesser Quaking-grass 70 34 0.35 046 *** [ ItrtHiitts horiieiiteiis Soft Broine 20 60 0.10 0.31 *** ( 'tircx hrevicnhtiis Short-stem Sedge 4 52 0.02 0.26 *** H 'cnnuiriiim Branched Centaury 4 0.00 0.02 NS iciniifiorum *Cirsiutn vulgare Spear Thistle 86 40 1.04 0.02 #** ( 'onvolvultts Pink Bindweed 4 44 Oil 0.23 !:!-! erubescens ( 'otiyza hoiuirifn.si.s Tall Reabane 22 6 0.11 0.03 *

1 ( 'vnotlon dactylon Couch 4 0.00 0.02 NS 1 ( 'yperus teneltus Tiny Hal-sedge 2 4 0.01 0.51 NS Danthonia species Wallaby-grasses 3 10 0.04 0.07 NS Deyeuxia quadriseta Reed Bent grass 4 10 0.02 0.14 NS ** Dichelackne crinita I ,ong hair Plume grass 16 o.ox 0.00 Eiymtts scabrus Common Wheal grass i 0.01 0.00 NS Epilobiwn Robust Willow-herb 38 0.19 0.00 *** billardierianum Eryrtgiutrt ovifium Blue Devil 6 12 0.04 0.06 NS 1 Euchiton species Cudweed 2 0.00 0.01 NS

1 ( iiiinoiihietn Cudweed 2 0.01 0.00 NS purpurea *Helminthotheca Ox-tongue 4S 0.64 0.01 echioldes *Holcus lanatus Yorkshire bog 66 0.00 3.10 *** Homopholis proluta Rigid Panic 20 0.00 10.82 ***

: Hypochoeris radicaux Cat's liar 54 100 1.24 33.41 1 ! K/um its capitatus Dwarf Rush 4 0.00 0.02 NS l.fonloilan Hair) I law kbit 20 16 0.20 0.12 NS taraxacoides 1 Lolium rigidum Wimmera Rye-grass 2 4 0.02 0.02 NS Oxaiis perennans Grassland Wood-sorrel 4 6 0.02 0.03 NS *Paspdium dilaxatum Paspalum X 0.00 1.32 * Pimelea spinescens Plains Rice-flower 2 T 0.01 0.01 NS *Plantago coronopus Buek's-horn Plantain IS 0.00 1.50 ** 1 Plantago lanceolate Ribwort 92 0.00 0.46 *#*

i Homulcn rosea Common Onion-grass 100 0.50 0.00 * * Y Schoenus apogon Common Bog-sedge 4 0.02 0.00 NS Senecio glome ratus Annual Firewced 2 4 0.01 0.02 NS Senecio quadridentatus Cotton birewced 54 10 1.24 0.05 -\: \--\- : Somlws asper Rough Sow-thistle 2 6 0.01 0.32 NS Stipa species Spear-grasses T 48 0.01 5.49 ** Themeda triandra Kangaroo Crass <)X 100 63.40 22.07 *** ^Tragopogon Salsify 20 O.(H) 0.10 *** porrijblius

' fiijoltimi Sithteiraneum Clover (MM) 0.07 suhlcrranvtim ' Vulpia bromotdes Squirrel-tail Fescue 1.7X 6.65 NS [ X'ulpiti mxuros Rat's-tail Fescue 0.00 0.02 NS

90 The Victorian Naturalist Naturalist Note

The Beetle Gondwanennebous minutissimus Kaszab (Coleoptera: Archeocrypticidae) - a First Record for Victoria

A number of small beetles <<3 mm) that The specimen has been lodged with the had been collected from pit lines in the Museum of Victoria who also advise this is Red Box Eucalyptus polyanthemos wood- the first and only specimen from this fami- land at Glynns Reserve, Warrandyte, dur- ly in their collections (A. Yen pers. ing the FNCV survey of the invertebrate cointu.). fauna, could not be identified. The key This note reinforces two important used (Moore 1980) only works satisfactori- lessons - the need to retain and label all ly with beetles greater than 3 mm in unidentified species within an order, and length. how easy it is to overlook important mater- In some cases, there were large numbers ial through lack of knowledge and skill. of these small beetles, for example 143 were collected in January 1997, I 14 in References Lawrence, (1994) Review of the Australian July 1997 and 47 in September 1997. J.F. A-Fcheoeryplicidae (Coleopteraj wiih Descriptions of Since non-identification would have made a New Genus and Four New Species, Invertebrate the overall results oi' the survey less mean- Taxonvmv 8. 449-470 Moore. B.P. (1980) 'A Guide to the Beetles of South ingful, help was sought from Dr John F Eastern Australia". (Australian EntomcrtogieaJ Press: Lawrence (CSIRO Canberra, Division of New South Walrsi Entomology) in identifying two particular groups that made up most of the unidenti- K.J. Grey

n ( "in i fied specimens. Woona Y/allainbie, Victoria WS5. Dv Lawrence was very helpful, and named the two species of beetles which comprised most of the unidentified specimens as Thalycrodes pulchrum (Coleop- sp. tera: Nitidulidae) and a Nargotnorphus S&, . (Coleoptera: Leiodidae). Furthermore, he enthusiastically selected another minute beetle (brown, ca 2 mm), unidentified from the July sampling, which he identified as Gondwanennebous minutissimus. Dr Lawrence said that this beetle had been previously known only from New South Wales, ACT, South Australia and Western

- - < Australia (Lawrence 1994). Our specimen (Fig. 1) was. therefore, the first record from Victoria. Details of the (ilynns record: Date. 12-19 July 1997: Location. Warrandyte. 145' Victoria 37°44'12" S. 1 V42" E; Habitat, Red Box Eucalyptus polyanthe- nios woodland: Collecting method, pitfall Fig. I. Gondwanennebous minutissimus (about Club traps: Collector- The Field Naturalists 2 mm). Drawing by Erich Sacco. of Victoria.

91 Vol. 116(3) 1999 Contributions

Thin-skinned Tectonics: its Application in Western Victoria

D.H. Taylor 1

Abstract Thin-skinned tectonics has become the standard framework lor interpreting the erustal struciure of Victoria. Sleeply clipping slruclures visible al the surface are no longer viewed as extending down- wards lo great depths. Instead such slruclures are inlerpreted lo have 'grown' or 'peeled off from discrete levels in a crust composed of several slacked layers, Ihe topmost being a "thin-skin'. (The

Victorian Nammlht I 16(3), I#). pp. 92-96):

Introduction

This paper was written on invitation to which masses of rock formed in one place explain the much used term thin-skinned on the earth's surface may be transported tectonics, with examples from Victoria and amalgmated into another region which being used to illustrate Ihe concept, was previously far away, thus giving rise Tectonics is the study of the slruclures in to "exolic terranes' (e.g. .Jones el al. 1983). rocks and the broader geometrical architec- This burgeoning knowledge has revolu- ture of ihe earth's crust which develops in tionised how we interpret the architecture response lo imposed pressures. Geology is ol' the earth's crusl from the mapping of a young science and many of the accepted the 2-dimensional surface exposure. In the ideas about how structures develop when past, surface structures were extended lo imposed pressures deform rocks are rela- great depths inio ihe underlying crust tively recent. Tor example, theories which was considered to be static and

explaining how rocks fold and develop essentially deformed in place. This is the cleavages weren't well documented until view expressed in the first comprehensive Ihe !960-70s. and compressional (stack- synlhesis of the Geology of Victoria ing) and extensional (segmenting) faults (Douglas and Ferguson 1976). Since then

were poorly understood until the late ihe concept o\~ thin-skinned tectonics has 1970s and early 1980s. The recent wide- been applied to Victoria (e.g. Fergusson et spread acceptance and application of ihe al. 1986) and incorporated into the revised concept of thin-skinned tectonics has synthesis of the Geology of Victoria grown out o\' these basic understandings o\' (Douglas and Ferguson 1988). Since the how rocks and the crusl deform. revised geological synthesis was presented. The new array of concepts has allowed a widespread detailed and ongoing geologi- much more dynamic interpretation than cal mapping of the slate by the Geological previously - a paradigm shift. It is now Survey of Victoria (e»g. VandenBerc et al. accepted that large pieces of the crusl may 1 992; Cay ley and McDonald 1995; Taylor be transported around on accommodating el al. 1996) and university investigations structures such as weak or 'slippery' layers (e.g. Cox et al. 1991 ) has filled in much of and stacked or emplaeed upon other erustal the detail only addressed in principle in the pieces to form a composite crusl of which revised synthesis (Fig. I ), the upper levels may he considered a 'thin- Western Victoria: skin': hence the term 'thin-skinned tecton- an example of thin- skinned tectonics ics". The process being somewhat analo- In the first synlhesis of the gous to a carpet being pushed across and Geology of Victoria (Douglas and rucking up over a smooth floor. Ferguson 1976) the deformed piles of deep sediments The view that the deformed crust we see marine that comprise at a site today always represents the most of western Victoria were viewed as remains of strata once deposited close to different sedimentary basins (deposilional troughs) separated that original site may also no longer hold by highs of volcanic rock (Fig. 2). true. The process of continental drift is The now recognised as the mechanism b\ troughs contain many kilometres of sediments, thickened by folding, and cut by numerous faults. Across ihe goldfields o[ 1 Geological Survey ol Victoria. P.O. Mux 500, East western Victoria much of the struciure was Melbourne. Victoria 30G2.

92 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Governor ~ Avoca \ -. F u!t Fault Heathcote^^ Fault Moyston Fault

Deformed Grampians younger Major bedrock rocks cover \ fault

across west-central ion and Fig. 1. Map of Victoria showing the position of the major faults the the position (A- A') of the section lines presented in Fiiis. 2. 3 and 4, inferred from the distribution of graptolite faults (Fig. 3). Movement along these fossils (small planktonic marine organisms major faults transported the volcanic rocks, whose diversification over time makes fragments of the original ocean floor them useful for determining rock ages) underlying the sediments, to the surface. which also provided an estimate of the off- Thus the volcanic rocks are no longer set across large faults (e.g. Harris and viewed as ancient topographic highs sepa- Thomas 1948). The extent and geometry o( rating many depositional troughs but as the the faults below the surface were unknown deepest parts o\' one great big trough but were viewed as extending sub-vertical- brought to the surface by faults! expose the ly to as deep as any cross-section conk! The major faults continually show. A synthesis of how the surficial volcanic rocks, or the oldest sediments rocks were deformed and what lay beneath lying just above them. In the deformed them was beyond the scope of the geologi- rock pile these rocks generally now reside about 15 Since cal knowledge of the time. at mid-crustal levels of km. surface and keep By the second edition of the Geology oi the faults are steep at the roughly Victoria (Douglas and Ferguson 1988) the bringing rocks to the surface from out ideas and mechanisms of thin-skinned tec- the same crustal level they must flatten level which is tonics had been applied to Victoria. Rather and tap into this mid-crustal than being in-situ, separate sedimentary called a detachment (Fig. 3). The flattening basins the deformed sediments were now geometry of the faults is called a listric is by seismic interpreted as being parts of the same large- geometry and supported ocean basin amalgamated along major imaging of the subsurface geometry of the

93 Vol. 116(3) IW9 i

Contributions

Mt Stavely Heathcote MtV\i axis axis axis

i 1 Ml -J + p^^/-^^m^

Common legend for all figures. Deformed otd VOlCaniC Unknown I sedim t — 1 crust I IT] oceanic rocks E =<* m lower crust rocks JS

Section looking north along line A-A' 40 Km vertical exaggeration x 2 Small arrows indicate faull movement

Fig, 2. Schematic cross-section of the erustal structure of western Victoria constructed From the first synthesis of Victorian geology. Note the unconstrained extension of surface structures to depth and the implication of ra-slru deformation ol all the exposed rocks. Note dial the legend for Fk. 2 is a common legend lor all Figures.

Section looking north along line A-A' j 40 Km vertical exaggeration x 2

Fig, Schematic cross-section 3, of Ihe thin-skinned tectonic interpretation of the crustal structure ol western Victoria as presented in the second synthesis of Victorian geology and updated by more recent mapping. Note top a layer of folded and faulted sedimentary rocks above mid-crustal detachment faults the underlying in volcanies which are occasionally brought to the surface. The nature ot the deeper crust is unknown.

Heathcote Fault Zone in which the major original ocean basin of western Victoria fault was shown to flatten at depth (Gray el probably consisted of 3-5 km oi' sand-rich ni. 1991), Such major faults stack the sediment deposited upon an ocean floor of stratigraphy and thus effectively shorten it, volcanic crust that is known from modern helping lo accommodate the deformation settings lo be aboul 6 km thick. Fossils and imposed upon (he rocks. In the sediments dating of radioactive isotopes show that above the level o\' the mid-cruslal detach- this ocean basin existed from about 510 to ment faults, the deformation is largelyly 420 million years ago. Mapping of more accommodated by the tight folds and deformed areas suggests significant thick- cleavage visible in outcrops. How the ening o\' these rocks during deformation by shortening is accommodated below the folds and fault stacking lo form a erusl level of the mid-cruslal detachment faults about 30-40 km thick (e.g. Gray and is unknown but it was possibly thickened Willman 1991). All this deformation was by a separate system of faull stacking. driven by plate tectonic forces which Geological mapping in areas not compli- forced the ocean basin of western Victoria cated by strong deformation shows thai the to be pushed onto the edge of the older 94 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Australian rocks to the west. The age of while other goldfields such as Bendigo and

this deformation is constrained between Ballarat occur in close proximity. It is gen- the depositional age of the rocks and the erally accepted that the faults acted as con- intrusion age of later granites to about 450- duits for gold-rich fluids generated at 420 million years ago (VandenBerg 1976). depth to rise towards the surface and be a timing broadly confirmed by recent dat- deposited in favourable sites during their

ing of minerals that grew during the defor- upwards passage ( e . 2 . W i 1 1 m a n and 1992).^ mation ( Foster et al. 1 998 ). Wilkinson The Moyston Fault is the big fault which The structure of the rocks which form the emplaced the oceanic basin of western Grampians has also recently been inter- Victoria against older rocks to the west preted as being thin-skinned (Cayley and iCavlev and Taylor 1998). This fault Taylor 1997). The tilted sedimentary strata trends northwesterly through Moyston in are no longer viewed as a 7000 m thick

western Victoria. West of the fault is the gently deformed in-situ depositional flat surface of the Dundas Tableland from trough. Instead, a sedimentary package which the Grampians Ranges protrude. To originally only half this thickness was

the east is the hilly country of the Western slacked by a complex fault system, proba- Victorian Uplands with the well developed bly forming a high mountain range which Great Divide. Within this belt of rocks \v;is then partially segmented and pulled numerous faults splay up through the 'thin- apart by a different, later set of extensional skin' of folded sediments, with the biggest faults. These evlensional faults again flat- bringing the volcanic rocks from mid- ten out into a crustal level where a detach- crustal levels of about 15 km to the sur- ment fault separates the younger face. These include the Avoca Fault which Grampians rocks as a thin skin over older. trends northerly between Maryborough unrelated rocks below (Fig. 4). This defor- and Avoca and the Heathcole Fault Zone mation style in the Grampians is a different trending northerly through Hcathcote. type of thin-skinned tectonics to the rest of Smaller faults which bring up sediments wesiern Victoria - one driven by extension from just above the \olcamcs also olxuv in rather than shortening of the crust. Victoria, with many being recognised by Conclusions associated /ones of more intense deforma- Thin-skinned tectonics has revolutionised tion caused by the fault movement, or by the way the deformation history and disruption to the distribution pattern of crustal architecture of Victoria is viewed. graptolite fossils, Goldfields such as Whilst the surface distribution of rocks on Stawell often lie directly on such faults the map face is little altered, the cross-sec

Black Victoria Serra Mt William Range Range Range Range

Section looking north, vicinity of position A

vertical exaggeration x 3 i i 15 Km

Note: Topography extremely exaggerated

interpretation of the Grampians region. l-iy. 4. Schematic cross-section of the thin -skinned tectonic rocks by a Hat Mote the thin layer oi deformed Grampians rocks separated from older underlying detachment fault

Vol. 116(3) 1999 95 Contributions tional slice representing the layered crust hcrgusson. CI... Gray, D.R. and Cas. R.A.F. (1980). Ovenhrust lerranes in the Fachlan fold bell, south- with respect to depth is profoundly differ- eastern Australia. GeohgV 14,519-522. ent. These ideas have been successfully Foster, D.A.. Gray. D.R. Kwak. A. P. and Buehei. M. and iectonie framework of tur- applied to much of western Victoria where (199SJ. Chronology biditc-hosled gold deposits in the western l.achlan coverage is nearly complete. new map Fold Bell. Victoria: "At- 'Ar results, Ore Geology Thin-skinned tectonics is also applicable to Review* 13. 22 l >-250, eastern Victoria and an overall synthesis of Gray, D. R. and Willman. C. F. (1991). Deformation m die Ballarat slate belt, central Victoria and implications this still ongoing mapping in this more for the erustal structure across southeast Australia. rugged country will shortly be available. Australian Journal of litallt Silences 38. 171-201. Gray, D.R.. Wilson. CJ.L. and Barton. T..I. (1991). References tnlracrustal detachments and implications for erustal evolution of the lachlan Fold Bell, southeastern Cayley, R. A. and McDonald, P. A, < 1995;. Beaufort I: Australia. Geology 19,574-577. 100 000 map geological report. Geahgicol Survey of

Harris. W..I. D.F. ( 1948). ol Victoria Report 1(14, and Thomas. Geology Campbelltown. Mining and GeologV Journal 3(3), Cayley, R.A. ami Taylor, D.H- ( 1997). (irarupiaus stpc 4(v54. l kiI map area geological repOit. Geological Survey of Victoria Report 107. Jones. |).l ... Ikiwell. D.G . Coney. P. J and Monger, analysis Cayley. R.A. and Taylor. D.H. (1998), The structural II.W.Il. (1983). Recognition, character and of framework and tectonic evolution of the western icctoiiosiraiigiaphie teiranes in western North America. Journal of Geological Educetthtt 31. 295-303. Lachlan Fold Belt. Victoria. /// 'Mineral Systems and die crust-upper manlle of southeast Australia' Eds Tayloi. D.IF. Whitehead. M.I-.. Olshina. A. and D.M. Hinlavson and L.E.A. Jones. A(iSO Record Leonard. J.G. (19%). Ballatal 1:100 000 Map Area l*>98/2. :<>-31 Geological Report. Geological Survey of Victoria (.'ox ST,. Etheridge, M.A.. Cos, R.A.F. and Clifford. ReponWl, Notl. R.A. (I9!*l). Deformation style ol the Castleniaine VandenBem. A.HM.. R.J., and Glen. R.A.. area. Bemligo-Ballarai /one: linplieations lor evolu- (1992). Bendoc 1:100 000 map area Geological tion of erustal structure in central Victoria. Report. Geological Survev of Victoria Report 90, VandenBerg. A.H.M. (1976). The Tasman Raid Bell in Australian Journal of Earth Sciences 38. 1 5i - 170, l Victoria. Geological Survey oj Victoria Report 1976/3. Douglas, J.G. and 1 crimson. J.-A. (I >7dl. Geohg) of - Victorttt. Geological Society of Australia Special Willman, C.E. and Wilkinson. II. E. ( 1902). Bendigo Publication 5. Spring Gully. Golden Square* Faglehavvk 1:10 000 maps report. Survo Douglas. J.G. and Ferguson. J. A. (I°SS}, Gee/fogy •! geological Geological oj Victoria 2nd edition. Geological Society of Australia. Victoria Report 93. Victorian Division.

Letter to the Editor

Sik.— I was greatly pleased, when present are required they can easily be spared from at your conversazione last week, to hear the National collection. The so-called Professor Spencer say that at last there was assistants' rooms at the Museum are a dis- some reasonable chance of an early exten- grace to Victoria, and the whole o\ the sion of the buildings at the National accommodation is far behind thai of the

Museum. Having wailed so long it may Australian Museum. Sydney, as I remem- seem rather injudicious to propose any ber il some years ago. opposition on account of which Ihe matter Along with others I deeply deplore the may be indefinitely postponed, but at the death of the late director. Sir F. McCoy, risk of so doing I would venture to suggest bin think that now, as there is a vacancy in that the Field Naturalists' Club should the management, is the time to bring the exerl its influence in favour of the removal Museum more within reach of the average of the National Museum to a more central citizen and student. — I am, &c, and accessible site, say at the Public KANGAROO. Library, where there is room for an annexe, similar to the picture galleries, Melbourne. 27th May. 1899

| "Kangaroo," and doubtless along the Latrobe-streel frontage. Here a other readers, will be pleased to know that the desirabili- museum would be in close proximity to the existing literature, and thus permit of ty of removing Ihe Museum as suggested above was affirmed at a meeting v>\~ the greater facilities to study. It may be said trustees on the 1st inst., at the thai the Mustiem is required at the and same lime Professor Spencer was appointed hon- University for teaching purposes, but I orary director. En. Vict. Nat.\ think on inquiry it will be found that bio- — logical and other schools possess nearly From The Victorian Naturalist, one hundred years ago. Vol. XVI. No. 3, 1899. enough typical specimens, and that if more

96 The \ ictorian Naturalist Hook Review

A Forester's Log: the Story of John La Gerche and the Ballarat-Creswick State Forest 1882-1897

by Angela Taylor

Publisher Melbourne University Press. 1998,

224 pp., maps and photographs (black dG white), RRP $29.95.

The physical appearance of a forest, or regeneration and survival required the pro an> other type of vegetation., does not tection of seedlings from marauding rah reseat the complete story o\' its past. hits and goats, and saplings from men Certainly there are \ isihle clues such as the seeking mine props and fuel. As well as

diversity of species, the density and age of attempting to protect the forest lo allow its trees and the presence of axed stumps. regeneration. La Cieichc attempted to re- Other dues exist elsewhere—in the soil pro- elolhe hillsides stripped hare by miners file ami in the memories and records o\' and tested a wide range of tree seedlings. Aboriginal and European Australians. He established a nursery at Sawpil Ciully. Angela Taylor has used the records of an where he germinated thousands of early Forester to provide some late nine- seedlings including Blue Gum, Black teenth century glimpses of a Victorian for- Wattle. Golden Wattle and Kadiata Pine. est. The forester is John La Gerche and the and established plantations nearby. forest is the Open forest of mixed species John La Gerche was not a Club member. of eucalyptus [which] merges with serried However, since Angela Taylor writes so ranks of plantation pines* near Creswick. engagingly about his work in the forest, where Australia's first Forestry school was this book may interest current FNCV established in 1910. La Gerche*s work in members and other readers of The the 1880s and 1890s significantly shaped Victorian Naturalist who share my interest

C'reswick's eucalypl forest and pine in forest history. I thank Angela Taylor for plantations. applying her historical intellect to La The forest between the goldfields of (ierche's Letter Books and Pocket Books

Creswick and Ballarat was one oi' many and I thank those who ensured that these areas which, in the second half of the nine- unique archival records were not lost. teenth century, were reserved as Victorian La Cierche's plantations in Sawpil (lull)

State forests. In 1882 I .a Gerche was are now on the Register o\ the National appointed Crown Lands Bailiff and Estate, By the time you read this review, Forester to supervise the Ballarat & the La Gerche Walking Track 1 through Creswick State Forest and to take legal them should he completed. My daughter,

proceedings under the I 869 Land Act who is beginning university forest science against all persons \ou\k\ cutting or remov- studies this year, returned from a prelimi- ing timber in the forest*. Using the com- nary visit lo Creswick with the hot-off-lhe ments he recorded in his official Letter press track leaflet from the Creswick Books (into which he copied all his official Landcare Centre. Now you can enjoy read-

correspondence - inwards and outwards) ing La (ierche's nineteenth century forest and his Pocket Books (in which he pen perceptions in A forester's Log and walk eilled field notes while oul in Ihe forest) through the landscape which has been Angela Taylor has re-presented La shaped by his efforts over a century ago. (ierche's perceptions of the forest. Postscript. The Track has jusl won ,i his role as bailiff and Executing dual Victorian Community and Local History Award. forester was difficult hut essential. By 1882 the forest had endured three decades Linden Cillbank llisiuiv iV Philosophy ui Science Department. of exploitation lo satisfy the needs of gold- I nivcrsitj ol Melbourne, lis mining and other European activities. Parkville. Victoria 1052.

97 Vol. 1 16(3) 1999 Contributions

An Australian Sea Lion on Phillip Island, Victoria

Roger Kirkwood', Jenny Hibble' and Ian Jerrer

Abstract A weak, adult male Australian Sea Lion tfeapkoca citwrva came ashore on Phillip Island. Victoria years, in June 1998, the first reported sighting ol" ihis species in eastern Victoria tor over 100 The sea lion was suffering from a severe lung infection and was eulhanased to reduce the possible spread of disease. Based on growth rings in its teeth, the animal was 12 years old. {the Victorian Naturalist 116(3), IW,pp.98-K)t).

Introduction Australian Sea Lions Neophoca cincrea During the afternoon o\~ 16 June, a *2 in- breed at colonies in South and Western long dead seal* at Shelly Beach, Phillip Australia and have an estimated total pop- Island (Fig. lb) was observed and reported ulation of WOO to 12 400 animals (Gales et to the PINP. The animal was not present nl. 1994; Dennis and Shaughnessy L996), when searched lor by us one hour after the Although they were distributed more wide- sighting. It may have been the underweight ly prior to scaling activities in the 1800s sea lion that actually was alive and capable (Warncke 1982), their currently known of returning to the sea. foraging range is restricted to the coastal In the evening til' 17 June, the same sea waters o\ South Australia and southern lion that had come ashore at Sunderland Western Australia. Occasionally, though, Bay (identified by patterns of sears on its individuals are sighted in Victoria neck and shoulders) was found in a back- (Menkhorst 1995), Tasmania (Kirkwood et yard in Ventnor (Fig, lb). It probably came ill. 1992), and New South Wales (Fulton ashore on Ventnor Beach, entered a creek

1990. P. Shaughnessy pers. conun.) behind the beach, swam inland about I km. (Fig. la). Here we report on the first such then crossed 400 m of open farmland to sighting of an Australian Sea Lion in east- arrive at the residential block. The sea lion ern Victoria, as well as the death of the did not change its position during the night animal and its subsequent autopsy, which and the next morning; it appeared to be aimed to determine why it could have close to death, in the opinion of a veteri- arrived in this area. narian (JH). It was thin, could only snarl (without raising its head) when approached Description ol' sighting to within 2 m. and its breathing was During the afternoon o\' 6 June 1998, a laboured. We suspected the animal could 'large seal* came ashore at Sunderland have had a tuberculosis infection, which is Hay, Phillip Island (Fig. lb). Local resi- known to occur in Australian Sea Lions dents saw the seal move up a steep track, (Cousins et ol. 1993). Under the supervi- across a road and into a residential area, sion of Department of Natural Resources reported the sighting to (he Phillip and and Environment Officers (David Cass and Island Nature Park (PINPU)ne of us (RK) Grant Griffin) the sea lion was eulhanased identified the animal as an adult male using a shot-gun fired at the head from a Australian Sea Lion and estimated it to be distance o\' less than 5 em. 1.9 m long and 150 kg in body mass. It We look precautions to ensure non-trans- appeared thin and weak, but was able to ferral of the potential infection; the ground return to the sea during the night, as evi- where the sea lion had lain was doused in denced by its tracks across the beach the petrol and burnt, the sea lion and its body next morning. fluids were contained in a plastic sheet and transported directly to a 3 m deep burial pit.

1 Phillip Island Nature Park. P.O. Box ''7- (owes. Also, all handlers wore disposable gloves Victoria 3922. and breathing masks. Prior to being buried. W-onthaggi Veterinary Clinic, 290 White Ru\ Wonthaggi, Victoria W95, the sea lion was autopsied (by JH and RK).

1 (iippskuul Pathology Service, Bairnsdale Regional its stomach contents were examined and IhispiiaL Muirnsilnk-. Victoria 3575.

W The Victorian Naturalist C ontrtbutions

The Pages

_VKS Phillip Island

Bass Strait 140' 145°Ej ISO^E.

Fig. 1. at Locations of previously reported sightings of Australian Sea Lions in Victoria (tilled boxes, Ventno from the Alias of Victorian Wildlife. Heidelberg. Victoria), The Pages, which is the nearest 38»30S Shelley Beach Australian Sea Lion colony to Victoria, and Phillip Island. b) Locations where an Australian Sunderland Bay Sea Lion was sighted on Phillip Island in June 1998. 38-35S 145°10E I45M5L

several teeth were removed from its jaw 70-100 mm long). In eephalopod beaks lor ageing. and approximately 50 cartilaginous vertebrae from an elasmobraneh. Cephalopod Results and Discussion beaks were sent to Rohyn lekeringill Autopsy (Museum of Victoria) for identification. lion had obvious external The sea no No flesh was present in the sea lion's wounds. Several teeth were missing and stomach to indicate that it had \'ct\ in the but there was no those present were worn, few days prior to death. Several ascarid to jaw. whieh sign of a major infection the parasites were removed from the intestinal is in beaehwashed fur sometimes apparent walls and sent to the Gippsland Pathology our experience seals iRK pers. oh\,). From Service for identification. at autopsying a range o\' beaehwashed marine mammals, the internal tissues Laboratory analysis appeared to be normal for an Otariid, in all Macroscopic examination o( the sea organs except the lungs. Three-quarters ol lion's lung tissue suggested a probable each lung exhibited generalised lesions, bronchopneumonia. The tissue contained with only the lower sections being intact. numerous pale areas, 2-4 mm in diameter. The lesions did not have the appearance ol a Microscopic examination revealed a dif- tubereulosis infection, which causes hard, fuse neutrophil and macrophage infiltra- white granulomas in fur seal lungs {RK tion of the bronchioles and alveoli. There peribronchial and interstitial pers. oba. I Samples of lung tissue were sent were multiple lymphocyte accu- to Ian Jeriet at the Gippsland Pathology areas of plasma cell and Service, Bairnsdale, for histopathologic^! mulation as well as widespread atelectasis and bacteriological examination. and multifocal intra-alveolar haemor- chronic The sea lion's stomach contained three, rhages. The diagnosis was egg shaped stones (700 g total mass, each suppurative bronchopneumonia; the tissue

Vol. 116(3) 1999 99 '

Contributions

the sea lion was 12 years of age. This is old -J0§ CemearitiM dnH for male sea lions, which rarely live more

' -. -i-> than 12 years (Stirling 1972).

* , *• "' 4(J ?'/ -,v;! .^.V^£jj|i There appeared to be a change in the -• - ^^19 T-.L™ • c/lf^Jw growth pattern of the canine's cementum after the laying-down of the fifth growth ring (see Fig. 2). Australian Sea Lions mature at about five years of age and the '" :.- '- ;V '' .'-"" : changed growth pattern in the cementum -_;._ . reflect a behavioural or physiological *- ':'. "w_^i|^B may i 'm& ***c«_««_*. ^E9^ ! mm modification in response to maturation.

Fig. 2. A cross-section of a canine from the Conclusions Australian Sea Lion that came ashore on This paper describes the rare sighting of Phillip Island. Numbers indicate growth rings an Australian Sea Lion outside South and in the cementum of the canine. Western Australian waters, and the first changes were suggestive of a non-specific record, since sealers* accounts, of this bacterial infection but with no evidence of species in eastern Victoria. In the 1800s. tuberculosis. Australian Sea Lions bred at several locations in Bass Strait, but sealers eliminated Stomach contents their colonies (Warneke 1982). Since 1973. The occurrence of stones in the stomach 13 Australian Sea Lions have been record- of the sea lion was normal (Walker and ed in western Victoria, one in southern Ling 1981). Australian Sea Lions deliber- Tasmania and three on the New South ately swallow stones that remain in their Wales south coast (Menkhorst 1995 and stomachs and presumably assist with unpublished reports to the Atlas of digestion (Needham 1997). Victorian Wildlife. Kirkwood et at. 1992. The cephalopod beaks included three Fulton 1990 and P. Shaughnessy pers. lower Sepia beaks (cuttlefish), six upper comm.). Like the Phillip Island sea lion. and two lower Ommastrephid beaks most sightings have been of large males, (squid) and five unidentified beaks. although some females also have been Descriptions of Australian Sea Lion diet noted. The apparently rare visits to Bass (Walker and Ling 1981. Gales and Cheal Strait waters may be occasional wanderings 1992) suggest that these cephalopods, as by individuals away from the species' nor- well as elasmobranchs which were repre- mal foraging range. Alternatively, sented by the vertebrae, are normal prey Australian Sea Lions may forage regularly for this species. in Bass Strait waters, but rarely come The ascarid parasites removed from the ashore on coasts where they can be sighted.

r intestinal walls of the sea lion w ere identi- Australian Sea Lions are known to occa- fied as Confracaecum ogmorhinis, a com- sionally travel inland. Individuals have mon parasite in Australian Sea Lions been found up to 10 km from the coast (Johnston and 1941). para- Mawson These (Wood-Jones 1925), so it was not excep- sites may cause gastric ulcers in sea lions, tional for the sea lion on Phillip Island lo but generally are considered to be of low travel I km inland. The animal's poor con- pathogenicity. dition (bronchopneumonia and starvation),

however, its Ageing probably impared judgement, which may have influenced its movement Teeth from the sea lion were sectioned and away from the sea. stained (hematoxylin and eosin) following The frequency of occurrence of broncho- the procedures outlined in Johnston and pneumonia in sea lions is unknown, but it Walt ( 1980). A total of 1 2 growth rings were has been a common infection in other otari- evident in the cementum of the canines (Fig. ids thai have come ashore in poor condition 2). Assuming the rings represented annual on Victorian beaches (Beasley 1998). In the growth (as has been demonstrated for other present instance, old age may have reduced otariids such as the Antarctic Fur Seal the sea lion's ability to tolerate infection Arctocepluilus gazella, Arnbom et at. 1992).

100 The Victorian Naturalist Contribution

making it susceptible to the broncho- Ausiraii.ii) Sea Lion. Nevphttw citierea, in the Great Vuslralian pneumonia. Bight Wiktlift A', vurvh 23, 7A 1 M Fulton, W.N. (1990), Firsl record of an Australian This sea lion was eiithanased because we Sea I urn on 1 he eastern Australian coast //„ Victorian suspected that it had a tuberculosis infec- Ntmtralisi M7 i4i. 124-125. Dales. N.T.B. !"<>_>, and \l 1 tion. We recommend, however, that pin- Cheat, Isiiniatnii' did cnmpoMimn of the Australian Sea-lion {NcttphocU nipeds that come ashore on beaches in citterea) from seal analysis; tin unreliable technique southern Australia normalK should be left Wildlife Remmli 19, 14 7 456 dales. \ T B.. Sliaii,i'hness>. P I) I alone. If the animal appears to be suffering and IK'iuus. T (IW4). Distribution, abundance and breeding cycle or diseased, a veterinarian should inspect of tin- Australian Sea Lion Nt'ophtit'a einerea iMannnalia I'innineilia). it. Euthanasia is a last resort to end undue Jourmit fij 1oo)02\ 134 J53 no suffering by an individual and/or prevent Johnston, Ill ami \tauson, P VI. (1941). Nematodes the spread of disease, from Australian marine mammals, Retards "/ tfu

l South \tiMi\iium Museum (». i' > 434. Johnston. It ami in. Acknowledgements D Watt. 1 19801 \ rapid method foi sectioning We wish to thank Pal Russell. Bill Mitchell and undecaleifjed carnivore Icclh foi age ing in 'Proceedings ol the Worldwide Salim Malik (Phillip Island Nature Park). and Furhcarei Conference, Frosflnirg, Maryland. Volume I. David Cass and Grant Griffin (Natural pp 407 Ml Eds I, \ Chanmanand i> Purslej Resources ami Environment} for assistance with Kirkwnoj. i R . pembenon. D. and CnpsoiuG 1 19*5) the sea handling lion. Rohyn Ickeringill llie conservation and management ol seals in

(Museum of Victoria i for identifying the Tasmania. (Unpublished report to DeparttncQl of cephalopod beaks, and Frank Busana (Victorian Parks. Wildlife and Keritnge Uoh.nti.

f twos, Menkhorsl. p \\ (Ed 1 Itisiuuie of Animal Science) for assistance with 'Mammals ol Victoria; Distribution. Ecohsgj and Conservation 1 (Oxford the tooth preparation. We also thank the Adas of I IUVers.it) Press; Melhonrnei Victorian Wildlife (email: [email protected]) 1 lie Needhara, D.J. I 199 ') role *i sea lion in sightings lion stomach; investigations using contrast radiogra- Victoria. Petei Sbaughness} For his personal ph} and Ruoroscop) In 'Marine Mammal Research in tlie communication of a recent sea lion sighting in Southern Hemispliere. Volume I Statu* 1 \eu Sooth Wales and an anonymous reviewer Ecology and Medicine pp u>-i IA9 Ed\ M. Hindetl andC Kemper. (Surrey Bcatty &Sons Sydney) foj iinprm ins. .1 draft of the manuscript. The sea

l Stirling, 1 1972) Ohsorvations on the Sea lion was autopsied under NRE Research Permit Australian I ion. Neophocu • tnennt (Wron), Kustr&titJti Juurnul No: RF-97-236. 1 ofZor>log\ 20. 2 'I ''I

Walker, I I I 1 G and ing, K | I9SJ Australian Sea

References I f km VtrtifthtK'a - iwnta tPeron, l *S6). In Handbook

\inhoin. I \ . I unn. N.J.. llarlon. Boyd, l.L. and T ol Marine Mammals. Volume I: Hie Walm*, Sea

1 live l ><>- 1992) Ageing Vnlan Lie Fui Seals and Southern I ions, l-ur Seals ( ami Sea Hief. pp 1 |s, KK S.tl. Elephanl Seals. Marine Mamitwl Scfenct II. 301-31 v KiU'.>v\a\ and R.J tlarris,, n . (Academic Press Bcahitry, \ K 1 I998J review of teal rehubi Illation ai I oil.loil). Melbourne Zot) 1987 1997 lh, Victorian w Vttnmitim arneke. I he KM | [9g2j, distribution and abundance in 115(2) l'> ol seals m llie Australasian region, WitJl simiinai ies Cousins, n.v . William* S.N.. Renter, R Foreihaw ol biolog) ami eniieni research. In 'Mammals nl the

. ('nfiins D„ Cluutwiek. D., Coughran, I.) p, and Seas', KAO Fisheries Scrifts S, pp 431 I7.s (FAO:

< I laJes, v .u. 1 i

seal I lAaracterisation oi the bacillus Australian A no, I ones. F, (1925') llie Mammals ol South

Vrin inan 92 " I Juurnul 70. Australia, pan 5. The Mouoddphiu"'. fGovomment Dcmii*.. I t- am] SttiHlghndSSy. P.D. (1996J si.,111:-, ol Hie Printer: Adelaide).

Australian Natural History Medallion Trust Fund The following donations were gratefully received during 1997-1999

Albm\ Wodonga Field Narufaiists Club W) Di Elizabeth N. Murks SUM) Helen Aston ss^ Queensland Ornithological Societ) $50 Ballarai Fieki NaiuraJtsts Club £20 Royal Societ) of Victoria $300 i ield Naturalists Society of South Australia $25 Victorian Ornithological Research Group S50 ( ieeloili! luekl Nuluinlists Club $20 Western Australian Naturalists Club MOO

The lunil relies almost eiitueK on donations, mw\ the annual admintstnative costs are aboul Sioo,

( I * pertsea in i >''s were high, because we had foui neu medallions struck, which togethei with the presentation boxes cost $1280. Anyone wishing to make u donation to this fund should make clici|ucs payable to the Field Naturalists Club ol Victoria, and send to the I reawirer, FNCV. Locked Bag I Blackburn 3130,

I he Australian Natural Hi&torj Medallion, which was instituted in 1939, is awarded annually i* 1 a p i on who. in the preceding ten years, has made a significant contribution to me understanding ol natural hfxtary in Australia,

Vol. 116(3) IW«> 11)1 Contributions

Hydroids from Ricketts Point and Black Rock, Victoria

Jeanette E Watson 1 and the late Daniel E, Mclnnes 2

Abstract Daniel Mclnnes. naturalist ant! microbiologist ( 3/ 1 0/1 Wo- 24/W8) left many notes but published lew results of his observations over many years on the Hydro/oa from Port Phillip Bay. In this paper his research notes on hydroids collected during the 1980s are collated and edited. The paper describes six species of athecate hydroids. two of which are first records for their respective genera in Australia, two are Australian species not reported since their first description and four thceaie

species including one probably species. Victorian ( Nuhn-ulisi ! 1 new (The lift *), IW, pp. 102-1 \.

Introduction

Daniel Mclnnes. naturalist and microbi- den under algae.) Although his measure- ologist (3/10/1906 - 24/9/98) left many ments and drawings are accurate, unfortu- notes bat published few results of his nately he left no preserved or mounted observations over many years on the voucher or type specimens, presumably Hydro/oa of Port Phillip Bay. During the because he continued observations until 1980s he regularly collected intertidal and the specimens died.

shallow water hydroids from the A difficulty I encountered in reviewing Melbourne seaside suburbs of Black Rock his data is that in many instances, he did (37° 5&' S. 145" OK E) and Ricketts Point not name the specimens under observation,

' 00' 02^ (3S S, 145 E) in Beaumaris. He providing only a reference such as 'hydroid lound many hydroids growing on common in red container 3*. Those specimens which seaweeds near shore and in tide pools on the he was able to name were usually con-eel to rock platform. Species on which he found genus and generally to species; often, how- hydroid epiphytes were the green alga Ufva, ever, these were old names now syn- holdfasts and thalli of the brown kelps onymised in the modem literature. Ecklonia radlota and Cystophora sp. and 1 suspect that his lack of rigorous scien- the red coralline alga Coruttina officinalis. tific publication was a matter of diffidence He examined his collections in the small and that he (quite wrongly) considered laboratory and seavvater aquarium at his himself to be an amateur whose efforts in home in the suburb of Malvern. The aquar- taxonomy would be unworthy of scientific ium system consisted essentially of aerated recognition. As a tribute to his work I now glass tanks and an array of plastic contain- try to set the record straight. 1 have been ers. Interesting specimens selected under able to extract and summarise from his the microscope were isolated in glass notes the following information: two petrie dishes in the containers. Hydroids species are first records of their respective thai particularly caught his attention were genera from Australia; two species have the small, cryptic species which have not been reported in Australia since their received little study in Australia. A first description and gaps in life histories detailed account of his collection methods of some others have now been filled. and aquarium maintenance are given in Because of insufficient information and Mclnnes (1982). unfinished sketches I regretfully exclude He kept a behavioural diary of his aquari- several other unusual athecate species. um specimens, including copious weekly, Three thecate species including one almost daily and sometimes hourly notes and dia- certainly new to science are reported and grams of interesting specimens. (One such other common athecate and thecate note plaintively asks 'Oh! where has my hydroids he found on algae are listed. For medusa gone?" An hour later according to clarity in publication it has been necessary his diary, the errant medusa was found hid- to redraw many of his sketches from the microscope. In keeping with what I am 1 Honorary Associate Invertebrate Zoology, Museum sure would have been his wish, in this of Victoria, Melbourne, Australia .W00, paper he is referred to simply as 'Dan'. Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc.

102 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Subclass Anthoathecata Description Family Clavidae McCrady, 1859 Hydranths arising directly from a creeping Clava Gmelin, 1791 stolon; stolon and hydranth pedicel covered Clava sp. by thin perisarc. Hydranth cylindrical, Fig. 1A young hydranth with four oral tentacles, probably moniliform, 0.3-0.4 mm long but Material tentacles not in a whorl; hypostome clavate. Colony collected 7/3/85 from underside Tentacles increasing in number to 18, scat- of Eckionia rodiata holdfast; colony sur- tered over hydranth body, older (distal) ten- vived until 18/4/85. Another colony of tacles up to 0.8 mm in length, proximal many dozens of hydranths collected 8/4/87. ones shorter. Hydranth up to 2 mm high at

B, extended hydranth with Fig. 1A-G. A. Clava sp.. extended hydranth. B-G. Rathkea octopunctata, apical view of medusa lour tentacles and medusa bud, C, medusa bud. enlarged, showing spots. D. with newly extended tentacles, G. lib- bud. E, more advanced medusa with tentacle bulbs. F. medusa erated medusa. Scale bar: 0.5 mm.

Vol. 116(3) 1999 103 Contributions maturity, pedicel about 1.2 mm long. above, the young medusa within the gonophore has four thick internal lobes. colourless grey. Colour Hydnmlhs to probably radial canals, and two central red Remarks spots connected by a thin red line (Fig.

I D). After four days the gonophore became One stolon grew to a length of 8.5 mm. vase-shaped with two opposite, protruding, The number of tentacles on the hydranth thick tentacle bulbs; base of bulbs with red increased from four to 10 over a period of spots. At this stage the medusa commenced nine days. During this lime one of the gonophore. hydranths was observed feeding on an pulsing inside the Over several hours the gonophore am phi pod. extended to 0.6 mm in length and the two One of the problems encountered in rear- tentacle bulbs became elongated into two ing very small hydroid colonies detached long, filiform tentacles armed with nema- from their substrate is inducing re-attach- locysts in the distal third; two more thick ment to new substrata in the aquarium. bulbs appeared opposite the origi- Dan apparently successfully solved this tentacle nal tentacles. The red spots, present at the with Clava by embedding the stolons in a base of each bulb, now enlarged into perra- blob oi' petroleum jelly on the bottom oi' a dial vesicles- peine dish. Several hours later, the medusa was This may be the species listed by Dan as released. At this stage the umbrella was Tunis negkcta Lesson (Mclnnes 1982). In balloon-shaped. 0.6 mm high and 0.4 mm the absence o\ reproductive structures and slightly thickened apically, with faint without information on the cnidome the wide, radial canals passing down the umbrella to species cannot be identified. There are \w

l lie tentacle bases. A quadrangular previous records o\' the genus Clava from than halfway Australia. manubrium extended more through the bell; mouth a simple broad disk. The gonophore remained as a trans- Family Rathkeidae Russell. 1953 Rathkea Brandt. 1838 parent deflated sheath. The observations Rathkea octopunctata

104 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

1996) and Australia (Southcotl 1982). cnidome oi' Dan's specimen, no further A puz/ling aspect is the red spots, devel- identification is possible. This is the first oping into prominent pustules near the base record of the genus Coryne from Australia. of the tentacles. As they occur on the tentacle and not the circular canal, these are not Dicoryne Allman. 1859 ocelli which, in any case, are excluded from Dkorxne annulata von Lendenfeld, 1884 the family definition of the Rathkeidae. No Fig. 2B such structures are mentioned in descriptions Dicoryne annulata von Lendenfeld. 1884: of more advanced medusae; it is possible 490, pi. 17, fig. 30. that these are lost as the medusa matures. The family definition of Rathkeidae also Material includes short oral arms on the manubrium Colonies collected 17/5/82, 10/9/82, and multiple sets of tentacles on the adult 5/1 1/82. Another colonv collected from medusa. Increase in the number of tentacles red coralline alga 22/1/82. is a common event in maturation of hydro- Description zoan medusae so it is equally possible that Colonies infertile. No information on in this species the oral tentacles may also hydrorhi/a. Hydranth pedicel cylindrical, grow at a later stage of development. 0.6 mm long. 0.18 wide, perisarc mod- Until the report by Watson (1998) and mm erately thick, deeply annulated. Extended the present account, the hydroid of A', hydranth 1.3-1.5 long, spindle-shaped, octopunctata was known only from some mm with 16-18 distal filiform tentacles Co 0.8 cultured specimens reared in overseas lab- long, hypostomc an open annulus. oratories (Russell 1953. Werner 1958). mm This account fills a gap in the natural life Remarks history of the species. This is undoubtedly Dicoryne annulata described bv von Lendenfeld from Port Family Corynidae Johnston. 1836 Phillip Bay." Coryne Gaertner, 1774 Dan left no information on the species Coryne sp. other than the scale drawing o\' the hydranth Fig. 2A and hydranth bud. The species has not been recorded since its first description. Material Sarsia Lesson, 1843 Collected from holdfast of Ecklonia radi- Sarsia radiuta von Lendenfeld, 1884 ata. 24/4/85; no other information. Fig, 2C Description Sarsia rudiufa von Lendenfeld, 1884: 583, Part of a small colony, simple and sparse pi. 20. fins 31. 32.- Walson. 1978; 305, fig. ly branched, diameter of branch 0.25 mm. 2A-D, pcrisarc almost smooth, reaching to base of hydninth. Hydranth 1.5 mm long, with an Material oral whorl of four capitate tentacles and Collected 25/4/82; no other information. (probably) 16-18 capitate tentacles scattered over body. Gonophorcs are fixed Description sporosacs scattered among tentacles; Hydranth I mm high, arising From a gonophore balloon-shaped, about 0.5 mm stolon (not sketched). Hydranth with \~oi\r long with a short peduncle and thick clear oral tentacles and nine to 10 tentacles scat- pellicle; sex probably male. tered over body; all tentacles long, capitate, capitulum armed with nematocysts. Colour Sporosac orange. Medusa 0.7 mm long and 0.6 mm wide, on below proximal tentacles, Remarks a short pedicel umbrella balloon-shaped, with four radial The specimen bears some similarities to canals and four long tentacles armed with Coryne sp. 1 of Schuchert (1996), small nematocysts; velum broad, almost quadrate in colonics of which were found on stones shape, opening small, circular. Manubrium and other cryptic habitats in New Zealand. cylindrical narrowing to a simple mouth. Unfortunately, without information on the

Vol. 116(3) 1999 105 Contributions

Fig, 2A-C. A. Corym sp., simple branch with hydranth and sporosacs. B, Dicoryne annulata, extended hydranth and hydranth bud. C, Sarsia radiata, extended hydranth and medusa about to be

released. Scale bar: A, 0,5 nun, B, C, 1 mm.

Remarks especially in relation to the basal pcrisarc This is probably the species referred by of the hydroid, the species is clearly Sarsia Dan to Stauridiosarsia productc (Wright), railiafa, previously reported from Port

( (see Mclnnes l )K2: 163). Although he pro- Phillip Bay by Watson ( 1978). The medusa vided no notes and his sketch lacks detail. was released in the aquarium.

106 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Family Aequoreidae Eschscholtz, 1829 Hydranth 2.5 mm long, spindle-shaped, Aequorea Peron & Lesueur, 1810 body slightly swollen below tentacle ring. Aequorea sp. Hydranth with 12 probably moniliform ten- Fig. 3A-C tacles 2 mm long, a large basal tentacle web 0.25 mm wide; hypostome circular. Material Cnidome of hydroid consisting of two Hydroid colony with medusa bud collect- size classes of nematocysts, probably ed 25/4/82; medusa released in laboratory isorhizas: from colony. Medusa collected 5/1 1/82. 1) capsule bean-shaped, 7.5 x 3.5 u,m Dan noted (26/9/86), that the colonies had tubule 350 u.m long. been 'in the (petrie) dishes for years, giv- 2) capsule bean-shaped. 15 x 7.5 \im, ing birth to medusae, and are the toughest tubule 100 urn long. of all hydroids. despite very cold to very Medusa buds borne on hydrorhiza and hot weather and "crook" seawater\ hydranth pedicel, the more advanced bud Description 0.5 mm high and 0.4 mm wide, showing a Colony stolonal, hydrorhiza tubular, creep- well developed manubrium and radial ing. Hydranth and medusa buds arising on canals. Medusa at release balloon-shaped, short annulated pedicels from hydrorhiza; bell 0.6 mm high and 0.6 mm wide, with pedicel expanding distally from base. four radial canals and a cylindrical

Fig. 3A-C. Aequorea sp.. A. hydranth and medusa buds. B, newly liberated medusa. C, nematocysts from hydranth. Scale bar: A. B. 0.5 mm. C, 10 urn.

Vol. 116(3) 1999 107 Contributions manubrium narrowing to simple tubular Description lips: ex umbrella covered by numerous New hydranths spindle-shaped, arising scattered large nematoeysts. base of bell about I mm apart from a reptant stolon with two opposite long moniliform tenta- about 0.15 mm diameter: juvenile hydranth cles with swollen bulbs and two opposite with three capitate tentacles increasing to perradial tentacle bulbs at base of radial four or five after seven to 10 days, mature canals, ring canal narrow, eight interradial hydranth at that stage about 1.5 mm long marginal vesicles with concretions, velum with a clavate hypostome; medusa buds broad. appear as bulges on lower body and stolons. Medusa small, with four groups of Remarks bifurcate tentacles, each with an ocellum at There is indication in his laboratory notes base. Buds grew over four days, in which (see Mclnnes 1982: 163) that Dan assumed time the tentacles lengthened with one this hydroid to be a species of Perigouimus bifurcation longer than the other. Medusae Sars. has features However, the medusa were released after four to five days, described for juveniles of Aequorea creeping on floor of aquarium. At this

(Pcron and Lesueur 1 809) in the jbrskalea stage the aboral tentacles were shorter, concretionary vesicles of the ring canal, each bearing five nematocyst pads - a large and pf vitrina Gosse. 1853. in Aequorea terminal pad. two closely adjacent pads a the almost complete cover of the exum- short distance down the tentacle, a smaller brella by large nematoeysts. pad, almost opposite, and one small pad The figured cnidome is from the tentacle opposite the bifurcation. The lower, longer web of the hydroid and it is possible that (oral) tentacles without nematoeysts, but these, and the tentacular nematoeysts. are with a bluntly pointed end. different from those of the medusa. The The medusae lived for four days after nematoeysts cannot be further identified as release during which lime 18 tentacles there is no information on the armature of developed and several new medusa buds the tubule. commenced growth around the manubrium The problem with precise identification of of the parent. species of Aequorea is that the hydroid and early life histories of most common Remarks Aequorea medusae in the world plankton Although Briggs (1920) collected many are virtually unknown. A further complicat- medusae and wrote a detailed account of ing factor is that the relatively large adult Stauroeladia haswelli from the Sydney medusae bearing many tentacles bear little region, he never discovered the parent resemblance to juvenile forms. It is likely hydroid. From Dan's description and that the hydroid Aequorea phillipensis sketches there is no doubt that this is the

Watson 1998 from Port Phillip Bay is the first record of the hydroid of S. haswelli. same as that found by Dan: however, this Except for the absence of a ring of aboral can only be ascertained with collection of tentacles the hydroid resembles other more material and further laboratory study. known polyps of Stauroeladia: the absence of these tentacles may be a normal character of S. haswelli or possibly a consequence of

Family Cladonematidae Gegenbauer. 1 857 the specimens being reared in an aquarium. Stauroeladia haswelli (Briggs, 1920) Dan mentions that the medusae were fed Fig. 4A. B on amphipods and the hydranths on tubifex worm cut into very small pieces. Cnidonema haswelli Briiiss, 1920: 93 - 104. pis 17. 18.

Material Subclass Leptothecata Several colonics collected from coralline Family Syntheciidae Marktanner- alga. 14/1/82: colony attached to glass of Turneretscher, 1890 aquarium; observations proceeded until Hincksella Billard, 1918 9/3/82. Hineksella cylindrica (Bale, 1888) Fig. 4C

108 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Fig. 4A-C. A, B. Slaumckulia haswelli, A. colony with hydranths and medusa bud with developing medusae. B. medusa, showing two sets of tentacles only, and medusa buds. C, Hincksclia cyUndrica, hydrothecae and extended hydranth. Scale bar; 1 mm.

Sertularella cyUndrica Bale, 1888: 765, pi. corrugated hydrothecae or Hincksclia

16. fig. 7.- Ralph, 1966: 163. cyUndrica (Bale 1888) with smooth hydrothecae. Ralph (1966) was also uncer- Material tain to which species her faintly corrugated Colony collected on Ecklonia holdfast, specimens from Port Phillip Bay should be February 1985, maintained for approximate- referred. As the hydrothecae of Dan's 1985. ly eight weeks in aquarium to May, specimens are smooth the species is here cyUndrica. Probably Remarks assigned to H. detailed studies will eventually show the Dan was uncertain whether the colony two to be conspecific. with faintly undulated hydrothecae was Thecate hydroids are well known to be Hincksclia corrugatum Millard. 1958 with

Vol. 116(3)1999 109 Contributions

intractable aquarium subjects so it is a Material remarkable achievement to have maintained Colony collected 16/10/82; no other a thecate colony over this period of time in information. relatively primitive laboratory conditions. Remarks This collection date is the first record of Family Haleciidae Hincks, 1868 the species from Port Phillip Bay. Halecium Oken, 1815 Halecium fragile Hodgson, 1950 Halecium sp. Fig. 5A Fig. 5B

Halecium fragile Hodgson, 1950: 15, fig. Material lla-d. Colonies collected twice, the first on

Fig. 5A and 5B. A, Halecium fragile, stem and extended hydrunths. B, Halecium sp., hydrorhi/a, hydranths and gonotheca. Scale bar: 1 mm.

110 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

2/4/82, the second collection a fertile Tuhle 1. Common Hydroids on Algae From colony from weed, 25/10/82; this colony Ricketta Point and Black Rock, maintained in aquarium until 27/12/S2. Species Habitat Description Eleutheria dichotomy

Qualivt'agcs, 1 S42 corallines llulrorhi/u a creeping undulated stolon; liitdciufriiwi capilia re hydrolhecal pedicels 0. 25-0.35 high. mm Aider, 1856 brown alga 0.12-0.13 mm diameter, arising singly at Silicularia mxea intervals from hydrorhi/a; pedicels deeply Meyen, 1834 Ecklonla ihalli annulated. Hydrophore shallow dish- Orthopyxis * (ilicnltiln shaped (hut not clearly Figured), hydranih (Hincks. 1853) brown alga Clyt'ui hcmisplniciica lilaiiicnlous red tall, spindle-shaped, with IS- 20 tentacles. (Linnaeus. 1767) alga Gonothcca borne on a short annulated I'liiitlellii ifinitJraUi pedicel from hydrorhi/a or from side of (Forbes. 1848) brown alga hydrolhecal pedicel, mitten-shaped, abora! Amphisbetiu minima Echlonia hold side deeply ridged. 0.6 mm long and 0.5 (Thompson, 1879) las! mm wide, orifice (probably) cylindrical, f'lituiuliiriti iMiqua i'.cklonia hold 0.13 mm in diameter, possibly with slight- (Johnston, 1847) last

Pitnmthiria selnvcoulcs Bale, / i kiouui ilialli Is everted rim. One gonothcca containing 1882 several spherical ova. Monotheca pulchella (Bale. ICvstophora Remarks 1SS2) Hull SiTfiiltitrlld robusta Dan figured the species but left no notes, Coughtrey, 1876 no! given assuming it to be Halecium corrugatissi- Muiiotlwt (i spinulosa (Bale. nol given mum Trehilcoek, l°2K. However. H. cor- IKX2) rUgatissimum is a tall, arborescent l\ Aglaophenia plumosa Bale. Ecklonia hold branched hvdroid. not slolonal as is this I.XK2 last species. As there is no other known Ralph I'orl Bay Survfi} l'JS7- Halecium similar to Dan's figure it is V- M. (1966). Phillip lfe llvdtoida. Memoirs oj thu National Museum <•! almost certainly an undescribed species. Victoria 27, 157-166- however, await the find- Verification must, Russell. F. S. 1 1953). The medusae nl the British Isles. ing of more material. Anihoiiu'dtisac. Lcptomedusae, Tnu:hyrneduKUc and

Naivotnedusae' (Cambridge: 1 'K) ( Supplementary Species List Saw, M. (1835) Beskrivelsci os lagltagclsci ovej nogjc niaerkclijje filer n\e I llawi ved den Heiiieiiske At various times Dan found other common K\si levcnde Dyr. Bergen pp 81, pK 1 15 hvdroid species on algae. The list (Table I) Sehikherl, P (1996) The maiine launa 01 New

alheeale hydtoids and I heir medusae is extracted from his notes ( 1982- 1985) and Zealand: << mdana: llydio/oa). New Zealand Qrettnoftrtiphit from Mclnnest 1982: 163). Institute MemoU 106, I 159, figs I S5 Jellvlishes Hlasses Seyplm/oa Acknowledgements SoUthcotl. K. V. (1982) and llydru/un). In "Marine Invertebrates of Southern

I Mrs ( Mel lines tor providing me with thank I Australia.* , Pari I Eds S,A Shepherd and M permission publish this Dan's notes and to rhonias pp. I 15 -159. resume of his researches on (he Hydm/oa leiulenlekl. R. von. (-1884-) The Auslrulian IhLln.medii-ae I'arl IV. 1'iot trditi\>\ pj the I mnctili References Society ofNew South Wales 9 ($), 467-492, pis 12-17,

( ISSI ) I he Ausi | al kiii rare in I rndenleld, R. von Hale, VV VI i IS8K), On Some new ami Kydroida I'art Proceedings "/ the Litmean Lhe Museum eollecnon. Proceedings "! the Linnean llvdmmediisae. V Nnv South 9{S), 581-634, pK 20-29, Soviet) ofNeM South ^3^3(2), 745-799. pis. 12-21. Six lety oj Wutes l oJ mi .! E. ( l >7S). New species and new records Bn^s h A. (1920). On ,i riL-w specie 8 crawling Watson, medusa (Cniikmema haswetH) from Australia. Re\ arm Australian aiheeaie hydroids, Proceeding* of the oj Victoria ijthx [uatFtitianAiuMti*ml50),93 IM.pls 17. 18 Hoval Society W(2) % 30) W. 1'ro-dodyies of a muddy hOOorfl: Hodgson, M, (1950). A revision ol the rasmanian Walstm. J, I'.. ( 1998) holes in the seabed. In Hydroida Papers and Proceedings of //"' Royal the hvdioid Fauna Ol volume loi the 80th birthday ol Tasmania for the Year [949, I 65 'Commemorative Society "i "'. ( observations on hydroids Willem Veivnorl m IW7' Bds I den I UrtOfl \ Mclnnea, I), t: 1 1982), Some I- ( van Bruggcn, P, I S Cornelius and P van i Black Rock fProi Phillip Buy< Australia), The Zoahgische Verhandelingen Victorian Natuntfi*t9% 159 163 Oftvegen pp.247 256

i I 448. O'Sullivan, I). (1984) Description ol Rathkea 333. ul M (l l>^X) Die Verbreitung und das lizzioiJi'i sp, nov (I Ivdtonn-dusae Kadikeidae) from Werner, Alillrelen der Anlhomedusa Rathkea Anlauliea and a \.r\ to the eeim hninial >/ N.illihtl l.ihn-s/i-ilhelie M. Sars, sowie die Histon W(6J, 861 868. OCtOpunrtata carat Temperaturabbaengigkeil ihiei Bntwicklung utvd I A (1809) Tableau des PeVon, , and Lesucw C whstrtst Heht i i -priaii/uHj.'. haft . lor Helgaltinder < el ..., : ,

III Vol. 116(3) 1^99 Contributions

The Booroolong Frog Litoria booroolongensis Moore (Anura; Hylidae): an Addition to the Frog Fauna of Victoria.

Graeme R. Gillespie' and David Hunter

Abstract The BooroolongB Frog Litofid boomoldngensh is a lotic species formerly restricted to streams in New South Wales. We report confirmation of the species in north-east Victoria, north of Burrow;! Pine Mountain. This species has declined throughout much of its range in New South Wales and is currently listed as Endangered in thai Slate. These records are therefore a significant extension to the 12-1 known occurrence of the species. (The Victorian Naturalist 116(3), I'W pp. 1 14).

Introduction

The Booroolong Frog Litoria booroolon- about its current conservation sialus gensis is a riverine species morphological- (Anstis et al. 1998). Further south, there ly similar to Lcsucur's Frog /,. lesueuri are relatively few historical records (Moore 1961. Anstis et al. 1998) (Fig. I). (Australian Museum records; New South

It occurs predominantly along western- Wales Wildlife Atlas). A recent survey flowing streams of the Great Dividing conducted for riverine frogs along west Range in New South Wales, from catch- flowing streams in Koseiuszko National ments draining the Northern Tablelands, to Park failed lo find the species at two his- the Tunuit River in the Southern toric collection sites, and only located it in Highlands, and other tributaries of the one stream in the region (Hunter and Murrumhidgee River (Caughlcy and Gal! Gillespie in press). The species has recent- 1985; Heatwole ct al. 1995; Anslis et al. ly been listed as endangered in New South 1998; Hunter and Gillespie In press). Wales (NSW Threatened Species Litoria booroolongensis has been recorded Conservation Act 1995). close to (he north-eastern Victorian border Observations (Caughley and Gall 1985), but previous During the summer of 1998/99 we con- fauna surveys have not located it in dueled a survey commissioned by the New Victoria. This may be because accurate South Wales National Parks and Wildlife identification of/,, booroolongensis is dif- Service, to assess the current distribution ficult, especially in the south of its range of /_. booroolongensis along the south- where the species is superficially very sim- western slopes of the Great Dividing ilar lo L. lesueuri (G. Gillespie pers. obs.). Range in New South Wales. During this The Australian Museum holds several survey we located the species along three juvenile /,. booroolongensis specimens small creeks, several kilometres north of collected in 1961 from the King River, the Murray River, near Jingellte, New near Wangaralta in Victoria (Australian South Wales. This led us to suspect that L. Museum record nos R909 I 7-R90930). booroolongensis may also occur along However, examination oi' these specimens similar small creeks feeding the Murray by one of the authors (GG) indicates that River from Victoria, north ol" Burrow a they are /.. lesueuri. Pine Mountain. We subsequently surveyed Litoria booroolongensis was formerly four creeks (Burrow ye. Walwa. Sandy and abundant along streams draining the Cudgewa Creeks) and the Murray River in Northern Tablelands of New South Wales this area. Litoria booroolongensis was (Heatwole et al. 1995). There have been located on Burrowye Creek at Burrowye very few sightings of this species in the (36" 2" H; 147 1 33' S), and on the banks of past ten years (New South Wales Wildlife the Murray River near Jingellic (3.V 56* E; Atlas), and concerns have been raised J 1 147 42 S), confirming the occurrence of Aiihur Rylah Institute. Department ol' Natural the species in Victoria (Fig. 2). Specimens

Resources and I n\ intnnieiil, I'D lio\ I ^7. were collected from each of these localities Heidelberg, Victoria 30S4. Applied Ecology Group, University of Canberra, P.O. and lodged with the Victorian Museum Box I- UekonnVn, ACT JMn

112 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Fig. I. The Booroolong FroLr Litoria bvoroolongt //.v/'v, from Bombowlie Creek, southern New South Wales. Photo: G. Gillespie/ (Victorian Museum record nos D69973 Victorian Wildlife Atlas). Litoria booroo- andD69974). tongensh is therefore likely to be restricted Our observations in southern New South in Victoria to this region north oi' Burrowa Wales suggest that L booroolongensis and Pine Mountain. L. lesueuri have allopatric distributions in Litoria booroolongensis inhabits rocky this region. We found L. lesueuri along permanent streams, ranging from small Cudgeua Creek, and previous surveys in slow-flowing creeks to large rivers (Anstis the region have located L. lesueuri on most et a!. 1998; authors' pers, obs.). Adults are other streams in this region of Victoria typically found sheltering under boulders (Watson et al. 1991; Gillepsie and Hollis or cobbles near riffles along the stream 1996; Hunter and Gillespie in press: bank (Anstis et al. 1998; authors' pers. obs.). The species occurs along streams in both forested areas and open pasture. Sites where we observed the species in Victoria and southern New South Wales were highly modified streams flowing through pas- lure, and were heavily disturbed and pol- luted by cattle. In the southern parts of its range, breeding occurs in spring. Hggs are deposited in rock crevices in the stream or in isolated stream-side pools (authors' pvrs. obs.). Tadpoles metamorphose in January and February (Anstis et al. I99S).

Identification Litoria booroolongensis is morphologi- cally very similar to L. lesueuri, which is a common and widespread riverine species et Fi^. 2. Localities of Litoria hoaroolongemu in south-eastern Australia (Barker al. find ica led in closed circles) m north-eastern 1995). The species can be reliably distin-

Victoria. (Scale 1 cm = 20 km.)

Vol. 116(3) 1909 113 Contributions

guished from L. Iesueuri by the extension Saddler (Australian Museum) and John of webbing to the base of the first inner toe Coventry (Museum of Victoria) kindly provided access to museum specimens. R. Loyn and G. pad on the hind fool. The webbing on L. Brown provided comments on the manuscript. Iesueuri extends only to the base of the penultimate phalange of the first inner toe References (authors' pers. obs,), Litoria booroolon- Anstis. M., Alford, R.A. and Gillespie. G.R. (I99S). Breeding biology ol' Litoria hooroohmgensis Moore gensis typically has a highly mottled dor- and L. iesueuri Dumeril and Bihron (Anura: sum with a scattering of salmon-coloured Hylidae)- Transactions of the Rayah Soviets- of South flecks. Litoria Iesueuri typically has a dis- Australia 122. 33-43. Barker. J.. Grigg. G. and Tyler. M.J. (1995). 'A Field tinct black stripe passing through the eye Guide to Australian Frogs'. 2nd Ed. (Surrey Beatty: and over the tympanum to the shoulder, Chipping Norton. New South Wales). Caughley. J. whereas this is less distinct in L. booroo- and Gall. B. (1985). Relevance of zoological tran.siiion to conservation of fauna: amphibians longensis {Barker et al 1995). and reptiles in south-western slopes of New South Wales. Australian Zoologist 21. 513-529. Significance Gillespie. G.R- and Holiis. G.J. (1996). Distribution Litoria booroolongensis is one of a num- and habitat of the spoiled tree frog Litoria spenceri Dubois (Anura: Hylidae). and an assessment of ber of riverine species in eastern Australia potential causes of population declines. Wildlife which have suffered severe population Research 23.49 -75. declines over the past two decades (Tyler Heatwole. H.. De Bavay. J.. Webber, P. and Webb. G. (1995). Faunal survey of New England, IV. The frogs. 1997). Its discovery in Victoria is a signifi- Memoirs of the Queensland Museum 38. 229-49. cant addition to the frog fauna of the State, Hunter. D. and Gillespie, G.R. (in press). The distribution, abundance taking the total number of species recorded and conservation status of riverine frogs in Kosciuszko National Park. Australian to 35 (Atlas of Victorian Wildlife). Further Zoologist. information is required to determine the Moore. J. A. (1961). The frogs ol eastern New South Wales. Bulletin the American current distribution of this species and the of Museum of Natural History 121,302. causes of its apparent decline, and how Tyler, M.J. (1997). The Action Plan For Australian best to manage and protect these remaining Frogs'. (Biodiversity Group, Environment Australia; populations. Canberra). Watson, G.F. Liltlejohn. M.J.. Hero. M.-J. and Robertson, R (1991). Conservation Status. Acknowledgements Ecology and Management of the Spotted Tree Frog {Litoria This work was funded by the New South Wales spenceri). Arthur Rylah Institute Technical Report National Parks and Wildlife Service and the Scries No. 116. (Department of Conservation and Arthur Rylah Institute. Department of Natural Environment: Victoria). Resources and Environment, Victoria. Ross

Erratum

Re ^Emperor: the Magnificent Penguin\ review by Peter Dann, in The Victorian Naturalist 116 (2), 46. Pauline Reilly was not the first female President of the R.A.O.U. A Mrs. Perrine Moncrieff, of New Zealand, had that honour. She was President during 1932-33. Thanks to Mrs Tess Kloot for pointing this out.

For assistance with the preparation of this issue, thanks to the computer team - Alistair Evans and Anne Morton. Thanks also to Felicity Garde (label printing) and Michael McBain (web page).

114 The Victorian Naturalist Book Review

Dawn Till Dusk: In the Stirling and Porongurup Ranges

by Rob Olver and Stuart Giver

Publisher: Tuan House. 1998. 176 pp. RRP $45 hard cover, $34 paper cover

'Dawn Till Dusk is both a practical guide common and scientific names, I wondered to. and a visual celebration of. the Stirling why the authors did not do the same for the and Porongurup Ranges of South-western orchids that were mentioned in the text. 1 Australia/ This quote from the press realise many are undergoing revision, but release is an accurate description o\ this would have still liked the current name wonderful book. The photography, mostly included. done by Rob Olvcr. is enough to make you Bridal Creeper is also mentioned as a want to pack your bags and catch the first problem weed in the Stirlings. This is a flight lo W.A. Des Olver also supplies a common name for a highly invasive weed sci- stunning shot of a Western Grey Kangaroo and once again I would have liked the in the Stirling Range heathland. entific name to clarify what plant the The book covers such topics as: detailed authors were referring to. Was the plant information of natural history, bushwalks, Myrsiphyllum asparagoicles'l Bridal Veil climbs, special attractions, gliding, flying, and Bridal Creeper are common names wineries, scenic drives, facilities and used by the nursery trade and sold to the accommodation. unwary. Chapter one gives a little of the known The authors state thai in the Porongurup Aboriginal history. Chapter two gives a Range. 300 varieties of fungi grow. I more detailed and well-researched record would suggest that there are many more, of early European history. Then follow but was interested that a count of species chapters on: geology, climate, flora and has taken place as like the non-vascular fauna and some very useful maps for the plants (mosses, lichens and liverworts) future travellers of this magnificent area. they are sometimes overlooked when Flora five, on and Flora are being compiled. I was pleased to read in Chapter use- the subject of mammals, that control of The chapter on scenic drives will be trip to the two feral cat and fox populations need to be ful for visitors planning a chapters addressed before the re-introduction of parks, but it is the bushwalking some of the diminishing mammal species. that are exeeplional their enthusiasm for The topic of environmental weeds is these two magnificent areas is apparent. touched upon; this and the feral animal Rob and Stuart have gone to great detail to these two problems faced by most land managers is explain the way to really see through- often omitted from books of this nature. areas on loot. Maps are excellent including this chapter. Also, the authors highlight the serious out the whole book information is given in effects of PhytOlhphorc cinnaniomi. the The rock-climbing fungus which has devastated many W.A. the same detail with stunning photos of climbs. forests. A Management Plan has been pre- some challenging this very well pared for the Stilling Range and at present I highly recommend beautifully photographed twenty-five percent of the park is closed lo researched and congratulate the authors for shar- all users on a seasonal basis. C.A.L.M. is book and the Stirling also carrying out research on threatened ing their vast knowledge on Ranges. The book is an and priority listed flora in the Stirling and Porongurup planning to Ranges. absolute must for any traveller ranges in the future. There are 123 species ol the Orchidaceac explore these two family found in the Stirling Range. 38$ o\' Cecily Falkinj'hani Australia. As all known orchids in Western 27 Chippewa Avenue. all the flowers in previous chapters give Mitehum, Victoria 3132.

115 Vol. 116(3) 1999 The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc. Reg NoA003361 IX

Established 1880

In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria

OBJECTIVES: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian flora andfauna.

Membership is open to any person interested in natural history and includes beginners as well as experienced naturalists.

Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia. Registered Office: FNCV, 1 Gardenia Street Australia. Postal Address; FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Phone/Pax (OS) 9*77 9860; Internationa] Phone/Fax 61 3 9X77 9860.

Patron His Excellency, The Honourable James Gohho, The Governor of Victoria

Key Office-Bearers Yarra 3141. 9252 2319 President: DrTOM MAY. c/- National Herbarium, Bird wood Avenue, South Vice Presidents: Or NOEL SCHLEIGtR and MR JOHN SEEBECK lion. Secretary; Mis ANNH MORTON, 10 RupicolaCt, Rowville 3178. 97900656 lion. Treasurer. Mr AKNIS DZEDTNS, PO Box 1000. Blind Bighl 3980. 5998 7996 Suhs<-rii>lion-Seeret

1 3. Blackburn 3 30. Al I 5428 4097 Librarian: Mis SI IEILA HOUG1 1 TON, FNCV, Locked Bag PO Excursion Co-ordinator: Mr DENNIS MELT2ER, S Hareourl Ave. Caulield 3162. 9523 1853 All Hook Sales; I_)r ALAN PARKIN. FNCV, Locked Bay 3. PO Blackburn 3130. 9850 2617 Book Brokerage: Mr RAY WHITE, 20 Allied Street, Essendon 3040. 93793002 3094. 9435 8408 Newsletter Editor: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, I Aslley Street, Montmorency Conservation Coordinator: Ms JENNY WILSON. RMB 2930. Eutoa 3660. 5798 5535 Group Secretaries

Botany'. Mr RAY MACPIILRSON, X Jean Street. Lower Tcmplcslowe 3107. 9X50 4319 Geology, Mr ROB IIAMSON, 5 Foster Street, MeKinnon 3204. 9557 5235 Fauna Survey: Ms SUSAN MYERS, I7A Park Street. Hawthorn J122, 9819 2539 Marine Researeh: Mr MICHAEL LYONS, 2/18 Stonnington Place, Toorak 3142. All 9S22 8007 Microscopical: Mr KAY POWFR. 36 Schotters Road. Mernda 3754. 9717 JH1

MEMBERSHIP Members receive The Victorian Naturalist and the monthly Field Nat News free. The pub organises several monthly meetings (free to all) and excursions (transport costs may be charged). Field work, including botany, mammal and invertebrate surveys, is being done al a number of locations in

Victoria, and all members are encouraged to participate.

SUBSCRIPTION RATES lor 1999 Year Half-Year First Member Metropolitan $40 $20 Concessional (pensioner/st udent/unen ployed) $30 $15 Country (more than 50km fromGPO) $30 $15 Junior (under 18) $15 $7 Additional Members Adult $15 $15 Junior $5 $5

Institutional Australian Institutions $55 Overseas Institutions AU$65 Schools/Clubs $35

Send to: FNCV, Loc ked Bag 3, PO Blackburn. Victoria 3130, Austr; lia.

Printed by Brown Prior Anderson. 5 Hvans Street. Burwood, Victoria 3125. Tli Victorian Naturalist

Volume 116 (4) August 1999

Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Vietoria since 1884 Nttittmlisl Notv

Intertidal Sighting of Stiliger smaragdinus Baba 1949 -an Uncommon Mollusc

During Mio laic morning of 23 February ed half an hour later, the mollusc had not 1999, ai Kitty Miller hay, Phillip Island, a moved from its position. single Stiliger smaragdinus was sighted in Stiliger smaragdinus is found in Japan, the lowermost intertida] /one during the the western Pacific, around Australia and spring low tide. This is an opisthobranch also in New Zealand (Hum I^X). to

mollusc in the Order Sacoglossa (sec Burn depths ol' 22 m (Edgar 1997). It feeds on

1998), li was exposed to air on a rial rock green algae and, when sighted, is often that was situated between two rockpools associated with (\ cactoides (Edgar 1997). rich in the seaweeds Caulerpa cactoides The species attains lengths of up to 75 mm and Amphibolis antan lica. The day was (Burn 1998; Edgar 1997). warm hut overcast Acknowledgements The mollusc was placed in a plastic con- I thank the Marine Research Group tor their eager lainei of seawatei", il then expanded and support, particularly Clarric Kandreck For nis began i<> move about. The estimated length cntluisiam, Robert hum lor identifying the mol- was 5 cm. The specimen was a beautiful lusc, ami both of these and Ken Bell lor valuable lime green with delicate yellow and bluish comments on an earlier draft of this note. while colouration at the bases of the cerata References and across the bodies of some of them, The Burn, R, (1998). Qrda Sacoglossa. In 'Mollusca: The numerous cerata waved about like algal Southern Synthesis. Fauna of Australia. Volume 5, fronds when the water column was dis- Pari B\ pp, 961 974 Eds P.L. Bcesley, OJ.B. Ross and A. Wl-IIs. (CSIRO Publishing: Melbourne). lurbed. The photograph below shows the i ii-.ii ( i.j. . < 1997). 'Australian Marine Life, The Plants elevated pericardium on the dorsum of the and Annuals of Temperate Waters*. (Reed Books: Australia) mollusc, with the anal opening as a raised

while papilla just anterior to il (see Hum I'hilon 1998), Alter photography, the specimen Vnlliiclis 26 0'Donnell Street, in was left the adjacent rockpool on a Uoud Rosanna East, Victoria J084 ol C. cactoides. When the spot was revisit-

Stiliger smaragdinus at Kitty Miller Bay, 23 February 1999. Photo by Raton Vafladis.

I IK The Victorian Naturalist The Victorian Naturalist \

Volume 116(4) 1999 August

Editor: Merilyn Grey

Research Report Attitudes Towards Possums: a Need for Edueation byK. Miller, P. Brown audi. Tetnby 120

Contributions A New Inland Record of the Swamp Skink Egernia coventryi Storr, 1978, by N. Clemann and C. Beardseil 127

The Use of 'Farms' for Denning by the Common Ringtail Possum Psettdocheirus peregrinus at Subalpine Altitudes, byK Green 129 A Survey of the Vertebrate Fauna of the Rushworth Slate Forest. Fauna Survey Group Contribution No. 22, by S. Myers and S. Dashper 131

Moss Bed Lake on the Nunniong Plateau, by R. Fletcher 142

Letters to the From A. Thies: Determination of liverwort from Mt Torbreck Editor Lepidoza laevifolia 145 From N. Romanowski: Aquaeulture of Silver Perch Bidyanus bidyanus 146 From G. Kibria: Response to N. Romanowski 147

Naturalist Notes Intertidal Sighting of Stiliger smaragdinus Baba 1949 -

an Uncommon Mollusc, by P. Vafiadis 1 18 Fungi Found in a Suburban Garden, by C. Falkingham 148 Ant Behaviour, by E. Grey 150 Mound-building Ants, by G. Howie 152

Book Reviews Australian Ants: Their Biology and Identification (Monographs on Invertebrate Taxonomy Volume 3), by S.O. Shattuck,

reviewer I). Britton 153 Beauty in Truth: The Botanical Art of Margaret Stones, by Irena Zdanowicz and Brilliant Careers: Women Collectors and Illustrators in Queensland, by Judith McKay, reviewer L. Gil(bank 154

ISSN 0042-5184

Cover: The Common Brushtail Possum Trichosurus vulpecula in the Fitzroy Gardens, Melbourne, eating bread left by tourists. (See Research Report, p. 120.) Photo by Kelly Miller. Find us on the WEB: http://ealcile.apana.ors.au/riuv/ email: fn [email protected] Research Report

Attitudes Towards Possums: a Need for Education?

1 Kelly K. Miller , Peter R. Brown' and Ian Temby-

Abstract When dealing with wildlife-human conflict issues, social Considerations are as important as biological and ecological considerations to the successful implementation of management strategies. This study investigated the human dimensions of the human-possum conflict, by asking people in an urban area of Melbourne for their views and knowledge of possums. The survey found that although factual knowledge of possums within the community is generally low. residents arc keen to learn more about possums. It also found that respondents with a high knowledge of possum biology had a more positive attitude towards possums than respondents with a comparatively low level of knowledge. These findings suggest that further community education on this issue is warranted. (The Victorian Naturalist lift (4). L999, 120-126).

I 111 roil oc t inn Although research into the human dimen- roof cavity of a house (How and Kerle sions or wildlife management is well 1995). The occupation of house roof cavi- advanced in North America, it is still in its ties by members of this species is common infancy in Australia (Jones 1993). North in many urban areas of Australia and is the American studies over the last two to three primary cause of conflict between humans decades suggest that an understanding of and possums (Mow 1992). the human component of wildlife manage- Problems associated with the Common ment issues is crucial to the effective Brushtail Possum include noise, damage to implementation of management strategies. the house, damage to garden plants, aes- As Pomerantx et al, {1987: 357) explain, thetic problems, and potential health risks. 'understanding the public's needs and con- 1. Noise from possum movement (in the cerns and communicating the rationale for ceiling and on the roof) and calls agency programs back to the public are possum can present necessary steps to achieving management problems for residents. Indirect noise problems can also occur objectives*. This understanding is particu- when domestic dogs bark al larly important for wildlife-human conflicts possums during the such as those arising from the cohabitation night. 2. Damage to the house can include urine of people and possums in urban areas. stains and holes in Two species of possum commonly the ceiling and walls. 3. Damage to garden plants result cohabit with humans in the urban, subur- can when native ban and rural areas of Australia: the possums defoliate and ornamental trees shrubs Common Ringtail Possum Pseudockeirus and and eat vegeta- peregrinus and the Common Brushtail bles, fruit and flowers. Possum Triclutsttrus vulpeculu. Both 4. Aesthetic problems can occur when there is possum odour, droppings species are protected in the State of on driveways or urine stains on cars. Victoria under the Wildlife Act 1975. 5. Potential health risks While the Common Ringtail Possum can can cause concern for residents (e.g. loss sleep create problems for residents, such as dam- of due to age to garden plants (McKay and Ong noise). 1995: Temby 1992) and aesthetic problems In order to better understand the dynam- (e.g. droppings on driveways), it is the ics of the urban possum issue, the aim of Common Brushtail Possum that causes this study was to investigate what people most concerns. The Common Brushtail in an urban area feel (altitudes) and know Possum is nocturnal and spends the day in (knowledge) about possums and explore a den in a hollow branch, tree trunk, fallen the link between the two. log or, with increasing urbanisation, in the 1 School of Ecology and Environment, Denkin Methods University, 662 Blackburn Road, Clayton. Victoria The City of Knox, a group of suburbs H68. located approximately 25 east of FJora and Fauna Branch. Department of Natural km the Resources and Environment, 250 Victoria Parade, Easl Melbourne Central Business District, was Melbourne, Victoria 3002. chosen as the study site. This site contains

120 The Victorian Naturalist Research Report

highly vegetated areas (particularly in tative data, descriptive and inferential sta- those areas abutting the Dandenong Ranges tistics (two-sample z test (Moore and National Park) through to residential areas McCabe 1993)) were used with compara- with little vegetative cover. It was therefore tive data statistically significant at p < considered to be representative of a range 0.05. For qualitative data, open-ended of different types of urban areas. questions were analysed for key themes A nine-page questionnaire was mailed, in and important comments. These compo- to 1995. 500 adult residents (randomly nents of the data are illustrated using direct selected using publicly available ratepay- quotes from respondents. ers books) throughout the City of Knox, of Results whom 142 residents responded (28%). A and Discussion limited time-frame did not allow follow-up Respondent attitudes towards possums of non-respondents, and the sample were assigned to three main categories (referred to as the Resident Sample) was based on answers to several questions including considered to be an adequate si/e for the 'how would you describe your exploratory nature of the study. Twenty- overall view of possums?' and 'why do one percent of respondents were 18-30 you hold this view?' The altitude categories were: years of age. 42$ w ere 3 1 -45 years o( age. 23% were 46-60 years of age. 149r were 1. Positive attitude, where the respondent Over the age of 60 years; and 7096 of the indicated that possums were welcome at sample was female. the house or property; Accompanying the questionnaire was a 2. Negative attitude, where the respondent covering letter and reply-paid envelope. indicated that possums were a nuisance The covering letter introduced the study to or pest; and potential respondents and emphasized 3. Neutral attitude, where the respondent anonymity and confidentiality of respons- indicated an undecided opinion. es. Respondents were given the option of

including their name and contact details on From the Resident Sample (// = 142), the questionnaire for any future studies but 25.4% of respondents expressed a positive

'/< were not required to do so. Respondents attitude towards possums. 33. 1 indicating interest in the survey results expressed a negative attitude towards pos-

( were mailed a summary of the research at sums. 37.3 /f expressed a neutral attitude

f the conclusion of the study. towards possums, and 4.2 /r of respondents The questionnaire included 44 questions did not complete the attitude questions. on a number of topics including attitudes Five questions were used to test the towards possums, human-possum con- knowledge level of the resident in terms of flicts, know ledge of possums, management possum biology. Fifteen percent of the issues and demographic characteristics of respondents from the Resident Sample respondents. who completed the knowledge questions In addition to the Resident Sample, 50 (/* = 137) answered all five questions cor- members of local special interest groups rectly, and \Q% displayed a low knowl- and other stakeholders were interviewed edge level answering either no questions by telephone. These groups included the correctly or one question correctly. The Knox Environment Society, Ferntree proportion of the Resident Sample that Gully Residents' Action Group, herntree answered each of the live knowledge ques- Gully Horticultural Society, residents who tions correctly is shown in Table 1. had recently hired possum traps from the The poor knowledge of possum biology Knox City Council, Wildlife Shelters/ in the Resident Sample was also apparent Wildlife Foster-carers, and Veterinary in the special interest group samples, with Surgeons. The telephone interviews small proportions completing all knowl- focussed on the same topics as the ques- edge questions correctly. Five of the 10 tionnaire, but allowed for further discus- Knox Environment Society respondents sion on certain points. answered all five knowledge questions Both quantitative and qualitative data correctly, compared with three of the analysis techniques were used. For quanti- seven responding Veterinary Surgeons,

Vol. 116(4) 1999 121 Research Report

Table 1. Proportion Of Resident Sample that answered knowledge questions correctly

Knowledge question Response categories Proportion that answered correcllv (%)(«= 137)*

A full-grown Rrushtail Possum is truc/false/unsure 26.1 smaller than a full-grown Ringtail Possum

Ringtail Possums usually have iine/lalse/unsure 34.1 a white lip on their tail.

Possums are nocturnal. true/f'alse/unsure 92.8

A marsupial is: a nocturnal animal/a mammal 91.3 with a pouch/a mammal without a pouch

Tick those of the following that dog/fox/possum/dolphin/ 73:2 are marsupials: kangaroo

f: Five questionnaire respondents did not answer the knowledge questions and were excluded from this analysis. ^

three of the 10 Ferntree Gully Residents' high knowledge levels, when compared Action Group respondents, three of the 10 with respondents from the trap-hirers group Ferntree Gully Horticultural Society (residents who had recently hired possum

respondents, one of" the 10 trap-hirers, and traps from the Knox City Council) and the

all three Wildlife Shelters/Wildlife Foster- Ferntree Gully Horticultural Society. The carers. Of particular interest was the poor latter two groups held mainly negative alti-

knowledge shown by I he responding tudes towards possums and had compara-

Veterinary Surgeons, which was surprising tively low knowledge levels (Fig. I ). given the relative simplicity of the knowl- A similar correlation was noted by

edge questions. Sehulz ( 1987) in a study of adult students' Another indication of poor knowledge can attitudes towards wildlife in West be seen in the responses to the question that Germany. Sehulz found that knowledge asked what species of possum was present level was the best variable to explain dif- around respondents' homes. Of the 55 ferent scores on the attitude scale. Schulz's respondents from the Resident Sample who study, based on the value framework believed they had possums around the house developed by Kellert (1976). showed that or property, 65% were unsure of die species. respondents with a very high knowledge There was a clear correlation between level also had high values on the moralis- attitudes towards possums and knowledge tic, naturalistic, ecologistic, and seienlistie levels of possum biology. Sixty percent of attitude scales. Conversely, respondents those respondents with a high level of pos- with a very low knowledge level had high sum knowledge (n - 20), defined as values on the humanistic, negativistic. and answering all knowledge questions cor- utilitarian altitude scales. rectly, held a positive attitude towards pos- Although Schul/'s study (1987) had sums. In comparison, only l vk of those more detailed attitude categories than our respondents with a low level of possum study, the results are similar. Respondents knowledge in = 14), defined as no knowl- to our questionnaire who had a high edge questions answered correctly or one knowledge of possums displayed charac- knowledge question answered correctly, teristics consistent with the moralistic, nat- held a positive attitude towards possums uralistic, ecologistic and seienlistie atti-

(two-sample z test: :, = 3. 13. p = 0.001 ). tudes as described by Kellert and Berry This trend was also observed in the (1987). These respondents typically held Special Interest Group samples. positive attitudes towards possums, with Respondents from the Knox Environment sentiments such as: Society and Wildlife Shelters/Wildlife I appreciate wildlife. Poster-carers held mainly positive attitudes towards possums and had predominantly Possums are a n a t u r a I part thi

122 The Victorian Naturalist Research Report

100% r 90%

80% • 70%

- 60% blank

50% O neutral

40% negative

30% El positive

20% '

10% -

0% •

Kg, I. \ttitudes towards possums in Special Interest Group and Resident samples (statistical analysis could not he conducted due to small sample sizes).

A = Knox Environment Society (n - lilt. B = Wildlife Shelters/Wildlife Foster-carers {n = 3), C = Veterinary Surgeons (n = 7), D = Ferntree Gull) Residents' Action Group (n = 10), E = Ferotree Gully Horticultural Societ> {n= 10). F= Trap-hirers {n= 10), G = Resident Sample (n= 142)

Australian environment and we should This correlation between knowledge o\ learn to live with them. possums and attitudes towards possums

I .mi an animal lover and enjoy seeing pos- raises an important question that could be sums in my garden. explored by future research - which comes

I love animals and wildlife. first, the positive attitude or the high We like a bush environment and enjoy all knowledge level'.' That is, does a person native animals. with a positive attitude towards possums

II is good lor the kids to experience ani- have more interest and therefore seek oui

mals and learn to live vs ith them. information, or does the increased infor-

They were here long before us and I mation i)r factual knowledge result in the believe all native fauna should be pre- positive attitude? To investigate this ques- served. tion, attitudes could be assessed before and after an education program (focusing only

In typical answers I rom comparison, on factual knowledge and not information respondents with low level a knowledge thai could directly influence altitudes) included. specifically relating to urban possums. Other studies have indeed shown thai [my view is| based on friends' experiences public values either can with possums doing damage to their change or be better houses. changed with information (Stuck) et al. 19X7). A preliminary study by Cam et ... we had possums.., noisy, vermin, (1994) found in a short period of destroyers, and their dropping mess al, that education in conservation biology everywhere. lime, (via an undergraduate university course) People live in houses with family and pels made students more biocenlric. Although The bush is provided (and there is plenty this indicates that education may be an of il in Victoria) that possums can live in effective management tool in modifying without causing problems in roof, fire- attitudes towards nature, il may be thai slu- place etc.

Vol. 116(4) 1099 123 Research Report denls seeking out an environmental course Although a change in attitudes towards already have positive attitudes towards the wildlife can be achieved (Temby 1995). it environment. The education they choose has been suggested by Baldwin (1995) that may simply strengthen the attitudes that a change in attitude is not enough. Baldwin they already have and encourage them to (1995) said 'while basic classroom educa- clearly express those attitudes. In order to tion can be effective at changing values explore this farther, education could be tar- and attitudes toward nature, direct experi- geted at those people within the communi- ence has the powerful effect of changing ty with negative attitudes towards possums behaviour' (p. 241 ). In our study, the most in order to determine if education is effec- common factor contributing to the respon- tive in modifying their attitudes. dents' knowledge of possums in the Implementing education programs also Resident Sample was 'personal experi- requires an understanding of what people ence' (49%). One current possum educa- wish to learn about. From our survey, tion program in our study area incorporates

1 30.4% of respondents (n = 138) said they "basic classroom education with "personal would like to learn about 'possum ecolo- experience' by showing the class a possum gy/biology', 40.6% said they would like to and allowing interaction (Y. Cowling learn about 'how to live with possums*. pers.com,). Although this program focuses 26. Kf said they would like to learn *how on childhood education, the experience of to remove possums' and 26.8% said they actually seeing a native animal will would like to learn about 'what happens to undoubtedly have an impact on many chil- translocated possums*. Table 2 divides dren and possibly instil a positive value of these findings further into those respon- wildlife within them. However, further dents with a positive attitude towards pos- research would be required to confirm sums and those respondents with a nega- whether or not a change in attitude would tive attitude tow aids possums. lead lo a change in behaviour on this issue.

Respondents with a positive attitude While childhood education is important, towards possums were significantly more information must also be available to interested in learning about possum ecolo- adults. The fact that 40.6% of respondents gy and biology and how to live with pos- from the Resident Sample indicated they sums, than those respondents with a nega- would like to learn how to live with pos- tive attitude towards possums (Table 2). In sums, clearly indicates the need to educate contrast, those respondents with a negative the general public - to inform residents of attitude towards possums were significant- urban areas how to cohabit successfully ly more interested in learning about how to with possums, or at least inform them that remove possums, than those respondents 'harmonious' cohabitation is possible and with a positive attitude (Table 2). has many advantages. As respondents with negative attitudes As Temby (1995: 178) has suggested for towards possums were shown to be less the management of kangaroos, 'acceptance interested in learning about possums, it and use of alternative approaches that do may prove more difficult to change their not rely on destruction will only come altitudes (through education) into positive about through appropriate extension pro- attitudes. Thus, education of children grammes that demonstrate their effective- (rather than adults) may be more effective ness and economic benefits'. Similarly, in modifying and/or shaping attitudes, residents with possum problems must be because the attitudes of children are still informed of appropriate and effective man- forming. Similarly, Caro et ah (1994) agement techniques. Residents will have speculated that conservation education little hope of effectively resolving a con- may be more effective in changing atti- flict if they do not have the appropriate tudes when people are exposed to it at an information that will allow them to do so. early age. Other studies have also shown The recent distribution of the 'Living With that a person's childhood experiences with Possums' booklet' (Department of Natural animals are important factors in the devel- Resources and Environment 1997) to key opment of adult attitudes towards wildlife groups in Victoria, such as local councils (Hair and Pomerantz 1987). and wildlife shelters, will undoubtedlv

124 The Victorian Naturalist ,

Research Report

Table 2. Respondent attitudes (Resident Sample) versus aspects of possum ecology/biology and management the respondent would like to learn about. Option respondent Proportion of Proportion of Significance would like to learn about 'positive attitude 'negative attitude (two-sample z test) towards possums* towards possums" subgroup {%) subgroup (%) In = 36) in =47) t P Possum ecology/biology 64 19 4.17 0.000

How to live with possums 61 30 2,83 0.002 0.001 How to remove possums 17 51 3.20

What happens to 33 23 1.01 0.156 translocated possums

1 Other 6 1

One or more of the above 94 79 1.95 0.026

Statistical analysis could not be conducted due to small sample sizes,

Special thanks go increase many residents' knowledge of pos- financial support of this study. to Dr Tara McGec (Deakin University), sums, particularly those who are having pos- Professor Robert Wallis (Deakin University), Dr problems. sum Darryl Jones (Griffith University), and Ms Leotli Thomas (Griffith University), for critical Conclusion comments on earlier versions of this manuscript This study has demonstrated that mem- and invaluable discussions on wildlife-human bers of the community, including special conflicts in Australia; Ms Yvonne Cowling interest groups, generally have a poor (wildlife shelter operator) for providing infor- and school educa- knowledge of possum biology. The study mation on her wildlife shelter tion program; Ms Rhonda Miller (wildlife shel- also showed that there is an important link ter operator) for helpful proof-reading and towards possums and between attitudes insightful comments; and all questionnaire and know ledge of possums, that people within interview participants from the City of Knox. the community are interested in learning References about possums and that people with a posi- Changes in attitude not enough. more Baldwin, R. (1995). tive attitude towards possums are Conservation 8iology9{2), 240-241,

( I Wi. Effects interested in learning more about possums Caro, T.M., IVIkey. N. and Gngionc. M. of conservation biology education on attitudes toward than those with a negative attitude. These Conservation Biology 8 (3), 846-852, com- nature. findings support the suggestion that Department od Natural Resources and Environment munication and education programs are (1997), 'Living With Possums'. (Department of Natural Resources ;md Environment; Melbourne.) important aspects of wildlife management Hair, .10. and Pumerant/. G.A. (1W). The education 1987). (Peyton and Decker 1987; Pentad al vajue of wildlilc. In 'Valuing Wildlife; Economic Eds D.J. The key requirement highlighted by this and Social Perspectives', pp. 197-207. Decker and G.R. Goff. ( Wcslview Press: Colorado, j for community education. study is the need Mow R.A. ft992>, Possum magic. Wildlife Australia As well as providing basic information 2'J. 24-25. Dow, k\A. and Keilc*. J. A. (1995)- Common Brushtail (via government agencies and community Possum. Trichaiuras vulpeculs. In The Mammals of have problems with groups) to those who Australia', pp. 273-275. Ed- R. Slrahan. (Reed Wales.) possums, it is also important lhat the Books: New South Jones. D.N. (1993), Dealing with the 'human dimen- broader community is given the opportuni- sion' in wildlife management, Australasian Wildlilc experience not ty lo learn more aboul and Management Sen ierj Newsletter October 1993, 8-9. Perceptions oi animals in onl\ possums but all native wildlife. Kellert. S.R. (1976). AineiKan society. Transactions of the North lift: No turn I Resourt es Acknowledgements American Wild and C

.w iety Bulletin 15, 363-37 1 1 gender. Wildlife hook In can be obtained 1 he i tving W|th Possums" McKay, G.M. and Ong, P. (1995). Common Ringtail and Fauna Branch, Dipartmenl in contacting the Flora Pseudocneirux peregrifiitx, hi 'The Victoria Possum. Natural Resources and Environment (250 of Mammals of Australia', pp. 254-256, Ed. R. Slrahan. Melbourne, 3002), or the RSPCA M r. | e . Eaffi South Wales.) i Reed Books: New Burwood Highway. Burwood East, 3151),

125 Vol. 116(4)1999 Research Report

Moore. D.S. and McCabe. G.P. (1993), 'Introduction to Perspectives', pp. 352-354. Eds D.J. Decker and G.R.

1 " 1 (fee Practice of Slalistics' (2 edn>. (W.H. Freeman Goff. (Westview Press: Colorado,) and Company: New York.) Stucky. N.P., Bachani, J. P.. Christoff, G.T. and Penland, S. (1987). Attitudes ol" urban residents toward Dieffenbaeh. W.H. (1987). Public interest and envi- avian species and species' attributes. In 'Integrating ronmental impact assessment and mitigation. In Man and Nature in the Metropolitan Environment'. 'Valuing Wildlife: Economic and Social pp. 77-82. Eds L.W. Adams and D.L. Leedy. Perspectives', pp. 235-242. Eds D.J. Decker and G.R. (National Institute for Urban Wildlife: Columbia.) Goff. (Westview Press: Colorado.)

Peyton. R.B. and Decker. D.J. (1987). The role of val- Temby. 1. (1992), 'A Guide to Living with Wildlife: ues and valuing in wildlife communication and edu- How to prevent and control wildlife damage in cation. In 'Valuing Wildlife: Economic and Social Victoria". (Department of Conservation and Perspectives', pp. 243-254, Eds D.J. Decker and G.R. Environment: Victoria.)

Goff, (Westview Press: Colorado.) Temby. I, (1995). Perceptions of wildlife as pests: you Pomerant/, G.A.. Stumvoll, R. and Decker, D.J. can leach an old dogma new tricks. In 'People and (1987). Public values and white-tailed deer manage- Nature Conservation: Perspectives on Private Land ment in New York. In 'Valuing Wildlife: Economic Use and Endangered Species Recovery', pp. 174- and Social Perspectives', pp. 357-365. Eds D.J. 180. Eds A. Bennett, G. Backhouse and T. Clark. Decker and G.R. Goff. (Westview Press: Colorado.) (Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales: Schulz, W. (1987). Attitudes toward wildlife in West New South Wales.) Germany. In 'Valuing Wildlife: Economic and Social

Mother and baby Common Brushtail Posstim Trichosunts vulpecula feeding. Supplementary feeding of possums and other wildlife is a common, though not recommended, practice. Photo by Rhonda Miller.

126 The Victorian Naturalist I

( 'ontribniions

A New Inland Record oldie Swamp Skink Egernia coventryi Storr, 1978

1 Nick Clemunn and Cam Beardsell 1

Abstract

The threatened Swamp Skink Egernia coventryi occupies a predominantly coastal distribution In south-eastern Australia, Fe* inland records exist from western Victoria. This note reports a new inland record ol /*.. coventryi from the vicinity of Hallarai. This population was located in hahuat

considered somewhat atypical for this species. \iiw u ipr'uw Nawnlisi 1 16 (4), 1999, 127 i -s >

l The Swamp Skink Egernia coventryi is on > February 1999, and bailed with

; listed as vulnerable in Victoria t N K pilchards, a proven bait for this species 1999) and has a disjunct distribution in ((lemannc/w/. 1998). southeastern Australia, predominantly in The vegetation in the immediate vicinity coastal regions (Cogger 1996). Within this of the traps was heathy woodland doinmal range tins lizard occupies swamp and salt ed hy Prickly Tea-tree Leptospermum <>n marsh habitat characterised by dense sedge lineniale and Dwarf Hush pea I'lilte/iaea and tussock vegetation (Smales 1981; humills with an open ovcrstorey ^>\ Schul/ 1985; (lemann IWj. Due to the Messmate Eucalyptus obiiqua, Scent bark structure of this vegetation, and the retiring E, aromaphioia and Shining Peppermint

nature of this lizard, E. coventryi is diffi- /-.'. willi.sii. Co -dominant vegetation in the

cult to capture hy hand and is more reli- ground layer included Small Grass tree ably collected using Elliott aluminium Xanthorrhoea minor, Common Rapier- sedge traps {Robertson l980;Clemann 1997), Lepidosperma filiformis x Man) Egernia coventryi is known from only a (lowered Mat-rush Lonta/id/a tnuhifhna, small number ol inland locations, general- Slender Tussock grass Poq h'ncut and

ly in eastern Victoria ;it Yellingbo and in Slender Dodder laurel Casxytha glabella. Easl Gippsland (Alias i)( Victorian The following morning the traps were Wildlife database. NKI-J. There are also checked and yielded a single adult female inland records for the west of the Stale, i. coventryi ami two Agile Autechinus from the Castcrton district, the Grampians Anlechi/ni.s agilis. The lizard was gravid National Park, and a single historical and produced four young on 14 behruan

record from liallarat. Despite recent 1999 while it was temporarily captive. The searches, the population in the Grampians length and weight of the adult and the lias not been observed for some time (J. neonates ate presented in Table I. All am Coventry pers. COmm.). The details of the rnals were released where caught after suit- record from Ballarat, including collection able observations had been made and pho date and specific locality, are incomplete tographs taken (big. I ), and unsubstantiated. A brief survey ot the immediate area While conducting herpctofauna surveys revealed a number i)( sympalric seincid for the Regional Forest Agreement process species, including White's Skink Egernia during January 1999 in the Enfield State whitiit Southern Water Skink Eulamprus Foresl

i) i H«34 ! | Brov Sin -ill- id< Ifn rg Victoria

Vol. 116(4) 1999 127 Contributions

Table I. Length and weight data of aduit female and four neonate Egernia coventryi from Enfield State Forest.

Weight (g* Snout- vent length (mm) Tail length (mm)

Adult female 16.5 90 92 original plus 36 regrown Juvenile 1 1.0 37 48 Juvenile 2 0.4 34 44 Juvenile 3 0.9 36 44 Juvenile 4 1.0 37 48

Acknowledgements Clcmann, N., Brown. P. and Brown. G. (1998). A note The authors thank Richard Loyn and Graeme on bait selection when trapping the Swamp Skink Egernia Coventry! in Elliott traps. Victorian Newell from the Arthur Rylnh Institute. The Naturalist 115. 81-83. Department of Natural Resources and Cogger, H.G. (1996). 'Reptiles and Amphibians of Environment, for encouraging the confirmation Australia'. (Reed Books: Frenehs Forest). of the original tentative sighting. John Coventry NRH. (1999). 'Threatened Vertebrate Fauna in Victoria (Curator of Herpclology at the Museum of - 1999'. (Department of Natural Resources and Victoria) and Peter Robertson provided helpful Environment: Victoria). comments on the distribution of this species. Robertson. P. (1980). 'ALCOA Portland Aluminium - Smelter Environmental Study I Peter also kindly measured and weighed the Report No. Mourning Skink 1 lizards. Geoff Brown, Richard Loyn and Investigations. Report prepared by Peter Robertson and Kinhil! Planners Pty Ltd. Graeme Newell commented on the manuscript. Schul/, M, (I985). The occurrence of the Mourning The authors an thank anonymous referee for Skink, t'f>crnia coventryi Storr, in sallmarsh in reviewing the manuscript. The surveys were Wcsternport Bay. Victoria. The Victorian Naturalist funded by State and Commonwealth 102. 148-52.

Smales. I. Governments as part of the process of develop- (1981 ). The herpetofauna oflhe Yellingbo ing the Regional Forest Agreements. State Fauna] Reserve, The Victorian Naturalist 98. 234-46. References Clcmann, N. (1997). Aspects of the biology and ecology of the Swamp Skink Egernia coventryi Storr, 1978 (Sauria: Scincidae). {Unpublished B.Se. (Hons.) Thesis. Deakin University).

Fig. 1. Egerrw covemrvi, gravid female. Enfield State Forest. Photo by Niek Clemann

128 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

The Use of 'Forms' for Denning by the Common Ringtail Possum Pseudocheirus peregrinus at Subalpine Altitudes

Ken Green 1

Abstract

Daytime observations of Common Ringtail Possums on the ground in subalpine woodland are attributed to the use of forms, similar to those used by hares. These areas of flattened vegetation are used both in summer and in winter, when thev are found beneath the snow. {The Viaarian Naturalist 116 (4). 19*w, 129-130).

The local abundance of Common tussock there was evidence of flattening of Ringtail Possums Pseudocheirus pefegri- the herbaceous stratum in what could best nus is thought to be affected by the avail- be described as a minimalist 'form', simi- ability of nest sites (McKay 1983). The lar to that used by Hares Lepus capettsis in nest is usually a ball of grass or shredded long grass, rushes or heath {Hewson 1977, bark in a hollow limb or amongst dense Mahood 1983). Denning in such a 'form' foliage, but at the northern extent of the by Ringtail Possums has not previously range of the species a nest is rarely con- been recorded in the literature but their structed, although the possum still sleeps occurrence on the ground in the late after- in tree hollows (McKay 1983). In stands of noon has also been observed in woodland regrowth Snowgum Eucalyptus niphophila at Mt. Kaputar (Bill Foley pers. comm.) above 1500 m in the Snowy Mountains. and at Round Mountain (Will Osborne relatively few trees have had sufficient pers. comm.) time to develop hollows, but Ringtail The use of 'forms' by Ringtail Possums Possums may still be observed (Green and in winter is even more unexpected, Osborne 1994). although conditions beneath the snow may In February 1999. Ringtail Possums were be more comfortable than in a drey situat- disturbed on the ground in snowgum ed in thick scrub, a sight uncommon above woodland on Disappointment Spur at the winter snowline (Green and Osborne about 1:30-2:00 pm by Glenn Sanecki 1994). Generally mammals weighing more {pers. comm.) and two days later at 9 am than 250 g are rare beneath the snow sur- by the author. In the first case, the possum face (Pruitt 1984) except in the case of bur- was simply disturbed as the observer rowers and/or hi hern a tors, which in walked through thick woodland, so no Australia include the Fox Vuipes vulpes deductions could be made about its behav- and Common Wombat Vombatus it rs in us iour on Ihc ground. Because the Ringtail (Green and Osborne 1994) and Echidna Possum is strictly nocturnal (McKay 1983) Tachyglossus aculeatus (Grigg el al. 1992). this is, however, indicative of behaviour In mid July 1996, in an area with no old other than foraging. In the second instance. Snowgums, the author observed a Ringtail the author had spent some minutes within Possum al 9.20 am emerging from a pos- one metre of a Ringtail Possum while han- sum-width tunnel chewed through thick dling two captured Dusky Antechinuses shrubs leading to below the snow surface.

Antechinus swainsonii. It wasn't until the The site was marked, and investigated after animals had been released, equipment the thaw. All that was present at the site packed away and traps folded that the was a branch of down-turned gum leaves author, stepping over a leaning tree, dis- about 40-50 em off the ground, with a turbed the possum which quickly ran up a space beneath but do evidence of a nest. nearby tree. On investigation, there was mi This form was more protected than Hare evidence of a ground-level nest- However, forms in winter which are sometimes no beneath a tree and under a nearby grass more than a scrape beneath an overhanging \sw National Park* and Wildlife Service, Showy tree {pers. obs.). Extensive movement Mountains Region. PO Bo* 2228, Jtndabyiw NSW under the snow would be impossible for

Vol. 116(4)1999 129 Research Reports such a large non-burrowing mammal as a forced to enhance its insulation from the Ringtail Possum and their tracks arc sel- cold by using the space beneath the snow. dom recorded on the snow (pers. oh.s.), so Based on the observations reported here, it their normal behaviour would probably be appears possible that the use of "forms" by to descend a tree directly to their Torm\ Ringtail Possums may be widespread but

In a sample of I L59 i'a\ scats from a sub- infrequently noted. The occurrence of this alpine transect containing many Hares, behaviour at subalpine altitudes raises inter- evidence of Hares was only found in one esting questions about the thermal biology scat while remains of Ringtail Possums of the species, particularly in winter. were found in five. Compared with nine References occurrences of Rabbits OryctolagUS Flux, J.h.C ( 1967). Hare numbers and tliol in an alpine ittiiicnln\, which are less common than hasin in New Zealand, Proceeding!/ of the New either species above the winter snowline Zealand Ecological Society 14, 15-26.

Green. K. ami Osborne. W.S. ( 1 08 1 ). The diet of l<>\cs, (Green and Osborne l°A)4), these figures Vulpes vttlpe\ (1..) in relation to abundance of prey are quite low. This suggests that, unless the above the winter snowline in New South Wales. Rabbits were scavenged after dying for Australian Wildlife Research 8. 349-60. Green. K, ami Oshorne. W.S. (1994). -Wildlife of the some other reason, on the ground denning Australian Snow-Coimiry'. (Reed: Svdney). is not as dangerous as it might first appear, Grigg, G.C., Aiu-ee. ML. and Reai'd. I. .A. (1992). as long as an animal has some well-devel- Thermal relations of free-living echidnas during activity and in hibernation in a cold climate. In oped predator-avoidance mechanism such I'liivpuses and echidnas*. Ed. MX. Augec. pp 160- as speed (in the case o\' the Hare) or tree 173. (Royal Zoological Society of NSW: Sydney), R. (l u 77). Hare. In The Handbook of climbing (in the Ringtail Possum). The HewSOD, Brown Hnlish Mammals 2nd ed', lids G.li. Corbel and H.N. greater degree of protection afforded to a Southern, pp 140-144. < Blackwell Scienlific Ringtail Possum in winter by submerging Publications; Oxford). McKay. G.M. (1983). Common Ringtail Possum. In Itself completely beneath the snow may be 'The Australian Museum Complete tiook of an indication of a low tolerance o\' cold. Australian Mammals', lul. R. Stratum, pp. 126-127. Comparative studies on the thermal biolo- (Angus Ml Robertson: Sydney). Mahood. I.T. (1983). Brown Hare. In "lite Australian of Ringtail Possums and Hares have not gy Museum Complete Hook of Australian Mammals". been conducted. However, the non-bur- Id. R. Sirahan. p. 4N0. i Angus & Robertson: rowing Hare (Mahood 1083) is able to sur- Sydney), Pruilt, WO. (l l)S4). Snow ami small mammals. In vive heavy snow years without moving to 'Winter Ecology of Small Mammals', Ed, J.F, lower altitudes, both in New Zealand (Flux Merrill, pp. IS. iCarnci'.ie Museum of Natural 1967) and Australia, and without being History: Pittsburgh),

Kdilnr's note:

I [ewson ( l*)77) describes a hares form ;is 'a stud low depression in long ;rass, rushes, heather or scrub*.

Fifty Years Ago

MONTHLY NOTES FROM THF PORTLAND F.N.C.

by Noel F, Learmonth

Among the exhibits brought to our last meeting were two Rufous Bristle-birds {Dasyornis hroadbcnii), a Ground Thrush (Oreoeittela lunulata), a Goshawk [Astur fasciatus) and an Allied Rat (Ratttts assimilis) - all from among that morning's catch in a member's line o\' rabbit traps. Bristle-birds are frequently killed in this way and, though difficult to see in the thick undergrowth south of Portland, are quite common; the writer saw five birds on one bush track al Cape Nelson recently. Ground Thrushes are rare here, though widespread. The goshawk was only just dead when found at

dawn, so it must be a very early hunter.

From The Victorian Naturalist 66. p. 68, August l°4°.

130 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Fauna Survey Group (FSG) Contribution No. 22

A Survey of the Vertebrate Fauna of the Rushworth State Forest

S.D. Myers 1 and S.G. Dashper'

Abstract Surveys were conducted in the Rushworth State Forest by the Fauna Survey Group of the FNCV for about four years. The main motivation for the work was to detect and monitor the presence of Brush- tai led Phascogale Phascogale tapoatufa, but we have also kepi records for all vertebrate species detected. These records include a number of species that are declining, threatened or endangered and provide a picture of the current status of the fauna in the forest. {The Victorian WumHsf, lift (4), 1999, 13I-14h.

Introduction of Nagambie, covering an area of circa Box and Ironbark forests contain some of 32 630 ha (Environment Conservation the most threatened habitats in Victoria. Council 1997). Within the forest, conserva- Approximately S5% of these forests and tion reserves include the Mount Black Flora related ecosystems have been cleared since Reserve (1630 ha) and the Whroo Historic pre-European settlement and less than 3% Reserve (490 ha). The remaining forest area of that remaining receives any form of pro- is classified as State Forest for hardwood tection (Robinson 1993). A large propor- production (Land Conservation Council tion of the Box-lronbark forests in Victoria 1981).

now exist only in fragmented and degraded The terrain is generally flat to undulating, remnants. This has had a considerable, gentle hills with Mount Black being the deleterious effect on the fauna of these highest peak at 328 m. There are many- woodlands and forests. Since European creeks throughout the Rushworth State settlement, three groups of species in par- Forest that rarely How except during periods ticular (Bennett 1993) have declined in the of heavy rain. Annual rainfall varies from

Box-lronbark forests. These are 1 ) the hol- 400-700 mm (Land Cconservation Council low-dependent species requiring large 19S1). The Rushworth-Whroo area was a areas (e.g. Powerful Owl Niftox stroma. major goldfield last century; the forest has Brush-tailed Phascogale Phascogale been seriously damaged in the past by the tapoatafa. Squirrel Glider Peiaurus noffol- activities of gold miners. To this day evi- censi.s); 2) mobile species that utilise dence of these past activities is quite visible. resources in different locations (e.g. Little The forest is still heavily used for logging Lorikeet Glossopsitia pusilla, Swift Parrot and firewood collection. Timber is extracted Laihamus discolor. Regent Honeyeater by selective logging and permit holders may Xanthomxza phrygia); and 3) forest-depen- take firewood. Certain areas of the State dent species that utilise fallen logs and Forest have not had as many trees removed; ground litter for nesting, foraging and shel- consequently the number of hollow-bearing ter (e.g. Hooded Robin Mclanoilryas trees is higher in these areas (pers. obs.)< cHctdlata, Bush Stone-curlew Hurhinus The forest is also used for a number oi recre- m&gnirostrte). A range of activities such as ational activities such as fossicking, rally car mining, timber cutting and land clearing driving, trail biking and horse riding. within the Box-lronbark forests has led to a reduction in the resources required by Vegetation these groups. There are a number of vegetative struc- The Rushworth State Forest is the largest, tural forms within the forest as classified most intact block of Box-lronbark forest by the Land Conservation Council (1981) remaining in this Slate. It is located in north and the Environment Conservation central Victoria and lies approximately 23 Council (1997). (See also Muir et at. a description of km north-east of Healhcote and 12 km west (1 995 J for EVCs (Ecological Vegetation Classes) for this area.) The general vegetative structure is 1 I7A Park Street. Hawthorn. Victoria 3122,

Vol. 116(4) 1999 131 Contributions

Fig. I. survey in Major points Rushworth Stale ForesL (Scale I km = 3.2 mm approximately)

classified as Open Forest II where Red Malice E. polybractca, are also found Ironbark Eucalyptus tricarpa\ Grey Box within the State Forest (Land Conservation Eucalyptus microcarpa and Yellow Gum Council 1978). Most o\' the Open Scrub Eucalyptus leucoxylon are the dominant malice in the northern section of the forest species of the tallest stratum (Land is used for Eucalyptus-oil production. Conservation Council 1978). The lower Altered lire regimes combined with inva- strata consist of Gold-dust Wattle Acacia sion by introduced herbaceous species has acinacca. Hedge Wattle A. paradoxa, changed the forest's substrata since his- Chinese Tea-tree Cassinia arcnata and toric times. Austral Grass-tree Xanthorrhoea australis. The Fauna Survey Group (FSG) of The Austral Grass Trees are especially conspic- Field Naturalists Club of Victoria has been uous around the slopes of Mount Black. In conducting fauna surveys in the Rushworth addition to the above forest type, large Stale Forest since the beginning of 1995 areas of Open Forest I consisting of Red with particular emphasis on determining Ironbark, Red Slringybark K. macntrhvn- the status and distribution of the Brush- clui and Red Box /:'. potyantkemos are also tailed Phascogalc Phascogale tapoatafa extant. Patchy areas of Open Forest I (Dashper and Myers m prep.). This report Woodland I, where the major tree species serves to catalogue records o\ all verte- Grey are Box and Yellow Gum, and Open brate species recorded by the FSG in the Scrub of Bull Malice E. behriana and Blue region over the past four years.

132 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Table 1. Total survcj effort in the FSG in Rushworth State •West.

Survey No. of nest boxes Trap nii'lHs Spotlighting iiai trapping date checked (minutes) (ui^lilst

. June 94 M() 330 ! December 94 - 77<> 405 April 95 - 220

Dececember 95 92 210 105 1 April 96 i: - M;i\ 96 u: - September 96 28 - K) January 97 142 100 June 97 142 200 160 Jul) l >7 190 Januars 98 142 80 95 1 Mav 98 92 30 180

Total 792 1856 1495 5

Survey Methods and Results cy rale than the Brush-tailed Phascogale, the Fauna surveys have been conducted over next most commonly recorded species. years from 1995 a period of three and a half Trapping to 1998. Surveys were carried out every 4 Cage and Elliot! traps were set in lines of to 6 months al various locations throughout 10 traps about 10 m apart. The bail used tech- the forest (Fig, I ). A variety of survey was a mixture of peanut butler, rolled oals, were used including checking nest niques honey and vanilla essence. Trapping was boxes, trapping, spotlighting, hinl observfl not earned out during the phascogale sightings. Tabie l ttons and incidental breeding season trout August to December shows the survey ellort tor each technique, or during particularly cold weather. trapping was Nest boxes A small effort at pitfall single visit m December A total of 142 nest boxes were routinely made during a One with 10 checked including 92 nest boxes originally 1994 to January 1995. pitline ( spaced al 10 in intervals was erected in 1992 (Soderquisl et al. I° >b} buckets no ami 50 nest boxes erected by the FSG in opened For 5 nights. Unfortunately, ani- [995. The 92 nest boxes are at 23 sites mals were trapped by this method tour nest boxes along a ban consisting of Spotlighting approximately MM) m sect, the boxes each Spotlighting was carried out on a regular, 50 uest boxes erected by the apart. The but not intensive, basis by members during boxes, at live sites FSG are in lines of 10 areas, mainly in FS( i camps in a uumbei of section of the forest. All nest in the central the central south section of the forest boxes have entrance holes of 35 mm in (Table 3). Il was carried oul on an oppor is a si/e thought to favour diameter, which tunistic basis and usually conducted by Phascogalcs and Sugai Brush-tailed two groups of Iwo to six people walking at Petaurus brevkeps (Soderquisl et Gliders a pace of approximately J km/li. al 1996). Therefore, nest box usage may nol be an actual reflection ol the status and Bal trapping oul using harp distribution Ol mammals other than Bat trapping was carried phascogales and Sugar Gliders. naps and trip lines {Table I). Further sur- 1 ol records and veys of bats in die area are required. Table - shows the number each species observed occupancy rates tor Bird records using the nest boxes. By tar Die most com- A bird list was maintained during each of recorded species was the Sugar monly the eighteen mammal survey trips as well by the Brush-tailed Glider, followed as during some independent trips by the Only live species in total have Phascogale. authors (survey trips were up to lour days recorded using the nest boxes; of those, been in length). Observations were made Iwo have been recorded only once each and throughout the forest (Fig, t); while carry one has been recorded twice. Sugar Gliders ing out other survey efforts, all birds seen higher nest box occupan- had a significantly and heard weie recorded.

133 Vol. 116(4) 1999 Contributions

Table 2. Species recorded in nest boxes {Total Table 3. Spotlighting results. Mean No. = number of individuals recorded) and Spotlighting Rate (MSR) = No. of records/total occupancy rate (Occ. Rate = no. species spotlighting lime (minutes); No. = Number of

records/no. boxes checked). Key: BTPh , Brush- records, 'see discussion. tailed Phascogale; SC. Sugar Glider; YFA, Species No. MSR Yellow-footed Antechinus; CBP, Common

Brushtail Possum; CRT, Common Ringtail Australian Owlet-nightjar 1 0.04

Possum. Barn Owl 1 0.04

Brush-tailed 1 Date BTPh SG YFA CBP CRT Phascogale 0.04 Common Brushtail Possum 21 0.84

Dec-95 1 25 Common Ringtail Possum 19 0.76

Apr-96 1 IS Fealhertail Glider 1 0.04

May-96 4 93 Koala 1 0.04

Sep-96 1 34 Southern Boobook 3 0.12 .lan-97 6 62 Squirrel Glider S * 0.32 Jun-97 4 114 Sugar Glider 36 1.44

Jan-98 4 76 Tawny Frogmouth I 0.04

May-98 1 68 Total No. 490 22 indirect and chance observations (vocalisa- Occ. Rate 0.03 0.77 0.01 0.01 0.01 tions, scats, tracks). Measures of abundance (Tables 2 and 3) are given for mammals that were recorded by trapping, Chance observations and indirect signs spotlighting or nest box checks. Vocalisations, scats and tracks encountered were duly noted. Short-beaked Echidna Tachygiown.s Discussion aculeatu.s One direct sighting of a very large, Survey work by the FSG in the pale individual was recorded with signs Rushworth State Forest area is an ongoing of diggings reasonably common although process that we hope to continue for many not widespread. Despite the apparent years to come. This is an interim report of abundance of ants in the forest, echidnas survey records to date. The group has do not seem to be common; it is possible recorded a number of species thai are of that the very hard soil limits the ability particular interest. of the species to exploit this food source. The aim of trapping by the FSG at Yellow-footed Antechinus Antechinus Rushworth was chiefly to detect the pres- flavipes flavipes ence of phascogalcs. Therefore, we have The Yellow- footed Antechinus was generally employed the strategy of setting recorded using nest boxes, in traps and traps in seemingly suitable habitat, espe- through incidental observations during cially near hollow stumps and logs and at the day. Scats and nests in nest boxes are the base of hollow-bearing trees. Trapping also reasonably common. This indicates has been a rather selective process, howev- that it is a relatively common species in er this has not excluded other mammals the Rushworth Forest. such as the Yellow-footed Antechinus The Yellow-footed Antechinus Antechinus flavipes from being trapped. To is restricted to a band running roughly date, trapping in Rushworth has not been along the line of the Great Dividing particularly successful, highlighting the Range from the north-east to the south- trap shyness oi' the animals combined with west of the State where it occurs low densities of phascogales and other mainly in dry forest and woodland. This species small mammals in this Box-lronbark for- is heavily reliant est. on natural tree hollows

for shelter (Menkhorst 1 995). Naturally Mammals occurring ground litter and logs, where The following is an annotated list of the Yellow-footed Antechinus forages for mammals recorded in the Rushworth Stale arthropods and small vertebrates, are also Forest by the FSG over the past four years. necessary. Menkhorst (1995) slates that Mammals in the forest were detected by the degradation of the dry woodland means of trapping, spotlighting and by habitats of this species inevitably leads to

134 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

concern over its long-term survival Koala Plia.scolarcios cinvicus prospects. One Koala was recorded while spot- Brush-tailed Phascogale Phascogale lighting in the Spring Creek area in the tapoatafa southern section of the forest. The most significant mammal recorded Common Brushtail Possum Trivhosurus is the Brush-tailed Phascogale. The vulpccula phascogale is classified as rare in Menkhorsl (1995) records the Victoria by the Department of Natural Common Brushtail Possum as common Resources and Environment and listed in in Box and Ironbark forests. They were Schedule 2 of the Fauna and Flora the second most commonly observed Guarantee Act. This species was first species after the Sugar Glider during

recorded by others in 1993 when phasco spotlighting (MSR 0.84 cf. 1.44; Table gale nests and scats were recorded in nest 3). One was recorded in a decrepit nest boxes, although no animals were sighted box. (Soderquist etal 1996). The FSG has 22 Sugar Glider Petauru& brevkeps records in total of phascogales using nest The Sugar Glider was the most fre- boxes (Table 2). Phascogale tapoatafa quently recorded mammal. Its use of nest has been observed twice during spotlight boxes appears to be mostly in areas with surveys and recorded three times in traps. low densities of hollow-bearing trees. It Additionally, signs, including scats and was the most frequently observed species nests, have been noted in 28 of 142 nest when spotlighting (Table 3). boxes (19%) regularly checked by the This species is widespread and rela- FSG. Obviously use of nest boxes by the tively common in Victoria and its status Brush-lailed Phascogale is considerably is classified as secure (Menkhorsl 1995). lower than that of the Sugar Glider but The Sugar Glider is also dependent on we believe that even this low occupancy tree hollows. The extremely high rate of rate is important. The phascogale nest box usage by Sugar Gliders (Table requires large areas o\' forest in order to 2) may indicate a paucity of natural hol- maintain viable populations (Soderquist lows. We often found Sugar Gliders 1995). A lack of mature-age. hollow- using nest boxes in areas that are almost bearing trees may lead to phascogales totally devoid of hollow-bearing trees. that in forests such selecting hollows with inadequate protec- Lunney i 1987) found tion against predators, leading to an as Rushworth State Forest that are man- increase in mortality rates. As the Box- aged intensively as a timber resource Iroribark forest continues to be degraded leading to reduced numbers of hollow and fragmented, local extinctions are bearing trees. Sugar Glider numbers are likely to occur. Rushworth Slate Forest is consequently reduced. In the Rushworth the largest block of Box-lronhark forest area large stands of coppiced eucalypls remaining in Victoria, and is important have replaced much old-growth forest, for the conservation of this species. With leading the fauna survey group to suspect the erection of nest boxes in the that the species' future in the Rushworth nit secure. Rushworth State Forest it is possible we area is by means are encouraging the phascogale popula- Squirrel Glider Pctaunts rtorfolcensis ol tion to increase in number, as a lack of This species was observed m an area hollows limits populations. roadside vegetation consisting of some Common Dunnart Sminthofusis marinas large hollow-bearing Yellow Box on the One female with 5 pouch young was southern border of the forest. It is possi- species has been recorded trapped in tall open woodland grading to ble that this low open woodland in the southern end during spotlighting in the Spring Creek with identifi- of the forest. In Victoria the Common area hut due to difficulties (Traill I.)unnart\ status is uncertain (Menkhorsl cation of the Squirrel Glider 1998) further work is required in order to con- 1995), it is classilied as Rare by the Environment Conservation Council firm the existence of this species within (1997). Rushworth may possibly repre- the Rushworth State Forest. Sherwin forest sent an important population. (1996) classifies the Rushworth

Vol. 116(4) 1999 135 ( oniributions

does not appear lo he common block as a key location for this species. this species Common Ringtail Possum in Rushworth State Forest. VscmliH luints fH-icyjinus < 'at Felts catus The Common Ringtail Possum was We have one sight record ol a cat, and occasions. It recorded once while using a nest box seats have been noted on to be common in ihe for- which was in very poor condition. The does not appear animal gained access to the box via ihe est hircus broken lid. This species was recorded Goal Cupni no direct sightings of Goat. many times in edge habitat tinting spot- We have have been recorded in lighting bul rarely within ihe forest Tracks and scats the forest. What is This species is common in forested the central section oi lo be goal hair has been areas in Victoria but il appears thai in believed in phascogale nests. Tracks Kushworlh Slate T'orcsl il uses hollows observed dams. rather than tlreys lor nesting. A lack ol have been noted al some hollows in the area may lead to reduced Feral l*ij» Sus si roju record of a dead pig numbers in Rushworth Stale Forest. The group has one end of Feathertail Gilder Acivb&tes pygmaeus near Spring Creek in the southern One Ivalherlail Glider was recorded by the forest, Rabbit Qryctalagus funiculus die group while il was loiaging in a large European flowering Yellow Gum near a dam. This Sight and sign records were frequently Species has only been recorded once in made. Anecdolally, we have noted a the Kushworlh Stale loresl in 1990 decrease in abundance since the introduc- (Alias ol Victorian Wildlife dalabase, tion of the C'alicivirus.

NKT). It may be under reported due ils diminutive size, Birds Eastern Grey Kangaroo Mucrvpua Over 100 species ol bird have been recorded by ihe FSG* with approximalclv

til observations o\' varying This species is common throughout the M) days bird forest, particularly in areas abutting farm- intensity being carried out. This represents Table 4 shows a list of bird land. Il is commonly recorded by direct a rich avifauna. observation and signs such as seals and species recorded by ihe FSG in Ihe skeletal remains. Kushworlh Stale Forest. Measures of abun- Black Wallaby WuUabm bicoior dance are given for birds where reporting 'The Black Wallaby is one ^i ihe most rale and abundance were measured. A common mammals observed throughout number o\ species recorded by the FSG in are classified by Rushworth State Forest. It is frequently Rushworth Slate Toresl sighted while driving; walking and spot- the Department of Natural Resources and lighting. Road kills are also commonly Environment as depleted. These are: observed. Hie thumping, warning sound Collared Sparrowhawk. Wedge-tailed is frequently rioted, as are scats. Young Eagle, Little Lorikeet, Australian Owlet animals are also often seen, suggesling a nightjar, While-bellied Cuckoo-shrike, high breeding rate. Jaeky Winter, Crested Kellbiid. Spotted Gould's Wattled Bat Chalinolobua Quail-thrush, While browed Babbler, Speckled Warbler, Chestnul rumped Grey Currawong and Emu (see ( )ne ( lould's Wattled Bat was captured Hcalhwren. as in a harp Hap. also Robinson L994), Water birds such Little Forest Hat Vespadelus vulturnus herons and cormorants have been recorded The Little Forest Bat was recorded al numerous dams scattered through the for from, harp trapping ill Ihe central section forest. Most dams are man-made (ire- ol the forest. The species is common and fighting purposes. Interesting sightings are widespread in Victoria (Menkhorst 1995), discussed below. Red FOX \ulpcs wipes Tow sight records of loves were made Emu Dronmius novaehalltmdiae population at within the forest. Seals are regularly. An artificially established I'uckainmval Military Reserve (Ernison though not commonly, noted. Anecdoialiv,

13b The Victorian Naturalist R

Contributions

l t't al. l )S7) was the onl\ avoid for cen- ly common wiihin the RushWorth Stale

tral Victoria collected over the period Forest, although it is iicc limn*: in l From l >77 to 1981. This leads the FSG to Victoria (Robinson 1994). believe lliat the Hum has posstbl) spread Speckled Warbler Ckthonicoh sagittate to the Rtishworth Siate Forest, Our per- This species is classified as declining

cculagc reporting rate of 22.29! suggests b\ Robinson (1994); it is a ground Iced that the species has possibK become well ing and nesting species thai is particular established in the area although no signs 1\ vulnerable to introduced predators. of breeding have \ci been observed, The Speckled Warbler's main dislnbu

Liltlc Lorikeet Glossopsitta pusiila lion in southeastern Victoria i^ wiihin the

This species mainl\ inhabits 1. 1 Box 1 > Box Forests and woodlands Where Ironbark ami associated Forest hut is not the habitai is highly modified oy dis common in the Rushworth region. Little lurbed ie g, where limber cutting occurs Lorikeets are highl) nomadic and have as in Rushworth) the populations disap been recorded h> the group when euca- pear (Robinson and Trail! 1996) lypti are Flowering in spring and winter. Regent Honeyeater Xanxhomyta phi ygia

It is also declining in Victoria (Robinson The Repent lloue\ealei is listed as a 1994). threatened tax on In Schedule 2 o\ the Swift Parrot Luthamus discolor Flora tint! Fauna Guarantee \ct 198& Classified as Vulnerable and listed and classified as Endangered h> the under Schedule 2 of the Flora and Fauna Depai 'tmenl oi Nalural Resources and Guarantee Act 1998, the Swift Parrot Environment, This species has declined relies on winter-flowering cucalypls in its in in disappeared from much of its range, non-breeding range, such as are found in lis present population may be less than the Box- Ironbark forests. 1000 individuals, ami ils decline is Powerful Owl Nino* strenua believed to be tine to habitat loss, degra The Powerful Owl has been recorded dation and fragmentation (Garnetl 1992)

once by the group in an area abutting Taw nv-erowned I loneyealer Mount Black where larger, hollow bear- This species was recorded only in areas ing trees remain in reasonable numbers. of malice neai the town ol Rushworth in

It has been estimated thai fewer than 500 the northern section ol the loiest. breeding pairs remain in Viciona Itluck lloneyeater ( 'cii/u<>iiv\ niget

(Gametl 1992), ll is estimated by the A single bud was observed drinking at l )9S Environment Conservation Council a dam in January l alter a period oi (1997) that fewer than 50 breeding pans below average rainfall. Rushworth forest remain in the Victorian Bovlronbark may represent an important dioughl forests. Rushworth Stale loiest could refuge area tor such species. The impoi therefore be an important area for the tauce of these siles lo species such as conservation of this species. The Black lloneyeater. in lei ins of long term Powerful Owl is classified as rare and viability, requires luithei research (Ford Vulnerable la Australia and Victoria. and Palon 19861 especially in view of continuing ol dry wood although % idespread < Environment fragmentation Conservation ( 'ouncil 1997). land habitats. Yellow-rumped Pardalote Pardalatuh Ked-eapped Kohin Petnrica goodtnovii punctatus zanthopygus The Reel capped Robin is classified as The Yellow lumped Pardalote was only declining in Victoria (Robinson 1994). It ever observed in the mallee area in the appears to be uncommon in Rushworth north Of the forest. This is probably an Stale Forest. isolated population and may hybridise While-browed Babbler Pomatostomus with the more commonly occurring noffl sufwn HioMt.s inalc race. Spotted Pardalote PiirdulolHS The White-browed Babblci is declining

punctatus punctatus, in Victoria ( (thin sou 1994), ami in ( hestniit-rumpecl llealhwren Hylacala although not uncommon Rushworth, pyrrhogia anecdotally we have no\a\ a decrease in We have found this species to be local- numbers. The While browed Babbler

Vol. II6{4) 1999 137 K1111

Contributions

Table 4. Birds Recorded in Rushworih State Forest. Surveys = number of survey trips in which the species was delected out of 18 carried out; % = percentage of surveys on which the species was recorded. Common and scientific names follow Christidis and Boles (1994).

Common Name Scientific Name Surveys %

Emu Dromaius novaehollandiae 4 22.2 Brown Quail Cotumix ypsilophora 2 lT.'l Australian Wood Duck Chenonelta juhata 3 16.7 Pacific Black Duck Anas superciliosa 4 92 2 Australasian Grebe Tachybaptus novaehollandiae 5 27.8

Pied Cormorant Phalacrocorax varius I 5.6

Great Cormorant Phalacrocorax carbo I 5.6 White-faced Heron Egretta novaehollandiae 2 11.1

White-necked Heron Ardea pacijica 1 5.6

Nankeen Night Heron Nyctieorax caledonicus 1 5.6 Brown Goshawk Accipiterfascia tus 4 22.2

Collared Sparrowhawk Accipifer cirrhocephalus 1 5j6 Wedge-tailed Eagle Aqitila andax 4 22,2 Little Eagle Hicraaetus niorphnoides 1 5.6

Peregrine Falcon Falco peregrinus 1 5.6 Painted Button-quai! Turnix varia 4 22.2 Common Bron/ewing Phaps chaleoptera 12 66.7 Brush Bron/ewing Phaps elegans 2 1 LI Crested Pigeon Ocyphaps lopholes 3 16.7 Galah Caealua roseicapilla 12 66.7 Sulphur-crested Cockatoo Cacalna galerita II 61. Lorikeet Rainbow Trk -hoglossus haematodus 1 5.6 Lorikeet Musk Glossopsitla t -oncinna 12 66.7 Little Lorikeet Glossopsitla pusilla 9 50.0 Purple-crowned Lorikeet Glossopsitta porphyroccphala 4 22.2 Crimson Rosella Platycercus elegans 17 94.4 Eastern Rosella PlatycercHS eximius 15 83.3

Swift Parrot Lathamus discolor 1 5.6 Pallid Cuckoo Cuculns pallidas 2 11. Fan-tailed Cuckoo Cacomantis flabelliforniis 3 16.7 Shining Bron/e-Cuckoo Chrysococcxx lucidus 4 22.2 Horsfield's Bronze-Cuckoo Chrysococcyx basilis 2 TlT Powerful Owl Ninox strenua 1 5.6 Southern Boobook Ninox novaeseelandiae 4 22.2 Tawny Frogmouth Podargus strigoidts 1 5.6 White-throated Nightjar Eurostopodus mystacalis 2 11. Australian Owlet-nightjar A egotheles crista! us 5 27.8 While-throated Needletail Hirtmdapus caadaculus 5 27. Laughing Kookaburra Dacelo novaeguineae 13 72.2 Sacred Kingfisher Todinunphus sanctus 3 16.7 Rainbow Bee-eater Merops ornatus 2 11. While-throated Treeereeper Cormobatcs leucophaetts 15 83.3 Brown Treeereeper Cl'unacteris picumnus 10 55.6 Superb Fairy-wren Malunis cyaneus 12 66.7 Spotted Pardalote Pardalolus punclalus 16 88.9 (includes Ycllow-rumped Pa xlolotc) Striated Pardalote Pardalotus striatus 12 66.7 Chestnul-rumped Heathwren Hylacoia pyrrhopygia 3 16.7 Speckled Warbler Chthonieola sagittate 2 11. Weebill Smicmmis brevirostris 14 77.8 Western Gerygone Gerygone fusca 1 5.6 Brown Thornbill Acanthiza pusilla 1 5.6 Chestnul-rumped Thornbill Acanthiza uropygialis 2 IL1 Buff-rumped Thornbill Acanthiza reguloides 16 88.9 Yellow-rumped Thornbill Acanthiza chrysorrhoa 4 22.2 Yellow Thornbill Acanthiza nana 2 1L1 Striated Thornbill Acanthizu lincata 4 22.2 Red Wattlebird Anthochaera camnculata 18 100.0 Little Wattlebird Anthoehaera chiysoptera I 5.6

138 The Victorian Naturalist 1

Contributions

Table 4. continued.

Common Name Scientific Name Surveys %

Noisy Friarbird Philemon corniculatus 3 16.7 Little Friarbird Philemon citreogularis 1 5.6

Regent Honeyeater Xanthomyza phrygia 1 5.6 Noisy Miner Manorina melanocephala 3 16.7 Yellow-faced Honeyeater Lichenostonius chrysops 7 38.9 White-eared Honeyeater Lichenostonms leueotis 11 61. Yellow-tufted Honeyeater Lichenostomiis melanops 18 100.0 Yellow-plumed Honeyeater Lichenostomiis ornatus 3 16.7 Fuscous Honeyeater Lichenostomiis fiiscus 17 94.4 White-plumed Honeyeater Lichenostomiis penicillatus 8 44.4 Black-chinned Honeyeater Melithreptus gularis 8 44.4 Brown-headed Honeyeater Melithreptus hrevirostris 17 94.4 White-naped Honeyeater Melithreptus lunatis 5 27.8 New Holland Honeyeater Phylidonyris novaehoilandiae 5 27.8 Tawny-crowned Honeyeater Phylidonyris melanops 3 16.7 Eastern Spinebill Acanthorhynchus tenuiroslris 4 t2 2

Black Honeyeater Certhionyx niger 1 5.6

White-fronted Chat Epthianura alhifrons 1 5.6 Jacky Winter Microeca Jasciiums 3 16.7 Scarlet Robin Petroica multicolor o 33.3 Flame Robin Petroica phoenicea 5 27.8

Red-capped Robin Petroica goodenovii 1 5.6

Rose Robin Petroica rosea 1 5.6

Hooded Robin Melanodryas cucnllata 1 5.6 Eastern Yellow Robin Lopsaltria austrulis 7 38.9 White-browed Babbler Poniatoslomus superciliosus 9 50.0 Spotted Quail-thrush Cinciosoma punetatum 3 16.7 Varied Sittella Daphoenositta chrysoptera 2 III Crested Shrike-tit Falcunculus jronlatus 4 22 2 Crested Bellbird Oreoica gutturalis 9 50.0

Gilbert's Whistler Pachyccphala inornata 1 5.6 Golden Whistler Pachycephala pectoral is 8 44.4 Rufous Whistler Pachyccphala rufiventris 9 50.0 Grey Shrike-thrush Colturicincla harmonica 12 66.7

Satin Flycatcher Myiagra cyanoleuca 1 5.6 Restless Flycatcher Myiagra inquieta 4 22.2

Mag pie- 1 ark (Jrallinci cyanoleuca 3 16.7 Grey Fantail Rhipidura fuliginosa 11 61.1 Willie Wagtail Rhipidura letu ophrys 8 44.4 Black-faced Cuckoo-shrike Coracina novaehollandiae 10 55.6

White-bellied Cuckoo-shrike Coracina papuensis 2 1 I.I

White-winged Triller Lalage sueurii 1 5.6 Olive-backed Oriole Oriolus sagittalus 9 50.0

Black-faced Woodswallow Ananias cinereus 1 5.6 Dusky Woodswallow A rtamus cyanoptcrus 10 55.6

Grey Butcherbird (')-(K ticus torquatus l 5.6 Australian Magpie Gynmorhina tihiccn 10 55.6 Pied Currawong Strepera graculina 5 27.8 Grey Currawong Strepera versicolor 16 88.9 Australian Raven Coitus coronoides 13 72.2 Little Raven Corvus mellori 2 11.1 White-winged Chough Corcorax tnclanorhamphos 15 83.3 Diamond Firetail Stagonopleura guttata 1 5.6 Misiletoebird Dicaeum hirundinaceuni 3 16.7 Welcome Swallow Hirundo neoxena 4 22.2 Tree Martin iiirundo nigricans 4 22.2 Silvereye Zosterops lateralis 4 22.2 Common Blackbird Tardus nicrula 1 5.6 Common Starling Sutrnus vulgaris 2 11.1

Vol. 116(4)1999 139 Contributions

area previously occurred in the Geelong Table 5. Amphibians recorded at Rushworth but now only occurs north of ihe Greal Stale Forest. Common and scientific names fol- Dividing Range in Victoria. lovv Cogger (1996). Spotted Quail-thrush Cindosomu punc- Common Name Scientific Name tatum Common Froglel Crinia signifera is declining in The Spotted Quail-thrush Eastern Smooth Frog Geocrinia victoriuna Victoria (Robinson 1994) and was Eastern Banjo Frog Limnodynastes dumerdi observed infrequently by FSG members. Bibron's Toadlet Pseudophryne bibronii Crested Bellbird Oreoica gutturalis Southern Brown Tree Frog Litoria ewingii This species is fairly widespread, Peron's Treefrog Litoria peronii though not common in the Rushworth State Forest. Since the local extinction of Stale this species in the Chiltern forest (Traill Table 6. Reptiles recorded at Rushworth Forest. Common and scientific names follow ex ai. 1996). the Rushworth population Cogger < 1 996). possibly represents the easternmost popu- Scientific lation in Victoria and is likely to be an Common Name Name important population at the outer limit of Marbled Gecko Christinus marmoratus the birds' south-eastern distribution. Tree Dragon Amphibolurus Grey Currawong Strepera versicolor muricatus Gould's Monilor Varanus goiddii Although declining in Victoria Lace Monitor Varanus varius 1994). this species is fairly (Robinson Bougainville Skink Lerista beugainvilUi common in Rushworth Stale Forest. South-eastern Morethia Morethia boulengeri Common Bluetongue Tiliqua scitu aides Herpetofauna (Tables 5 and 6). Red-bellied Black Snake Psettdechis No systematic surveys for reptiles and porphyrnicusE'dstcrn amphibians have been earned out to date. Brown Snake Pseudonaja textilis However- casual observations have to an unglamorous image. In large part the revealed a number of species. In particular forest was all but destroyed before people Bibron's Toadlet Pseudophryne bibronii had a chance to realise its intrinsic value and Eastern Banjo Frog Limnodynastes (Calder et al. 1994). Compared to the wet dumerelli are common around dams within forests of Victoria, dry forests have the forest. Given that these dams are rela- received little attention in recent years. The tively recent, man-made additions to the importance of this type of forest to landscape it seems likely that populations Australia's history and ecology cannot be of these species have increased since his- overstated. An increase in awareness of toric times. Both Varanus varius and V. conservation issues in regard to biodiversi- goiddii have been observed on one occa- ty has recently helped to overcome some sion. They require hollow logs and dense of these problems but ongoing effort is Utter for shelter. Both of these commodi- required. Many species rely wholly or in ties have been depleted in Box-Ironbark large part on the Box-Ironbark forest. In forests since European settlement. order to protect biodiversity in this State Conclusion the protection of Box-Ironbark forest is of The Fauna Survey Group has recorded a tantamount importance. number of species that fall within the three The Fauna Survey Group is continuing groups of declining species described by its work in the Rushworth State Forest in Bennett (1993). The relative paucity of the hope that a picture can be created of records for many of these species suggests the fauna in this area in regard to status, that a lack of large hollow bearing trees distribution and occurrence. We will con- has had an impact on the distribution and tinue to place emphasis on the Brush-tailed abundance of these species. Other distur- Phascogale as we believe this species to be bances in the Rushworth State Forest have not only of particular intrinsic interest but led to a decline in species reliant on fallen an indicator of the overall health of the for- and rotting logs and a deep litter layer. est. At the same time we will of course Unfortunately, the Box-Ironbark forests keep records of all species detected. of Victoria have, in the past, fallen victim

140 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Acknowledgements Recommendations, North Central Area'. (Land Conservation The Fauna Survey Group would particular]) like Council: Melbourne). I and Conservation Council "Report to thank ihe M.A. Ingrain Trust for financial (1978). on the North Central Study Area'. (Land Conservation support with this survey. The authors wish to Council: Melbourne). express Ebeif gratitude to Ray Gibson, Rob Lunney, D. ( 1987). Effects of logging, fire and drought Grafton, Russell Thompson and Ray White, as On possums and gliders in ihe coastal forests near well as all FSG members who assisted with Bega, NSW. Australian Wildlife Research u. 263 fieldwork, Trapping was carried out under :74.

Research Permit number RP-97 144 under the Meukhorsl. P.W. (Ed.) (1995}. 'Mammals ol " Victoria. Ecology. provisions of the Wildlife Act 1975, We would Conservation and Distribution'. (Oxford University Press: Melbourne). like to thank an anonymous referee for helpful Muir. A.M.". Edwards, S.A.. and Dickius. M..I. (1995). Comments on the draft Of this paper. Description and conservation status of the vegetation Of die Box-lroithark Lcosyslcm in Victoria, Flora and References Fauna Technical Report |36. (Department of Bennett, A.F. 1 1993). Fauna Conservation In Bos and Conservation and Natural Resources: Melbourne). Ironhark Fore&lS: A Landscape Approach. The Robinson. D. (IW). 'Lest We Forget to Forge.' the

Victorian Naturalist 111). 15-53. Victorian Naturalist 1 10, 6- 10. \1 Calder. D . Calder, J ami McGinn. 1. (1994). 'The Robinson. D. (i994). Research plan for threatened Forgotten Forests: a held guide to Victoria's box and woodland buds, ARI Technical Report No. I $3 iron bark country'. (Victorian National Parks (Department ol Conservation and Natural Resources: Associalion inc.: Melbourne). Melbourne). ChriMtidiv L. and Boles, \\ E. 'The I 1994) Tuxonom; Robinson. D. and Traill. BJ, 0990), Conserving and Species of Birds of Australia and its Territories', woodland birds in ihe wheat and sheep belts of

ii ( l Royal A -l i a I as Km )i n il hotog i sis Union; southern Australia. RAOU Conservation Statement Melbourne). No. 10.

1 1 11

Melbourne). Sodcruuisl. T.R.. Traill. B.. t ai is. F. and Beasley. K. Environment Conservation Council (1997). "Box (1996), Using nesi boxes to survey for the Brush Ironburk - Forests and Woodlands Investigation tailed Phascogale Phusrogale tapoatafa. The

Resources and Issues Report*. I Ian iroriment Victorian NiiiuraliM 113, 256-2$!,

Conservation Council: Melbourne). Traill, B .1 ( 1998), Identification of Squirrel Gliders Tord. M.A. and Paeon, D.C. (Edsj (1986). 'The and Sugar Gliders in Victoria. The Victorian Dynamic Partnership-Birds and Plants in Southern Naturalist 115. I.VS-1--IL

Australia', (The Flora and Fauna of Nouili Australia Traill. B.J.. Collins, V. , I'eakc. P.. and Jcssup. S.

Handbooks Committee). I 1996). Current and Past Status of the Birds of

' (iarnelt. S. (Fd.l ( 1992). Fhrcaiencd and Lxtinct Birds Clullern a Box Ironbark Forest in North Fasiern of Australia". (RA.O.U. Repofl 82). Victoria. The Australian Bird Watcher 16. 100 J2fi, land Conservation Council (1981). 'Final

One Hundred Years Ago

- A Large Dingo I wish to hring under the notice of this CTub particulars regarding a fcarge half-bred Dingo killed recently at Tatong, about 20 miles south-east of Benalla. A paragraph in the Age of 24th April last stating that a Dingo a shade over 6 feel long had been captured at Tatong, struck me as being very interesting, on account of the

size of the animal, and I accordingly made inquiries on the matter. Mr. Z. Anthony, of the Vermin Destruction Branch of the Departmenl of Lands and Survey, kindly wrote to Mi. M.J. Delahenty. the Vermin Inspector of the Benalla district, who replied that the animal was a half-bred Dingo, black in colour, and nearly as large as a Newfoundland dog. As this is a most unusual size, even for a half-bred wild dog, the

fact appears worthy of record. - A.H. Kitson. 10th July. IK99.

From The Victorian Naturalist XVI, p. 76. Augusl [899.

Vol. 116(4) 1999 141 Contributions

Moss Bed Lake on the Nunniong Plateau

R.J. Fletcher 1

Abstract A pristine sphagnum bog on the Nunnio ng Plateau is visited and a start is made to determine the suite of plants thai furnish it. (The Victorian Naturalist 116(4). 1999, 142-145).

A network of tracks o\' varying quality. virtually all of them created for logging, covers the Nunniong Plateau in Gippsland. On the one hand this has destroyed much of the habitat, but on the other has made a rather remote area accessible. Many of these tracks have fascinating names, such as Jam Tin. Blue Shirt, Diggers Hole and so on. Following an excursion to Brumby Point in April 1998, we look some time to examine some of the tracks and follow a circuit beginning at Brumby Point Track, then along Diggers Hole Road lo Whcatftcld Road and to Ryans Creek Road, which comes to a dead end at Ryan Creek below Mount Nunniong. A short distance further along Whealfield Road there is the Missing Link, less than a kilometre long, which connects with Moss Pig. 1. Moss Bed Lake. Dry in April I99& Bed Track. Along Moss Bed Track, about 1.25 km short of its intersection with alpine bog community occurs on a more or Mellick Munjie Road, and just to the south, less impervious clay or peat (Ashton and there is an expanse, quite circular, of water Hargreaves 1983). This particular bog would forming a sphagnum bog and bordered by a appear to be on the latter base, and possibly eucalypt forest. It is marked on the also with a granite underlay. This observa- Deception-Deddick 8523-N Mapsheet, co- tion is made because the area surrounding ordinates EU953906 and accessible by a the Lake is covered with decaying granite in track from the Moss Bed Traek. pieces up to football size. The soil depth is The winter and spring of 1997 were par- not very great and this is easily observed ticularly dry. and followed by a hot sum- from the root structure of fallen trees. mer, so that when we first saw the 'Lake' it Substantial timber surrounds the Lake, was in fact a completely dry vista of dried including Mountain Gum Eucalyptus Sphagnum moss extending over the whole dalrympleatia. Messmate E. obliqua and bed, which is about 300 m in diameter. Narrow-leaf Peppermint E. radiata. Not Clumps of dried rushes broke the monoto- far away, within a kilometre and within ny (Fig. I). Time was not available to make earshot, one could hear the chainsaws and any real examination, but having estab- bulldozers clear-felling. In addition to this lished the locality we determined to come destruction, the tracks had been widened to back at another time, preferably after rain. allow for the passage of timber jtnkers, by In a normal or average year this alpine area, the simple expedient of bulldozing the altitude approximately I ISO m. could expect margin of Moss Bed Track. This road a rainfall o( between 1000 tol400 mm widening technique can also be observed (Bureau of Meteorology). In addition to this on other parts of the Nunniong Plateau, precipitation there would be runoff from noteably along Nunniong Road, so timber higher country, much of the surrounding extraction is set to continue for some time area, particularly to the west, being in yet. Huge areas have been clear-felled excess of 1300 m. Characteristically, the along Mellick Munjie Road and also further west in the Emu Plains area west of 1 Js Mariorfe Avenue, Belmont 3216.

142 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Fig. 3. Flower of Nymphoides montami opened up hy the warmth of the sun.

show. Another dominant plant is the Tall Spike-rush Eieochans spfwcclatn. which tends to grow in separate stands. Specimens of this plant growing near the margin of the Lake had been grazed by brumbies. We in fact observed a small mob doing just this on the western side of Lake. We later found it was a spot Fig, 2. A border oi Gahnw neberiana separates the Moss Bed Lake from a stand ol Eucalyptus dal- where they commonly came to drink. To rympUana. obtain an illustration of the flowering spike

it was necessary to rather gingerly the Nunniong Road. In this area, the (Fig. 5) distance out on a fallen log, the unwanted logs have heen piled into exten- walk some only alternative to wading waist deep. sive windrows in preparation for burning. Keeping just clear of the Sphagnum moss So much for Ihe uses of the forest. possible to walk more or less The good rains early in 1999, breaking it was dryshod around the Lake, although close to the long drought, encouraged us to revisit there were tracks through the Moss Bed Lake and the marked difference the margin moss where brumbies and wombats had can be seen in Fig. 2. This picture illus- been foraging or drinking. In this wet area trates well the abrupt demarcation from between the open water and the beginning bog to limber, with a substantial interven- of the forest occur many rushes and ing border of Red-fruit Saw-sedge Gahnia a list of those sedges, and Table 1 contains sieberiana between the Lake and a stand oi able to identify. Also in this wet Mountain Gum. Much of the foreground in we were the area there were Alpine Water-fern Fig. 2 is occupied by a dense mat, with pctina-inarina. Bat's Wing Fern common name of Marshwort Nymphoides Blechfittm incisa and lots of Chickweed moniana, growing in shallow water. The Histiopteris golden-yellow flowers of this Moss Bed handsome Table 1. Some Rashes and Sedges at dis- aquatic plant make a marvellous mass Lake. these conditions, as soon as the play under Cuicx afipii'ssa Tall Sedge sufficiently high (Fig. 3). sun has risen C. gaudickaudianu [-en Sedge of Apart from the extensive sheets C fackiana Sedge Spike-sedge Marshwort, and the general distribution of llt'oihuris sphacelata Tall minus Spreading Rope-rush Sphagnum over most of the area, the bog is Empodisma Gahnia neberi&nu Red-fruit Saw-sedge by clumps of Mountain dominated Junius suhsccundtts Finger Rush (Fig. 4), whose Cord-rush Restio aUSfratis Luzula modesta Southern Woodrush splendid flowering heads make quile a Restio atisiralis Mountain Cord-rush

143 Vol. 116(4) 1999 Contributions

Fig. 4. Mountain Cord-rush Restio australts clumps at Moss Bed Laki

Stellaria media. In some of the welter spots were mats of the Small River Table 2. Some Dicotyledons in and around Moss Bed Lake (* = Buttercup Ranunculus amphitrichus. introduced). Within a few metres of the margin, making Acacia mearnsii Black Wattle A. siculiformis Dagger Wattle an understorey of the euealypts already Aeaena novae-zeiandiac Bidgee-widgee mentioned, there is a wide variety of herbs Baeckea gunntanu Alpine Baeckea and shrubs. River Lomatia Lomatia myri- Billardiera hhgiflora Purple Appleberry voides was just beginning to flower, Braeteaniha braeteata Golden Everlasting although at lower altitudes we saw many in Cassinia longifolia Shiny Cassinia Coprosma hirtelia full flower. Cinquefoil Cranes-bill Rough Coprosma Derwentia derwentiana Derwent Speedwell Geranium potentilloides made a splash of Epilabium gunnianum Gurm's Willow-herb colour here and there as did the Alpine Eucalyptus dalrympleana Mountain Gum Podolobium Podolobium alpe.stre and Grass E. obl'npui Messmate Trigger-plant Slylidium graminifolium, and E. radiata Narrow -leaf some clumps of Golden Everlasting Pepperminl Gaultheria appressa Wax Berry Braeteaniha braeteata. Twining its way Geranium potentilloides Cinque-foil through some of the shrubs was Purple Craneshill Appleberry Billardiera lon^iflora (Fig. 6). Lem Opogon hookeri Mountain More time and expertise would be Beard-heath required to make a complete census of the Liiutm marginals Native Flax Lomatia myricoides River Lomatia plants growing in and around Moss Bed Nymphoides montana Marshwort Lake, but Table 2 contains a list of those Podolobium alpestre Alpine Podolobium identified during or since the excursion. Polyscias sambm ifolia Elderberry Panax Ranunculus amphitrichus Small River Acknowledgements Buttercup Thanks to Ken Holloie and Dagmar Savva for Ridnis parvifolius Small-leaf Bramble their company and assistance, and especially to *Stellaria media *Chiekweed John Reid and Helen Aston of the National Slylidium graminifolium Grass Trigger-plant Herbarium Of Victoria for the identification of Tasmannia xerophila Alpine Pepper Care.x appressa and Nymphoides man tana respectively.

144 The Victorian Naturalist .

Letters to the Editor

Mr. 6. Purple applehetry Biltardiera longiflora.

Bibliography Ashiun ( and Hargreaves ( l >NM. Dynamics of subalpine vegetation ;it Echo Flat, Lake Mountain, Victoria. Proceedings oj the Ecological Society of Australia 12,35-60.

( 1 III. 1 Aston, ( )77). 'Aquatic manis of Australia (MUP; Melbourne.) 1 Map: 'Deception-Deddick 8523 N' (1992). 1:50 000 (Survey and Mapping Victoria) (i. Sainty. and Jacobs, S.W.L. ( 1994). 'Water Plants in Australia' (CSlRO: Melbourne) Foreman, D.B. and Walsh, N.(i, (Eds) (1993). 'Flora 1 of Victoria Vol. I. (Inkata Press: Melbourne.) pM)7). Walsh N.(i. and Lntwisllr 'I .1 (Eds) { 'Mora ] Victoria' Vol, II, (Inkata Press: Melbourne.)

Walsh N.(i. and Errtwistle T.J. (lids) (1999). 'Rora <>i 1 Victoria. Vol. III. (Inkata Press: Melbourne.)

Fig. 5. Flowering spike of Tall Spike-rush Eleocharis sphacelata.

Dear Hditor, I452Q 26 January 1986; MliL 23301/ 242732 and MUCV 23301. This note refers to 'The Biogeography of The latter location is within 5 km o\ the

Pseudocephalozia paludicola R . M former. No collections are known from Mt Schuster, an endemic Australian Liverwort' St Gwinear and Mt Erica. The plant from by Jon Sago {The Victorian Naturalist II5 Ml Torbreek was Lepidozia laevifolia as (3), (998, 84-86). stated in the corrigendum on p. 82 of The This liverwort has been found only twice Victorian Naturalist 116 (3). The location in Victoria: should be added to the first sentence of the (I j At Mt Baw Baw above ski run 5; leg. corrigendum so lhal il reads 'The determi- l and del. G.A.M Scott s.n. 25 June l )77, nation of the liverwort from Mt Torbreek confirmed J. Huge! 1 98 1; MUCV 32 1 7; referred to in "The Biogeography..." \ and (2) On the Alpine walking track NW of Arthur W. Thies Mt Kernot; leg. and det. A.W. Thies National Herbarium, Royal Botanic Gardens, Bird wood Avenue, South Yam, Victoria J141,

Vol. 116(4) 1999 145 Letters t(t the Editor

Dear lulilor, because ;iqu;iculturalisls select for individu- Kihiia's (I 1 )*) 1 )) response to my letter als which breed most readily under artificial which protested the Inclusion of an article conditions, and which convert Iced into flesh primarily on aquaculture (Romanowski most efficiently, 1999) in The Victorian Naturalist intro- c) Few captive breeding programs for duces new Information which is dealt with fishes in Australia come close to using from an aquaculture perspective only. even the minimum FAO breeding group

In particular, Kibria suggests I should si/e of 50 Kibria cites. Thus, the Trout have described an alternative to aqLiaeul- Cod restocking program he rnenlions uses itire as a way of rehabilitating Silver Perch eight fishes lor breeding, while for Eastern populations, bill this would have been Freshwater Cod the entire breeding group inappropriate as the only mention of the is 20 (Walker 1994). Even this figure is entire subject in the original article is based

( is universal- 'Such measures | to increase population! and Soule I9SI ), which now might include aquacultUre*\ However, as ly regarded (including by Frankel and

Kibria has introduced these new aspects. I Soule') as far below the minimum viable will briefly show how far removed aqua- populations of hundreds, or perhaps even culture is from conservation. thousands, suggested by practical work on

a) It is m>( 'widely accepted that ovcrex- island biogeography (sec for example ploiied and depleted fisheries can be reha- Fiedler and Jain 1992). bilitated through programs of artificial The remainder of Kibria's response is breeding, rearing and restocking in natural largely irrelevant to the original article, or habitats' except in aquaculture circles, my letter for example, discussion on which is why only ai|uaeulHuv references 'improvement* of fish strains via triploidy. are cited in support of this sweeping gener- This has not been achieved with Silver alisation. I don't know of any evidence of Perch, but if it is. the production o\' faster- successful population enhancement of this growing, sterile Silver Perch is certainly not kind for any fish, anywhere in the world. going to be of any value in conservation! All improvements have been achieved by Nick Romanowski restoring habitat, and reducing fishing Dragonfly Aquatics, RMB AB W> l )S; pressure (see also Horwil/ l° vu! Certac, Victoria *249, Cadwalladei and Lawrence 1995), References hi r.leetrophoretic methods of comparing Cadwalluder, P.L. and Lawrence, B.W. (1995). Rehahiliiaitnn ol native I'sh slocks in Hie Murray variation between wild and hatchery popu- Darling River system, in 'Reintroduction Biology of lations Trout tell us little, but of Rainbow AuKtinhan ;nni Nm\ Zealand Fauna', pp si -85. Ed. M there is abundant evidence that hatchery Serena. (Surrey Bealty and Suns: Chipping Norton).

Fiedler, ft . ami Jain. S.K, (Eds) (1992). 'Conservation and wild populations of trout are very dif- Biology: The Theory and Practice of Nature ferent behaviourally and physiologically. Cunsci vaiimi. Preservation -11111 Management'. Sehweiberl (l lJ7 c)) describes a comparison (Chapman und Hall: New YorJo. Frankel. O.H, and Soule, M.K (1*981), Vonservaiinn a wild strain o\' Hrook Trout with a of ami Evolution*. (Cambridge University Pfbss: hatchery slock originally from the same Cambridge) source, kept in identical adjacent pools on Horwit/, r ( 1995). An environmental critique of some lieshwaier captive breeding and ivinlrodnction pro an identical diet for a year. grammes in Australia*. //; 'Rcintroduction Biology ol At the end of this lime 'the domestic strain Australian and New Zealand hanna', pp. 75 80! hd. M had reached more than five inches, while the Serena, (Surrey Bcatty and Sons: Chipping Norton}. Kihria. G. (1999J. Response lo Nick Romanowski fish an inch half ,.. Wild were and a smaller regarding our review paper Biology and oquactllluiv the domestic fish were obviouslj attracted to ai Silver Perch /'///• Victorian Ntitumfist 116, 29-33

Kibria, Nugagoda, N .. Fairolough, R. and Lam, P. the biologists, displaying no fear and expect C, (19V8) Biolog) and ai.|iiaeiiluirv ol' Silver Perch, in;' food, while the wild fish continued to lUttvdmis hi,lyiiiui.\ 1 Ti'iaponidael: a review Ihr flee'. Not surprisingly, after release into the Victorian Nuturolist 1 15. 56 S3.

Romanowski, N ( 1999). letter in response lo an article same stream the wild fish showed higher l ( > hy Kihria. NugOgoda, laireloiieh and I. am. l »S, survival and growth rates than the haieherv ///, id 1,'ihin fruHiratlxt 116, 28-29, strains. These same phenomena can be Sehwieheu, E (1979), Trout', Volume I (Andre lVniseh: London), observed in any aquaculture stock which has Walker. I. (]994>. fauhusiast liooks oino Mary River been captive bred for any length of lime. Cod, \n.\laxitt Atiuaculturt 8(3). 2X) 22

140 The Victorian Naturalist | |

Letters to the Edih

Dear Editor, References Kibria, G. (1999). Response to I refer to my earlier letter (Kibria 1999} Nick Romanowski regarding our review paper 'Biology and aquaculture in which I responded to a letter from Nick of Silver Perch. The Victorian Naturalist 1 16. 29t33. Romanowski regarding our review paper Kibria, G.. Nugegoda, IX. Fairclough, R. and Lam, P, 'Biology and aquaculture of Silver Perch: < 1998). Biology ami aquaculture ai Silvei Perch, Birfyanux biclyunus (Tcraponidae): a review. The A review' (Kibria ei ai. 1998). Victorian Natiaalisl 1 15, 56-62, In response to the latest letter from Rowland, S. (1999). Silver perch aquaculture, In 'Fish ('uls'. (Ed. M. Huggan), (Fisheries Research ami Romanowski, I am submitting the follow- Development Corporation: < Canberra.) ing: Romanowski, N. (1999). Letter in response u> an article (1)1 am unsure what Romanowski means by Kibria, Nugegoda, Faicclough and l.ani. 1998. Thg Victorian Naturalist 115. 2S. by 'aquaculture circles'. However, it is important to mention that fisheries and Annotated Bibliography aquaculture scientists from all over the Leber, K. M. (1994). 'The need for a responsible approach to marine stock enhancement, In Marine world work under one umbrella. Since lisli culture and enhancement. Conference proceed

these are interrelated disciplines (see also ings. Washington Sea Grant Program, Pp. I 7-22. (Washington Sea Gram publications; (The Kibria 1999). an integrated approach is Seattle). principal toots available to fishery managers for for sustainable fisheries required and aqua- replenishing depleted species and managing fishery yields through propagation and release. culture development and management pro- | grams. Research findings generally com- I eber, K. M„ Brerrasn. N, P. and Arce, S. M. (1995). Marine enhancenienl With Striped Mullet; Are hatch- plement each other (see the Annotated eiv releases replenishing or displacing W| '^ stocks. Bibliography for examples). American fisheries Sonny Symposium 15, 376-387, [The cultured Striped Mullel when released increased (2) M<>M of references cited in my letter in abundance ami could help replenish Ihe depleted

(Kibria 1999) were from non-aquaculture llshei\ . | related journals. Most importantly, the key Mueller. R. (1990). Management practice* for lake fisheries in Switzerland. Management of freshwater conclusions were drawn from the findings fisheries, Puropean inlaml fisheries advisory emu of the world's recognised International mission symposium, Wageningen, Netherlands. Pp. fisheries Centre for Living Aquatic Resources 477-492, | Management of freshwater through stock enhancement to achieve a high sus- Management (ICLARM), which is devoted tained yield ol the eomniei viall v i rnpin UiiH llsh to the management and conservation of species.] Nicolajscn. IP, Daniclsscn, I)- S. and Moksness, P., biodiversity of aquatic organisms in Asia. f]993). Reeapiure. migration and growth of reared Africa. Caribbean and Pacific islands. Turhol released in the I Jmfjnrd. Denmark in IMS').

(3) A recent paper shows that "all research I he International symposium on sea ranching ol eod and oihei marine species. Arendal. Norway. 13-18 and production o\' Silver Perch to date used June 1993, Programme & abstracts. P. 42. |Thc the progeny of wild broodfish and there growth ol enhanced Turhol was similar lo the growth ol wild Turhol has been no artificial selection* (Rowland |

Stonei. A. W. and Davis, M. ( 1994). Experimental out- 1997). Therefore the original claim, and its planting of juvenile queen conch, Sfromhnx gigax: theoretical consequences mentioned by Comparison of Wild and hatchery -reared stoeks.

Fishery Bulletin 2. 390-41 I [Stock enhancement Romanowski 1 1999), is queslionable. with hatchery reared juveniles as a means to rehabili- Some more examples of the success of (4) tate overfished populations. | stock enhancement programs are presented Sreenivasan, A. (I9K9), Fish slock enhancement in larger liido-paeific water bodies, PAO pisherics in the annotated bibliography (see also Report No. 405. Pp. 6-33. |Slock enhancement is a Kibria 1999). major Enpul in i&creasbig and sustaining fish yields from large water bodies. Svaa*and, P. Joerstad, K. P.. and KriitianSen, T. S. you once again. Sincerely yours. Thank [1990). Pnhancemcnt studies of coastal cod in west

ern Norway, Pail I. Recruitment ol wild and reared Dr. Golam Kibria cod lo a local spawning slock. Journal tin ( onxcil 5- International Exploration tic la Met 47( 1 ), Lincoln Murine Science < L-nlrv Pour L' recruitmcni patterns between Poii Lincoln. South Australia 5606 12. |No difference in wild and reared Cod was found,

Editors note: The correspondence on this subjeCI has now been closed.

Vol. 116(4) 1999 147 Naturalist Notes

Fungi Found in a Suburban Garden

Most naturalists are very aware of the caught my eye. I could hardly believe my interesting and intriguing things that can eyes or contain my excitement. I was look- be found in their own gardens. There is ing down on a Bird's Nest Fungus, possi- always an assortment of invertebrates, bly Cyathus alia. This species has been lizards, frogs, birds and if you are lucky, listed as growing on soil, straw, twigs, fir mammals. cones, felled wood and planks in gardens.

For many years I have prowled around My specimen was growing on a small gar- my garden at night (regardless o[' weather den stake. The fungi did not have hairy conditions) with a torch or spotlight. A few cups as in Nidula emadensis and measured hours spent gardening can also easily turn only 6 mm across the top of the goblet-like into double the time allowed because of structure. The spore-bearing chambers

interesting discoveries. (peridioles) were 1-2 mm. I found on fur-

On 23 May (1999) I was unable to attend ther reading that this species prefers a fungi excursion led by Tom May (FNCV manured ground and is more frequently President) to Yarra Bend. To quell a little found in gardens than forests. My speci- of the disappointment, 1 decided to search men was in a small vegetable garden! my own garden with a more thorough As I worked my way assiduously around

method than ever before and look for fungi. the garden in a clock-wise fashion I found

I had previously recorded enough species the Smooth Ink Cap Coprinus atramentar-

to give me hope of some interesting finds. utf. Then as I crawled beside some railway

Fungi such as: Gymnopilus pampeanus, sleepers I spied a tiny beige Mycena Pax'tUus involmiis. Schizophyilum cam- species peeping out from the cracks in the mime. Lactarhts tonninosns. Amanita mus- timber; next a patch of brown capped carta, a slime mould Stemonitts sp., and Cortinarius sp. growing among grass. the ubiquitous Agaricus xanthodermus, the Then a Trametes sp. - a polypore with poisonous yellow-staining mushroom pores instead of gills - growing on a dead which seems to me to have become much stump, pure white, softly hairy on lop at more common in recent years (some com- the back of the bracket, possibly Trametes

mon names of fungi are listed in Table 1 ). hirsute. Another velvet brown Trametes Our block is the average quarter acre sp. with no distinctive zonation and a block, planted with exotic, native and white under-surface remained a mystery. some indigenous plants, the majority being Finding the name adds to the interest of native to Australia and indigenous to the fungi study, but just understanding their Mitcham/Donvale areas. important role in the environment and The block is fairly steep which allows appreciating their wondrous colours and water to run off in winter, and is reasonably diversity of shapes is enough to keep my well drained. We are situated on the down enthusiasm from ever diminishing. side of a very steep hill where, in the sixties By now a fine misty rain clothed the

when we arrived here, a small creek once whole garden in a silver/grey curtain. 1 did

trickled past our house. The creek flowed wonder at the strange picture that 1 present- into a tributary of the Mullum Mullum val- ed to the neighbours, looking down at me ley and on into the Mullum Mullum Creek from the lofty heights of their windows and our bk>ck was surrounded by indigenous over-looking our garden, as I crawled vegetation and lots of blackberry bushes around in my wet weather gear on all fours!

In my search. 1 set off with a hand lens. Inspired by the discovery of the Birds plastic container and a knife, heading for Nest Fungus I very optimistically searched the area that had yielded the minute the fallen Banksia cones for the Mycena viscidacruenta in past years. Banksiamvces sp. believed to grow on

Grasping a small stick lying on the soil I Banksia spinnlosa. which is growing in my started to probe the leaf litter. I soon garden. With the aid of my hand lens 1 unearthed the first half dozen of these found four different types of fungi growing diminutive glistening red jewels, then on a number of cones. One of the

something on the stick I was holding FUNGLMAP target species (the second for the

148 The Victorian Naturalist Naturalist Notes

Table 1. Some of the fungi found in Cec ly' s garden at Mit ;ham

Scion til" c Name Common Name

Agaricus xanthodermus Yellow Stainer Amanita mu&caria Fly Agaric Coprinus atramentarius Smooth (Common) Ink Cap Coprinus micaceas Glistening (Mica) Ink Cap Cyathus olio Bird's Nest Fungus Gymnopilus pampaenus Laclarius tc>nniti<>\u\ Woolly Milk Cap Lepista nuda Wood Blewit Mxcena viscidocruenia Nidula emoclensis Bird's Nest Fungus Paxillus mvolutus Brown Roll Rim Schizophyltum commune Split Gill Stropharia awantiaca Trametcs hirsute Hairy Trametes day. Mycena viseidocruenta being the first; also grows in indigenous bushland in the see below for more details on Fungimap) nearby Mullum Mullum valley. Mvcoaciu suhceracea and a small while Out in the front garden under the Silver Ascomyeete (Cup Fungus) with a stalk Birch Betula penduia was a Wood Blewii o\' measuring 0.5 to I mm with hairy, deeply Lepisia nuda . This must surely be one concave eups measuring 1.5 mm. As the the more beautiful of fungi with its mauve cup matures it flattens out. possibly a gills and stem (see Bruce Fuhrer's lovely Lachnelfa sp. The third species found on photo in A Field Companion to Australian the cones was a small 2 mm white fungus Fungi), I have seen it many times before; with a 4-5 mm long translucent stalk another target species, I was delighted to

(stipe). Under the lens it looked incredibly find it in my own garden. Rebetoma sp.. beautiful and fragile. The fourth species Fly Agaric Amanita muscuria and the was a tiny pink gilled fungus with a cap 1.5 Woolly Milk Cap Laclarius torminoSUS mm w ide and a white stipe: a liny gem with almost completed the collection, all the beauty of its larger counterparts that I found several types of 'paint fungus' on anyone with a land lens can enjoy. sticks and small logs which were beyond The common red capped agaric my skills of identification. Some of them Strophanti aurantiaea followed growing were white and some were fawn or brown. in some wood chips (mulched from cut- Twenty-one species was the total that I tings from our own garden), while found, many more possibly lay concealed Glistening Ink Cap Coprinus tniciu ens was under the ground or in places I missed seen in grass near an old Acacia elata altogether. I believe the total at Yarra Bend stump, looking like some exquisite art on the excursion I missed was 30. I was work from a child's fairy story book. On only 9 species down on that total and had the stump, a mass of bracket fungi was not travelled out of my garden. to be growing in heavy brown solid tiers. This This was an interesting lesson to me stump had been a source of fascination for more observant in the future, and brought some time as the mass had just continued to mind Tom May's suggestion recently all note the fungi that we see to grow. During the dry autumn I had that we could the dog. getting the paper or watered it. as an experiment to sec just while walking

take our recreation. I consid- how big il would get. Unfortunately, I was anywhere we the unable to get spore prints from most of the er myself one of the lucky ones. I have Bracket species and ils species name opportunity to walk in the nearby Mullum remains a mystery. Mullum valley several limes a week and Another fascinating mystery is a small have been recording the fungi tor some agaric with a plain white cap (diameter 5-6 time. I also walk in many bushland mm) which will not yield a spore print. reserves on other days of the week. But 1 all contribute (if The gills have a pink tinge (maybe a duo also believe Ihat we can interest is there). Look for some of the and the Steffi has a ring somewhat like a the of which Lepiota without the freckles. This species FUNOIMAP target species, many

149 Vol. 116(4) vm Naturalist Notes are illustrated in Fuhrer (1985), This occassionally a Blue-tongue Lizard and scheme records target fungi species from Possums. all parts of Australia (recent or old records I found the survey yielded many more are accepted) so lhai iheir distribution can species than I could have imagined. It was be mapped. fUNGlMAP has produced a kit heaps i)\' fun and I would love to hear from and beginners can start participating by others about their garden discoveries using the coloured photos of the first target r'ungiphiles unite - your gardens await you. species for a guide. These are included in Cecily Falkingham the instruction sheet. FUNQIMAP is a joint 27 Chippewa Avenue. project by the FNCV, the National Miieham, victoria 3132 Herbarium of Victoria and the School of Ecology and Environment at Deakin Kurlher Reading ol 1 Boiigher, N.L. and Syme. K. (I9<>8). 'Fungi University . Southern Australia'. (University of Western Australia People who for whatever reason cannot Press: Perth). travel far can also contribute to basic data Cleland, i.B, (1934 1935). 'Toadstools and Mushrooms and Other latter Piingi ol* South on fungi. What a wonderful record we Australia' (Reprinted 1976). (Governmeni Printer; could build up at our garden fungi and Adelaide). what they grow on, without even leaving Cole, H., Fuhrer, B. ami Holland. A. (1984), A Field Guide to the Common Genera of (idled Fungi in our own homes. Auslralia'tlnkala Press; Melbourne). L Now more than ever home owners both Dickinson, C, and l.ueas, .1. t I >7*^>. 'The F.neyelopedia rural and suburban are planting indige- ol Mushrooms". (Orb is Publishing: London), Fuhrer, It, (1985). A field Companion lo Australian so our gardens never before nous, have had Fungi'. (The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria; such a variety of plants mixed with both Blackburn). native and exotic. This variety of flora Fuhrer, U and Robinson. R. (1992). 'Rainforest Fungi oi I asinania and South Fast Australia'- (CSIRO reflects the variety of fauna visiting the Publishing; Melbourne). home block. For example, whilst conduct- Macdonald, R. and Wesiennan. J. (\W)). 'A Field Guide to Pungi of South-eastern Australia'. (Nelson: ing this fungi survey I found native cock West Melbourne). roaches, dozens of cicada nymphal skins. Phillips, R. 119-80. 'Mushrooms and other Fungi ol 1 Spiders of many varieties and a wonderful Great Britain and Europe . (Pan Hooks: London).

Svreek. M. ( I983), "The Hamlyn Book of Mushrooms steel blue/grey 5-inch centipede. I am visit- and Fungi". lliamlyn/:artia. Piaguet. ed by many different bird species and even Wfltlina, R, (i { >7o). 'Identification of the Largei

Fungi' ( Hul ton Educational Publications:

1 Amersham. Bucks). If you would like to participate in this exciting Wood. A. (199Q). Australian Mushrooms and new project, or for more information, contact Toadstools: How to Identify Them'. (NSW RuNGrMAP, National Herbarium of Victoria, University Press: Sydney) BirdwOOd Avenue, South Yarr;i. Victoria 3141, Young", r, (1982), 'Common Australian Fungi' (NSW email fungimapOrbgmelb.org.aa University Press: Sydney >.

Ant Behaviour

During a recent FNCV Botany Group was noi related to si/e since the Meat Ants excursion lo the Brisbane Ranges, my were smaller than both the minor and major attention was drawn to a well-worn trail ( \nnponotus workers. made, and being used, by the 'Meat Ant' irirfontyrme.v purpureas is a monomor- Iriiiamxnne.x purpureas. In one place, this phic species with worker castes all aproxi- trail passed near a small depression in mately the same si/e - c. 8 mm. On the which ants of the genus Camponolus (com- other hand Camponoius is a polymorphic monly known as Sugar Ants) had built a genus with worker castes showing a large, nest At the nest site, minor Carnponotus continuous range in si/e from the small worker ants were bringing soil out til the (minor) lo large (major) workers (Shatmck nest under the walchtul eyes' of a number 1999), The Ciunponotus sp. in my obser- o( majors. Occasionally an /. purpureas vation ranged in size from c. 10 mm crossed this depression, whereupon all the (minors) toe. 15 nun (majors). Camponotus immediately retreated into the This behaviour of lridomxrmex and nest even though no contact was made Camponotus species has been reported by between the two species. This behaviour a number of authors - including Andersen

150 The Victorian Naturalist Naturalist Notes

l Tabic 1. PJ.M. Greenstade's Ecological Categories of Ants in Australia (Andersen l >K7

Category Major taxa Ri'loani features

1. Dominanl species Iridoim ran \ Highly abundant; active and aggressive; able to monopolise resources

2. Subordinate species I arge bod) size: polymorphic; submissive behaviour; nocturnal Foraging V Climate specialists [&) Hot Mi hphorw Behavioural and morphological specialisations . ,', I \plus lb) Cool Prolashu Reslrieted to cool and svel regions where Notoncus iridomyrmex is at its climatic limn

4. Cryptic species Si /, nopsis Aeti\itv confined to soil and litter

many Pont I tna

5. Opportunists Rhytidoponera Unspecialised; hkcK to interact strongly with

Paratn i ft/ira iridomyrmex

6. Generalised myrmicines Monomorium Unspecialised species; recently arrived in Pheidolt evolutionary time Crematogastei

7. Large, solitary foragers VvnihChi Large bod) size; low population densities; unlikelv to interact strongh with other ants

1 1 * is 1 I '*). 1901 (pheromonest or it an instinctive 1 084. L986a, 1986b, 1987, odour

and 1092). and Greenslade I 1076 and behaviour? help answers.' 1979). Table 1 shows seven ecological cat Can anyone with egories oi ants, the most important ol References consists dominant species. which of Andersen. VN (1984).CommuniV) Organization ol

chiefly fridamyrmejt (abundant, highly Viiis m Hi.' v i, toi i. in Mallee Th* Vit torian active and aggressive) which arc often Naturalist 101. 248 157 Andersen, AN. ( 1986a) Patterns "I \m Community with subordinate species such as associated Organization in Mesic South eastern Vustralia.

Camponotus (large size, mainly nocturnal AuximtinA Journal ofE* ology 1 1 8 97 VN (l9R6b). Diversftj, Seasonality and and submissive towards Iridomyrmex). Andersen, Community Organization ol Ants ai Adjacent HcaUi and Table I is based on Greensladc's work and Woodland Sites in South eastern Australia s \ustratiat\ Journal <>/ Zoology M I 64-, is taken from Andersen < 10S7). l Andersen, A. N Ant Community Organization Dominanl ants have been described as and t-in iionnicni.il Assessment' in The Role ol 'both abundant and influential' Invertebrates In Conservation and Biological l active Survey*, Majer. J 1> fed.) Western Australian ((iicenslade l >7(>) and as "highly Department "i Conservation and I and Management aggressive ants that show rapid and Report. recruitment to food resources and an Andersen. AN (1990) 'The Use ol Ant Communities important competitive influence on the to Evaluate Change in Australian terrestrial Ecosystems a Review and a Recipe'. Proceedings >>i '

of the ant community' ' ; > remainder >>( I ihc I cological Society Vustralia 16,3 (Andersen 1092). Andersen, A N (1991) 'The \nts >>i Southern [CS1R0 Although my observation was made on a Australia \ Guide lo the Session Fauna*. minutes, Australia) single occasion, for only a few Andersen, A.N (1992) Regulation of 'Momentary' in Exceptionally Rich and the ants were identified by sight alone, [ diversify b> Dominant Species Am Communities ol the Australian Seasonal Tropics, the observed behaviour of die ( 'amponotus lh, Arm ;/, an Vatitralisi 140, 401 +20

the 'sub- * species does appear to agree with Greenslade. P.J M (1976) Phe Meal Anl IrUlomynm missive towards Iridomyrmex* behaviour par i

thai sp. v I to the Ants ol (1992) also notes CamponotUH Greenslade, IM M 1 1979) luidc South Australia (South AustaUan Museum: fte n r e t re at when challenged (by Welalde). iridomyrmex I, Shattuck, S.O (1999) Australian Ants, rheii hiolog; However, this behaviour raises a ques- and Identification' (CS1RO Publishing Australia) tion. What triggers the submissive behav- EJ.Grey iour towards Iridomyrmex^ of Camponotus 8 Woona Court, Is H recognition by sight, recognition by Y.illuinhic, Victoria 1085

151 Vol. 116(41 IW9 Naturalist Notes

Mound-building Ants

I was interested to read 'Lcafhoppers in Ant Nests', published in your February issue (Day and Pullcn 1999), having lived adjacent to the mallee areas adjoining the

Berri Irrigation areas until I left school.

My wife and I have visited the Calperum area on many occasions and the Coollong paddock (west of Kenmark) which is now the Conservation Park of the same name. About 15 of my visits over later years, with the South Australian Field Naturalists Society's Botany and Mammal Clubs, have been to Calperum and adjacent areas of the Bookmark Biosphere Reserve.

My wife pointed out that in Fig. 1 o\' Day and Pullen's article, above the first four letters of the word 'characteristic' in the caption, there is apparently a soil mound of Carnponotus clarior. This ant species usually nests under the base of mallee and where possible brings Cone-shaped mound of Camponottt.s clari- or. out the excavated soil via a hollow stem and Munyaroo Conservation Park, South Australia. Photo by G.L. Howie. drops it from the farthest projection which often results in an almost perfect cone.

I have been collecting ant specimens for Some estimates are that there may be as Mr Archie McArlhur. mentioned in the many as 250 species of ants in mallee acknowledgements, since he spoke to a associations and I suspect there may be a meeting of the Mammal Club on ant col- number of examples of this behaviour with lecting. He pointed out that pitfall traps other ant species. can serve a secondary purpose as a source The photograph (above) of the ant of ant specimens. mounds mentioned clearly shows the exca- The last paragraph you published poses vated soil as having been dropped from 'If the eggs are inserted into the twigs or hollow stems o( mallee. stems of the host plant, as in other curymelids. how do the nymphs reach the G.L. Howie nest of a host ant?' 53 Gladys Street, Clarence Gardens, I have discussed the matter with Archie South Australia 5039. and have suggested the ants collect the eggs o[ the lcafhoppers and tend the eggs as References their own. Apparently this is the case with Day. M.K and Pullen. K.R. (1999). Leathoppcrs in Anl Nests: Some Aspects of the Behaviour o( the juvenile stages of the Ogyris butterfly, Pogonoseopini (Hcmiptera: Eurytnelidae). The which feeds on mistletoe and is escorted by Victorian Naturalist lift. 12-15. a species of ant related to the mound builders mentioned.

For assistance with the preparation of this issue, thanks to the computer team - Alistair Kvans and Anne Morton. Thanks also to Felicity Garde (label printing) and Michael McBain (web page).

152 The Victorian Naturalist Book Reviews

Australian Ants: Their Biology and Identification (Monographs on Invertebrate Taxonomy Volume 3) by S. O. Shattuck

Publisher: CSIRO Entomology, ISBN 643 06032 4.K.R.P, $89.95,

Ants comprise an important group of key. and a section which details each organisms in most Australian terrestrial genus. There are also 30 colour plates habitats. They are conspicuous and impor- illustrating aspects of ant biology and their tant in Australian ecosystems, especially in interactions with the environment. our arid regions. As such, they have The introductory section briefly and suc- become increasingly crucial to studies of cinctly summarises the general patterns of the Australian environment, with many ant diversity in Australia, the biology and researchers, students, and natural histori- life-history of ants, ants as pests, the use of ans with no prior history of entomology ants in environmental monitoring, the clas- taking an interest in ant communities. Ants sification of ants, use of keys for identifi- are now considered to be useful indicators cation, anatomical terms, ant collection of environmental disturbance, and arc techniques, specimen preparation and cura- often included in habilai assessments along tion, and suggested reading for those wish- with plants and vertebrates. ing to Look further into aspects of ant biol- This obviously creates a need for a com- ogy and taxonomy. These sections have prehensive and user-friendly guide to the been kept to an admirable minimum - com- identification and biology of Australian mendable given the vast quantity of pub- ants, and in this book Steve Shattuck has lished information. produced just such a publication. Prior to The key is the heart of this book, and the this excellent book, researchers and stu- author has spent much time developing dents have relied on regional publications, and fine-tuning the key by allowing active such as Alan Andersen's The Ants of ant researchers to use drafts during the Southern Australia: a guide to the Bassian key's development. Every couplet is illus- fauna and Peter Greenslade's A Guide to trated, often with more than one character. Ants of South Australia, both of which The illustrations, produced by Natalie dealt admirably with the regions they Cov- Barnett. are uncluttered, and the characters ered, but were inappropriate for usage In the are indicated by arrows, or shading so that Diore northern and western parts of there is no ambiguity. Given an adequate Australia, and did not include generic stereo dissecting microscope, and a good changes from recent laxonomie revisions. light source, this key should allow confi- Additional guides to ant genera were to be dent identifications of most ants to the

(bund in global publications such as Barry generic level, even for the inexperienced Bolton's Identification Guide to the Ant ant enthusiast. The layout of the key is identification; speci- Genera of the World, and within Holldoblcr fairly standard for ant and Wilson's 7 he Ants, but the keys in both mens are first keyed out to subfamily then, of these publications are unwieldy and diffi- in a separate key. to genus. with cult to use for people without background The final section of the book deals knowledge of ant taxonomy and anatomy, each subfamily and genus. There arc 103 with few illustrations in the case of ant genera currently known from Australia, Holldobler and Wilson, and with only SIM so this section comprises a large part of the (Scanning Electron Microscope) pho- publication. For each subfamily there is a identification, and an tographs in the case of Bolton. section detailing Shattuck has rectified virtually all of overview of the subfamily in Australia. For detailing these shortcomings in the literature by pro each genus there are sections distribution and during a clear and well-illustrated book of identification, biology, the current- the Australian ant genera. The text of the habitats, and a list of names of Australian species. There arc book is set into an introductory section, a ly described

153 Vol. 116(4)1999 Book Reviews

also (wo or more SEM photographs for be that it would have been good to put each genus, usually of a frontal view of the some basic taxonomic history in the gener- head and a lateral view of the alitrunk, and ic descriptions. This would enable the read- a distribution map which shows collection er to compare previously published names sites. The identification section is an in the literature where there have been tax- important part of the generic descriptions, onomic changes in recent times. For exam- as it allows the key user to confirm their ple, Iridomyrmex, a diverse and ecological- placement of a specimen. Similar genera ly significant ant genus, formerly included are compared, and the characters used to the ant genera Papyrius, Oehetellus, separate them described, so that the reader Anonychomyrma, Doleromyrma. can further clarify their identifications. The Linepithema, and Philidris within its scope descriptions of biology are fascinating, and until recently revised by Shattuck. the reader will soon realise just how much Shattuck has put together a book which work remains to be done on the natural his- will become the standard text for tory of Australia's ants. The scope of researchers, enthusiasts and students who research areas available is also emphasised wish to understand Australian ant diversi- by the inclusion of three undescribed gen- ty. It will find use in areas well removed era within the book; no doubt this book will from general entomology, such as in envi- encourage field workers to locate even ronmental management and botany, and is more! The associated distribution and habi- a fine inclusion in CSIRO's Monographs tat information tells us the general distribu- on Invertebrate Taxonomy series. tion of ant genera both within and outside Australia. This gives the reader an idea of David R. Britton Agronomy and Soil Science. the endemicity of many Australian genera. School of Rural Science and Natural Resources. I could find no errors in this publication, University ol'New England

and if 1 had any complaints at all, it might Armidale. NSW 2351.

Beauty in Truth: the Botanical Art of Margaret Stones

by Irena Zdanowicz

Publisher: National Gallery of Victoria, 1996. 96 pp., 108 colour plates.

Brilliant Careers: Women Collectors and Illustrators in Queensland

by Judith McKay

Publisher: Queensland Museum, J 997. 80 pp., numerous illustrations (black & white and colour). RRP $19.95.

Exhibitions are limited in time and space. from where she has travelled back and But their associated publications endure forth across the world to draw plants in and some deserve a continuing readership. their native habitats. In Beauty in Truth I think that these two books certainly do. Irena Zdanowicz provides an insightful Dr Margaret Stones is a remarkable and biography of Margaret Stones and a renowned botanical artist. She began her description of her working methods. botanical work in Victoria in the 1940s, Rarely does an exhibition catalogue and has lived for most of her life near the include illustrations of all work exhibited. Royal Botanic Gardens at Kew, England, but Irena Zdanowicz convinced the

154 The Victorian Naturalist Book Reviews

Gallery that this should be done for the Amalie Dietrich was employed to collect marvellous retrospective exhibition held in natural history specimens for a German 1996, which spanned fifty years of museum. After retiring from teaching in Margaret Stones' work. Irena Zdanowic/ 1895 Selina Lovell collected plant speci- also insisted on high quality illustrations in mens in Cooktown, where in the 1970s the catalogue. While no reproduction can Vera Scarth-Johnson, inspired by the beau- ever - match the incredible light and life ty of the Endeavour River and the early the beauty - and truth in Margaret Stones' work oi' Joseph Banks and Daniel original work, the illustrations in Beauty in Solander, began collecting and painting the Truth - are stunning all 108 plates. They local flora. An earlier artistic visitor was include work carried out during two major Ellis Rowan, about whom Judith McKay projects: on the endemic flora of Tasmania wrote Ellis Rowan - A Flower-Hunter in (in conjunction with the botanist Dr Queensland, which was published in 1990 Winifred Curtis) and on the flora of by the Queensland Museum in concert Louisiana (USA). Botanical notes for each with an exhibition o\ its collection of 125 plate were prepared by Professor Carrick Queensland flower paintings by Ellis Chambers, and Drs. Don Foreman, Linden Rowan. Dr Dorothy Hill taught geology Gillbank. David Hunt and Lowell and paleontology at the University of Urbatsch. The index includes taxonomic Queensland from 1946-72 and became the and common plant names. first female Fellow o\' the Australian Dr Judith McKay prepared Brilliant Academy of Science. Many of the women Careers to accompany the Queensland discussed in Brilliant Careers, including Museum's 1997 exhibition in its series of Joan Cribb. Doris Goy, Hilda Geissmann, annual exhibitions for International Mabel Hobler and Estelle Thomson, were Women's Day. Brilliant Careers pass members of the Queensland Naturalists" tribute to a remarkable group of women Club.

who. as scientific collectors and illustrators It is too late to visit these two exhibi-

over the past 1 50 years, have extended our tions, but it is not too late to enjoy these knowledge of the Queensland environment beautiful books. Unfortunately Beauty in and people. All have left a public legacy in Truth is out of print, but Brilliant Careers their contributions to museums and herbar- is still available at the Queensland

ium collections, or ill their publications Museum, and I would hope elsewhere. and advocacy of conservation causes." They should both be in any library which The work of 34 women is discussed by claims to have a good Australiana or various authors. Maida Allan. Elizabeth Australian natural history collection. Coxen, Harriette Biddulph. Ada McLaughlin and Mabel Nobler collected Linden Gillbank specimens in the vicinity of their History & Philosophy of Science Department, University of Melbourne, pastoral homes. In the Queensland 1860s Parkvillc, Victoria 3052.

The Victorian Naturalist

All material for publication to;

The Editor The Victorian Naturalist FNCV Locked Bay 3 P.O. Blackburn Victoria 3 130

Vol. 116(4) 1999 155 1

The Field Naturalists Club ofu Victoria Inc. fag-No- A003361 IX

Established 1880 In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria

OBJECTIVES: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect A ustralian flora andfauna.

Membership is open to any person interested in natural history and includes beginners as well as experienced naturalists.

Registered Office: FNCV, I Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia.

PQSUd Address: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn. Victoria 3130, Australia.

Phone/Fax (03) 987? 9X60; International Phone/Fax 61 3 9X77 9860. Patron His Excellency, The Honourable James Gobbo, The Governor of Victoria Key Office-Bearers President: Dr TOM MAY, c/- National Herbarium, Bird wood Avenue, South Yarra 3141. 9252 2319 Vice Presidents: Dr NOEL SCHLE1GER, I Astley Street, Montmorency 3094. 9435 8408 and Mr JOHN SEEBFCK, 113 Arundel Road, Park Orchards 31 14. AH 9876 1762 Hon. Secretary. Mrs ANNE MORTON. 10 Rupieola Court, Rowville 3178. 9790 0656 ihm. Treasurer. Vacant Subscription -Secretary: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. 98779860 Editor, The Vie. Nat.: Mrs MHRILYN GREY. 8 Martin Road, Glen Iris 3146. 98X9 6223 Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOt IGHTON, FNCV, Locked Bag 3. PO Blackburn 3130. AH 542X 4097 Excursion Co-ordinator: Mr DENNIS MELTZER, 8 Harcourt Avenue, Caufieid 3162. 9523 1853 Hook Sales: Dr PARKIN, Locked ALAN FNCV, Bag 3. PO Blackburn 3 1 30. AH 9850 2617 Book Brokerage: Mr RAY WHITE, 20 Alfred Street, Essendon 3040. 9379 3602 Newsletter Editors: Dr NOEL SCHEEIGER, as above and Mr. KEITH MARSHALL, 8/423 Tooronga Road, Hawthorn East 3123. 9882 3044 Conservation Coordinator: Vacant Group Secretaries Botany: Mr RAY MACPHERSON, 8 Jean Street, Lower Templestowe 3107. 9X50 4319

Geology: Mr ROB I IAMSON, 5 Foster Street. McKinnon 3204. 9557 5215 Fauna Siavey; Ms SOPHIE SMALL. 13 Park Road. Glen Iris 3146. AH 9X09 0076 Marine Research: Mr MICHAEL LYONS. 2/18 Slonnington Place, Toorak 3142. AH 9X22 8007 Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 Schoiters Road, Mernda 3754. 9717 351 MEMBERSHIP

Members receive The Victorian Naturalist and the monthly Field Nat News free. The Club organises several monthly meetings (free to all) and excursions (transport costs may be charged). Field work, including botany, mammal and invertebrate surveys, is being done at a number of locations in Victoria, and all members are encouraged to participate.

SUBSCRIPTION RATES for 1999 Year Half- Year First Member Metropolitan $40 $20 Concessional (pensioner/sludent/unemployed) $30 $15 Country (more than 50km from GPO) $30 $15 Junior (under 18) $15 $7 Additional Members Ati "H $15 $15 Junior $5 $5 institutional Australian Institutions %^ Overseas Institutions At l$65 Schools/Clubs $$5

Send to: FNCV. Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130. Australia.

Printed by Brown Prior Anderson, 5 Evans Street, Burwood, Victoria 3125. The V Victorian Naturalist

Volume 116 (5) October 1999

Published by The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria since 1884 Honours

FNCV Honorary Life Member Jack Hyett

Jack Hyett worked tor the Education Group, and is a member of several natural Department of Victoria from 1933 until history clubs including the FNCV, RAOU 1976, first as a primary school teacher, and (now Birds Australia) and the Wildlife after 1963 as a professional officer, Preservation Society of Sri Lanka. Teachers' College at Burwood. Later he He served for seven years on the bird sur- worked as a Science lecturer at Burwood vey of Wilson's Promontory, and also con- State College. He lectured for the Council ducted the mammal survey of the o( Adult Education on Bird Study in Promontory. Australia, directed their Outback Study Jack Hyett has published several books Schools, and led birdwatching and wildlife and numerous articles on birds and mam- tours in Australia and overseas. He toured mals, edited four volumes of The Emu, and places such as the Galapagos Islands, has sub-edited The Australian Ecuador, Sri Lanka, India and South Africa. Birdwatcher, for which he has prepared Jack can tell stories of some interesting indices, as well as a bird species index to events that occurred on some of those tours, the first 100 volumes of The Victorian especially the African ones. Naturalist. Jack was the Australian Natural In 1933 he joined the Bird Observers' History Medallionist in November 1985. Club of Australia, and was the custodian of N.W. Schleiger their historic photographic collection for I Astley Street, several years. He was the foundation presi- Montmorency. dent of the Ringwood Field Naturalist Club Victoria 3094, from archives made available by and the Victorian Ornithological Research Sheila Houghton, Hon. Librarian.

Jack Hyett (right), receives his honorary certificate of FNCV Life Membership from Vice President Noel Schleigerat Covenant House, Canterbury Road, Blackburn on Friday, 28 May. 1999.

158 The Victorian Naturalist The Victorian Naturalist

Volume 116(5) 1999 F.N.C.V. October

Editor: Merilyn Grey

Honours FNCV Honorary Life Member - Jack Hyett, byN.W. SMeiger 158 Australian Natural History Medal 1999

- Mary Patricia Cameron, by I. Endersby 160

Research Reports Fire Effects on Selected Terrestrial Invertebrate Fauna in Heathland at Wilsons Promontory. Victoria - a Preliminary Survey, by E.J. Grey 162 New Holland Mouse Psettdomys novaehollandiae (Rodentia: Muridae): Further Findings at Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory National Park, by B.W. Atkin and B.R. Quin 169

Contributions Observations of Platypus OrrUthorhynchus anatinus Mating Behaviour, by M. De-La-Warr and M. Serena 172 A Diary of The Saunders Casemoth Oiketicus elongatus n

by J. Eroadberry 175 New Records of the Striped Worm-lizard Aprasia striolata in South-western Victoria, by C. BeardselL N. Clemann, J.SilinsandE.McNabb... 179 Early Devonian Fossils from Eglinton Road and Rail Cutting, Alexandra, Central Victoria, by C. Earp 181

Naturalist Notes Corroboree Frog Pseudophryne corroboree, by E. Lyndon 168 Australia's Flying Frogs? by T.J. Amiable 187 Southern Right Whale^in Port Phillip Bay, by J. Seebeck 188

The Weaver, by G. van Wessem 1 90

Book Reviews Defending the Little Desert: the Rise of Ecological Consciousness in Australia, by L. Robin, reviewer D. Cheal 191

ISSN 0042-5 I 84

Cover: Adult male Saunders Casemoth Oiketicus elongatus. See story on p. \75 Photograph by Arthur Farnworth.

Find us on the WEB: http://caIcite.apana.org.au/fncv/ email: [email protected] Honours

Australian Natural History Medal 1999

Mary Patricia Cameron

The Queen Victoria Museum and Art of Tasmania' during the period 1967-1978, Gallery in Launceston has a botanical col- and she edited and wrote much of the text lection of such high standard that its of the Launceston Field Naturalists Club's

Herbarium is now recognised as a major publication 'Guide to the Flowers and centre of botanical research in Tasmania. Plants of Tasmania' and its three revisions. Mary Cameron, in her voluntary capacity With the support of the Plomley as Research Associate, curates the collec- Foundation and the Museum she has been tion and provides a plant identification ser- studying the flora of many different types vice for the public as well as private com- of wetlands in north east Tasmania, result- panies. The Herbarium contains some ing in a number of joint publications on 20.000 plants together with a collection of flora lists and ecological details. With the Tasmanian limbers. The City Council hon- assistance of the Museum's photographer. oured Mary in recognition of 5,000 hours Mark Bartkevicius. Mary has amassed a of work for the Launceston Community. large slide collection of Tasmanian orchids In 1947 Mary Cameron graduated as to record details of soft tissues which are Bachelor of Science from the University of lost in preservation. The collection and dis- Tasmania with a major in botany, and she tribution records have been used in the taught science subjects in Tasmanian sec- writing of volumes of the "Flora of ondary schools for several years. She also Australia' and a forthcoming 'Atlas of gave long service as part time reference Tasmanian Orchids'. librarian at the Northern Regional library. The Royal Society of Tasmania and the Launceston. until her retirement. Mary Launceston Field Naturalists Club have maintained her botanical studies and pur- benefited from Mary's contributions over suits wherever possible while raising a many years. She joined the Royal Society family of six children and fulfilling the in 1946, became a life member in the demands of employment. As spare time 1950s and was a member of its Council on became available she devoted an ever several occasions. Also she was vice chair- increasing amount of time and energy to man and Chairman of its Northern Branch, botany. In about 1969 she became contributing to the planning and conduct of Honorary Curator of the Herbarium at the the Branch's program of lectures and Queen Victoria Museum and set about excursions. The Field Naturalists Club reorganising and improving the presenta- made her an honorary life member recog- tion of the collection in addition to the for- nising her long service as committee mem- mal tasks of collecting, identifying and ber, librarian, vice president and president. preserving specimens. In 1972 she was She has given numerous talks to the Club, appointed Honorary Botanist and in 1987 arranged and led botanical excursions, and the City of Launceston recognised her written detailed reports for its publications.

'enormous contribution ... to the In 1993 Mary Cameron was made a Museum's botanical collection and to the Member of the Order of Australia for 'out- community through the provision of infor- standing service to the study of the botany mation' by elevating her to the position of of Tasmania, and botanical and environ- Honorary Research Associate of the Queen mental conservation*. She has a long histo- Victoria Museum and Art Gallery. ry of service on a number of conservation Mary Cameron's botanical investigations committees and advisory groups. The and vegetation surveys date from the Tasmanian Conservation Trust, the 1960s and have been the basis for a num- Australian Heritage Commission ber of publications. She collected plants Evaluation Panel (Tasmanian Section), the and provided distribution information for Department of National Parks and Lord Talbot de Malahide who published Wildlife's Flora Advisory Committee and the six volume work 'The Endemic Flora its Rare and Threatened Species

160 The Victorian Naturalist Honours

Committee are among the bodies on which Naturalists Club and a collection of she has served. She is a member of the endemic flora at a site near Scottsdale as a Tasmanian Arboretum Inc. which, in an Bicentennial project. endeavour to prevent the loss of woody The Launceston Field Naturalists Club plant species through forest destruction, had great pleasure in nominating Mary has established collections of flora from Cameron for the award of the Australian various parts of the world on a 45 hectare Natural History Medallion. property at Eugenana. At a local level, Mary has directed the planting of Ian Endersby 56 Looker Road, Australian sub-alpine flora on a 60 hectare Montmorency, Victoria 3094. property of the Launceston Field

Editor's note: The Australian Natural History Medallion will be presented to Mary Cameron at a meeting of the FNCV on Monday, 8 November 1999 at 8:00 pm. The pre-

sentation will take place at the FNCV Hall, 1 Gardenia Street, Blackburn, Victoria. After the presentation, Mary Cameron will speak on 'Conservation of Tasmanian Plants'. All welcome.

Medal for 1999. Photo by Mary Cameron, awarded the Australian Natural History John Simmons, Tasmania.

161 Vol. 116(5) 1999 Research Report,

Fire Effects on Selected Terrestrial Invertebrate Fauna

in I leathland at Wilsons Promontory, Victoria - a Preliminary Survey

EJ.Giey 1

AIis»i;kI

A preliminary smdy oi anls, beetles and spiders was conducted jm two heathland siies in Wilsons Pronuimory National Park one mosi recently burnt in iwi, the olhei in 1998, There was sufficient

• Mi' in the rente am fauna, particularly in the abundance ol Rhytidoponera species, to indicate thai a

more i omprehensive siuily is warranted. (The VU utrian Nawmltii 116(5), 1999, 162- 168. j

Introduction

The Field Naturalists CJub of Victoria inc. lion ol 140 m above-sea-level. Both sites conducted a research trip to Wilsons had a slight westerly slope but were on in Promontory October 1998. The work opposite sides of Ihe track c. 100 m apart, undertaken included this invertebrate survey, and both had simiku soils, derived from as well as the identification of grasses ami granite, with high clay content and medium sedges by workshop and Ik-Id siudy, mam- to coarse quartz grains. Due to the clay con- mal surveying by napping and spotlighting tent. Ihe soil has low water permeability. ami freshwater invertebrate sampling. The heath site on the north side of the The invertebrate survey aimed to provide Hack, although not burnt in 1998, has had baseline dala on anl ( I lymcnopleia), beetle an extensive fire history, having been burnt (Coleoptera) and spider (Araneae) launa in in 1951, 1957, 1073, May 1 988 and two healhlaml sites One unburnl sinee October 1991. In contrast, the heath site 199] and referred to in the lexl as the burnt in May 1998 (a prescribed burn), unbumt site, and the other burnt in 1998 which lies on the south side of the track, ami referred to as the burnt sill-. An evalu- had only been burned in 1951 and 1957 ation of the differences in species abun- (Jim Whelan j>crs. coitnu.). and dance diversity between the two habi- Vegetation on the unburn! heath site was tats was also made. The study was sel up dominated by Prickly Tea-tree so thai further work could continue in Leptospermum continentals, Dwarf Sheoke order to monitor the changes in invertc Allocasuarim paradoxa and White Kunzea brale fauna as (he recently burnt heath Kunzva ambigua. Other plains included regenerated, using the site last burnt in Butterfly Flag Dlplarrena moraea* 1991 as a control. Australian Dusty Miller Spyiidium parvi- Earlier work on anl diversity, seasonality Jolitmt, Pink Heath Epacris impressa. ami community organisation had been con- Silver Banksia ia Banks nwrgmata% Dagger ducted by Andersen < 198(0 in heath and llakea llitkai teretifolia subsp. hirsuta. Woodland sites near Tidal Kiver, toward Furze llakea II i°S, Parks Victoria burnt some burn, ihe vegetation was higher and denser ol the healhlaml in an area along Five Mile than ai the unbumt site with Aibcusuarma Track overlooking Corner Inlet at [he paradoxa being the most abundant species northern end of the Park The two study (Jim Whelan pets, comm,). sites were located on an exposed saddle al 6 r M i8 52 54 $ 1 I46°21W E, with an eleva Methods

Al each site, five lines of live pitfall Haps

1 s Woona i '"mi. YnHambia, Victoria Miss were put in (25 traps a! each site) lo form a

162 the Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

Mg. I. The unburni heath site, Installing pit fall u ips - Elsbeth Sacco, Pal Gre) and Erich Sacco. square grid. Each line was separated by throughout this report by inverted com- five metres, with live metres spacing mas). Andersen (1990) defines a 'species between traps. For the traps, plastic coffee group' by saying that 'even though most cups were used with 200 ml capacity, species cannot be confidently named, height HO mm and a top diameter of 72 many can be readily assigned to groups mm. Each trap was dug in, so that the top with distinct morphologies, habits and dis- was flush with the ground, and 30 ml of tributions'. As an example. l preserving fluid put in each trap. The pre- Anonychomyrma (was Iridomyrmex) itin* serving liquid consisted of a 50/50 mixture emus* refers to a complex of species close- of ethylene glycol and ethanol (70%). The ly allied to, and including, A. ttinerans. traps were open for a seven-day period However, some ants could only be identi- from 3- 10 October 1998. fied to genus. Beetles and spiders were The weather, while the pitfall traps were identified to family level. All other materi- open, was cool and windy with some rain. al captured was retained as 'miscella- Rainfall and min/max temperatures were neous'. measured on site - 29 mm of rain was The keys used for identification were recorded, and a temperature range of 7- taken from a variety of sources : ants ln ("'. Andersen 1991, Greenslade 1979 and one Hand collecting for ants and beetles and derived from New et at. 1996; beetles spiders was carried out within the bound- Moore 19X0; and spiders - Da vies 1986. aries of each site for 30 minutes by ten Results people Oil 10 October [998, when the Pitfall trapping weather was mild and sunny. Material was Total numbers of ants, beetles and spi- collected from foliage, under litter and on ders recorded from pitfall traps are shown the ground. In order to equalise the collect- in Table 1. Ants were by far the most ing effort, the same ten people were numerous group in both sites, while beetles involved at each site. and spiders comprised only 17% and 9.5% klentilicalion of ants was taken to species respectively in the unburn! site, and 4.2% level, where possible, or they were and W/i respectively at the burnt site. assigned to a species group (indicated

Vol. 116(5) 1999 163 ) Research Reports

Fig. 2. The burnt heath siti

Table 1. Total numbers of ants, beetles and spiders collected in pitfall traps.

Ants (Hymenoptera) Beetles (Col Spiders (Araneae) Unburnt Heath 219 54 38 Burnt Heath 210 10 14

A nls (Hymenoptera: Formieidae most of the balance. Rhytidoponera las- The ants, when identified to sub-family maniensis and R. Victoria? were also level, showed considerable differences in recorded in the burnt heath, but in much numbers between the two sites (Table 2). lower numbers, 80% less than in the In the unburnt heath, the sub-family unburnt heath, and members of the subfam- Poncriiiae far outnumbered the Ponerinae ilies Dolichoderinae, Myrmicinae and found in the burnt heath (175 v 47), while Formicinae were more equally represented. the sub-families Myrmicinae, Dolicho- The greatest variety of taxa for both sites dcrinae and Formicinae in the unburnt was found in the sub-families Myrmicinae heath were greatly outnumbered by those (unburnt 4, burnt 8) and Formicinae at the burnt site. However, the total num- (unburnt 4, burnt 10). Monomorium kitianl bers of individual animals at both sites was the most numerous of the Myrmicinae were fairly equal (219 in the unburnt site in the unburnt heath, while Crematogaswr and 210 in the burnt site). sp., Meranoplus sp. and Pheidole sp. were In contrast, ant diversity was decidedly the most numerous in the burnt heath. In higher in the burnt heath with 24 taxa the Formicinae. the most numerous were

(species, species groups or genera) com- Pseiidotwtoncus sp. (unburnt site, 1 1), and pared with 14 in the unburnt heath (Table 2). Paratrevhina 'minutula' (burnt site, 22). In the unburnt heath site, the two most Beetles (Coleoptera) abundant species were Rhyiidoponera tas- In contrast to ants, the unburnt heath had maniensis, and R. vivtoriae (153 and 21 the greatest number of individuals captured respectively), which together accounted for in pitfall traps (Table 3) and the greatest 79% of all ants collected. Species of - Dolichoderinae and Formicinae made up beetle richness at family level eight fami-

164 The Victorian Naturalist ' ' ' ' '

Research Reports

Table 2. Total ants (Hymenoptera: Formicidae) in Pitfall Traps. + This species was only collected by hand and did not appear in the pitfall traps. Sub-family Species Unburnt Heath Burnt Heath Myrmeciinae Myrmecia fotficata 1

Myrmecia nigriscapa 1 Myrmecia 'pilosula +

Total 1 1

Myrmicinae Aph&enogaster longiceps 1

Crematogaster sp. 1 14

Meranoplus sp. 1 17

Monomorium kiliani 3 1

Monomorium sp. 1 3

Orectognathus clarki 1 Pheidole sp. 17 Solenopsis sp. 2 Total 6 56

Ponerinae A mblyopone australis 1 Rhytidoponera tasmaniensis 153 43 Rh vtidoponera victoriae 21 3 Total 175 47

' Dolichoderinae Iridomyrmex 'bicknelli 1 Anonychomyrma 'itinerant 13 3 Anonychomyrma 'nitidiceps 6 65 Tapinoma minutwn + Total 19 69

Formicinae Camponotus 'claripes 3 2

Camponotus sp. 1 Camponotus 'nigroaeneus + + Notorious ectatommoides 3 Notorious hickmani 4 Paratrechina 'minutula ' 22 Paratrechina sp. 2

1 Plagiolepis sp. 1 Polyrachis patiens 3

Prolasius sp. nr. bruneus 1

Prolasius sp. 1 Pseudonotoncus sp. 11

Stigmacros ( Hagiostigmacrosjsp. n 1 Total 18 37

Total number of individuals recorded 219 210 Total number of taxa in pitfall traps 14 24

Table 3. Total beetles (Coleoptera) in pitfall traps. + This family was only collected by hand and did not appear in the pitfall traps. Family Unburnt Heath Burnt Heath

Buprcstidae (Jewel Beetles) +

Carabidae (Ground Beetles) I Curculionidae (Weevils) 2 2 Chrysomelidae (Leaf Beetles) + Elateridae (Click Beetles) 1 Pselaphidae 2

Ptinidae (Spider Beetles) 1 Staphylinidae (Rove Beetles) 42 7 Tenebrionidae (Darkling Beetles) 1 Trogidae 4

Undetermined I

Total number of individuals Total number of families in pitfall traps

Vol. 116(5) 1999 165 Research Reports

Table 4. Total spiders (Araneae) in pitfall traps, + This family was only collected by hand and did not appear in the pitfall traps. Imm - immature; damed = damaged. Family Unburnt Heath Burnt Heath Male Female Male Female

Amaurobiidac 1

Clubionidae {2 imm) 1 3 O Dictynidae 1

Gnaphosidae 2 1 (1 imm) Hadrotarsinae +

Lycosidae 19 6 4 1 Miturgidae (1 imm) 1 D Salticidae + +

Theridiidae 1

Thomisidae 1

Undetermined 1 3(2 darned)

Total number of individuals 3(1 13 Total number from each site 38 Total number of families 6 lies were identified in the unburnt site 5. Total compared with three in the burnt site. Rove Table numbers of ants, beetles and spiders collected by hand. Beetles (Staphylinidae) were the most abundant family at both sites, and apart Ants Beetles Spiders Hymenoplera Coleoptera Araneae from Tenebrionidae, the families found in the burnt heath were also found in the Unburnt unburnt site. Heath 86 5 4 Burnt Spiders (Araneae) Heath 56 3 2 Male spiders (83% of the total) far outnumbered females. This is not unexpected over 90% were ants. since it is the habit of male spiders to wan- Table 6 shows the breakdown of the ants der around in search of mates. into subfamilies and species. Numerically, Active, hunting spiders from the families 60.5% were caught at the unburnt site. In Clubionidae. Gnaphosidae. Lycosidae the unburnt heath the most abundant fami- (Wolf Spiders) and Miturgidae were the ly was the Dolichoderinae (55% of total) most abundant of the spider fauna captured with Anunychomyrma 'nitidiceps* being in pitflall traps - 92% of the total in the the most abundant species (36 individuals). unburnt heath and 69% of the total in the The latter was also abundant at the burnt burnt heath. site (17), but Meranopius sp. from the sub- One individual was trapped from each of family Myrmicinae (13) and Camponotus the following families - Amaurobiidae 'nigroat'fU'ns ' from the sub-family (unburnt site) and Dictynidae (burnt site). Formicinae (12) were a fairly close second These spiders build lacy webs, similar to The numbers o\' beetles and spiders col- those built by the commonly seen Black lected by hand were small and no further House Spider. analysis was done. The single Theridiidae found in the Discussion unburnt site elongs to the same family as It was unfortunate that no pre- fire data the Redback Spider and builds a gum-foot- are available on the fauna present at the ed snare. sites, and this study started five months One Flower Spider (Thomisidae) was after the 1998 burn. Another factor that found in the burnt site. must be taken into account is the differ- Hand Collecting ence in vegetation between the two sites The results of hand collecting are shown prior to the 1998 burn which may have in Tables 5 and 6. contributed to the differences in fauna

Table 5 shows the total number o\' indi- found in this survey. Additionally, the viduals collected in each order. Again, burnt heath site had a long. 40 year period

166 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

Tabic (». \ nis ( 1 1\ menoptera) collected lu hand. Family Species Inhitrnt lleulh Burnt lleulh

Mvimeciiniie Wyrmecw fotflcata

Mvrnn-, hi ttigrist lipu I o

' Mi nnecia 'pilosuh o

rotal l 4

Myrmiciiiac Aphuenogaster longii epi (

l Metanoplus sp, 9 I \!i>i!,'!n< •nitm kiitani' ** Total id W

PontTlnae Rhytidoponera tasmaniensis 20 ' Rhytidoponera victoriae Total 20 7

Dolichoderlnae Iridomyrmtu 'bicknelti' 5 l * () AtwiiYi h<>m\iiiiii 'itineruns' ' \n<

I ormuiiuu- I temponotus 'nigrtweneus Total 2 12

Total number of individuals So 56 H Total number of species __ ^

without burning and this may be a further pers comw, November 1998), hence the numbers factor in the fauna] differences found, Also difference in Rhytidoponera /°' " I I ol the Mies ! the cool damp weather experienced during between the two | and the trapping period may well have inhibii total) However, a numbei ol generalised CL total ant foraging activity and influ- Myrmicines such .is Crematogastet Pheidole enced the number recorded. However.the Meranopius, Monomorium and are seed hat results obtained from the survey show guf species (2591 oi total) which have flexj ih ieni variation in the species composition vesters/ honeydew feeders and can both of the ant fauna at each site to enable com ble foraging times. I.e. forage appeaj able to parison with future work- during the day and night, at this site. For the unburni heath ant fauna, the out coexist with Anonychomyrma Paratrechina standing feature was the abundance ol the The nocturnal, hiiei foraging

1 l'< not be a competiioi opportunistic, omnivorous Rhytidoponera mimtula * > would aspect is the virtual absence species in contrast to the low numbers ol An interesting al both sites compared highly active, aggressive Anonychomyrma ol Aphaenogaste) the numbers found in heath ueai Tidal ipecies, In part this may be due to the cool with K<0. M possible weather since Anonychomyrma sp. arc River by Andersen is clay content ol the soil may be more active in sunny areas (Amleiscii that the high as this species is more abun 1991), but a paucity ol Anonyt homyrma an influence ( ( > soils (Andeisen l >l The also occurs with less insolation (solar radi datil in sandy ) greater amount ol insolation received on ation) at ground level, for example in burnt heath dense heath vegetation (Andersen 1986). the bare ground surface ol the may have induced greater ant activity. In the burnt heath site, a number of fac rhe beetle fauna was relatively similar at tors may have affected the results: open sites, The greatei numbers recorded in ground as in the bare, burnt heath site both heath might be associated with favours pitfall trapping and thus, the the unburn! and availability ol food The abun results might be an artefact ol the method shelter dance of the predacious \u>\c Beetles is r ed as well as site differences; open habi to point ol interest, sum- these beetles tend tats favour the ant species Anonychomyrma where then aggressive ptclei wetter aieas because theil short ely ( \3<% of the total), covers) and slemlci form dor, behaviour and numbers suppress the subor I. a (wing not allow them to resist dry conditions dinate Rhytidoponera species (Andersen

lft7 Vol. 116(5)1999 Research Reports

(Moore 1980). The cool, damp weather made suggestions which improved an early experienced during the (rapping would draft. have suited them, References - Given the limitations of this study the Andersen, A.N. (1986). 'Diversify, seasonality and fire history of both sites, vegetation differ- community organization of ants a( adjacent heath and wood land silos in south-eastern Australia'. ences before the 1998 burn, no pre lire Australian Journal ofB&ology, 34. 53-64-, data - the results still provide starl- a useful Andersen, A.N. ( 1990). 'The use of an! communities to ing point lor documenting changes in the evaluate change in Australian terrestrial ecosystems: a review and a reeipe'. Proceedings Fauna! composition as the burnt heath ofthe Ecological Society ofAustralia, 16. 347-357, regenerates. Andersen, A.N. (1991), 'The Anls ol Southern Australia A Guide to the Bassian fauna'. (C'SIKO: Acknowledgements Australia.) The Field work was conducted under Parks Davics, v.i, (I9N6). 'Australian spiders Collection, 1 Victoria Permit 10000179 and, made possible Preservation and Identification . (Queensland Museum Hookk-i 14: Queensland.) with help from Parks Victoria Rangers, mem- < Ireensladc, I'.J.M. ( I979), -a Guide to Ants of South bers dt die invertebrate survey leam from the Australia'. ( South Australian Museum: Adelaide.) l-NC'V and other field naturalists. Special men- Moore, B.R < I9X0), 'A Guide to the Beetles of South tion should be made of the contribution made hy Eastern Ausiralia". (Australian Knlomolojdeal Press: Erich and Klsbclh Sacco lor help in setting up New South Wales,) the trapping lines, and to members ol die survey New, T.R.. liritlon, D.R., Hinkk-y, S.O. and Mdler.

L..I. ( I99f». leam lor identification work. Alan Andersen 'The am fauna of Mt. Piper and its relfi vanee to environmental assessment and Mil- cohmty.i (CSIRO) also made valuable comments on the tion of a threatened invertebrate community'. Flora differences in behaviour of die ani fauna. Jim and Fauna Teehnieal Report L43- (Department of Whelan (Ranger in-Uinrge) provided valuable Natural Resources and Environment: Melbourne.) information on lire histories. Alan Yen (MOV)

Corroboree Frog Pseudophryne corroboree

My kite husband and I were at Mt

Kosciusko in the similiter of I 968. Naturally, we enquired where we eould find (he frog and were directed to a suil- able location. Mere in the very wel sphagnum beds we found frogs galore, along wilh their eggs. The eggs were larger than Ihose oi' lowland frogs, ('very puddle was full o\' tadpoles. The frogs were curious things; (hey didn't hop but crawled persistently out of focus, proving difficult to photograph as they were constantly crawling away. J. Barker and (i. Grigg ( 1 *>77), in 'A Field Guide to Australian FrOgs\ have this lo say: 'Found in sphagnum bogs above 1500 m. Ten or twelve large eggs. Short breeding season, December to February, Corroboree Frog Pseudophryne corroboree 1 wilh eggs. Photo by D.W. Lyndon. Tadpoles similar to other Pseudophryne.

I wonder how the dry years are affecting them. Certainly 'ordinary' frogs seem to Ellen Lyndon have gotten scarcer / Steele Street, l-eonpuha. Victoria 3*J53

I6S The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae (Rodentia: Muridae): Further Findings at Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory National Park

Bruce W. Atkin 1 and Bruce R. Quin-

Abstract Trapping for the New Holland Mouse Pseudomys novaehollandiae was carried out on the Yanakie area Isthmus of Wilsons Promontory National Park, southern Victoria, in May 1996 as part of a program aimed at determining appropriate habitat management tor this species. During previous surveys in the vicinity, the New Holland Mouse had been captured only on vegetated dunes. However, on this occasion a number were trapped in open swales. This finding'may increase our understanding of the habitat requirements of the New Holland Mouse. The shrub fayer in the swales, dominated by Coast Tea-tree Leptospetmum taevigatttm, had been slashed within the previous three vears; it is possible that the regrovuh had reached a stage ot succession where it was providing sufficient cover for New Holland Mice, perhaps coupled with an increased abundance of food. This paper describes the results ot the trapping program and provides recommendations for future management of the New Holland Mouse and its habitat at Yanakie Isthmus. Wilsons Promontory National Park. (The Victorian Vaturtttist 116(5). 1999. 169-172.)

Introduction Study Area, Materials and Methods The New Holland Mouse was first The study site was immediately west of recorded on the Yanakie Isthmus area of the main access road to Tidal River, about Wilsons Promontory National Park during three kilometres south of the entrance to 1993. It was found on dunes vegetated the Park and 10 km north of Darby River with mature Banksia and Allocasuarina (Fig. 1). woodland, with an understorey dominated The dunes in the area are generally three by sedges and low shrubs (Quin 1996; to five metres in height and vegetated as

Quin and Williamson 1996). It had previ- described in the introduction, The vegeta- ously been recorded on the Promontory tion in the swales, which are generally up near Darby Swamp and Five-Mile Road to 50 m wide, has been described as rough

(Fig. 1 ) in the early to mid-1970s (Seebeck grassland (Chesterfield et al. 1995). etui 1996). Grazing pressure from Eastern Grey In an attempt to determine appropriate Kangaroos MacropuS giganteus, Common management of dune and swule vegetation Wombats Vombatus ursinus and European for the New Holland Mouse, a trial exclu- Rabbits Oryctola^us cuniatlus is heavy sion plot of 25 m x 25 m was proposed, to and bare ground is common, ranging from prevent grazing by herbivores (Chesterfield <5% to 40$ (B.W. Atkin. pers. ok). The el al, 1995). The purpose of the plot was to vegetation is dominated by a few apparent- assist managers in determining whether or ly unpalatable species, particularly Black- not the elimination of grazing would lead to anther Flax-lily Dianella revoluta. Silky restoration of a Kangaroo Grass ThemeJu Guinea-llower Hihhenia sericea and Coast triandra native grassland/ open woodland, Tea-tree Leptospermum laevigatitm. thus conserving habitat of the New Holland The swales in the study area were slashed Mouse (Quin and Williamson 1996). initially in March 1992 and again in The aim of this study was to determine December 1993. to control the spread o\' the presence and distribution of the New Coast Tea-tree (P. McDiarmid, Ranger. Holland Mouse in the vicinity of the pro- Parks Victoria. Yanakie pers. comnr). posed exclusion plot. Future trapping Coast Tea-tree invasion of dune vegetation would then reveal whether the New is believed to threaten populations of the Holland Mouse utilised the restored grass- New Holland Mouse because the resulting land as habitat. Tea-tree thicket out-competes the vegeta-

tion community it occupies. The New Department of Natuial Resources and Environment. Holland Mouse has not been located in Road. Yarrarn. Victoria 3971. icrcial well established Tea-tree monocultures Department of Natural Resources and Environment. P.O. Bo* 264, Wood Vallock, Victoria 3139. (Quin and Williamson 1996). Al the lime

Vol. 116(5)1999 169 .

Research Reports

1 Vv^ Table I. Total captures of small ground mam-

1 1 o.'.ii'j fT~^^^"WwrV mals during Elliot! trapping al Yanakie Isthmus, Wilsons Promontory National Park, May 19%. Date House Swales Dunes Rat Mouse

Y(1 WuititnhSay r-f \. /A 7 May 4 10 3 X Mas 7 t5 2 2 / ^^ Yanakie Isthmus

9 May 3 10 3 1 Total 14 35 8 3 Grasslands Track V— •3^^ Trapping Site \

Five-mile Road \ base of dunes, and four lines (25 traps) \ C MTlfjNAI / Darby Sw.nmp Were positioned in open vegetation in the swales. Traps were spaced at 10 m intervals and baited with a mixture of peanut butter.

"" honey and rolled oats. Traps were checked l < r early each morning and then closed to pre- *B \J vent capture of diurnal animals. They were re-opened in the late afternoon, and rebait- - N IM , ed where necessary. i Kilumelrts SO 5 10 15 20 Trapping was carried out on three consecutive nights, realising a total of 264 Fig. I. Yanakie Isthmus. Wilsons Promontory trap-nights. The survey initially aimed to National Park. determine presence or absence of the New Holland in of the study, the Tea-trees and Flax-lillies Mouse the study area. However, in captured had grown to around 0.3 in in height. view of the number The area had not been burnt for 20-30 on the first night, it was considered important to take morphological measurements years and previous surveys in the vicinity had located the New Holland Mouse only thereafter. Weights of New Holland Mice were recorded on the second of in the dunes (Quin 1996). Since 1992. bait- morning ing with the poison 1080 has been earned Capture; weight, gender, tail, and pes (foot) out annually in the swales for the control length were recorded on the third of Red Foxes Vulpes vulpes and rabbits. morning. A Pesola spring balance was for Baiting for rabbits has been excluded from used measurement o\' weight, vernier calipers for pes sites where the New Holland Mouse was measurement and a ruler known to occur. The baiting aims to for measurement of tail length. After reduce rabbit numbers and therefore assist examination, each individual animal was in restoration of the Kangaroo Grass released at the location where it was cap- Themeda triandm native grassland-open tured. woodland which formerly occurred over Results parts of the Yanakie Isthmus (Quin and Three species of rodent were recorded Williamson 1996). during this survey: New Holland Mouse. The weather throughout the survey peri- Bush Rat Ruitus fuscipes and House od. May 7-9 1996. was generally cloudy Mouse Mus nmscitlus. Total captures for and cool, with showers on the first two each species are shown in Table 1 nights. The third and final night was clear The overall success rate was 22.7%. The and cold. mean success rate for the New Holland A total of 88 Elliott folding box traps Mouse was 19.3%. On 8 May the success (Elliott Scientific. Upwey. Vic.) measuring rate \ov the New Holland Mouse was high- }} x 10x9 cm was used. The survey con- est, at 25%. centrated on several dunes where New Over the three nights. 14 (28.6%) New Holland Mice had been trapped earlier in Holland Mice were captured in swale veg- 1996 (D, Carmen, pers. cotnm.) and adjoin- etation. On the first night, four New ing swales, and included the site chosen for Holland Mice (28.6%) were trapped in the the proposed exclusion plot. Five lines of swales; on the second night, seven (3 1 .8% ) traps (63 traps) were positioned on or at the and on the third night, three (23.1%). No

170 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

Table 2. Morpnotoj asurements for New Holli md M ice captured ai Yanak ie Isthmus, Wil sons

HlL'l I missing. Promontory Natioiud Park, May 1996. one individu il not tided as p ar of tail Measurement Male Female mean s.d. range n mean S.(l. ranye n

MassCgD 19.2 132 18-21 7 16.9 1 .56 155-19.5 5

Tail length (mm) 94.6 8,22 80-105 7 9 1 .5 5.07 85-56 Pes length (mm) 16.7 0.25 16.5-17.2 7 16.4 0.47 15.7-16.8 s

House Mice or Bush Rats were captured in Isthmus was highest in May (see Kemper the swales; all were on or immediately at 1988) and competition had forced some the foot of dunes. mice into the swales. One New Holland Mouse shed the last 35 The on-going baiting for rabbits and mm of the skin ol Us tail while being han- foxes, although peripheral to the New dled. This technique is used by some Holland Mouse population, may well be rodents to avoid capture (P. Myroniuk, having a beneficial effect, leading to a pers. comm.). Another had recently losi higher population. Smith and Quin (1996) approximately one third o\' its tail (i.e. not have demonstrated that some Australian only the outer skin). rodents have undergone decline where feral Following their release, most New Holland predator abundance has been elevated by Mice paused for three or four seconds before high levels oi introduced prey species such bounding away rapidly toward cover. One as rabbits. Thus, more than one factor may individual covered a distance of about 20 ra be responsible for the apparent increase in population. in an estimated five-six seconds. size o! the New Holland Mouse One of the 13 New Holland Mice trapped Previous studies have demonstrated the Mouse lor on the night of 9 May escaped before mea- preference of the New Holland surements or gender were recorded. Of the an actively regenerating (post-lire or post- Wilson remaining 12. seven were males and five clearmg). heathy understorey (e.g. were females. Range, mean and standard 1994; Brailhwaite and Gulleu I97S). The study site dentation for all measurements are record- Vegetation in the swales at this early stage of succession followed in Table 2. was at an ing slashing. It is probable that in time, as Discussion Coast lea-tree regrowth comes to domi- Holland Mice The capture rale o( New nate the site, thereby excluding other plant this survey was higher (193$ ) obtained in species, the area will become unsuitable as than that recorded by Quin (1996), whose habitat for the New Holland Mouse as and work in the same area in February appears to have been the case at other sites April 1993 yielded 25 New Holland Mice on Wilsons Promontory (Quin and from 157 trap nights (15.9'r ). Williamson 1996). have The vegetation in the swales may The establishment i)i grazing exclusion provide been too low and sparse in 1993 to plots alluded to in the introduction, was sufficient cover for the New Holland measure i mended to be a management Mouse Vegetative cover had increased which might enable the New Holland since that lime (B.R. Quin pen. obs.); this Mouse to venture out of the dune vegeta- graz- could be attributed to a reduction in tion as the Themeda grassland/woodland in rabbil ing pressure due to the extensive the swales established sufficient cover. As bailing program. As a result, by 1996 the New Holland Mice were found in the provided patchy Coast lea-tree may have swales during this survey, and some cap Holland sufficient cover to enable the New lures occurred on the actual exclusion plot swales. Mouse to venture into the site, the proposal requires modification. Alternatively, food abundance may have (The planned grazing exclusion plot was increased in association with the increase established shortly alter this survey look in cover. However. Carmen (pent* comm) place.) recorded breeding in May, so an alterna Future management for the New Holland live explanation may be that the New Mouse should include systematic monitor- Yanakie Holland Mouse population at ing of Iheir numbers, and monitoring of

171 Vol. 116(5) 1999 Contributions vegetation under three different manage- References R.W. and Gullcn. P.K. (1978). Habitat ment regimes within and outside a much Braiihwaite, selection by small mammais in a Victorian heathland. larger exclusion zone: Australian Journal &J Ecology 3. 109- 1 27. • an area of swale which is slashed every Chesterfield, E., Trumbull-Ward. A.. Hopmans, P. and

Whelan. J. < 1995). 'Early Changes in Vegetation 3-5 years to keep it at a stage of succes- from a Grazing Trial on Yanakie Isthmus. WiKons sion which is currently believed to be Promontory National Park'. (Plora and Fauna suitable for New Holland Mice; Technical Report. Department of Conservation and Natural Resources.) • an area Of swale in which the Coast Tea- Kemper. C. ( 19X8). New Holland Mouse. In 'Complete tree is left to regenerate, to determine Book o!" Australian Mammals", pp. 408-409. Ed. the post-slashing regeneration age at Ronald Strahan. (Reed Books: Chats wood.) Quin. B.R. (1996). New Holland Mouse Pseudoinys present; which the mice are no longer iwvaeholiundiae (Rodentia: Muridae) in South • an adjacent area of dune vegetation. Gippsland. Southern Victoria Part One - Distribution 236-246. This should provide useful information on and Status. The Victorian Naturalist 113, Quin. B.R. and Williamson. R.C. (1996). New Holland of grazing by large herbivores on the effect Mouse Pseudoinys jiovae It oil and'tae (Rodenlia: swale and dune vegetation composition Muridae) in South Gippsland. Southern Victoria Part and on New Holland Mouse population Two - Conservation and Management The Victorian Naturalist 113,281-288. growth and distribution. Seebeek, J., Mcnkhorst, P., Wilson. B. and Lowe, K. [1996), New Holland Mouse Pseudomxs novaehol- Acknowledgements iandiae Action Statement No. 74. Flora and Fauna We would like to thank the following people Branch. Department of Natural Resources and East Melbourne. who assisted with this project: Susan Taylor and Environment. Smith. A. P. and Quin. D.G. (1996). Patterns and causes Ross Williamson for supervision; Linda Rippon, of extinction and decline in Australian conilurine Susan Taylor and Sonya FcodororT for assis- rodents. Biological Conservation 77. 243-267. tance with field work; Paul McDiarmid for Wilson, B. (1994). The Distribution of the New

information: and Gordon Friend. Darren Quin. Holland Mouse Pseudoinys novae ho I fa'inline John Seebeek, Susan Taylor, Ross Williamson (Walerhouse 1843) in the Eastern Otways, Victoria. and Wendy Williamson for constructive criti- The Victorian Naturalist 111. 46-53. cism of drafts of this report.

Observations of Platypus Ornithorhynchus anatinus Mating Behaviour

Mark De-La-Warr' and Melody Serena-

Abstract Only three instances of apparent Platypus mating behaviour have previously been described in the wild, with three additional examples of mating described in captivity. We report here on a presumed mating sequence observed in the wild at Lake Elizabeth in the Otway Ranges, Victoria. (The Victorian Naturalist 116(5). 1999. 172-174.)

Introduction

Remarkably little is known about the appear somewhat earlier in Queensland and reproductive behaviour of the Platypus northern New South Wales than in Victoria Ornithorhynchus anaiinus. Given that eggs (Griffiths 1978). To the best of our knowl- have been recorded in underground nests edge, the breeding behaviour of wild from late August to October and that gesta- Platypus has previously been described by tion and incubation are respectively only two authors, with three additional believed to last about one month and ten accounts of mating recorded in captivity.

days. Platypus presumably may breed as Veneaux ( 18487 quoted in Burrell 1927) early as July, with some evidence that eggs witnessed two Platypus mating in the middle of a reed bed after the male had chased

1 Olwiltl Adventures, P_0. Box 36. Birregurra, Victoria the female 'for nearly an hour". The male 3242 gripped the female's neck with his bill and ' Australian Platypus Conservancy. P.O_ Box 84, Whiltlesea. Victoria 3757. her hindquarters with his back legs. The

172 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

female struggled violently and vocalised (which was curled forward) while moving increasingly loudly ('plaintive cries rather his body forward so his head lay over her like the squeaks ol' a young porker') until shoulder. The animals were supported by a the pair separated after five or six minutes. log lying approximately 10 cm below the Afterwards, the two animals played water's surface, although in 1991 the together for more than an hour'. female swam the length of the tank on sev- Burrell (1927) (who doubled the accura- eral occasions while the male was mounted.

cy of Verreaux's observations i reported The pair remained coupled for 17 minutes two separate incidents along the Namoi and 28 minutes, respectively. River in August 1909 and September 1921. We describe below a fourth example of In the first incident, one animal floated presumed Platypus mating behaviour in the 'perfectly still" with its body and tail sub- wild, observed on 2H September 1998 at merged below the surface, while the sec- Lake Elizabeth, Victoria. ond approached slowly and then mounted Description of the Waterway the first *in a leisurely fashion'. The sec- Lake Elizabeth is located S km southeast o\' ond animal then 'threw himself back into a the township of Forrest in the Olway Ranges posture' at silting which point 'there was a n <143"40'55"E. 3S M)'45"S). The lake was great splash, and both animals disap- formed in 1952. when a natural landslide peared*. These events were direct!) pre- dammed the Hast Barwon River, creating a ceded by the animals swimming in a tight waterbody which is about S00 m long x 200 circle at the surface for about one minute. m wide at its widest point and typically 4.5- In the second incident, two Platypus were 6 m deep. The habitat surrounding the lake initially observed "floundering, or wallow- consists of wet sclerophyll forest and sub- ing' at the surface, facing in opposite temperate rainforest dominated by Manna directions and upside down so the tail of Gum Ettcalxptus viminalis and Southern each animal was laid Hat along the other's Blue Gum E. globulus. Since 1994, one of abdomen. At short intervals, the animals us (MDLW) has regularly conveyed small rotated around their long axis (whence the numbers of people around Lake Elizabeth lloundering) so each could brealhe in turn by canoe, in order to observe the behaviour at the surface, with these manoeuvres of a number of species living in and around undertaken 'in a calm, slow, deliberate the lake, including Platypus. Up to seven manner, and almost noiselessly". Alter three Platypus are seen over a period of two hours minutes, the pair separated underwater and around dawn. The animals continue to feed then rose together to the surface before div- and otherwise appear to be undisturbed by ing and disappearing from view. the presence of the boat as long as its occu- In captivity. Fleay ( 1980) observed a pair pants remain quiet and reasonably still mating on 1 October 1943. The interaction when Platypus are at the surface. began with the animals swimming in pro- The observations reported below were cessional circles in the tank, the male made on a sunny day following a windy, grasping the end of the female's tail in his rainy night. After a long spell of dry bilk While still holding the female's tail. weather, nearly 70 mm of rain had fallen in the male doubled his body under her to the previous three days, causing the lake achieve intromission. The pair subsequent- level to rise. ly adopted the posture observed by Burrell

along the Namoi River in 1921. facing in Description ol' Mating Behaviour opposite directions and upside down rela- Two Platypus were observed at approxi- tive to each other so they had to breathe mately 0700 hours resting in 12 cm of water alternately. The pair separated after ten on a partly submerged hollow log (60 cm in minutes. diameter, with the hollow portion extending At Taronga Zoo in Sydney, mating at least 2 m back from the entrance) located sequences were recorded on 10 October perpendicular to the bank along the shady 1990 and H October 1991 (Hawkins and northeast margin of the lake. One animal Fanning 1992). In both cases, the male was lying on top of the other, with its bill mounted the female by grasping her tail moving slowly back and forth along the between one hind foot and his own tail

Vol. 116(5)1999 173 Contributions

other's back. The animals then began ported by a structure in a few centimetres rolling over in tandem in a hailing manner. of water or while floating in deeper water. Their bodies were pressed together closely, (2) In shallow water, a pair will mate with with their underpays mostly hidden by a the male mounted on lop of the female. In tangle of legs as Ihey rotated slowly. Both deeper water, the animals may end up fac- animals had their eyes shut and otherwise ing in opposite directions and positioned appeared oblivious to the presence of the upside down relative to each other. observer's canoe, 8-10 m away. (3) A pair of Platypus may remain coupled After completing about four full rotations for a few minutes to as long as about half over a period of two to three minutes, the an hour. two Platypus separated and swam in a (4) Mating may be immediately preceded leisurely manner for a distance of about by the pair swimming in tight processional one metre to the exposed opening at the circles on the surface. In captivity, such end of the log. After both animals entered circling behaviour has sometimes been the hollow, one turned around and used its recorded on a number of days in the breed- bill to re-arrange some reeds growing ing season (Strahan and Thomas 1975; around the entrance. The animal continued Fleay 1980). possibly due to the animals to manipulate the vegetation in a diligent being forced to share a relatively small manner for 30 to 40 seconds, until the space throughout this period. opening into the hollow had been hidden Acknowledgements from the observer's view. While it is We thank P. and C. Brown and T.. V. and A. known from radio-tracking studies that Rowc for helping to confirm the details of the Platypus burrow entrances are often con- observations reported here. cealed from view by undercut banks, overhanging vegetation, etc. (e.g. Serena el al. References Burrell, H. (1927). The Platypus', (reprinted in 1074 1998), this is the first time that a Platypus by Righy Lid: Adelaide). has apparently been seen actively disguis- Flcay. D. (1980). Paradoxical Platypus*. (Jaearanda Pass; ing the entrance to a resting site. The log's Brisbane).

Griffiths. M. < 1978). 'The Biology of the Monotremes'. location orientation and suggested that it (Academic Press: New York). may have led directly to a burrow in the Hawkins. M. and Panning. D, (1992). Courtship and bank. Alternatively, Platypus are occasion- mating behaviour of captive Platypuses al Taronga Zoo. In Platypus and Echidnas', pp. 106-1 14. Rd. ally known to shelter during the day in M.L. Augee, (Royal Zoological Society of New sizeable hollow logs at the edge of the South Wales: Sydney).

Serena, M .. Thomas, J.L.. Williams. G.A. and Officer, water (Burrell 1927; M Serena pers. obs.). R.C.H. (1998). Use of stream and river habitats by the Platypus. Ornitliorhymhns uruitinus. in an urban Discussion fringe environment. Australian Journal of Zoology Considered collectively, the accounts of 46, 267-282. R. and Thomas, Platypus breeding behaviour summarised Strahan, D.R. ( 1975}, Courtship of the Platypus. Ornilhorhxnchus anatinus, Australian above suggest that the following generali- Zoologist 18(3). 165-178. sations apply to this species: (I) Platypus may mate either while sup-

Special Issues

Next year (2000) we will publish two special issues of The Victorian Naturalist. One of the issues will celebrate the lite and scientific work of Sir Frederick McCoy (1823-1899) on his centenary. Frederick McCoy was the first President of Naturalists the Field Club of Victoria and held this office for three years, from 1 880- 1883.

The second special issue will concenlrale on The Murray River, its billabongs and creeks. If you wish to contribute articles, research reports or notes to either of these issues. please contact the editor (FNCV, Locked Bug 3. P.O. Blackburn. Victoria 3130).

174 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

A Diary of the Saunders Casemoth Oiketicus elongatus

Joan Broadberry 1

Abstract This paper includes field observations of the larval and pupal stages of the mule and female Saunders Casemoth Oiketicus elongatus, including method of climbing vertical surfaces, indications ofeclo- sion. timespan of pupal stage and a description of winged male and wingless female moths. (IJu Victorian Naturalist 116(5), 1999, 175-178.1

Observations of the larval stage

On Sunday 21 February 1994 I picked up restless, climbing the sheer sides of the a 15 cm long, twig-decorated case of a esky again and again. It took us another week c>\ observation to realise that the Saunders Casemoth Oiketicus elengahis l which had fallen out of a prickly Grevillea caterpillar climbs vertical surfaces by mak- in our yard. These cases are quintessential^ ing a silken ladder, with steps about 7 mm Australian. Most of us learn as children to apart. The animal builds each step by mov- recognise them, but beyond the mere act of ing its head from side to side and laying the silk secreted recognition there is total ignorance. I con- down many strands of sulted Coupar (1992). and found that case- from its mouthparts. This becomes a rung moths are the larval ov caterpillar stage of a of its ladder. The caterpillar, using its first moth, and as they are interesting to keep pair of legs, then pulls itself and its stick until its projects beyond the and observe. I installed the animal in an old case up, head esky and provided several food plants rung. It stretches its head a further few mil- Grevillea, Acacia and Eucalyptus, not being limetres and lays down another step. The process is repeated over and over sure of what it ate. I keep a regular nature whole shows diary, and the following account is from the again. The silken ladder left behind clearly where the casemoth has climbed. field notes I made over the next year.

That evening I was home alone when I heard a faint noise. ITI never forget the delight of that first sight o\' the head and thorax of a handsome orange and black caterpillar. Initially we only caught ^^\ peeped ^ glimpses of the caterpillar if we quietly into the container. But the creature gradually became used to us and began to move around freely, somehow crawling up the vertical sides of the esky and attaching near the top. It always quickly closed its case for privacy when disturbed, but over time, this action became slower. After a day or two we established the food plant as Grevillea zlabrata by seeing best the caterpillar eat it. By the way. the sign of casemoth life* and activity are the faecal pellets ffrass) lying on the bottom oi of the its container. I look many photos orange head and black body segments. blotched with bright orange. Up to seven body segments came out of the case, the last three showing being totally black. On the Ihorax were three pairs of legs lipped

claw-like feet (Fig. 1 ). N with curved Fij>. 1. Larval stage ol casemoth showing the became very A week later the casemoth caterpillar's head, ['holograph hy Joan Broadberry, 2 Shawi Court, Templestowe, Victoria )I06.

175 Vol. 116(5)1999 Contributions

More observations. I noticed the back end metres from the phone box and forgot about of the animal came right out of the case it. However, this little creature was destined when faecal pellets were being expelled. to play a much bigger part in our lives.

While they feed, casemoths attach the top Some time later, on 23 March, I noticed a of their case to a twig with a few strands of small casemoth hanging in the same place silk. This is cut when they are ready to on the telephone box. It may have been the move on. The case can be very lightly shut same one we found earlier because it was by twirling it around a stick or pulling it attached on exactly the same spot. It seems inwards like an old-fashioned drawstring intriguing that it would 'home' to the identi- purse. Saunders Casemoths readily climb cal place. Observing closely. I noticed it around in foliage using their strong, hooked seemed shrunken inside. Looking carefully feet to grip onto twigs, the body inside the I realised there was an orange and black case always being pulled behind. caterpillar head and thorax, detached and

I started reading Common (1990). The dangling below the case (Fig. 2). Reasoning Saunders Cascmoth belongs to a world- that this might be a sign of pupation before wide family of the Psychidae, commonly the emergence of an adult, I took the case called case or bag moths. The family home and hung it inside a glass jar resting includes about 600 species with an esti- on a cool, south facing windowsill over the mated 145 found in Australia. Oikcticus sink, where I would notice it every day. We elongotus occurs in Southern Queensland, just dared to hope for an adult moth, but

New South Wales and Victoria in all sea- realised it would require patience. sons of the year. Each individual animal Sunday 12 October 1994. What excite- seems to have a preferred food plant, but ment! My daughter had the honour of find- the species is polyphagous and has been ing a perfect adult male casemoth inside recorded on Eucalyptus, Lepiospermum, the jar (see photo on front cover). Our

Melaleuca, and introduced plants including patience had paid off. It was a truly beauti- Citrus and Cotoiwaster, Grevillea subsp., ful moth and so seldom seen, although the plant our casemoth feeds on, is not mentioned as a food plant. Casemoths go through many instars over a period of years, during which they seal up their cases, become inactive and shed their skin. This is known as ecdysis. The number of instars of the Saunders Casemoth is not stated. A study of a similar West Indian species. Oiketicus kirbyi, estimated 12 to 20 instars. On 10 March

1994 I observed that our casemoth appeared to be going through ecdysis. It had been hanging from the side of the esky for several days, not moving and producing no frass. An alternative explanation may be that the caterpillar was going through a period of diapause, a time of decreased metabolism. On 25 March the casemoth commenced feeding again and on 21 May we released the captive animal outside to live freely on its foodplant.

Observations of the male pupal stage

On 1 1 March my daughter found a second, smaller casemoth attached low down on a nearby telephone box and brought it home. After a couple of days, as it wasn't Fig. 2. Detached caterpillar head and thorax eating, I put it back in the tanbark about live dangling below the twig case. Photograph by Joan Broadberry.

176 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Fii*. 3* Pupal case, after male adult casemoth Fig. 4. Female adult Saunders Casemoth. show- has emerged. Photograph h\ Joan Broad berry. ing pupal case. Photograph by Joan Broadheny.

this only they must be common. It had a wingspan Was it too heavy or was the way pf 45 mm; a black lurry body 26 mm in down? How do casemoths go backwards? length; a long, pointed, orange and black This behaviour was observed o\'i' and on striped abdomen; a large hairy orange until 5 February when it finally climbed up made a patch on its back; and black antennae. The to the middle of a low window and gel bold orange and black colour scheme very strong attachment. I was able to echoed that of the caterpillar. The excellent views from inside the glass, of (brewings were an elongated oval shape, the movement of the head in making the the transparent, with a bee-like texture. The ladder, and the awkward heaving of hindwings were similar but much smaller. heavy body up each silken step. That final effort. More o\ The two pairs of wings rested in a horizon- journey look tremendous body segments than I had tal position. the caterpillar out of the case. The twig case had a dark, shiny cylindri- ever seen previously came there it stayed, tightly closed. cal pupal case, open at the bottom, protrud- Once secure,

I aware of a Saturday I I March. became ing from it [Fig. 3). Now. years later. 1 yellow head sometimes observe such cases, a sure sign faint movement and a shiny back end of the case. the moth has flown. Regrettably, after just peeping, out of the The animal seemed being photographed the adult gave its life What was happening? the wrong way around as the female is fer- for science, ending as a pinned specimen. I would not Mission accomplished. But there was to be tilised inside the case and expect the head to be at the rear opening. I a further chapter. was consumed with curiosity but the only Observations of the female pupal stage way to look inside would have been to The large casemoth had been outside, destroy the twig home. Again patience was

lost in the prickly embrace of the required. Looking back now, I know this (Jre\ dlea. During the colder winter months meant the caterpillar had turned into a we made no observations at all. but we mature, adult wingless female moth (Fig. spotted it again at the end of October mov- 4). The pupal stage lasted only about five ing around the shrub. weeks, in comparison with the male's

(hat the I On 14 January 1995 I recorded pupation, which took at least five months. twig home measured 16 crn from tip to tip. re-read Common (1990) more carefully. In This is considerably larger than the 12 cm the sub-family Psychidae, both male and maximum recorded in Common (1990). female newly emerged adults turn inside From my photographs of the distinctive the case, meaning the female genital organs case, there is no doubt it was the original are facing away from the rear opening. The very animal. That day the caterpillar was male is able to greatly extend its abdomen house restless. It climbed part way up the to contact them. This is the origin of the wall and attached near the front door. Next species name ' elongatus*. tracked it by da} we lost the animal, but On 21 March I noticed that the rear end means of the silken ladder. The caterpillar Of the case was gaping open, and glancing had climbed the whole height of the house at the ground, saw a fat, yellowish grub ground. up to the eaves. Later tt fell to the like animal lying there. Because I had ear-

177 Vol. 116(5) 1999 Contributions

Directions for the future investigation There are many more aspects of Saunders Casemolh biology lo explore: the number of instiii s and lifespan tor example. The significance of the dangling remains of the

head and thorax is not yet clear. It seems to be an indicator of eclosion in the male ani-

mal. I have observed this sign on two other occasions, collected the cases and in both instances, after some time, a male molh has emerged.

Mj». 5. Pan (»i a colon is containing I continue to learn. In a recent interesting over 70 individual PhOlOgi apt] by Joan encounter with the Saunders Casenioth we Hmadlu-iry, found a group of over 70 individuals clus- tered together on a Cypress tree in an inner

Her glimpsed its head. I realised this was suburban garden (Fig. 5). In this colony I the wingless adult molh. It was a very found iwo eases lused together. Each con-

happy occurrence, as I would never have tained a healthy caterpillar, but the two damaged the ease to see the animal. Again were forced to move about together, like

great excitement, as I photographed the Siamese twins, as their cases were joined live female Saunders Casenioth. (Fig. 6). This lanv group raises the ques- The windless moth. 6 cm long, looked tion of how gregarious (he caterpillars are? just like a bloated yellow Egyptian Studying this unique Australian animal is mummy, with a large mustard coloured a fascinating part of my life. It is seeming- head. The hody texiure was smooth, with ly so common bul also so secretive. The five indistinct segmenls covered by very caterpillar and female modi, always hidden lOOSe baggy skin. The molh was very from our eyes inside the ease, and the swollen, with its ovipositor extended from male, so elusive that few photographs or a brown furry ring around its rear opening. specimens exist. Its helpless body heaved and pulsated in a wave-like motion starling from (he head References and travelling to the back. Three pairs of Coupar, I'. and M. (Wl). 'Flying Coloure*. (NSW University Press: Sydney.) minuscule legs were just visible below the Common, ! I H. ((990), *Mothp of Australia', head, but the creature was not designed to [Melbourne University Press: Melbourne.) walk or fly. simply to spend its whole life inside the protective case.

Next day I cut ihe empty twig case open tor photographs. Inside was a velvety soft silk lining and the remains of a black, shiny, tube-like pupal case similar to the

one I had seen protruding after the male molh emerged. The animal had pupated head up. but must have turned after emerg

ing from the pupal ease. Later. I decided to replace the moth in its damaged home and leave it out overnight, just in ease eggs

were laid. The mosl exciting thing of all would be lo watch them hatch and see liny Saunders Casemolh larvae start to build their homes. Hut it was uoi lo be, and the wingless female died about 26 March. In

Common (1990), I read, 'Sometimes the spent female is said to drop from ihe case after oviposilion.' The female had probably Kij*. ft. Larval slage nt cast-moth, showing two been Fertilised ^\^\ laid the eggs of the next Iwig eases fused together. Photograph hy Joan generation, before dropping from the case. Broadhury.

178 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

New Records of the Striped Worm-lizard Aprasia striolata in South-western Victoria

1 1 1 Cam Beardsell , Nick Clemann ', John Silins and Edward McNabb

Abstract

The Striped Wonn-li/urd Aprasia striolata lias been infrequently recorded m Victoria, ami is official* ly listed as a threatened Species. This article reports two new localities tor this species in south west cm Victoria. One individual was captured in an invertebrate pilfall-trap in heath) woodland south of I'.denhope. Nine adults and five juveniles were hand-caught aftei being located beneath limestone slabs in the Glenelg River gorge south-west ol ( 'aslerlon. Numerous sloughs Of this species were also discovered beneath rocks at this site. Sympalric reptiles species noted during briel surveys al both

sites arc listed, i flu Victorian Naturalist 116 [5>. 1999 179-180.)

Introduction Habitats at the new sites The Striped Worm-lizard Aprasia striola- The Ldenhope site was at the northern ta Lutken 1X63 is a small, worm-like end of an extensive sand-plain which pygopodid (legless) lizard, adapted to bur- extends south-west to the South Australian rowing in loose sandy or loamy soils bordei To the north lie the Wimmera (Cogger 1996} (Fig. I). It has two main Plains which once supported grassy wood- distributions in semi-arid regions of south- lands, though they are now largely cleared ern Australia (Cogger 1996). One is in the tor grazing and cropland. Heathy woodland south of Western Australia, whilst the on the sand plain contained an overslorev other extends from Portland to the Big of Desert Stringy hark Eucalyptus Desert in western Victoria across South atcnacfa. The healhland underslorey con- Australia to the Eyre Peninsula. sisted of tall shrub copses of Desert Populations within this range may be Hanksia liank.sia omnia and a moderately localised and fragmented due to nalural dense stratum of low shrubs including discontinuity in habitat and land clearing. Heath Tea-tree teptaspermum myrsinoides, Aprasia striolata has been infrequently Daphne Heath Brachyloma daphnoides and

observed in Victoria and is officially lisled I Lime Heath Astroloma conostephioides. as Lower Risk - Near Threatened

arc II records and. prior to 1970. another In the Glenelg River gorge. A. .striolata cliffs, I 1 records (Atlas of Victorian Wildlife occupied limestone escarpments and database. NRP). Most records have come upper river terraces. The ovcrstorey con- from sand-hill malice communities of the sisted of an open shrubland of Drooping Little and Big Deserts. There is a scattering Sheoke Aiiocastiarina vcrt'uillata, Wedge of records from heathy woodlands in the leal' Hop-bush Dodonaea cuneata and Tree Ldenhope-Caslerton region, with an outly- Violet Hxmeuanthcra dentata, The ground ing population on limestone cliffs along, the stratum on the escarpment consisted of an southern coast around Portland. This note open tussock grassland dominated by Grey reports two new records detected in sum- Tussock-grass I'oa sirhcriana and Rough mer- autumn 1998/99, during fauna surveys Spear-grass Austrosttpa siahra. The ler for the Regional Forest Agreement Process. race supported a closed grassland oi' These were of a single animal captured in Common Tussock-grass Voa lahtHaniicn. an invertebrate pilfall-trap south of Cliffs were formed of horizontal bedded small, slabs lay on the i denhope and a population located during limestone while Hal searching of the Glenelg Rivci south- escarpment. Rock screes occurred on the west ot Castefton. terrace at the foot of the cliffs. Soil consist- of friable brown alluvium. Artimi Ryliih Institute foi Environmental Research ed Department ai Nalural Resources and Environment,

i i ,, i- 1084. i ^ ictoria, Australia | Bi si Hi id lb l<< whom corrvbpondenci should be adilrctwcd

Vol. 116(5) 1999 179 Contributions

New records of the Striped Worm-lizard adults). Garden Skink (three adults) and A single A. striolata was captured in an Southern Grass Skink Pseudemoia etitre- invertebrate pitfall-trap near Edenhope. It casteauxii (four adults). This site was pri- had a snout-vent length of 92 mm. and a vate property which retained most of its tail length of 31 mm. Other reptile species original vegetation and had not been sub- recorded at this site included Garden Skink jected to ground disturbance. These factors LampropfyoUs guichenoti. Bougainville's probably account for the persistence and Skink Lerista bougainvUlii, Eastern Three- density of the lizards in the area. lined Skink Bassiana duperreyi and Tree Acknowledgements Dragon Ampiboturus muricatus. The field work was a component of the located under Fourteen A. striolata were Regional Forestry Agreement wildlife survey of limestone slabs in the Glenelg River gorge western Victoria. The authors thank Ivor Graney during a 90-minute search by the authors of the Portland Field Naturalist Club who drew on 25 March 1999. Nine of the individuals our attention to the presence of unspecified worm-lizards in the Glenelg River gorge. Geoff were adult (one collected. Fig. 1) and five Brown and Richard Loyn, both of the Arthur were juvenile. Numerous shed skins Rylah Institute, provided helpful comments on (sloughs) were also observed beneath the the manuscript. slabs. A single animal was captured during a brief search of the same area the previous References Cogger. H.G. (1996). "Reptiles and Amphibians of day. Sympatric reptiles recorded during the Australia". Revised edition. (Reed Books: Port search of the Glenelg River gorge included Melbourne.) NRE (1999). Threatened Vertebrate Fauna of Victoria Common Brown Snake Pseitdonaja textilis - 1999'. (Department of Natural Resources and (two juveniles), Bougainville's Skink (two Environment: Melbourne.)

>^mhUm^^., i|J -15* vBiSr

Fig. 1. The Striped Worm*lizard Aprasia striolata. Photo by Nick Clemann.

180 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Early Devonian Fossils from Eglinton Road and Rail Cutting, Alexandra, Central Victoria

Clem Earp 1

Abstract A brief report is given of ail aflochthonous fossil assemblage of Pragian (Early Devonian) age from marine shale al a location near Alexandra, central Victoria, Australia. The fossils include large early land plants, of which illustrations are given of an unnamed species, possibly related to Dtrpanophxcus (Lycophylina. Drepanophycales). Rare shelly fossils include Hercynella (Mollusca. Rival via); the literature relating to this genus is reviewed. (The Victorian Naturalist 116(5). 1999, 181- L86.)

Introduction Eglinton Cutting is a large road cutting The shelly fossils collected in 1929 were approximately 4 km northwest of subsequently examined by Dr. J. A. Talent, Alexandra on the Goulburn Valley who identified the brachiopods Boucotia

Highway (Fig. 1 ). At the crest of the road, australis and H. loyolcnsis, as well as not- another cutting branches off lo the north- ing the occurrence of indeterminable gas- cast; tixis was formerly the line of the Yea- tropod remains (Couper 1965). On this Alexandra railway. basis, Couper (1963) considered the hori- In 1994. the local council reduced the zon at location 8 to represent the slope on the south side of the cutting to Flowerdale Sandstone Member ot prevent rockfalls. On inspecting ihe new Williams (1964). graptolitcs, location 9 is one of face, I found that numerous fragments of As for the plant, the original localities for the species the Si I tiro-Devonian fossil Baragwanathia, were visible. On subse- Monograptus thomasi Jaeger 1966 (sec specimen from quent visits. I found a number of other fos- also Jaeger 1967). A (iarrall sils, mostly in the talus left by the road Eglinton Cutting was figured by works. Some of these fossils are described and Rickardst 1984, fig. 51 ). below, others are still under study. Those Lithology figured in this paper are deposited with the The new south face of the cutting expos- National Museum of Victoria (indicated by es a stratigraphic thickness of nearly 40 m NMV specimen numbers). (Fig. 2). The rock is almost entirely thin- Previous studies bedded light to dark grey mudslone, 2-3 The area was examined in 1929 by a weathering to a buff colour at ihe top team of geologists from the Mines m of the cutting. The beds dip uniformly at Department, who were specifically looking around 82" to the southeast, and strike at 130°. the top the exposure for Baragwanaihia and associated grapto- about Near of beds massive ungraded fine- lites. The north end of the cutting (road are two of and rail combined) was referred to as location K in the published report by Harris and Thomas (1941). and the railway cutting was referred l<> as location 9. Location 9 produced specimens of graptolites and Baragwanaihia longifoiia occurring together, which were pictured by Lang and Cookson (1935} in the first description of this species. At location 8 however, Harris and Thomas reported only a succession of basal shelly "grits', over- lain by sandstones, and mudstones contain* Fig, I. Small dots show fossil localities north of ing MvnograptUS Alexandra, from Harris and Thomas (1941), redrawn on a modern map base. The large dot (8) shows the location of the Eglinton Road and Rail Culling. 1/270 Albert Road, Sdurh Melbourne* Victoria 1205

181 Vol. 116(5) 1999 Contributions grained quartzilic sandstone, 15 and 30 em would have been little wider than a modern thick, separated by 60 em of mudstone. single lane. It is now a four-lane highway. The thickness of the mudstone beds with a parking area equivalent to a fifth varies from millimetres up to about 15 cm, lane. Clearly, an enormous amount of south but is most commonly in the range 6-9 cm. material has been removed from the Many of these thin beds are graded, with side of the cutting. siltstone (sometimes very fine sandstone) The strata are part of a marine shale and minor current-bedding at the base, fin- sequence, at least 500 m thick, to judge by ing up to laminated elaystone at the top. exposures to the south of Alexandra. This The contacts between the beds are usually sequence, in turn, belongs in the formation planar and often marked by a millimetre- known as the Norton Gully Sandstone thick iron oxide stain; this is taken to rep- (VandenBerg 1975). The name is some- resent oxidation of sulphides from organic what misleading, by the way. as the formal matter which settled at the top of the bed. definition states: The predominant type The lithology indicates deposition by tur- consists of elaystone and siltstone shale bidity currents in quiet, deep water. with thin bedded fine sandstone'. This exactly. I have not closely examined the north side describes the observed facies The of the cutting, which is now overgrown and relationship between the Norton Gully weathered, except to note that the bedding Sandstone and beds previously assigned to and structure are more complex. the Flowerdale Sandstone Member is cur- e.g. I have been unable to find any 'grits' rently under investigation (see (coarse sandstones and granule conglomer- Edwards et ah 1997). ates) corresponding to those seen by the Palaeontology Mines Department geologists in 1929. This General remarks can be accounted for by the vastly altered All the fossils I have so far found have nature of the cutting. In 1929 the road been on the bedding planes between mud-

stone layers. 1 have seen none in the sandstone, whereas at Mt Pleasant, on the other side of Alexandra, where the lithology is

very similar, it is the thin-bedded sandstones which are known for their plant fossils, while the mudstones are barren (Cookson 1935). The stratigraphic distribution of known fossil horizons is shown in Fig. 2. Although the fossil biota is rather scanty, the locality in this paper shares some species with localities in the Lilydale dis-

trict. Numbers given in the following text for the Lilydale locations correlate with those on a chart in Garratt (1983, fig. 5). Most localities from the Lilydale district comparable with the locality in this study are well into the Boucotia loyolensis zone. suggesting an age younger than that for the Flowerdale Sandstone Member (Garratt 1983. fig. 6).

Flora Numerous fossil plant remains have been exposed; they include vague carbonaceous films, well-preserved coalified compres-

Fig. 2. Straiigraphic column, south face of sions, mineralized impressions and Eglinton Cutting. G - graptolites. P - plants, H leached-out moulds. The better preserved - - Hercvnella, ss sandstone. specimens will be described at a later date;

182 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

for now a brief summary will be given. locus, in a K-configuration (Fig. 3). These seem to terminate in club-shaped endings, Baragwanathia longifolia Lang and which are sometimes surrounded by a halo Cook son. suggesting the remains of a globose struc- Very common; occasional specimens can ture, or in other instances, there seem to be be definitely identified in at least five differ- a number of short, erect sporangia-like ent horizons, ranging from the top to the bot- objects attached (Fig. 4). tom of the cutting. Sometimes all that can be This last species I regard as identical to seen is a vague outline of an arched branch, plants found in the Wilson Creek Shale at at other times there are splendidly tbliaceous Frenchman's Spur, described in manu- specimens with coalified remnants. script by Tims (1980). Tims assigned the Hedeia corymbosa Cookson. species to the zosterophylls on the basis of As well as a couple of isolated stems, the their branching, but the size and appear- site has yielded a substantial specimen with ance of the specimens is so remarkable that more than 20 sporangial heads. This is this hardly seems likely. Specimens with thought to be the largest specimen oi Hedeia larger diameter axes somewhat resemble yet found (J. G. Douglas pen. cotnmJ), an Eifelian (Middle Devonian) plant. Drepanophycus devonicus Weyland and Yarravia cf. oblonga Cookson. Berendt, as illustrated by Schweitzer and A single stem 12 cm in length with poorly Giesen (1980), but the secondary branches preserved sporangia appears identical to one are significantly longer in our specimens described by Cookson (1949, Plate 4, figs. 4 (Fig. 5). and 5) from location GL Lilydale. These forms are more slender overall than Y. Fauna oblonga Lang and Cookson sensu siricto. The observed fossil fauna consists of abundant graptolites, and a very few isolat- Zosteropkyilum? sp. ed, more or less complete brachiopod and Thin axes up to 10 cm in length, occa- bivalve shells. The latter are relatively sionally branching dicholoniously. No con- large (smallest diameter > 1 cm). Whereas nected sporangia have been found, the sug- the graptolites have left substantial car- gested assignment is based purely on the bonaceous remains, the shelly fossils are appearance of the axes. reduced to impressions, which leads to dif- Unknown trachcophylc. ficulty in identification. All fossils are Naked stems 5-15 mm diameter, one erf highly compressed parallel to the bedding, which has a pseudomonopodial branch 7 and there is a further component of distor- mm in diameter. There is a prominent vas- tion which is most obvious in the grapto- cular trace. More frequent short branches lites (Jaeger 1966). 2-3 mm in diameter and 2-3 cm long occur Although the very rare brachiopod and at intervals, often springing from the same bivalve shells may have been directly turbidity currents, little sup- - -. ' emplaced by — - 7 \ —7

Kin. 3. Unnamed tracheopbyte, NMV 4. Another detail from NMV P208597A, P208597A. Detail of two secondary branches in Pig. X2.5, Single branch with possible sporangia on K configuration, xl-75. At left, a third branch (he ctavate termination. inates from the opposite side of the axis.

183 Vol. 116(5) 1999 . Contributions

porting evidence for this mode of deposi- been found, but the impressions are not tion is present. The size of the shells is clear enough to be identifiable. anomalous in the fine sediments. There are Mollusca (Nauliloidea) no coarse sand grains, lithic clasts or bro- Geisonocerina ? sp. ken shell fragments which one would Two poorly preserved specimens were expect to be entrained by currents suffi- encountered in this study. One is a faint ciently strong to carry the large complete impression which shows the apical 6 cm of valves. I consider the association with the an orthoconic nauliloid conch with the abundant drilled fossils, such as the land numerous transverse striae (8-10 per cm) plants, to be significant, and suggest that common in this genus. Although G. cuts- these shells were rafted by epibiotic sea- traits Chapman has been recorded from the weed and dropped into position. Norton Gully Sandstone at 'Kelly's Hill"

Graplolithina (Mt Matlock), it differs from the specimens Monograptus thomasi thomasi Jacgei examined in this study by having nodular This is observable at intervals at all lev- rather than smooth striae (Chapman 1912). els of the cutting (Fig. 2). This well-known Mollusca (Bivalvia) index species fixes the age of the rocks as Hercynelta killarensis Gill. Pragian - for a recent discussion see Carey Two reasonably clear impressions of and Bolger (1995). right valves, both having the hinge portion Brachiopoda missing. One of these was the only shelly Fascicostetla? sp. fossil found in place within the outcrop

A battered fragment of an external mould exposure; it was concave side up. In the

shows coarse angular ribs arranged in bun- field, Hercynelta is easily recognised as a dles of 3, the middle being more promi- large, almost circular shell with one radius nent, at either side of a central area occu- marked out by a low ridge (Fig. 6). pied by a panel of finer ribs. This type of Hercynelia killarensis was originally ornamentation is characteristic of the described from location G35, Killara, near Resserellinae (Walmsley and Boucot Lilydalc (Gill 1950). Hercynelta also 1971). Two species of this subfamily have occurs at Seymour in a very similar lilhol- previously been reported from the Lower ogy (Schleiger 1964). Devonian of Victoria. Of these, the one Notes on Hercynelia with coarse ornament is a Fascicostetla. The previous Victorian papers on which Gill (1942) considered identical to Hercynelia were written at a lime when it specimens from New Zealand, then called was thought to be a gastropod. This F. gervitlei, but now known as F. batonen- sis Walmsley and Boucot. Gill reported this species from locations G7, G9, G20 andG21 at Lilydalc. Two other brachiopod specimens have

Fig. 5. Unnamed tracheophyte. NMV Fig. 6. Hercynelia killarensis Gill, NMV P2Q8598A. Detail of a single branch with P30352IA. Inner mould of a right valve. clavate termination, originating from a thick xO.625. The anterior ridge, at upper right, is axis: x2. intact only in its central half.

184 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

includes two palaeo-ecological studies single species. One of his examples is the

(Chapman 1917; Gill 1950), and one can pair H. petasoida and //. kilhuvnsis, which

appreciate that the ecology of ;i bivalve Gill (1950) described from the same loca- may very well be different from that of a tion; but any conclusive proof must await gastropod. As the overseas Literature is rel the discovery of an articulated specimen.

atively inaccessible, I think it worthwhile As regards the ecology of iicrcyiwllti. it is

to summarize it here. now believed that this genus followed a //< /( Ytu'lla is thought to have evolved reclining mode of life in deep water (KnV

during the Upper Silurian from the genus 1979. 19S4). By 'reclining*, it is meant thai Sifurinti, by migration of the apex o( the the shell was lying on or just beneath the shell from its normal place at the margin, sediment surface, with the sagittal plane at towards the centre iTermier and Termier an oblique angle to the vertical, and with- 1950). The two genera are members of the out a strong, permanent byssal attachment

family Aniipleuridae. Hercynetla is found (Stanley 1970, p. 35-36). Kn/ (!9 (X4) conin Europe. North Africa and North sidered Hercynetla to represent the perfec- America as well as in Victoria, and was tion of a trend among the Aniipleuridae considered characteristic oi the Old World towards the reclining lifestyle. Members oi t'aunal province o\' the Early Devonian bv this family began life us equivalved semi- Forney etai (1981). infaunal juveniles attached to the substrate Following the discovery of articulated by a byssus. As they grew, one of the specimens at a couple of European loca- valves (randomly left or right) became tions. Prantl (i960) emended the original lower than the other as the oblique position

diagnosis of Kayser < 1K7K) as follows (my demands. The lower valve developed a translation): conical shape (el". //. petasoida) while the "Homomviirian. with strikingly inequiv- upper became more (Tat and lid-like (cf. H. alve asymmetric shells with a subcen* kil!airti\!,s); left and right valves are to he tral to submarginal summit. The shells found equally among either form. are subcorneal to clypeate. with a Conclusions prominent anterior wing. The wing is The fossils reported in this paper repre- convexly arched on i)nc radius, forming sent the remains of species which were a ridge along its course from the sum- free-swimming (nauliloids) or floating mit to the hinge. The hinge is curved marine organisms (graptoliles), or which inwards with a prominent external liga drifted out to open sea, either on their own ment groove. The pallial line is entire.' (plants] or attached to floating debris (the It should be added that the valves arc eden- rare molluscs anil brachiopods). On settling tulous. The external ornament consists of to the ocean floor, they were buried by concentric growth lines, and in some deposition from turbidity currents, which at species a radial sculpture (e.g. //. victoriae this location consisted of very fine sedi- Chapman, illustrated by Gill 1950). ment, indicating some distance from land. The anterior ridge mentioned in the diagnosis is referred to in the older literature as Acknowledgments a 'fold*, a term more appropriate to gas- The author wishes to thank N.W. Schleiger ami J.Ci. Douglas lor their comments on an early tropods. It is perhaps the location of the drall of this paper: thanks are also due to an hvssal gland (Termier and Termier 1950). anonymous referee fen suggesting clarification but personal opinion is that it serves my of some points. some function analogous to that of the posterior ridge in many other bivalves. References >>! and Botger, P, ! (1995), Conodontt Following the recognition of the genus as Carej S P. disparate Louver Devonian /ones. Wilson Creek a bivalve by the Termiers. Prantl (I960) Shale, ivfis Walhalla area, Victoria, Australia, observed that there were numerous Atchvrtnga 19, 7^ 86. Chapman, I- (1912). Lower Silurian fossils of eastern instances of pairs of similar species report- Victoria Pari II. Records <>l 'lie GwfoRiccit Survey ed from the same location. Given the u\ VictoriaX £4 233

1* inequivalve nature of known articulated ( hapman, (1917) On the Probable Environment of the Palticcuoic Genus HercyneHa in Victoria, PracraHng& specimens, he suggested that these pairs of 2'>, 1 23- oj the Royal Society of VU totia 1 2fi. ('. () species represented opposing valves of a Cooksnn. I (1935). " plant remains from the

185 Vol. 116(51 1999 .

Contributions

Silurian of Victoria, Australia, that extend and con- Lower Devonian rocks of south eastern Australia. nect floras hitherto described. Philosophical Journal of the Geological Society of Australia 14. Transactions of the Roxal Society of London B225. 281-286. 127-147. Kayser, E. (1878). Die Fauna der altesten Devon- Cooksnn, 1- C. 49), Yeringian (Lovvei Devonian) Ablagerungen ties Harzes. Ahhandlungeti iur geoln- plant remains from Lilydale, Victoria, with noles on gischen Specialkarte von Preussen and den

a collection from a new locality in the Si I uro- Thuringischen Staatett, 2 (4). Devonian sequence. Memoirs of the National Kriz. J. (1979). Devonian Bivalvia. Special Papers in Museum of Victoria 16. 117-131. Palaeontology 23. 255-257

Couper, .1. ( l%3). The Geology of the Yea-Molesworth Krfz, J. (1984). Autecology of Silurian bivalves. District. Unpublished diploma thesis. Royal Special Papers in Palaeontology 32, 183-195.

Melbourne Institute ol Technology. Lang, W. H. and Cookson. I. C. (1935). On a flora, Couper. J- (J965), Late Silurian to Early Devonian including vascular land plants, associated with stratigraphy of the Yca-Molcsworth District. Monograptus. in rocks of Silurian age, from Victoria. Victoria. Proceedings of the Roxal Society of Australia. Philosophical Transactions of Ihe Roxal Victoria 79. 1-9. Society of l.omh >n B224, 42 1 -4 19 Edwards, J. E.. Olshinu, A. am! Slater. K. R. (1997). Prantl, F. (I960). Die systematische Stellung der

Nagambie ol 1 and pan Yea :100 000 map geological Gattung Hercxiwlla Kayser < Peleeypoda). report. Geological Survey of Victoria Report 109. I- i'olaoutologische /eitschrift 34. 150-153. 142. Sehleiger. N. W. (1964). Primary scalar bedding fea- Forney, G. G., Roticot. A. J. and Rohr. D. M. tl98h. tures of the Siluro-Devonian sediments of the Silurian and Lower Devonian zoogeography ol' Seymour district, Victoria. Journal of the Geological selected molluscan genera. In 'Communities of Ihe Society of Australia 11. 1-31. Past", 19- pages 1 164. Eds J. Gray. A. J. Boueot and Schweitzer. H. J and Giesen. P. (I980| Qbef W. B. N. Berry. laeniophvton tnopinalum. Protolvcopodltes devont- Garratl. M. J (19&3), Silurian and Devonian biostralig- cus und Clado.yylon scoparium aus dem Milteldevnn raphy ol the Melbourne Trough, Victoria. Proceedings von Wupperlal. Palaeontographho B173. 1-25. of the Royal Society of Victoria 95, 77-98. Stanley. S. M. (1970). Shell form and life habits of Ihe Garratt. M. J. and Rickards. R. B. (1984). Graptolite Bivalvia (Mollusca). Memoirs of the Geological biostraiigiaphy of early land plants from Victoria. Society of America 125. 1-296. Australia. Proceedings OJ the Yorkshire Geological Termier. H. and Termier. G. (1950). On the systematic Society 44. 377-384. position of the genus Hercytie/lu Kayser. Gill. E. D. (1942). The thickness and age of the type Proceedings of the Malacoloycal Society of London Yeringian strata. Lilydale, Victoria. Proceedings of 28. 156-162. the Royal Society of Victoria 54. 21-52. Tims. J. D. (I9S0). The early land flora of Victoria. Gill, B. D. (1950). A Study of the Palaeozoic Genus Unpublished doctoral thesis. University of lieiyvnella, with Description ol Three Species from the Melbourne. Yeringian (Lower Devonian) of Victoria. Proceedings VandenBerg. A. H, M. (1975). Definitions and descrip- of the Royal Society of Victoria 59. 80-92. tions of Middle Ordovician lo Middle Devonian rock Harris. W. J. and Thomas. D, E. (1941 ). Notes on the units of the Warburion district. East Central Victoria Silurian Rocks of the Yea District. Mining and Geological Survey of Victoria Report 1975/6. 302-304 Geological Journal 2, Walmsley, V. G and Boucoi. A. J. (1971). The Jaeger. H (1966). Two late Monograptus species from Rcsscrellinae - a new subfamily of Late Ordovician Victoria. Australia and their significance for dating lo Early Devonian dalmancllid brachiopods. the Baragwanathia flora. Proceedings of the Roxal Palaeontology 14,487-531. Society of Victoria 79. 593-413. Williams. G. E. (1964). The geology of ihe Kinglake Jaeger. H. (1967), Preliminary stratigraphical results District, Central Victoria. Proceedings of the Roxal from graptolite studies in the Upper Silurian and Society of Victoria 77. 272-327.

One Hundred Years Ago

A report of the botanical results of the A paper was read by Mr. D. M'Alpine, excursion to Cheltenham on Saturday. 19th entitled 'Description of a New Parasitic August, was read by the leader, Mr. C. Agaric' French, jim., who stated that a very inter- The author described a new species of esting afternoon had been spent. Some fungus of the genus Hebeioma twelve varieties of orchids had been noted (Agaricaceie), which had been found by in bloom, besides numerous other plains. Mr. C. French, jun.. during the Cheltenham On one of the orchids a parasitic fungus excursion, growing on the stem of an new to science had been found. Mr. J. orchid, Plerosiylis pcdnncttlaUL R. Br., il Stickland staled that Ihose members iner- being most unusual for a Hebeioma to be esied in pond life had also experienced a parasitic. profitable outing, as among other captures were the males of the rotifers Lacinuiaria From The Victorian Naturalist pedunculated and /.. eUiptica, which are XVI, October 5. 1899. somewhat uncommon.

186 The Victorian Naturalist h

Natt4ralist Notes

Australia's Flying Frogs?

A number of "Hying Frogs' art- known area, it may represent a component of the from around the world e.g. Litoria pectoralis muscle, When subjected to a graminea from New Guinea (Tyler 1976), simple stretch reflex in drawing the Fore

Hyla miliaria from Mexico (Pough et

l Indonesia (Heusser l >74). A detailed the webbing was extended briefly and then anal> sis oJ gliding performance by two partially relaxed. At maximum extension species of Rhacaphonu Progs has been the webbing appeared to pull the skies ol published (Emerson and Koehl 1990), but the abdomen out a little loo, so that the to my knowledge no one has investigated effective increase in planing area stretched the gliding (or parachuting) abilities ol almost from the groin to the elbows,

Australian frogs, If a frog is able to fall ai I he efficiency o\ gliding depends on a an angle less than 45 degrees it is said to number of (actors such as mass, velocity, glide whereas if the angle is greatei than drag, shape of planing surfaces, angle oi

45 degrees ii is said to parachute (Pough el attack as well as the dimensions ami oticn ai 1998). talion ol the planing area. The axillary

While examining a live Specimen of a webbing oi I., peronii togethei with fingei large IVron's Tree Frog Litoria peronii and toe webbing and the head, bod) and From north ol Wagga Wagga, New South limb surface areas is significantly less than

Wales, it took a Flying leap ofl my tlesk in the oriental flying frogs (e g. and landed about a metre aw as on the GUI Rhacophorui species) which are able to lain. There was nothing special about thai glide up lo I 5 m oi more at an angle of except thai it appeared to land a little high about IS degrees (Pough et a! 1998), but sufficient in opinion to give er on the curtain than what I thought it certainl) my should have done, given the take oil veloc- significant lift- Whethei the frog was glid oi is not ceitain as the ity and initial trajectory. 1 decided to inves in:' parachuting tigale Further and observed several lumps. angle oi fall appealed lo be close to 45 the On dose examination of the frog I found degrees, Unlike Rhacophorus species an axillary webbing which stretched from inlerdigital webbing is not extensive in approximate!) mid bod) almost to the / not id species, frog steer in i the can actually 1 Whether elbows. I'lie photograph Fig 1 show s this webbing which is slightly less than flight with this webbing is anothci interest has full) extended here. Furthermore, the in:' question I he feci that the webbing spreading of this webbing appealed to be voluntary muscle control suggests the pos- utulei voluntary control. As the muscle sibility. The excellent diurnal and noctur would involved in the stretching of the axillary nal vision ol these frogs certainly be webbing has an origin in the lateral body a very useful adjunct to controlled gliding wall and an insertion in the distal humerus Such an ability would be very useful in the high, swaying branches ol trees in which the species lives, Examination oi several othei arboreal or semi arboreal Litoria

species (Green Tree Frog /.. caerulea,

Eastern Dwarf Tree Frog / fallux, Bleating Tree Frog L dentata and Jervis Bay Tree Frog /. jervisiensls) shows the) all have extensible axillary webbing to varying degrees, but whether all Litoria species i\o is not known. Other question. needing investigation involve a comparison of the terrestrial and arboreal spei ies

/ itoria peronii Fig. I. Peron's free I rog of the genus l.itorut. bearing m mind lhal *' \\ agga vv ,i-!m N.S.W., *how iny a) illarj tin 'inns as Currently accepted is probably

!, p| oiob ' Annable

IK7 Vol. 116(5) 1W9 Naturalist Notes polyphyletic (Cogger 19%); also whether evolution of a novel locomotor type: "flying frogs' f.volulitm A

Tyler. M. (1976). , (Collins: Sydney.) The helpful comments of an anonymous review- 'Frags er are much appreciated. Amiable References T.J. Faculty of Science, Cogged H.G. (1996). "Reptiles and Amphibians of ondale College. Box 1 9. Australia'. Filth edition with amendments. (Reed; Cooranbong, Sydney.) N.S.W.2265. Emerson, S.B. and Koehl, M.A.R. (1990), The interaction of behavioral and morphological change m the

Southern Right Whale in Port Phillip Bay

Southern Right Whales Enbalaena aus- The principal Victorian site is centred on tralis are regular visitors to Victorian Logan's Beach, just east of Warrnambool. waters. They migrate from their summer a regular calving and nursery area. feeding grounds in the sub-Antarctic to the Numbers of whales present vary from year coastal waters of southern Australia during to year; in 1997 there were five adults and late autumn/eurly winter and remain until a calf, in 1998 three adult females, each mid-late spring. The coastal range is from with a calf. An observation platform has about Perth. WA to Sydney, NSW. been built and many hundreds of people In the 1830s and 1840s, the annual visits watch the whales each season. The to shallow bays in western Victoria and Department of Natural Resources and Wilsons Promontory were the basis for an Environment (NRE) closely monitors the intense shore-based whaling industry. whales and collects and collates sightings Indeed, the first settlement in Victoria was of the species from other places along the at Portland Bay and focussed on this natur- Victorian coast. al resource. The intensity of the hunting In August 1998, a Southern Right Whale soon reduced the numbers, although paid a visit to Port Phillip Bay. This was Southern Right Whaling continued until an unusual occurrence; since 1977 there the 1950s - bul not in Victorian waters - have been four records of this species in and the species came very close to extinc- the Bay - August 1977, July 1988, May tion. It is now estimated that there are 1989 and August 1992. All these involved about 6-800 Southern Right Whales in single animals. There is no evidence to Australian waters during the winter suggest that Southern Right Whales have months. The largest concentration of these been anything more than occasional visi- is at the Head of the Bight, in South tors to the Bay, even al the beginning of Australia, where some 200 animals may European settlement. congregate. Southern Right Whales are The animal was first observed close to fully protected under Slate and the shore in the Mornington/Mt Martha

Commonwealth legislation. In Victoria, area on Saturday I August, and reported to the species is listed under the Flora and NRE Fisheries and Wildlife officers during Fauna Guarantee Act 1988 and manage- the weekend. It was not reported on 3 ment and conservation actions have been August, but on the following day was seen prepared and were recently published cruising along the coast between Martha

(Seebcek el al. 1999) in a formal Action Point and Balcombe Point. It was only Statement. some 10-15 m offshore for much of the

188 The Victorian Naturalist Naturalist Notes

time, and excellent video footage and still Several points emerge from this event. photographs were obtained. The character- Probably the most exciting was that so istic callosities on its head were clearly many people were able to gel a good look visible, as was a diamond-shaped white at the animal, which was often very close its mark on back. The pattern of callosities to shore. Many people did as I did, and fol- is unique and is used as the basis for iden- lowed the whale from vantage point to tification of individuals. A National vantage point along the coast. The regula- Photographic Index is maintained for all tions that are in place to protect whales Southern Right Whales, to help in popula- from interference by boats or aircraft were tion monitoring. Many of these pho- obeyed, with only a couple of boats ven- tographs are obtained using extensive aeri- turing too close and having to be warned. al surveys for the species, or at congrega- Media interest was high, with television, tion sites such as Head of the Bight. All radio and newspaper stories over several the whales which visit Logan's Beach are days. Other than some minor traffic con-

; photographed from the air by local NRF , gestion, whale watchers were able to share staff. this rare event in a great spirit of coopera-

I visited Mornington on 5 August. The tion and wonder. whale had been seen off the Mornington NRE's Port Phillip region were responsi- Jetty earlier that morning, but had left and ble for managing issues of concern, but was reported to be heading up the Bay. were only required to maintain their

Over the next couple of hours I followed watching and recording role, and the many the steady stream of whale watchers to var- staff involved in this exercise have helped ious vantage points along the coast and had the community to experience a truly great

good views of the animal. It was swim- natural event. ming quite rapidly, about 3-400 m oil' the Acknowledgements coast and I last saw it o\J Olivers Hill at Rod Barber and Bob Hutton, from NRI:*s Frankston. It was seen that evening in the Mornuifjion office, were instrumental in record- shipping channel off Black Rock, ing tile movements of the whale, obtaining On 6 August, NRE mounted a shore video footage and managing the public. Bob Warneke provided comment early records ol search and the whale was located in on Southern Right Whales in Victorian waters. The Sorrento Harbour in the afternoon, at Alias of Victorian Wildlife database provided which time its presence caused the records of the species in Foil Phillip Bay. and Sorrento-Queenscliff ferry to delay (he account in Mammals of Victoria (P.W. berthing for a short while until the whale Menkhorsl, ed., p. 195) and the Action Statement (Sccheck. J.. Fisher, J., Wameke, R. and Lowe. moved out of the way. At sunset, it was K. 1999, Action Statement No. 94. Southern seen heading north, off Blairgowrie. Right Whale Eubalaena aiistrahs, NRE: 3-1/2 hour flight NRIi offi- Despite a by Victoria) die relevant background material cers on 7 August, during which the Bay Seebeck was searched intensively, the whale was John Flora and Fauna Program^ it is presumed that it not seen again, and Department ol Natural Resources and Environment, safely left the Bay late on 6 or early on 7 4/250 Victoria Parade 3002. August. East Melbourne, Victoria

The Southern Righl Wluilc near Mornington, AUgUSl 1998. Note the callosities on the whale's head. Mornington. The while patch on its hack is just visible. Photo hy Rod Barber, NRE,

Vol. 116(5) 19W 189 Naturalist Notes

The Weaver

Autumn is my favourite time of year. The hind legs are a different length from the mild, drawn out, in the main sunny days, other legs, enabling one claw to be above the followed by cool or comfortably warm other as the Weaver descends to the ground.

evenings. Often wind free or perhaps with Head down, it rapidly abseils by its own spi- just a gentle breeze. It is almost as if nature der line. I assume that those claws, one is having a rest in preparation for the above the other clasping the thread, keep the

heavy work it has to do in winter. strain off the spinnerets while they exude the Describing permaculture gardens around spider silk during the descent. the world, a series of ABC TV programs Belonging to the sheet web family of spi- during January gave me a renewed interest ders, the web is some 30 by 50 centime-

in my garden. To see what I would have to tres. It is started every night at dusk and is do to turn my backyard into a permaculture packed up again at early dawn.

plot, I went for a walk. Frankly, what I saw Strung out between the ground and over- was a wilderness, the grass under the apple head twigs, high enough from the ground

tree was up into the branches. But there for me to u alk under, it is quite a large and was also a great surprise. For the apple tree elaborate affair. With guy lines going here was struggling with an enormous load of and going there to secure it. When you apples. Really unbelievable. Without any consider that the Weaver's legs easily span human attention, nature, assisted by the 3 to 5 centimetres from claw to claw, it is bees, had just been doing its own thing. not surprising that the Weaver can move

To start things. I planted some sweet with the speed of lightning across its scaf- corn, some silverbeet and a few parsley fold. This was brought home to me when

seedlings given to me by a friend. I also an electronic flash from the camera dis-

developed the habit of taking a walk turbed the Weaver. It went suddenly into around the garden before going to bed. the packing up behaviour which you can The sweet corn was planted late in the observe every morning before dawn. The

season and when it has noticeably grown a Weaver moves around the centre a bit, 1

bit I praise and encourage it. The warm think undoing key tie points in the web, for

weather may last just long enough to bring it then drops half the web in a flash, gath- me some corn cobs. Then over to the com- ering the web into what seems an untidy

post heap. Putting my hand on the top, I feel bundle of thread. It then packs up the top the reassuring warmth telling me that in this half and takes the untidy bundle of fluff

world of uncertainty Nature continues in its with it into the branches. mysterious wisdom, no matter what. During wind-still nights the Weaver sits

Thus it was that one evening, two months in the centre of the web waiting, quite flat

ago now. in the dark, 1 walked into a spider in the web. But when one night a breeze

web. That is to say. my face walked into it sprang up, the centre of the web was tossed while the spider must have seen me com- 3 to 4 centimetres backwards and for- ing. For there was no trace of 'The wards, at times quite forcefully. The Weaver'. Coming back half an hour later Weaver now stood off the web, hanging on to see how things stood, the Weaver was in a manner which reminded me of a sail busily restoring its shop front, the work surf-board rider in a storm.

already half completed. When it was warm and wind-still, the

Since ihen I call on the Weaver every Weaver wove those large nets even' night. night, a beautiful Garden Orb Spider. Seen Abseiling to the ground to set its guy lines, from up close, its back is a light sandy returning to the canopy of leaves by climb- brown. Superimposed in black is a motif thai ing, head up, in a hand over hand manner. looks a bit like the Crown and Anchor of the However when a large high pressure area merchant navy. The first segment of each developed over the Bight and Adelaide, the

front leg is a brilliant red. On the underside, anti-clockwise winds brought cold air from

the hind legs are set off in alternate short the Antarctic and some rain. I noticed that lengths of black and white bands. The outer the Weaver then built a very much smaller

190 The Victorian Naturalist Book Review

web, sheltered to some extent by hanging abseiling, hanging around in very small amongst the canopy of leaves. bits of web hung up between the leaves.

I had hoped that the Weaver would find a And like Mammie. you don't see hide nor mate and reproduce, to keep the unwanted hair o( them during the day. A new cycle bugs down. Well it seems my hopes will has started, a new generation is taking be fulfilled. We have passed the autumn over. That is how life is. equinox and relative calm has returned for a while. While i haven't seen the Weaver Gert van Wcsscm 84 Allele Avenue, again, there are lots of liny Weavers. With Femtree Gully. Victoria 3156. bodies the si/e o( grains of barley, they make just like Mammie did. Playing at

Defending the Little Desert: the Rise of Ecological Consciousness in Australia

by Libby Robin

Publisher: Melbourne University Press, 1998. 203 pp., paperback RRP $24.95.

The controversy thai developed around and attempts to place the people ami the Victorian government proposals to sub- events in the wider social context. The divide and clear the Little Desert for agri- book opens by presenting a simple history the culture in the lale 1960s has entered folk of the developmeni of the region and o\ lore as a turning point in conservation in dispute, wisely avoiding an account the Australia. The anti-development campaign natural history of the area. After all, many have covered these values is important in that it prevented the destruc- other references best 'discov tion of an area of extraordinary natural rich- and, for many o\' us. they are 1 es. However, the campaign's role in devel- ered directly and personally. Subsequent oping the ecological consciousness o{ the chapters deal with the campaign from the o\' the National 1970s, and beyond, is seen by many as even perspectives Victorian 'ccologists', the locals more important. Out o\' this controvers} Pinks Association. the from grew the 'balanced* approach to land devel- in the Winimera and bureaucrats opment and reservation that characterised Melbourne. The political perspective is not

but I suspect that this is the subsequent 15 years or so - particularly presented in depth, oversight by the author. through the Land Conservation Council of no intentional of cabinet meetings and Victoria; but also in national issues such as Verbatim records discussions are still not avail- the Lower Gordon in Tasmania, Lraser other political are renowned for respond- Isiand in Queensland and Kakadu in the able. Politicians to have Northern Territory. The 'Little Desert ing to the questions they would like rather than the questions they Controversy* is important in itself. Il is also been asked, important because of the accretion of histor- were asked. book is obviously the result i^i ical perceptions and retrospective assess The research, all oi which is thoi merits of those exciting times. meticulous Robin has had access lo This new account grew out of a postgrad- OUghly referenced. At times this has led to uate project, hut the book's style is certain many sources.

It notably different styles in the various ly not that of a dry academic thesis. is points i}\ view of the main decidedly readable. The book is divided chapters. The conservationists are engagingly and into chapters based on the Little Desert public presented. contrast, the issue itsell and the various protagonists, personally By

191 Vol. 116(5)1999 chapter dealing with the contributions from accounts, by the final few sentences, read- public servants is clearly based on volumi- ers will find themselves drawing further nous records from public service archives lessons and conclusions pertinent to cur- and less so on personal interviews. rent issues, beyond the Little Desert itself. Nevertheless, Robin astutely realised that My most significant reservation about the such contributions, although less visible, book is its approach of seeing 'history' as were no less important, and perceptively an unfolding of events with a certain presents this critical input. The aboriginal inevitability about them, given a particular material is least satisfactorily treated, social context. As Robert Ingpen has either from a current or an historical con- argued elsewhere (1980, Turning Points in text. However, I suspect that this is a 'fact the Making of Australia, Rigby: Of life' for historians dealing with a non- Melbourne), history is a weaving together literate culture and a dispersed and sub- of chance and contrivance, of planning and stantially dispossessed remnant. happenstance. As with other turning We are offered some insights into the points, the 'Little Desert Controversy' is way the central characters approached their also a mixture of the inevitable with the various roles in the unfolding drama. purely fortuitous. Idiosyncrasies did matter Personal aggrandisement seems to have and were important in the unfolding of driven no-one, except perhaps the politi- events. Robin seems to have emphasised cians. Ego played only a small part and the social streaming of events and down- grandstanding was used to further a public played the input of chance. Nevertheless, cause, rather than personal profiles. Unlike this reservation may be saying as much more recent controversies, the 'conflict' about the prejudices of this reviewer as it was relatively respectful - at least in pub- says about the book itself. lic. In some respects, times have changed. The book is very readable. It is an inter- In other respects, very little has changed, esting and informative history of the devel- as those with a longer perspective than the opment of environmental consciousness in next election were painted as naive and out Australia. It is an insight into people and of touch with 'modern economic realities'. social attitudes, not too far removed in After the specifics of the Little Desert time. It resonates with contemporary Controversy have been presented and lied issues, such as alienation of the public together as a coherent story, Robin estate for private profit and publicly-sub- attempts (a little less successfully) to put sidised native forest destruction for wood the implications of this history and its per- chip export. Perhaps it is true that 'the only ceptions into a wider and current social lesson of history is that we do not learn 1 ". context. There is a tendency to categorise anything from history I hope not ... and classify people and points of view, occasionally losing sight of the distinctive- David Cheal ness of individuals and their particular per- Parks and Wildlife Commission. P.O. Box 496, sonalities. But as with all historical good Palmerston. N.T. 0831.

The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc Reg No AO0S361IX

Established 1880 In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria

OBJECTIVES: To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian flora andfauna.

Membership is open to any person interested in natural history and includes beginners as well as experienced naturalists.

Registered Office: FNCV, 1 Gardenia Street. Blackburn. Victoria 31 30. Australia.

Postal Address: FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130. Australia. Phone/Fax (03) 9K77 9860; Internationa! Phone/Pax hi 3 4877 9860. The Victorian Naturalist

Volume 116 (6) December 1999

Published hx The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria since 1884 From the I (hioi

The Victorian Naturalist would nol he successful withou! (he enormous amount of lime and effort voluntarily given by a large number of people who work behind (he scenes.

One of the inosl important editorial tasks is to have papers referced. The Editors would like lo say thank you lo those people who refereed manuscripts during 1999:

Nigel Ainsworlh Louise (iilledder (Jerry Quin Dennis Black Kevin Mill John Seebeck Sue Briggs Roger Kirkwood Melody .Serena David Britton Murray Littlejohn Todd Soderc|uist

.lane ('aider Richary Loyn I leinar Streiman Malcolm (alder Ian Lunt Barry Traill Graeme Coulson Mali Malipalil Robert Wallis David Crosby Brian Malone Simon Ward Ian Davidson Ian Mansergh Mark Warne John Duggin Tom May Dick Williams Steven Gallagher Peter Menkhorst Jenny Wilson Mary Gibson Martin Predavee

The Victorian Naturalist endeavours lo publish articles which are written for a wide and varied audience. We have a team of dedicated proof-readers who help with the readability and expression of our articles. Thanks lo:

Julie Barllell Sharon Ford Tom May Ken Bell Mary Gibson Michael McBain Tania Bennell Ken Green Geoffrey Palerson Phil Bock Pat Grey John Seebeck Amis Dzedins Murray llaby Robert Wallis Ian Endersby Carrie Handreck Gretna Weste Jennie Epstein Virgil llubregtse Jenny Wilson

Alislair Evans ( ienevieve Jones Anhur Farnworth Ian Mansergh

Sincere thanks lo our book reviewers tor 1998 who provided interesting and insightful comments on a wide range of books and oilier materials.

David Britton Cecily Falkingham Rod Jones David ( neal Ron Fletcher Barbara Sharp Peter Daiin Sharon Ford Ian Thompson Ian Endersby Linden (iillbank

As always we particularly thank our authors who provide us with excellent material for publication.

Our editorial advisory team continue to provide valuable advice and assisiance: Ian Endersby, Ian Mansergh. Tom May and John Seebeck.

On the production side, a thank you lo:

the computer learn - Alistair Evans, Anne Morton. Michael McBain who maintains the internet sile (http://calcite.apana.org.au/rncv/) Ken Bell who prepares (he annual index; Felicity Garde Tor printing the labels: and Printers, Brown Prior Anderson Ply Ltd. especially Sieve Kilto.

I*>4 The Victorian Naturalist The Victorian Naturalist

Volume 116(6) 1999 December

Editor: Merilyn Grey Assistant Editor: Alistair Evans

Research Reports Is the Home Range of the Heath Mouse Pseudomys shortridgei an Anomaly in the Pseudomys Genus?

by Edward P. Meulman and Nicholas I. Kiomp 196

Germination and Sowing Depth of Wallaby Grass Austrodanthorda eriantha: Techniques to Maximise Restoration Efforts by C. O'Dwyer 202

Barbed Wire Fencing as a Hazard for Wildlife by Rodney van derRee 210

Contributions Recent Foraminifera and Ostracoda from Erith Island, Bass Strait, by KJN. Bell and J.V.Neil 218

Naturalist Notes Bizarre Encounters with Wildlife: Observations from Around Wattle Glen, by Maria Belvedere 228

Book Reviews Australian Plants for the Garden: An Australia's Best Garden Guide, by Gwen Elliot 209 Plant Collecting for the Amateur, by T. Christopher Brayshaw, reviewer Sharon E. Ford 229

Guidelines for Authors at the end of this issue.

ISS\ (1042-5184

Cover: The Heath Mouse Pseudomys shortridgei. photographed at Pomona] in the Grampians by John Seebeck. See Research Report on p. 196.

Find us on the WEB: http://talcite.apana.org.au/fncv/ email: fncv@vicnet. net.au Research Reports

Is the Home Range of the Heath Mouse Pseudomys shortridgei an Anomaly in the Pseudomys Genus?

1 Edward P. Meulman' and Nicholas T. Klomp -

Abstract The home ranges of Heath Mice in three different areas of the Grampians National Park, Victoria, were determined by radio-tracking and trapping. Eight individuals were radio-tracked over I ] days in February-March 1996. revealing a mean home range, using the Minimum Convex Polygon method, of 5.65 ha (sc = 1.72 ha). This was significantly larger than the mean home range revealed

trapping - 1 by on three grids of 9 1 00 folding aluminium "traps during 1 995- 1 997 (0.74 ± 0.47 ha. n = 57 animals). There were no significant differences between the mean home ranges of males and females, nor among the three different areas, despite differences in floristies and lime since lire. The home ranges recorded in this study are significantly larger than those predicted from allomelric equations based on the si/e of the Heath Mouse (70 g) of 0.07-0.18 ha. Although this anomaly has been recorded in other Pseudomys species, it is vet to be explained adequately. (The Victorian Naturalist 116(6). 1999, 196-201.)

Introduction

The area used by an animal for its home there are an adequate number of captures range is likely to be the minimum neces- of individuals (Stoddart and Challis 1991 ). sary to provide the key resources required, Eight to ten repeat captures are considered with the actual shape of the home range the minimum required to estimate home being determined by the nature and distrib- range size with reasonable accuracy ution of these resources. Among adult (Hawes 1977, Montgomery 1979. Desv et mammals, a primary determinant of home al. 1989). range size is access to food (Hansson Still, there are often significant differ- 1979; Hixon 1980). Therefore, it is not sur- ences between the sizes of trap-revealed prising to find that among different species home ranges and estimates obtained using of mammals there is a clear relationship radio-tracking (Jones and Sherman 1983: between home range size and body weight Attuquayefio et al. 1986; Desv et al, (McNab 1963: Turner et al. 1969; 1989). Bubela et al. (1991) reported that Ilarestad and Bunnell 1979), and between trapping underestimated the home range of home range and metabolic rate (Mace et the Broad-toothed Rat Mastacomys ftt.\cus al. 1983; McNab 1988). Given such rela- by as much as 40-60%. Further, resources tionships, one might predict (hat popula- are not evenly distributed over the home tions of the same species, living in habitats range of an animal; rather, certain areas of differing productivity, would occupy will be rich in resources while other areas ranges of correspondingly different sizes. are poor. Certain 'core areas' are likely to Studies of the home ranges of many ani- be used more frequently than other areas mals are inherently difficult, particularly and would probably contain the nest site for the more cryptic and nocturnal small and dependable resources (Desy et al. mammals. Before the development of 1989). miniature radio-tracking packages, most Despite these limitations, studies of home home range studies of small mammals range afford a greater understanding of were based on live-trapping and mark- various aspects of a species' biology, such recapture techniques (e.g. Broughton and as food requirements, population density. Dickman 1991; Stoddart and Challis territoriality and competition. Home range 1991). The data obtained from trapping si/e might also reflect mating systems grids can be used to provide an estimate of (Gaulin and Fitzgerald 1988). Several the home ranges of animals within the pop- studies have recorded disproportionately ulation if the trapping areas are greater large home ranges of some species of than the home ranges of the animals, and if PseiubmySi perhaps reflecting an anomaly in this genus (e.g. Brandle and The Johnstone Centre, Charles Sfurt University. PO Moseby BOX Alhury. 2640. 1999). This m f NSW paper investigates the home whom to correspondence should he addressed. range size of the Heath Mouse Pseudomys

196 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

shorthdgei, as revealed by live-trapping with a small radio transmitter attached and radio-tracking and considers whether around the neck (Fig. 2) just behind the the sizes recorded are an artefact of the mandible and secured using surgical tubing methods used to determine home range, an (Meulman and Klomp 1997). Each radio-

anomaly of this group of mammals and/or collar weighed approximately 3.5 g, repre- a reflection of the biology of the senting 5-6% of the body weight of the Pseiulomys species. animals. After attachment of the collar, animals were placed in a holding cage Methods (Meulman and Klomp 1996) for five min- Study area utes of observation prior to release. Radio- The Grampians National Park is located tracking of Heath Mice was conducted in central western Victoria approximately using two fixed towers and a null-peak 270 km northwest of Melbourne. Three system (after O'Connor ct al. 1987). The areas of heathland in the park (locations A, direction of each transmitted signal was

B and C; Fig. 1 ) were surveyed every 1-2 recorded simultaneously by each operator, months over three years (1993-1996). One but independently from each tower (after hundred individual trap sites in a 10 x 10 Swihart and Sladc 1985), yielding a mini- grid formation (sites 20 apart) were m mum of 14 and a maximum of 42 recorded established at locations A and B, while locations for each individual Heath Mouse. location C comprised 91 individual trap The operators at each tower synchronized sites in a 13x7 grid configuration. their hourly readings during the tracking Locations and had last been burnt in A B period, although successive fixes of a 1987. giving a serai stage of 7-8 years, given animal (i.e. successful iriangulation)

while location last burnt in 1980 ( C was L5 were often several hours apart. Previous years earlier). studies have shown this species to be nocturnal, although data were col- Trapping procedures and data collection largely lected over 24-hour periods on a number of A single folding aluminum Elliott trap occasions. was placed at each trap site and baited with The accuracy of bearings taken from the a mixture of peanut butter, rolled oats and fixed towers and the accuracy of deter- honey. Each trap was covered with a plas- two mined signal directions were validated tic bag and a liberal amount of clean cotton using radio transmitters removed from wool was placed in each trap to provide insulation for captured animals. During hot weather, traps were closed during the day and reset in the evening. Captured Heath Mice were weighed, examined for sex and reproductive condition, given an individual mark (ear-clipping) and released at the point of capture. Only those animals that were caught ten or more times were used in the analysis of trap-revealed home range. For paired comparisons of home ranges of individuals in breeding and non-breeding seasons (October-February and March-September respectively), only those animals that had been caught five or more times in each season were used in the analyses.

Radio-tracking procedures and data collection Five male and three female Heath Mice were each radio-tracked for 10-11 days Fig. I. The Grampians National Park showing 1996 at Locations during February-March trapping and raduvtraekinc locations (A. B and A and B. Each Heath Mouse was fitted C) used in this study.

Vol. 116(6) 1999 197 Research Reports

Results Home range revealed by trapping The mean size of trap-revealed home range of Heath Mice was 0.74 ± s.d. 0.47 ha (n = 57). A two-way ANOVA revealed no significant differences between the home range sizes of male and female

Heath Mice (F 14l) = 0.361, P = 0.550), or among the home range sizes of Heath Mice = occupying different locations (F- 4 ,, 0.969, P - 0.415). and no significant two- way interaction was found between location and sex = = (F3t49 0.062, P 0.980). A two-way ANOVA was used to examine differences between mean home range sizes observed in breeding and non-breeding seasons and different sexes. No significant dif- Fig. 2. Heath Mouse fitted with a small radio ference was found between sexes (F, = transmitter. The surgical tubing used to secure n 0.272, P = 0.607), nor between seasons the transmitter is clearly visible. Photo by Recto (F, Zollinger. 22 = 0.01 1, P = 0.918), and no significant two-way interaction was found between sex individual Heath Mice and a surveyors and season (F, = 0.026, P = 0.958). theodolite (see Meulman and Klomp 21 The mean trap-revealed core areas of 1997). male Heath Mice (0.31 ± s.d. 0.22 ha, n = Data analysis 31) and those of female Heath Mice (0.27 Bearings taken from the two towers were ± s.d. 0.21 ha, n = 26) were not significant- converted to local co-ordinates using ly different (Student's / = 0.591, d.f. = 55. Locate //, a computer program, and an P = 0.556). While MCPs overlapped for error ellipse was described around each some individuals, the core areas of female group of co-ordinates for each Heath Heath Mice did not overlap, but rather Mouse, allowing rejection of any reading adjoined along common boundaries. The having too large an error. Co-ordinates shape of core areas varied considerably obtained from radio-tracking and trapping among individual females, depending on were analyzed using another computer pro- the number of intensively used sites within gram. Calhomt\ to estimate home range the home range. The core areas of five using the minimum convex polygon males overlapped almost completely (90- method (MCP). The MCP method deter- 100%) with female core areas. However, mines home range from the convex poly- not all male core areas were associated gon formed by joining the most peripheral with individual females, but overlapped points (fixes) with straight lines (Mohr the core areas of both females and other 1947. Trevor-Deutsch and Hackett 1980). males. Core areas were defined as the area encap- Home range revealed by radio-tracking sulating 75% of all captures, and were cal- Table 1 presents the home range sizes of culated using the harmonic mean (75% the eight Heath Mice radio-tracked in this isoplelh) method. The 75% isopieth was study. The mean home range size (MCP) chosen as the core area following Dixon determined from radio-tracking (5.65 ± and Chapman (1980), because estimates of s.d. 4.85 ha) was significantly larger than home range expand rapidly when the out- trap-revealed home range size (Student's t lying 25% of points are included. All data = 2.897, d.f. =66, P « 0.005). The mean were checked for normality of distribution home range size of radio-tracked male (Kolmogrov-Smirnov, all Ps > 0.2) and Heath Mice (7.48 ± s.d. 5.18 ha) and that homogeneity of variances (Bartlett's test, of female Heath Mice (2.60 ± s.d. 2.52 ha) all P% > 0.7) prior to any parametric-tests did not differ significantly (Student's t - being used to lest the significance of any 1.492, d.f. = 6, /> = 0.186). differences recorded among groups.

198 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

Table 1. Home ranges and core areas (in ha) of the adult Heath Mice Pseudomys shortridgei radio- tracked in this study. Areas were estimated using the harmonic mean method (Dixon and Chapman

1 980). and minimum convex polygon f MCP) (Mohr 1947). n = number of fixes per animal.

Sex Weight (gl Core area size Home range size Home range size (harmonic mean) (MCP)

F 62 19 0.005 0.26 0.37 F 68 37 0.590 3.99 5.34 F 63 20 0.290 5.90 2.09 M 64 32 0.327 4.01 5.67 M 60 41 0.328 3.09 4.95 M 65 35 0.433 8.32 11.60 M 68 42 0.S27 2.84 13.94 M 70 14 0.018 0.68 1.23 Mean 65.0 30.0 035 3.64 5.65 se 1.21 0.10 0.93 1.72

Discussion sion. This result is also consistent with The mean weight-loss incurred by ani- Happold's (1976) suggestion that Heath mals wearing radio-collars was 5.0 g (± Mice are largely monogamous, so would 3.2 g), approximately 1% of body weight. be expected to have similar home ranges. No animals were injured as a result of the Variations in the size of home ranges of radio-collar attachment. The minimum mammals have been associated with social convex polygon method was used for factors, such as access to females (Bubela home range analyses in this study because and Happold 1993). metabolic require- dispersion of it is the only technique that is strictly comments (Mace et al. 1983) and parable between studies, and is more resources (Montgomery et al. 1991). robust than other techniques when the Comparative studies of mammals have size number of locations is low (Harris el al. repeatedly indicated that home range 1990). Many authors have reported sex- correlates positively to body size (McNab related differences in home ranges of 1963; Harestad'and Bunnell 1979; rodents, with larger home ranges occupied Lindstedt et al. 1986: Reiss 1988; Swihart by males, particularly during the breeding et at. 1988; du Toit 1990; Gompper and period (Mineau and Madison 1977; Gittleman 1992). A number of allometric Wolton 1985: Attuquayefio et aL 1986). equations have been developed to predict Gaulin and Fitzgerald (1988) suggested the size of an animal's home range based These are all modifica- that home range size might be a predictor on its body mass. of mating systems. In rodent populations tions on McNab's (1963) original hypothe- basic characterised by a promiscuous mating ses, and all depend on the assump- system, males have larger home ranges tion that home range size varies as a func- Simply than females because of the intense male to tion of metabolic requirements. male competition for mates. In contrast. stated, larger mammals have larger home monogamous rodent species would have ranges because they need more energy food is consid- home range areas that are similar for both resources. While density of sexes (Swihart and Slade 1989), with ered an important factor. Harestad and body-weight breeding pairs normally sharing a home Bunnell (1979) found that for 75-90% of the variation in range that they defend against samc-sexed accounted Using a mean conspecifics (Kleiman 1977). Home ranges mammalian home ranges. of for Heath Mice of Heath Mice examined in this study were body weight 70 g allometric model of found to be similar for both sexes. (Cockburn 1979), the Bunnell (1979) relating home Although the sample size of radio-tracked Harestad and confident of this range to body mass of herbivorous mam- animals is too small lo be m (// = 2.7\M \ where // is the home result, the total number of trapped animals mals is body mass in from which trap-revealed home range sizes range in hectares and M home range of 0.180 ha for were calculated in = 57) is comparatively kg) predicts a Mice. predicted home range large, and strongly supports (his conclu- Heath The

199 Vol. 116(6) 1999 Research Reports

based on the equation // = 4.9(W * as pro- width of which is equivalent lo half the

posed by Swiharl et a/. ( 1 988) calculates a inter-trap distance (Trevor-Deutsch and home range area of 0.07 ha. Hackett 1980). Although the Long-tailed These predicted home ranges are signifi- Mouse is of similar size and weight to the cantly smaller than the mean home range Heath Mouse, its estimated home range is (MCP) of Heath Mice calculated from closer lo that predicted by the standard trapping data (0.74 ha) and from radio- allomelrie equations. Given the different tracking data (5.65 ha). The core home methods used, further investigation of the ranges of 0.27 ha for females and 0.31 ha home range of the Long-tailed Mouse

for males determined in this study are still would be useful. 1.5 times larger than those predicted by One explanation of the apparent variation either equation. These calculations of core in home range sizes used by different home range are based on trapping data. species of Pseudomys may be that the which underestimate actual home range recorded differences are not species specif-

area (Bubela and Happold 1993). Hence it ic, but rather simply relied habitat quality is clear that the home range of the Heath in a given area. For example, the home-

Mouse docs not fit either of the proposed range of the Plains Rat Pseudomys aus- allomelrie equations relating home range tralis appears to vary with habitat quality tp body mass. (Brandle and Moseby 1999). In areas containing high quality habitat, females occu- Other Pseudomys species pied home range areas of around one While there is only limited published hectare, while those of males were around information available on the home range of 4-5 ha (Brandle pers comm,). In poor qual- the Pseudomys species, the Heath Mouse ity habitat, female home range areas were appears not to be alone within the genus in seen lo increase lo 8 ha. As this species having a disproportionately large home weighs between 40-45 g, its home range is range. Anstee el at. (1997) reported that considerably larger than would be predict- radio-tracking revealed a home range of up ed by any of the allomelrie equations. to 14.4 ha lor the Pebble-mound Mouse However, this study found no differences Pseudomys chapmani (12-15 g), with core in size of home ranges of Heath Mice in dif- areas also being very large. Radio-tracking ferent areas, despite variation in time since studies of the Shark Bay Mouse last fire and floristics between the study Pscudomvs fiefdi have revealed that this sites, which presumably reflected variation species also has a large home range of in habitat quality. Clearly, more detailed between 3-4 ha (Speklwinde p#r&. vomm.). studies of the home range o\' Pseudomys The New Holland Mouse Pseudomys species are required to determine the rea- novaehollatuliae {20-25 g) was found to sons for their apparently large home ranges. have a home range (MCP) of 0.84 ha for and how biotic and abiotic factors may males and 0.51 ha for females (Lock influence and rcllcct home range. 1995). Again, this is much larger than would be predicted from body size alone. Acknowledgements We are grateful lo (1. Piu and R. Zollinger for despite this latter study using trapping to their assistance in the Field, and to R. Brandle determine home range - a technique that and R. Speklwinde for providing valuable usually underestimates the home range of advice during this study. R. Korn produced

small mammals (Bubela et al. 1991 ). Figure I. The Department of Natural Resources However, not all Pseudomys species have and Environment, Parks Victoria and the disproportionately large home ranges. Animal Care and Ethics Committee (Charles Sturl University) provided the licences and Sloddart and Challis (1991) estimated the approvals required to complete this work. E- mean home range of the Long-tailed Meulman was supported by an Australian Mouse Pseudomys kigglnsi as 0.20-0.26 Postgraduate Award. ha. using the inclusive boundary strip method. This method estimates home References Ansiee, S.D.. Roberts. J.D. and O'Shea. J.H. < !W). range in a similar to way the MCP method, Social structure and patterns of movement of the but includes the addition of a peripheral Western Pebble-Mound Mouse. Pseudomys chap iiuiiii, al Manindoo. Western Australia. boundary strip around the polygon, the Wildlife Research 24. 295 K>5.

200 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

Attuquayefio, D.K.. Gorman, M.L. and Wolion. RJ. Lindsledl. S.L,. Miller, B.J. and Buskirk, S.W. (1 4Kb). (1986). Home range sizes in the Wood Mouse, Home range, time, and body si/e in mammals. Apodemus yx/vaihus: hahilul, sex and seasonal dif- Ecology bl. 413-418. ferences. Journal ofZoology 210. 45-53, Mace, G.M.. Harvey. P.ll. and Clutlou-Brock, T.H. Brandle, R. and Moseby, K,E. (1999), Comparalivc (1983),. Vertebrate home range si/e and energetic ecology of two populaiions of Pseudomys australis requirements. /// 'The Leo logy ol Animal in northern South Australia. Wildlife Research 26. Movement'. Eds I.R. Swingland and P..I. (Clarendon 541-564. Press: Oxford.) Broughton, S.K. and Dickman. C.R. (1991). The effect Meulman. E.P. and Klomp. N.I. (1996). A new hold- of supplementary loud on home range of the irm-cage lor small mammals. Wildlife Research 2i$, Southern Brown Bandicoot, Isoodon ohesulus. Z45-24& Australian Journal of Ecology 16, 7 1 -78. Meulman. E.P, and Klomp. N.I. (1997). Some princi Bubela. T.M. and Happold. D,C,D. (1993) The social pies and limitations ol radio-tracking small mam- organization and mating system ol an Australian suh- mals. Report no. S3. The Johnstone Centre. Charles alpinc rodent, the Broad-toothed Rat Mastacomys Sinn University. Vi fustms. ildtife Research 20, 405-H7, McNab. B.K. < 1963). Biocnergclics arid the determina- Bubela. T.M.. Happold. D.C.I), and Broome. I..S. tion of home ranee si/e. American Naturalist 97.

tl99l). Home range and activity of the Broad- 1 S3 140.

toothed Rat. Mitstacoims Justus, in suhalpine heath- McNab, B.K. ( I9SSJ. Complications inherent in scaling land. Wildlife Research 18. 39 48 die basal rale ol metabolism in mammals. Quarterly Cockhurn. A (1979). The ecology ol i'scudomws Review ofBiology 63, 25-54.

species in Somh-haMern Australia. PhD Thesis. Mmeau. P. and Madison. D. ( l°77>. Radio-tracking ol Monash University, Melbourne. Peromy\(.u\ leucopus. Canadian Journal of Zoology Desy, B.A., Bat/li. CO and like. L. (l9«9} 55,465-468. f

Comparison of vole movements assessed hy live Mohr. CO. ( 1947]. Table ol equivalent populations ol topping and radio-trackimi. Journal of Mammalogy North American mammals American Midland 7(1. §52-656, Naturalist 37,223 249. Dixon, K.R. and Chapman. J. A. f!980), Haimome Montgomery, W.I. (197'')). Trap-revealed home range mean measure of animal activity areas. Ec&togy 61. m svmpatric populations of Apodemus \\lvat>cu\ and 1040-1044. Apodemm /lain i.dlix. Journal of /.oology IX'L

du Toil. J.T. ' I990>. Home range hod\ mass relations: 535-540; a Held studv on African browsing ruminants. Montgomery, W I.. Wilson, W.I... Hamilton, R. and

Qecalogia 85, 301-303. Me( arinev. P. ( l*WI ). Dispersion in Ihe Wood Mouse.

Gaulin. S.J.C. and Lil/gcrald, RAS . I 1988). Home Apoilcmus wlvafnus: variable resources in time and range si/e as a predictor of dialing systems in space Journal of Animal Ei ology 60, 179- 192. Mfcrotus, Journal : Mamtndlogy 69, Ml-319, O'Connor, PJ„ Pvke, (i.H. and Spencer, H. (I U K7).

Gompper, VI. E and Gilt I em an. J, I., (1991). Home Radio-tracking honeyeater movements, Emu 87 ranue scaling: iniraspecillc and comparative bends. 2 1^-252. OecvtogiaH* \A Reiss, M. (IMKSt. Sealing ol In tine range si/e: body

Hansson, I as a limiting factor for small si/e. metabolic needs ami ecology, Trends in Ecology | |979l- Food U 1 I Evolution 85-86. rodent numbers. Oecoiogia 37, 2 7 1 and 3,

( ). and Happold. VI. I 1976), Social behaviour ol the Conilurine Stoddart, D,M. and Chatlis. G. I 991 The habitat lite Long Tailed Mouse". Research rodents ( Mvriduc i ol Australia. Zoologies Held biology of Tierpsycholagy 40, 113-182. reporl no 6, Tasmanian Forest Research Council.

Haresiad, A.S. and BunnclJ, KL. ( 1979) Home range and Hohait.

body weight: a re-evaluation. Ecology 60. ^NM-402. Swihart R.K, and Slade, N.A. I 1985). lesimg lor inde Harris, S.. Cresswell, W J., horde. P.O.. Trewhella. pendenee ol observations in animal movements. range W.J.. Wollard. T, and Wra>, S. j 1990)- Home Ecology 66. 1176-1184, analysis using radio tracking data: a review ol prob- Swihart, R.K. and Slade, N.A. (J 989). Differences in lems and techniques particularly as applied to the home range si/e between sexes ol Microtus ochro viiidy o! mammals. Mammal Re tew 20, 97-123- paster. Journal of Mammalogy 70, XI6-K20. Havves. M.L. (1 ()77). Home range, territoriality and Swihart, R.K., Slade. N.A. and Bcrgstrom. B.J. (1988), ecological separatum in sympalric shrews. Sorej Relating body si/e to the rale of home range use in vagratts and Sore.\ obscurux. Journal of Mammalogy mammals. Ecology 69. 393-399. Trevor-lXulsch, H. and Hackeli, l).K (1980). An eval 58. 35 I Hixon. M.A, (1980). i-ood production and competitor ualion of several grid trapping methods hy compari- density as determinants ol feeding leiriioty si/e. son with radio telemetry in a home range study of the American Naturalist 115. 51O-530 Eastern Chipmunk (Tamias sniutus). In 'A comparison ol on Biolelemetry and Radio-Tracking". Eds Jones. H.N. and Sherman. LJ. | 1983). A Handbook Meadow Vole home ranges derived Ironi grid Hap C.J. Amlaner and D.W. Macdonald (Pergamon ping and radio-telemetry. Journal of Wildlife Press; Oxford.) Management 47. 538-561, Turner. KB., .lennrich. R.I. and Weinttauh, J.I). (19fW). Kleiman, D. 11^77). Monogamy in mammal, Home ranges anil body si/e ol lizards. Ecology 50.

Quarterly Hevien / Biology 52. $9-69 1 07b- 1 OKI". iiesimg behavior Lock. V! (1995). The distribution and abundance of the Wolion, R.J. ( I9S5), The lunging and New Holland Motive Pseadomys .'.' Iiollandiac in til Wood Mice, Apodemus wlvulicus. as revealed by

I l 203-224. ihe Forest Road Resei m \n\ i B.Sc (Hans) radio tracking. Journal of Zoology 206, Thesis. iJeakin University, Geelong,

Vol. 1 16 (6)1 201 Research Reports

Germination and Sowing Depth of Wallaby Grass Austrodanthonia eriantha: Techniques to Maximise Restoration Efforts

C. ODwyer'

Abstract

Knowing Ihe germination requirements * »l a particular population of plants is essential in the process of habltal restoration, so thai germination and establishment in the field is maximised. This study investigated the temperature required for germination, the sowing depth Tor maximum emergence and Ihe effects Of Irealments in overcoming dormancy in a population of Wallaby Grass Austnxlanthonia eriantha from Mount Piper, Broacll'ord, Victoria, the habitat of the endangered Golden Sun Moth Syncnum plana. The temperature required for maximum germination was L5°C. Removing the palea ami lemma from freshly-harvested seeds or storing seeds for two years at room temperature resulted in a twenty-fold increase in germination. Treatment with sulphuric acid (chemical scarification.) increased germination from 4% to 56%, whilst soaking in potassium nitrate and stratification lor 50 days or 100 days had no significant effect on germination. Burial at a depth of 20 mm or greater had a pronounced inhibitory effect on the emergence of seeds of A eriantha. Therefore these results suggest (hat establishing A. eriantha at Mount Piper would best be achieved by sowing caryopsides in autumn when air temperatures average I5"C and water is not limiting. Caryopsides should be collected in December, stored for approximately 4 to 5 months and sown directly on the surface of the soil, bunher field trials are required to test these suggestions. {The Victorian Naturalist 116 (6), IW, 202-209.J

Introduction

Planis in ihe genus Austrodanthonia germination and establishment in the field (family Ponceac). previously Dunthonia is maximised. Previous work on the mech-

(Under 1 997), ate commonly known as anisms of seed germination and Ihe effects Wallahy Grasses and are a common fea- of environmental influences on germina- ture of open forests, woodlands and grass- tion to increase crop production has con- lands. Native grasslands are one of the centrated on economically importanl most endangered vegelation lypes in species for agriculture, forestry and horti- Australia (Groves 1979; McDougall and culture (e.g. Pisum sativum* Eeuwens and Kirkpatriek 1994) and those thai are domi- Schwabe 1975; Phaseolus vulgaris. Van nated by Austrodanthonia spp. are becom- Onckelen el al. 19X0: Lupinus aibus. ing increasingly rare. These particular Davey and Van Sladen 1979; Hordeum vul- grassland types provide habitat for (he l>are, Collins and Wilson 1975; Acer sac- endangered Golden Sun Molh Synemon charin?!, Webb et al, 1973; Finns radiant. plana (Figs 1 and 2). Once widespread Donald and Jacobs 1990; Audouinia capi- throughout southeastern Australia, the lata, de Lange and Boucher 1990; Golden Sun Moth is now known from only Anigoianthos manglesii, Sukhvibul and lour sites in Victoria, 12 sites in the Considine 1994; see Appendix for common Australian Gapilal Territory and 15 sites in names). However, Australian nalive species New South Wales (Clarke and O'Dwyer are now receiving considerably more atlcn- 1997). The population of Golden Sun lion as conservation and restoration efforts Moths found at Mount Piper. HO km north are increasing (Morgan and Myers 1989; of Melbourne, inhabits a native grassland Myers and Morgan 1989; Sindel et al. dominated by Wallabv Grass A. eriantha 1993; Baxter etal. 1994).

Kinder, II. P. (Lincll. in T. Milch.) There has been little work on ihe gerrni- (O'Dwyerand Atliwill 1999). nation requirements of Austrodanthonia Knowing ihe germination requirements spp. (Toole 1939; Laude 1949; Lindane* of a particular plant population is essential 1972; Hagon 1976; Lodge and Whalley in the process of habitat restoration, so that 1981; Lodge 1993; Lodge and Schipp 1993a, b). However, these investigations

1 Cheryl 0*l)\\yer. Biulogisl. N;itur;it Ecosystems, revealed that different Austrodanthonia Zoological Parks and Gardens Hoard, l'<) Box 74, spp.. and different populations, differed in Parkvilie. Victoria 3052.

202 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

Fig. I, Female Golden Son Moth Synemon Fig. 2. Male Golden Sun Moth Svncmon plana. plana. Photo by H.D. Edwards, CSIRO. Photo by G. Clarke. CSIRO. their germination requirements. For exam- tests began soon after harvest. Air-dry, non- ple, seeds of A caespitosa (as Dunflionia dormant caryopsides were collected from caespitosa) collected from areas in higher Mount Piper in 1993 and stored in paper latitudes germinated at higher temperatures bags in the dark for two years at 25°C. Prior than those collected from lower latitudes to treatment, caryopsides were dusted with (Hodgkmson and Quinn 1976). Trumble fungicide (Thirum). (cited in Cashmore 1932) found that Laboratory germination at constant tem- Anstroilanthonia (as DaiUhonia) seeds ger- peratures minated at 1.8-20 C. whilst both Maze ei al To examine the effects of temperature on (1993) and Lodge and Whalley (1981) germination, seeds were germinated in found that A. caespitosa (as Danthonia chambers at constant temperatures of 8°, caespitosa) germinated over a range of Q 15°, 20". 26°, and 32 C. The germination of temperatures and concluded that caryopsides that were freshly harvested, dry- Anstroduiulwiua was not significantly stored for 2 years, or cold-treated (method affected by temperature. This variability is described below under Dormancy), were also common in other grass species (Hagon compared for each of the temperature 1976: Molt 197K: Sawhney and Nay lor regimes. Experiments ran for 30 days and 1979: Groves et al. 19X2). Temperature, under favourable conditions, all viable seeds moisture and seed dormancy affect the ger- germinated within 7 days of imbibition. mination and establishment of native grass- In each treatment, five replicates of 20 es (Hagon 19761. caryopsides were placed in 9 cm sterile No published information has been Unnu\ petri dishes with 5 ml of distilled water, on on the germination requirements of A, eri- top of two layers of Whatman filter paper. antha. This study investigated the tempera- No. 41. Petri dishes were sealed using clin- ture required for maximum germination, ical test-ware tape. Light intensity of 300 the sowing depth for maximum emergence lux was supplied by Philips warm-while and the effects of treatments m overcom- fluorescent tubes, set for a 12 hour pho- ing dormancy in a population of A. cri- lopcriod. A seed was considered to have antha from "Mount Piper, Broadford, germinated when the radical reached I mm Victoria. The results will be used to in length. attempt to maximise germination of \. en- The viability of each seed lot was deter- antha in the field at Mount Piper. mined by dissection of all the un-germinat- of the germina- Methods ed seeds al the completion tion test. Seeds were classified as viable if Fully mature dispersal units (caryopsides; the embryo and endosperm were still firm the seed together with the surrounding palea as dead if the seeds had turned and lemma) of Austmdanthonia trlantha and intact, or lo Germination was were collected from Mount Piper. pulpy and begun decay. expressed as the percentage of viable seed. Broadford in December 1995. Germination

( 203 Vol. 116(6) 1 >99 Research Reports

Dormancy Caryopsides were placed on the surface of Freshly-harvested caryopsides of A. eri- the soil (0 mm) or at depth using a ruler to antha were treated in a variety of ways in create a furrow. Seeds were kept in a an attempt to break dormancy. The treat- glasshouse at 23 °C with natural lighting and ments were (a) cold stratification, (b) watered when required. The experiment ran removal of palea and lemma. (C) dry stor- for 60 days. Only healthy, well-developed age, (d) soaking in potassium nitrate seeds were used in these trials.

, and (e) soaking in sulphuric acid analysis KNO ( Data

1 1. SO,. For cold stratification caryopsides All data sets were tested for normality were placed in 9 em petri dishes, with 5 ml and homogeneity of variance and were log of distilled water. The petri dishes were transformed if required. A t-lesl was used sealed with clinical test-ware tape and to compare means. A two-factor repeated placed in a refrigerator at 5°C lor 50 days measure ANOVA was calculated on the and 100 days. For the KNO, treatment, transformed data, which was then back- caryopsides were soaked in 20 ml of 0.8% transformed for data presentation. (w/v) of KNO, at room temperature far 24 Results hours and rinsed once with distilled water. Temperature Treatment with FFSO, (chemical scarifica- The percentage germination (after 30 tion) involved soaking caryopsides in 20 days) of viable dry stored seeds of ml of 50$ (v/v) of IFSO, at room temper- Auslrodanthonia erianiha (K6%) was ature for 25 minutes. Caryopsides were greatest at 15 C (Fig. 3). The decrease in washed thoroughly for 10 minutes with germination of dry stored seeds at each distilled water. temperature above and below was Both untreated and treated caryopsides 15C significant < 0.05). Seeds did not germi- were placed in petri dishes and incubated (p Q nate at 32 C, for any treatment. Only a in a controlled temperature incubator at small percentage of fresh seed (17%) and I5°Ci which was found in the first experi- cold stratified seed for 50 days { 13%) ger- ment to be optimal for the germination of minated at I5°C. Viability was 50%. A. erianiha. All other conditions were as described for the previous experiment. Dormancy Only healthy, well-developed seeds were Germination of A, erianiha increased selected based on the results of viability twenty-fold after storage (p < 0.05; Fig. 4). developed in the preceding experiment. Similarly removing the palea and lemma from freshly-harvested seeds also resulted Emergence from varying depths in a twenty-fold increase in germination Caryopsides of A erianiha that had been (p< 0.05; Fig. 4). Treatment with HSO, kept in dry-storage for 2 years were sown at (chemical scarification) increased germina- four depths (0 mm. 5 mm, 10 mm, 20 mm) tion from 4% to 56S (Fig. 4). However, in a commercial grade potting mix and in this was significantly less than increases soil collected from the field site at Mount due to air-dry storage or glume removal. Piper. The soil was surface-sterilised and

Soaking in t and stratification for 50 soaked with water for two days prior to sow- KNO days or 100 days had no significant effect ing. Two wooden seedling boxes (5(H) x 500 on germination relative to the control > x 70 mm) were filled, one with field soil and (p 0.05; Fig. the other with the potting mix. To prevent 4). compaction in soil the box. collected from Emergence from varying depths Mount Piper was mixed with commercial Seeds of A, erianiha germinated and mineral sand in a 1:1 ratio prior to sterilisa- emerged at all depths but there was a sig- tion. There were four replicates each of nificant reduction in emergence when treatment in each seedling box. with each seeds were sown at 20 mm (p < 0.05; Fig. treatment in a different row column set and 5). There was no significant difference out in a latin square design. Twenty-five between the emergence o\' seeds sown at caryopsides were sown, approximately 10 mm. 5 mm, and 10 mm on either of the apart at each depth. A buffer-/one of mm 20 soils. Emergence was greatest when seeds mm was left between each treatment. were sown at mm (38$ I.

204 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

100

/ ^Sh T 60

15 20 26 32

Temperature D C

Fig. 3. Effect of temperature on germination of Austrodanthonia eriantha, immediately after dispersal (. dotted line), after air dry storage for two years (, solid line), and after cold stratification of fresh seed for 50 days (a. dashed line). Percentage germination was determined from 5 replicates of 20 dispersal units after 30 days. (Intermediate temperatures were not tested.) Error bars show the standard error of the mean.

Discussion may contain inhibitors (Bradbeer 1988). Maximum germination of Austrodan- may mechanically restrict the protrusion of" thonia eriantha was at I5°C (Fig. 3). and the radicle (Ikuma and Thimann 1963). at Mount Piper this would be met in late may reduce oxygen to the embryo (Roberts autumn or early spring, when the air tem- and Smith 1977), or may prevent the perature averages 15°C. This supports the leaching of inhibitors, thus preventing ger- work by Lodge (1981) and Hagon (1976) mination (Webb and Wareing 1972). who found that Austrodanthonia species The germination of dormant A. eriantha and other cool-season grasses germinated seeds increased after the removal of the from mid autumn to late winter. Lack of palea and lemma (Fig. 4). ruling out the has a germination at 32°C (Fig. 3) suggests that possibility that embryo dormancy high air temperatures in summer may major role in inhibiting germination, has restrict the germination of ,4. eriantha. although embryo dormancy been species. Inflorescences of A, eriantha are produced observed in other Austrodanthonia

( ) showed that by in December and most of the seeds are dor- Lodge and Whalley 1981 mant at the time of dehiscence (seed removing the palea and lemma from (as release). Dormancy is overcome by a time Austrodanthonia linkii Danthonia not increase and lag (Fig. 4) after dehiscence, during which linkii), germination did that hulling A. Califor- seeds at'ter-ripen. The loss of dormancy Laude (1949) found with lime has been attributed to an increase nia (as D. California) only marginally germination. The lack of in biosynthesis of gibberellins in the cary- increased chilling and opsis or a loss of inhibitors from ihe palea response to germination by (Fig. 4) also provides and lemma (Hagon 1976). In this study the soaking in KNO t as exact nature of the physiological role of evidence for coat induced dormancy treatments involve conditions the lemma and palea in dormancy was not both of these found that investigated. However, previous experi- inside the embryo. Toole (1939) germination ments have shown that these structures A. spicata (as D, spicata)

205 Vol. 116(6) 1999 Research Reports

100

70 i 1 60 o oi 50 0) O) B 40 c o

CL 20

T3 E

TO -,

o * O "5

Treatment

Fig. 4. Effects of different storage and dormancy breaking treatments on the germination of Austrodanthonia eriantha seeds. Percentage germination was" determined from S replicates of 7 caryopsides after 15 days at 15°C. (Fresh seed was soaked in 50% H,S04 and 0.8% KNO.,.) Error bars show the standard error of the mean.

increased after chilling at 3°C for 63 days, it also varies within populations. Laude and also responded to the addition of 0.2% (1949) found non-dormant seeds of A. Cali- KNO,. However, Toole (1939) concluded fornia (as Danthonia California) germinat- that dormancy was coat-induced as, at the ed over a 16-week period illustrating the time of publication, the effects of KINO, variability within the population. This was and cold stratification were unknown. It also shown in A. sericea (as D. sericea: can be concluded that the dormancy of A. Lindauer 1972). In the present study, the eriantha from Mount Piper is coat- germination of A. eriantha was also vari- induced, imposed by the palea and lemma. able. Some seeds (17%) germinated imme- Chemical scarification did not result in diately after dehiscence, indicating that complete germination (Fig. 4) and this may these seeds were non-dormant whilst the be due to the incomplete digestion of the majority required an after-ripening period. palea and lemma; i.e. remnants may have A small percentage (14 and 16%) of both had an inhibitory effect. Morgan and dry-stored seeds and those with palea and Myers (1989) found that germination of lemmas removed did not germinate. dormant Diplachne fusca seeds decreased Dormancy in these seeds, which were prob- when treated with a solution derived from ably still viable, may be embryo-induced. macerated lemmas. It is likely that the This variability in dormancy would spread lemma and palea of A. eriantha contain an the risk of establishment and ensure that inhibitor, as chemical scarification would some seeds from the same population per- enable gas to be exchanged between the sist for several seasons (Lodge and embryo and the external environment, and Whalley 1981). the radicle to protrude resulting in com- Removing the palea and lemma may not plete germination. be economically feasible on a large scale As previously mentioned the degree of and may actually hinder germination in the dormancy varies between populations, but field. Awns and glumes protect the seed in

206 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

a 20 1 I 5 10 20 Depth (mm)

Fig. 5. Effects of different sowing depths on seedling emergence of viable seeds of AuStrodartthonia eriantha, in a commercial potting mix (solid bars), and in soil collected from Mount Piper, Broadford (shaded bars) Caryopsides were "germinated under glasshouse conditions. Percentage emergence was determined from 4 replicates of 25 caryopsides after 30 days. Error bars show the standard error of the mean. are the field, orientate the seed for maximum that the food reserves in the seed seed/soil contact and enable the seed to depleted before the seedlings reach the sur- lod«e in the most favourable microsite face and establish. (Peart 1979; Peart 1981: Sindel et ai 1993). Further field trials are required, nonethe- establishing Burial at depth of 20 mm or greater has a less these results suggest that pronounced inhibitory effect on the estab- Austrodanthonia eriantha in the field lishment of seeds of A. eriantha (Fig. 5). would best be achieved by sowing caryop- The germination of buried seeds may be sides in autumn, when air temperatures dependent upon the exposure to light average I5°C and water is not limiting. (Wesson and Wareing 1969). At depths Caryopsides should be collected in approximately 4 to 5 greater than 2 mm insufficient light pene- December, stored for directly on the surface. trates the soil to induce germination of months and sown some seeds (Woolley and Stoller 1978). The presence of inhibitors in the palea and immediately Since some seeds of A. eriantha germinat- lemma limits germination after seed fall even though temperature and ed at depths of 20 mm, it can be concluded moisture be suitable for germination, that light is not required for germination of may This prevents the loss of seedlings due to all seeds. Work on other Austrodanthonia temperatures. A few months species found that germination of non-dor- high summer concentration of mant units was not restricted by light after seed fall, the palea and lemma, enforc- (Hagon 1976; Maze et al 1993). Wesson inhibitors in the would decrease as a result of and Wareing (1969) showed thai by aerat- ing dormancy after-ripening. By this time temperature at ing the soil, inhibiting gases are removed the ger- allowing germination to proceed. As a Mount Piper would be suitable for mination A. eriantha (I5°C) and light effect is not involved, soil aeration of would be expected to establish in may be an active factor in preventing ger- seedlings conditions and continue mination. The present study showed that the cool autumn through winter and spring. there was no difference in the emergence growing of A, eriantha in a well-aerated potting Acknowledgements soil mix compared with thai of the field this work was financially supported by the Board of (p > 0.05; Fig. 5) and therefore soil com- Zoological Parks and Gardens The research was undertaken at the paction was not involved. It is more likely Victoria.

207 Vol. 116(6)1999 J ) .

Research Reports

University of Melbourne, School o| Botany, < a .lunoir. and Ih/niltoitut liiiku KuBth, lor tlgricuituml Special thanks to D* I'M. Aliiwill. use 2, fYgromic ami inoi plioloLMLiil vanalion, Australian Journal ofAgricultural Research 44, 7 1>-^K.

References Lodge. O4M. and Schipp, A.1 (1993b). Efft^ts ol depth

j Baxter, It.J.M., Van Staden .1,. Granger, U and and mm.' ol sowing «n emergence of Oanthonia

Brown, N.A.C. f 1994), Plant-derived sffiokc ami rwhard&anii Cashmore and Danthonta linkii Kunth. smoke extracts stimulate seed germination of the fire Australian Journal oj Agricultural Research 44,

climax grass Themeda triamlra Environmental and Mil I \i:

ft \p< runcntal Hotany 34* 2 17-22 V Lodge, (i M and WhalK-y, IMXB. (I')KI) Bnulbeer, J.W. (1988). Seed dormawcj uod germina- EfttabHshmenl of wann and cool-season native prren tion' (Chapman and Hall, New V/ork, mal grasses on the north-west slopes ol NSW,

Cashmorc. A.H. (1932). An hwesligatuirt of tin- tflxo I Dormancy and germination. Australian Journal oj

iMMiiiL ami ny.i k uliural characteristics ol the Botatjy29, 1 1 1 1 19. Oanthonia group Report number 69 (CS)RO; McDougall. K. and Kiikpainck. J It (1994)

Melbourne.") Conseivaiion of lowland native grasslands 111 south' Clarke, CM. ami O'Dwyet, C, (1997); A sun. > ol easlern Auslialia, (WoildWide l-untl lor Nalnrc

native grassland 9 i tea in southeastern. Now South Australia: Sydney.) Wales for the endangered Golden Sun Moth, Maze. K.M.. Koen, I. IV and Wan, L.A. (i993), Syncnnm plana, A report prepared for ihc Threatened Factors influencing the germination of six perennial Specie* LJrifl, NSW National Parks and Wildlife Brasses of central New South Wales, Australian Service, southern zone. (CS1RO: Canberra.) Journal ofBotany 41, 79-90:

Collins. D.M. and Wilson. A.I (1975). Embryo and Morgan, W.C. and Myers, B.A. ( I9S9), Genninaiion ot endosperm metabolism ol barley seeds during early the salt tolerant grass Diptachne fusva I, Dormancy

germination Journal <

Davey.J.i:. and Van Sludcu. J. (1979), Cylokuun activ- Moil. .1,1, (J978). Dormancy and germination in five ity in I npintts allnis I IV Distribution 111 seeds. native grass species From savannah woodland com Plant Physiology 63. 873 K77. munities ot ihe Northern Terriiory, Australian >U LanfiC, i.H. and Boucher, C (1990) Atneeological Journal of Botany 2d, 621-631.

ittudieson \uJouiuia eaftitata (Bruniacettc), I. Plant- Myers. B.A. and Moruan. W.C. | 19S9). t ieitninalioii o| derived smoke ;is a seed germination cue. South ihe sah-ioierani grass Qiplachne fusca 11. Salinity \frkan Journal of'Botany 56, 700-703. responses, Australian Journal of Botany M, 239-25 I.

Donald, D.GJvl and Jacobs. C.B. (1990}. The effects O'Dwyer. C, and Aliiwill, KM, { 1999). A comparative of storage time, temperature and containei on ibe via- siudy of the habitats Ol Sytlcmon plana Walker bility of the seed of Four pine species. South African (Lcpidopteia; Casiniidae): Implications for reslora

-I I'oirsfrv Journal 154. I 46. don. Biological ( onservathti X'), 131 l-l 1

Eouwens, C.J. and Scliwabe, WAV. (1975}. Seed and Peart, MJI, < 1979). Experiments in the biological sig- pod wall development in Pixam sativum, I, in rela- nificance Of the morphology of seed dispersal units in tion to cxltueled and applied hormones. Journal ol grasses, Journal af Ecology 67. R43-&63. i. \perlmmtal Botany 26, l I Peart, MJI (1981). farther experiments on ihe biologl

1 1 eal Groves, R , . (1979). The status and Future of significance of the morphology of seed-dtspcrsaj Australian grasslands. New Zealand Journal oj Units m grasses. Journal aj Ecology (>*>. 425-436. l-u'lovyl, 70 SI Roberts, Ml. and Smith. IM). (|077|. Dormancy and Groves, U.11, Hagon, M,w, and Ramnkrishnan, vs. Ihe pentose phosphale pathway. In 'The physiology {IUN2} Dormancy and ^-ai iinii.h it mi of seed of eight and hioehemislry of seed dormancy and genuine populations ol Themeda australis Autsmdian Journal lion'. Brf. A, A, Khan. (Ntulh Holland Publishing ofBotany 3k, 373-3R6. < ttinpany: Netherlands.)

Hagon, MAV. (Ty7G), Germination and dormancy ol Sawhncy, k. and Naylor. J.M. ( 1979). Dormancy stud Vhcnwdu austialis, Oanthonia spp., Stipa higenh'ula ies in seeds of Avena faiua. '>. Demonstration ol 1.1 and Hothriat hloa macro \ustralian Journal of genetic variability affecting the response 10 tempera- M>> -.21 Botany 24, ture during seed development. ( 'anadian Journal of llorfgkihson. K.C, and Qutnn, J. A. ((976). Adaptive Botany 57. v> <>.c variability m the growth of Oanthonia vacspito&a Smdel, B.M., Davidson, St., Kilhy, MJ, and (hoves. QaUil, Populations hi diffcreni temperatures, K.M. (1993), Germination and establishmeni of

Australian Journal <>i Hotany 24. 381 196, tlnnwiiu triandta (KftftgarOO grass) as alleeied by

I andr, |0|O), MM j t Vlayed eciminalion ol California sod and seal characteristics. Australian Journal of uaiL-uiss. Oanthonia caiifnrntra. Agronomy Journal, Botany 41. 105-1 17. Stikhvibul, 4L4Q4-40R, N. and (onsidine. J.A. ( 1*)94). Rfignlatiofl

1 nidami. 1 .1 t 10721. Germination ecology ol pi germination of seed of Amgaumthos inan^Usii, Oanthonia ftcricea populations, Oissertation Austi alum Journal of iiotany 42, 191-203. loole. lfcrfracfs32.50r)IB 5062B. V.lv. ( 1939), (icnninalioii ot Ihe seed of poverty I fouler, II r (19^7), Nomenclrttural eorreciions in ihc grass, Oanthonia spicata. Journal oj America Sr^rwrj ftytidospernut complex [Danthonieae, Poaceae), ofAgronomy 31, 954-965, rWw/M-e/7, &9 274. Van Ouekelen. II,. CaubergS, K,. Ilorcitians, S. and

I oder, GJvl, i 1981). I )e( ireel. Establishment of wann and Coot- J.A. 1 1980), Metabolism of Ahseisie acid 111 sf.is.ai native perennial grasses oh the north west developing seeds of Phaxeolus vulgaris I and its dopes el NSW, Bstabtikhmeui and seedling survival in correlation to germination and a-Amylnso nctrvttity*.

Ehe field, \tattralian Journal ofBotany 29, \2\ 1 13, Journal oi Experimental Botany 3t, "i i-920 Lodge Wesson, ti, G.M (199?). rhe domestication ofthe native and Warning, P.F t I9b9). Ihe induction of

grasm ; Oanthonia riuhurt&wnii Cashmere and light sensitivity in weed seeds by tuuial. Journal of i Oanthonia finkii Kiuilh. for agricultural use; I werimentuj Botany 20. did 125, Selecting for inftarertccnci yield, \ustralian Journal Woolley, JT. and Sioller. I'.AV. (1978), Ugfcl peneira- \$rt{ 59- 'I ulntml ResMtrh 44. 77 tu-n and light-induced seed germination on soil. ! 1 . .1 1't'Ma) G M. and Silnpp. A ( I'lu- d«.ni. ffi 1 Plant Physiology 61. 597-600, lion of the nahw grass Oanthonia rfrhardxonii

208 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

Glossary Appendix. - awn a fine bristle-like appendage, especially Common names of plants mentioned in le text. occurring on the glumes o\' grasses. Acer saccharum Maple caryopstdes (caryposis) - a dry. indehiseent. Anigozanthos manglesii Kangaroo Paw one-seeded fruit in which the seed coat is close- Audouinia capiiata False Heath ly fused to the fruit wall. e.g. in most grasses. Hordeum vulgare Barley dehiscence - to open spontaneously along cer- Lupinus alius Lupin tain lines or in a definite direction when ripe, as Phaseolus vulgaris Bean seed capsules. Pinus radiata Monterey Pine gibberelims - plant growth substances; can have Pisum sativum Pea spectacular effects upon stem elongation in certain plants; can break dormancy in some seeds. glume - the chaffy lower-most organs of a spikelet, which forms the inflorescence of grasses and similar plains. inhibitors - a restraining or preventing factor. lemma - the lower of two bracts enclosing an individual grass flower. palea - the upper of two bracts enclosing an individual grass flower. radicle - the part of an embryo giving rise to the shoot system of a plant.

Australian Plants for the Garden: An Australia's Best Garden Guide

by Gwen Elliot

Publisher: llxlaiul House Publishing, Melbourne. Paperback, I2S pp.,

full colour throughout, 150 colour photos. ISBN I 86447 039 9. RRP $14.95.

Gwen Elliot has been involved in Colour photographs allow easy identifi- Australian plant horticulture since the cation and inspiration for even the most culti- 1960s. She is an honorary life member of novice of gardeners! Australia-wide the Society for Growing Australian Plants, vation notes will allow you to pick out the Victoria, and of the Arboretum Associates. best native plants for your own garden. University of California, Santa Cruz, USA. Gwen has written numerous books on Australian native plants. available- This is an easy-to-use guide to creating a Also delightful garden filled with Australian natives. Australian Plants for the Garden Trees and Shrubs: An Australia's Best Guide is a selection of the most attractive and Garden reliable Australian plants. Tips on growing Australian plants for by Graeme Purdy cut-flowers, to attract native birds and but- 1 2X colour throughout, 150 terflies or for fragrance, are among many Paperback, pp., full of the handy hints which are also offered colour photos. ISBN 1864470402, RRP $14.95 by other experienced gardeners.

209 Vol. 116(6) 1999 Research Reports

Barbed Wire Fencing as a Hazard for Wildlife

Rodney van der Ree 1

Abstract Anecdotal reports From landholders and biologists suggest that the entanglement and subsequent

death of animals on barbed wire fences is widespread in Australia. In this report, I collate records of at least 62 species of wildlife that have become entangled on barbed wire fences in Australia, This paper is divided into two components; the first focuses on an area near Euroa in northern Victoria as a case study, and the second lists records from throughout Australia. In the Euroa study area, the species most commonly encountered on fences were gliding marsupials (Sugar Glider Pctaurus bw- viceps and Squirrel Glider/', uorfolccnsis) (26 individuals), followed by birds (7 individuals). On a continental scale, species found entangled in barbed wire include gliding marsupials, flying-foxes, aquatic birds, night birds and birds of prey. Records were collected from a wide range of habitats and localities, including the urban-rural fringe, forests and woodlands, agricultural landscapes, semi- arid areas and around water bodies. All individuals were found entangled with barbed wire, and more than 95% of entanglements occurred on standard height farm fencing. Recommendations for alternatives to barbed wire fencing are discussed. (The Victorian Naturalist 116(6). 1999, 210-217.)

Introduction

During a study of the ecology of arboreal ear strips along roads and streams (van der

marsupials in a network of roadside and Ree, unpuhl. data). The remaining 15% is streamside vegetation near Euroa, Victoria, made up of small patches of woodland. a number of" Squirrel Glider Pctaurus nor- The major land use is agriculture, with jolccnsis and Sugar Glider P. brcviccps extensive dryland cropping and grazing carcasses were discovered suspended from (Bennett ctal. 1998). barbed wire fences (Fig. I). There have Observations of animals caught on been several incidental observations of barbed wire fences were made opportunis- such deaths for a range of species in Australia and overseas (Russell 1980; Allen and Ramirez 1990; Andrews 1990; Krake 1991; Nero 1993: Land for Wildlife 1994; Piatt and Temby 1994; Johnson 1995; Anonymous 1996; Tischendorf and Johnson 1997; van der Ree 1997; Campbell 1998; Johnson and Thiriet 1998)

but the extent of this problem is still relatively unknown. The aim of this study was to quantify the extent of the situation by _^M*^ collecting records from a range of sources and describing the actual event (e.g. species, fence type, which strand of wire. location).

Study area and methods Case study - Euroa, Victoria The study area lies within the northern plains of Victoria and is bounded by the towns of Euroa. Violet Town, Nagambie, Avenal and Murchison. Formerly dominated by open euc;ilypt woodland, there is now 3.6% remnant vegetation cover, approximately 85 (/o oi' which occurs as lin-

1 Fig. I. Dead School of Ecology and Environment, Deakbi Squirrel Glider Pctaurus norfol- UnivL-rsiiy, RusJi-n Campus, 662 Blackburn Ru\ cettsis caught in a barbed wire fence. Photo by Clayton, Victoria .^I6H. R. van der Ree.

210 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

Table 1. Observations of wildlife entangled with barbed-wire fencing from the Buroa case study area. Species listed in taxonomic order according to Christidis and Boles (1994) thirds) and Menkhorsl (1995) (mammals).

Species Scientific name Number of Fence type Wire type individuals Mammals

Squirrel Glider Pi'iamus norfolccnsis f b Sugar or Squirrel Glider Fctuiirus sp. I h Birds

Spoonbill Pfatalea sp. f b Rock Dove Cnluniha ftvia I b Galah Eolopkus roseicapilla f b Southern Boohook NinoA novaeseelandiae f b Australian Magpie GymnorHina Hbicen f b

c While-winged Chough 'orcorax melanorhamphos 1 b

Fence type: 1= standard height (arm Fence. Wire type: h = barbed wire. lically while undertaking fieldwork on the Australasian Wildlife Management ecology of arboreal marsupials. Additional Society. Field Naturalist Club of Victoria. records were obtained from local landhold- and Birds Australia via their electronic ers. There was no systematic searching to mail discussion lists and newsletters. The detect entangled animals, and consequently wildlife atlas data-bases from Victoria anil the results of this study are likely to under- New South Wales were investigated, as estimate the severity of the prohlem. was the Wildlife Information and Rescue Whenever possible, the following para- .Service (WIRES) data-base. meters were obtained for each entangle- Results ment: Euroa study area • date found; Number and type species entangled • approximate lime since death or entan- of A total of 33 animals was recorded glement; entangled on barbed wire between 1994 • species, sex and approximate age (the

and 1998 m the Euroa study area (Table I ). approximate age oiPetaurns species was Fifteen were positively identified as determined using the level of upper Squirrel Gliders ami I 1 gliders could not incisor wear (refer Suckling I9K4; Quin be reliably identified to species and are 1995); referred to as Petunrns sp. (this group • location (latitude and longitude), and includes only Sugar Gliders and Squirrel description of site; Gliders). Other species entangled with • the point of entanglement on the animal's

barbed w i re f e ncing i n c I u ded i h e body (e.g. wing, neck, tail, gliding mem- Australian Magpie Gymnorhina tihicen (2 brane); individuals) (Fig. 2), ami ;i single Rock • the fence characteristics (fence type, barbed or plain wire strand, strand position in the fence).

A ustraUa-wide Perspective This section is a preliminary report of records from a wide range of people across Australia and is intended to highlight the issue and present initial findings. I collated the same information as that collected for the kuroa study area, from sources including Field Naturalist groups, Landcare groups, landholders and biologists, between 1996 and the present. I also Kig. 2. Ausralian Magpie Gytnnorhina tibicen requested records from members of the caught on barbed wire fence. Photo by R. van Ecological Society of Australia, del Kee,

Vol. 116(6) 1999 211 Research Reports

records) and the gliding membrane and leg Table 2. I'oini of entanglement of gliders found too tin barbed wire fences in the Euroa study area, (two records). Three gliders were 1994 1998. No. - number of gliders found. decomposed lo determine the point of point of entanglement Point of entanglemenl No. entanglement, and was not recorded for six individuals, Only Tail only two gliders were found alive and released, Tail ami gliding membrane and these were entangled by the tail only. ( Hiding membrane and leg Unable to (ell (decomposed too far) One magpie was entangled by a combina Noi recorded lion of wing and neck, and the feral pigeon Tolal round 2u was caught by its leg ring; the point of entanglement was not recorded for the remaining birds. \)ovc (Feral Pigeon) Columha livia. species. Spoonbill Platolca Southern A ttstralia-wide perspective

Nitioy novaeseelandicte , While- Boobook Number and type of species entangled winged Chough Corcora.\ wcfanorliam- Sixty-two species ol' wildlife have been phos and Galah Eolophus roseicapilla. observed entangled with barbed wire fencing across Australia (Table 3). The types Ffjivf characteristics of species include gliding marsupials, bats, All individuals were entangled with barbed wire on standard farm fences ground-dwelling birds, water birds, night birds and birds of prey. The most numer- approximately one metre high. The appar- group reported entangled with barbed ent point of enianglemenl of the animal ous wire fencing were Hying foxes from north- was with the barb on the wire. Where entanglement position was recorded ern Australia. The Little Red Flying-fox Pteropus seapulatus appears particularly (n= 1 7), 12 entanglements occurred on the susceptible to entanglement in north top strand of the fence, one occurred on the Queensland, with a report second strand from the top. and four published of over 450 individuals entangled in one year occurred on the third strand from the top. (Johnson Once caught on the barbed wire, u 1995), and another respondent reported 200 individuals on one fence at appeared that many gliders and birds the same lime (Jon Luly, pcrs. co/nnt.). became further entangled as they struggled respondents reported observing to free themselves. On one occasion, the Many numerous strand of wire was cut and the glider taken. macropods (Black Wallaby biColor, Eastern Grey Kangaroo With the wire in-siiu, to a wildlife shelter WaHahia Western lor removal and rehabilitation. In the Macropus gigantewa, Grey Kangaroo 17. fu!iglHOSUS and Red Euro's study area, all 33 records occurred t where fences were positioned between Kangaroo M. rufus) and Emus Dromaius novaehollandieac with their legs Cleared paddocks and vegetated roadsides. entangled in the top two strands of fences but could Carcass cttaracteristics not give detailed information about specif The advanced decomposition of many ie incidents because of the regularity with carcasses limited observations on the sex which they were observed. This problem is and age o[' the animals. Four female and not specifically related to barbed wire, as one male Squirrel Glider were identified; plain wire also entraps kangaroos and the sex of 21 gliders and seven birds was banns by their legs as they attempt to jump not determined. Using the degree o\ tooth the fence, ami hence these records have not wear on the upper incisors of the gliders as been included in Fable 3. an index of age. four individuals were Mesh fencing may pose a barrier to those identified as juvenile and four as adults. species that are loo large lo pass through Age was not determined for the remaining the mesh and unable to jump or climb over IS gliders or seven birds. the fence. Certain species of reptile appear For gliders, the most common point of to be particularly susceptible because their entanglement was the tail (II records! rear facing scales and body shape allows (fable 2). followed by a combination o\ them lo place their heads through the tight- the tail and gliding membrane (four l\ lining mesh but doc* not allow the rest

212 The Victorian Naturalist l I )))))) )

Research Reports

Table 3. Observations o\' wildlife entangled with barbed -wire fencing from across Australia (excluding the Euroa ease study records) as reported by volunteei observers. Species listed in taxonomic order

c* l according to Christidis and Boles ( )4) (birds) and Met lkhorst ( 1995) and Strahan ( L983) (mammals).

Species Scientific name Stale (Number of individuals) FenceWire type type Mammals Koala Phascolarctos citterns NSW (2), QLD (4) Greater Glider Petauroides volant Vic (2). NSW (6), Qld (4) Yellow-bellied Glider Petaurus austraiis Vic (3), NSW (3), Qkl (8) Sugar Glider Petaurus hrevii eps Vic (25) NSW (9), Qld (44) I'.c Squirrel Glider Petaurus noffolcensis Vic (24), NSW (12), Qld (5) Sugar or Squirrel Glider Petaurus sp- Vic (12) NSW (II Mahogany Glider Petaurus grat Uti Qld(5)

Brush-tailed Beitong Betxongia penicitlata Qld ( 1

I asmanian Pademelon Thyhgale hillardierri Tas ( 1 Grey-headed Flying- fox Pteropus poliocephatus Qld (4). NSW (3) I. c

A !'. Little Red Ilying-lo\ Pteropus scapulatns Qid (666 ), NSW (5), c NT(6),WA(1) Black Flying-fox Pteropus alecto Qld (23), NSW (81), NT (20) r,c Spectacled Flying-tov Pteropus conspicallatus Qld (25) Rying-fox Pteropus sp. NSW (4), Qld (2), NT (75) Queensland Tube-nosed Bat Nyctimene robinsoni Qld (4 1) f.c

Ghost Bat Macroderma gigas NT ( 1 White-striped Lreetail Bat Tadarida austraiis Vic(l) Long-eared Bat Nyciiphitus sp. NSW (I) Microchhopteran Bat species unknown NSW (I), Qld (2) Grassland Melomys Melomys burtoni NSW (I)

Red Fox \ itlpcs vulpes Vic (!) Birds

( \ i> Southern Cassowar) 'asuaiius casuarius Qld ( I >

King Quail Coturtii\ chinensis NSW<2) I h

( i" h Australian Wood Duck ( 'heumietfa juhata Qld ) Pacific Black Duck A/his supcrciliosa NSW (s). Qld (I) r b f h Hoary headed Grebe Potiocepkalus Vic ( I poliocephatus

Short-tailed Shearwater Pufflnus tenuirostris Vie{<5) l b Australian Pelican Pc I annus conspiiillatus Vic(l) r b White-faced Heron Egtetta novaehoilandiae Vic (1), NSW (3) r b

White-necked (Pacific) Heron Ardea pen iflca Vied i I h Nankeen Night Heron Nycticora* caledonicus NSW (I) f h Royal Spoonbill Platafea regla Qld (2) f b h U edge tailed Eagle \quila tuulax Vic (I) r Brown Falcon Falco berigora NSW (I) f h Australian Hobby Falco longipemm NSW (I), Vic (I) r b Peregrine Falcon Falco peregrinus Vic (I) r b

i Sarus Crane (Urns arttigone Qld { I ) b

I Buff-banded Rail (i,iiln< alius philippcnsis Qld (4) b

I b Little Button-quail Turnix veto* NSW (2) Red-chested Button-quail Turnix pyrrkoth&rax NSW(I) l b Lathams Snipe Gallinago kardwiekii NSW(I) I b Bush Stone-curlew Htnliinus graiiarius Qld (2) I b

( I b Black-fronted Dotterel 'haradrius melanops Vic (I) Masked Lapwing Vanellus utiles Vic(l), Qld(l) I b

I b Silver (lull I Ait US noviteliollaiuliae Vic(<5)

(I) I b Little Corella Cacalua sanguinea Qld I b Sulphur-crested Cockatoo Cavatua gaterita Qld ( I r b Red-rumped Parrot Psephotus lidctttaionoius Vic (I) r b Southern Boobook Niun\ novaeaeelandiae NSW 1 1), Qld (I), Vic(3) Masked Owl Tyto novaehollandiae NSW (2) I b

I b Barn Owl I yto alba NSW |2). Qld Mi, Vic (3)

( f b Qld ( I ), SA I Grass Owl Tyto i apensis Tawny Frogniouth Podargus urigoides. Qld (2), SA (2), Vic (4) I b

t b Australian Owlet-nightjar Aegotheles cristatus Vie r I

Vol. 116(6) 1999 213 Research Reports

Table 3 continued.

Species Scientific name State (Number of individuals) Fence Wire type type

Laughing Kookaburra Dacelo novaegidneae NSW (2), Vic(l) f b Dollarbird Ewxstomus orientalis Qld(l) f b Eastern Spinebill Acanthorhynchifs NSW(l) f b tenuirostris Magpie-lark Grallina cyanoleuca Vic(l) f b Willie Wagtail RMpidura leut ophrvs Qld(l) f b

Australian Magpie Gytntiorhiua tibicen ACT (I), Old (2). SA(2), f. c, b Vic(l) na Silvereye Zosferops lateralis Vic(l) f b Common Starling Stumus vulgaris Vic(l) f b A = Includes records of 200 individuals (Jon Luly pets . comm.) and 450 individuals from Ravenshoe district, north Queensland Fence type: f = standard height farm fence, c - 6 to 8 fool cyclone wire mesh fence, na = not assessed Wire type: b = barbed wire, m = mesh.

of their bodies to pass through or retreat. Gliders that became entangled with barbed Goats were reported to become entangled wire is probably much greater than that with mesh fencing as their horns prevent reported here because many carcasses them from removing their heads from the could not be reliably identified. Moreover, wire mesh once pushed through. this report only includes those individuals Electrified strands of wire too close to the that have been found and reported. In

ground may electrocute Short-beaked Victoria, the Squirrel Glider is present in Echidnas Tachyglossus actdeatus if they only a few large reserves (e.g. Chillern attempt to push underneath the wire. Fatal National Park, Kiilawarra State Park) and collisions by various bird species with is largely restricted to small patches of mesh fencing was frequently recorded. woodland habitat or linear reserves along Wildlife also became entangled with wire roads and streams. This species has under- in non-fence situations; a Kookaburra gone a significant decline in abundance Dacelo novaeguineac was found impaled and in Victoria is classified as vulnerable on a protruding wire on a tree-guard, five to extinction (CNR 1995). The additional While-throated Needletails liirundapus threat of mortality from barbed wire fences Caudacutus and Black Swans Cygnus for small and isolated populations may be afraius were observed dead on overhead detrimental to their long-term persistence. powerlines and a small insectivorous bat The records collated from across

was impaled by a piece of wire on the top Australia indicate that the problem is wide- of a shed. spread. Records were collected from all Records of fauna entangled with barbed states of Australia, with most originating wire were received from across the from the eastern mainland states. The Australian continent. Wildlife were entan- absence of records from many areas may gled with barbed wire fences in a wide be due to a paucity of observers and entan- range of habitats, including arid and semi- glements going unreported rather than an arid rangelands, temperate woodlands, absence of entanglements. As many entan- forests, rainforest, wetlands, urban areas glements undoubtedly go unobserved and and the rural-urban interface. unreported, the results of this study musl be considered an underestimation. To Discussion realise the full extent of the problem, A localised and widespread problem observations of entanglements need to be The most commonly encountered species reported and systematically collated. Of entangled with barbed wire in the Euroa the data-bases interrogated, only the New area was the Squirrel Glider. In parts of the South Wales Wildlife Atlas was able to study area, roadside vegetation supports easily retrieve records of wildlife entan- high densities of the Squirrel Glider and gled with fences. It would be useful for other arboreal marsupials (van der Ree, other data-bases to include a specific code unptibi data). The total number of Squirrel for records that originate from such entan-

214 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

glement so that in future the extent ot" the Management implications situation can be accurately described. Habitat restoration and revegetation is a goal of many government agencies, con- Wildlife behavior servation groups and landholders. Fencing In the Euroa area. 85% of remnant vege- is essential to control stock access in order tation occurs along roads and streams, and to protect native vegetation and allow for the remaining \5% as small patches. The natural regeneration of palatable species. practice of fencing on both sides of roads, Wildlife populations in many rural areas streams and around patches places wildlife have already undergone considerable at risk of encountering a fence. The move- declines, and often exist in small isolated ment patterns and behaviour of Squirrel patches of habitat. The loss of individuals Gliders (as revealed by radiotelemetry) in by entanglement with fencing is an avoid- the Euroa area (van der Ree, unpubl. Jala) able and unnecessary additional threat. All increase the risk of becoming entan- may fencing that utilises barbed wire to con- with barbed wire fences. Squirrel gled serve or protect vegetation may conceiv- Gliders, and probably other gliders, risk ably place the fauna using that habitat at entanglement with barbed wire fencing risk of local extinction. when gliding to and from woodland vegetation in paddocks and along roads and High risk areas streams. Gliders also glide diagonally It appears from these results that areas of across comers at 90° intersections to min- potentially high risk can be identified: imise travel distance and energy demands. • Highly fragmented areas where animals These behaviours require the glider to reg- must regularly cross barbed wire fences ularly cross fencelincs. The potential for to reach different parts of their habitat. entanglement also increases as gliding dis- This is particularly apparent in the Euroa tance increases: the longer the glide, the study area and is probably true for main lower the animal will land on its target tree agricultural areas. birds, and the closer it is to the height of the • Regular flight paths for bats and barbed wire fence. and movement paths for mammals that The placement of barbed wire fences in may include areas of fragmented and activity paths of other species may also continuous habitat. increase the rate of entanglement. In north • Areas with high density populations of Queensland, barbed wire fences in fruit bat species vulnerable to entanglement such flight paths regularly cause the entangle- as marsupial gliders in the Euroa case ment and mortality of at least five species study and fruit bats in north Queensland. is of fruit bat. Removal of bats from barbed • Wetland areas where barbed wire wire fences may place humans at risk of exposed above the water level. infection with bat viruses, and extreme Fencing alternatives care should be taken when removing these For an alternative fencing style to be animals'. New' fencing erected in existing adopted, it must be of equal or greater ben- wildlife travel paths can cause the entan- efit for stock management. Depending on glement and death of many individuals. the farming enterprise, a number of alter- Many respondents reported that kangaroos natives to barbed wire are available: appear to be highly susceptible to entan- • Plain high-tensile fencing wire, if ten- glement in new fencing, and thai consider- sioncd correctly, can contain most stock. ation to wildlife movements when design- When a fence is being constructed with ing fences can minimise the problem. new materials, consider using multiple There were insufficient data to determine Strands of high tensile plain wire or plain whether mortality by collision and entan- wire and ringlock mesh (but beware glement with barbed wire is specific to age using fine mesh which may also entrap or sex in any group of species. animals or act as a barrier to movement).

• If additional security is required, investigate (he option of electric fencing instead Guidelines on how to handle bats are given ;ii barbed wire. However, beware the the following web address: http://www.bush- Of of nct.uld.edu,au/~nielissu/iTnli/ potential risk of electrocution of wildlife.

Vol. 116(6) 1999 215 Research Reports

• If using existing feneeposls, consider providing funds for fencing ami revegeta- removing the existing strands of barbed lion projects should consider these findings wire and replacing iheni with plain wire. and encourage the use of non-barbed wire In addition, consider adding an electrified alternatives as a condition for receiving strand to the fence for increased security. funding. This will reduce the amount of

• If a plain wire or ringlock mesh option barbed wire fencing being erected, and as does not offer sufficient security, an elec old fences are gradually replaced with non-

trifled strand is not feasible, and the use barbed wire alternatives, the loss of fauna of barbed wire can not be avoided., then to barbed wire fencing will be greatly consider avoiding barbed wire on the top reduced. two or three strands of the fence this Acknowledgements will reduce, but not eliminate the risk. In This is a contribution from the Landscape use wire or sheath high-risk areas, plain Ecology Research Group, Deakin University. the barbed wire inside poly-pipe to pro- The financial support of the Holsworth Wildlife

tect animals from the barbs. Research fund is gratefully acknowledged. I • Design the fence to avoid right angles thank the 120 plus people who provided me with their observations on wildlife mortality where marsupial gliders may cross diago- associated with fencing ami for discussions nally across the corner (Pig. 3), such as at about fencing requirements. Thanks also to the the intersection of two road reserves, landholders and residents of the Huroa district this woidd benefit other wildlife by cre- who initially alerted me to the problem and gave

ating extra habitat as well as reducing generously of their lime and local knowledge. I thank Andrew Bennett, Jenny Wilson and Sally fencing costs. Kimher and an anonymous reviewer for com- Future investigation should consider: ments on the manuscript. • Documenting the extent o\' the problem References more fully by government agencies and Allen. G.T., and Ramirez. P. (1990). A review ot bird wildlife rehabilitation organisations deaths on barbed wire. The Wilson iiidlrtin 102 (3). 553-558, through wildlife databases by specifically Andrews, A, (I990J. Fragmentation of habitat by roads including 'entanglement with barbed and utility corridors: a review. Australian Zoologist wire' as the cause of death. 26 (3), 3-4. Anonymous tl u<>b). Wings and prayers. The • Investigating alternative fence designs Kookaburra. Outdoor Australia August - September, 1 I hat contain stock, are cost-effective to i 24 Ci.. Hespe. IX. eieet and maintain, and do not pose a Bennett, A.F., Brown. Fuinsden. L.. Krasna. S.. and Silins. J. (199$), 'Fragments lor the threat to wildlife. future. Wildlife in llie Victorian Riverina (the • Education programs to ensure land man* Northern Plains)'. (Department of Natural Resources and l-nvimiiiiienl: Fast Melbourne.) agers are aware of the potential risk to Campbell, J. ( 1998). More on fishing line and another wildlife and are able to identify high risk barbed ha/ard. Victorian Wade? Study Croup areas or 'hot spots'. Bulletin 22 (July), 59; Government agencies and other bodies Chrisiidis, I... and Holes. W F (1994). -The taxonomy and speeies of birds ol Australia and iis territories'. (Royal Australian Ornithologists Union: Melbourne.)

CNR ( I $95}, Threatened la una in Vieioria.

I Department of Conservation and Natural Resources,) Johnson. A. (1995). A real nightmare lor little reds. Nw 141m Newsletter of the Friends of the I- or North Flying 100 m Foxes 2 (October), Johnson. A., and Thiriel. I). (1998). Barbed wire fences and living loves don't mix. Animals Today February - April.'in-ll. Krake, Ci. (1991). Observation 0t a dynaslid beetle impaled on barbed wire Victorian Entomologist 21. 61. Land For Wildlife (1994). Untitled Land fm WMtfe 1 2 ) 100m tfews i M. Menkhorsl. P.W. (ed.) (1995). 'Mammals of Vieioria: Fig. 3, Fencing diagonally at a 90° Corner Distribution, ecology and conservation'. (Oxford reduces the amount of Fencing materials University Press: South Melbourne.) required, provides additional huhitat for Nero. R..W. (1993). Northern Hying squirrel and red bat eaughl on barbed wire. fUtic .lax 51. 215-216, v/ildlife, and potentially minimises the risk of Plait. S.. and Tetntu. I. (1994). Fencing wildlife lubi entanglement by wildlife- 1 lal. Land lor Wildlile Note Number 2 .'. p. 4,

216 The Victorian Naturalist Research Reports

(Department ol Conscrvalion and Natural Book ol Australian Mammals'. (The Australian Resources,) Museum: Sydney.)

Quni D.Ci. ( 1995}. Population ecology i of the Squirrel Suckling, G.C. ( 1984). Population ecology of the sugar Glider {Petmrus notpU ends) and the Sugar Glider glider. Petunias hrevkeps, in a system of fragmented \P hreviceps) (Marsupialia, Pctauridao ai habitats. Australian midlife Research 11,49-75 Lunebiuncis Creek, on the central north coast of Teschendorf, .I.W., and Johnson. C I . ( t997) I one- New South Wales. Wildlife Research 22.451-505. eared owl snaked on barbed- wire fence. Blue Jay Russell, R. ( 1980). 'Spotlight on Possums'. (University 55. 200.

o! Queensland Press: Si Lucia. 1 Queensland.) van der Ree, R. (I ><>7|. Barbed wife a hazard to Stratum. R. (1983). 'The Australian Museum Complete wildlife. Landfoi W i hili-fc News 3(6), II.

One Hundred Years Ago

The Blackhsh - Some interesting notes on the habits of the Biackfish, Gadopsis gracilis. McCoy, appear in the Australasian of 25th November, which, though written from an angling point of view, are worthy of attention, and possibly criticism", especially by country naturalists. Biackfish can almost be claimed as purely Victorian fish, and even here are nearly confined to the southern streams. The only other habitat of the genus is Northern Tasmania. Professor McCoy recognizes three species, and remarks,

in "The Prodromus of Victorian Zoology'*, vol. L, p.39, that the colour is very variable.

Large Biackfish are undoubtedly scarce, owing to the many enemies they now have to encounter, and are only to be found in the upper reaches oi the streams in the most unfrequented portions of the colony. In the early days of Melbourne fish o[' 6 lbs. to 8 lbs. in weight were of common occurrence, but one hears of such fish but seldom now. One was taken in the Cockatoo Creek, near Seville, in January last, which weighed 7!4 lbs., and it is on record that some twenty years ago a fish was caught in the Ringarooma River, Tasmania, which turned the scale at 13 lbs. 4 oz. In seeking for Biackfish the size of the stream does not seem to matter; in fact, fine fish are often obtained in the smallest streams. They are very shy fish in daylight, seeking the shelter of sunken logs,

stones. &c, and though with greal care they may be caught in the daytime, especially if the water be discoloured by rain, the best time to secure them is in the brief period between sunset and darkness. They can sometimes be taken all night, but another good time is at just before or at daybreak. The writer, though in favour of protection for the

Biackfish. states that the present close season, from 31st August to 15th December, is

of no practical use, as in the first place it is rarely observed, and secondly his experience leads him to believe that Biackfish spawn nearly all the year round, as he has taken the fish containing spawn in January, February. March, and April. He suggest that instead of a close season a minimum weight of half a pound should be adopted, and so give the small fish a chance to grow and provide sport worthy of the fisherman.

From The Victorian Naturalist XVI, p. 130-131, December 1899.

New Assistant Editor

I am pleased to welcome Alistair Evans as Assistant Editor for The Victorian Naturalist. Alistair has worked on the journal every week for almost three years as a desk-top publisher, preparing articles for the printer. He has also been a regular proof- reader during this time.

Alistair is a PhD student at Monash University, where his field of research is the functional morphology of teeth and cranial features in mierochiropteran bats.

I am looking forward to working with Alistair on your journal, where his expertise in computing, desk-top publishing and statistics will be welcome.

Merilvn Grey

Vol. 116(6) 1999 217 Contributions

Recent Foraminifera and Ostracoda from Erith Island, Bass Strait

K.N.Beli'andJ.V. Neil-

Abstract The foraminiferal and ostracodal faunas from a sample at 15 m depth at Erith Island, Bass Strait, are described. The foraminiferal fauna consisted of 38 species; notable live species are Cribrohulimina polystoma (Parker and Jones), Rosaiina irregularis (Rhumbler) and a spicular test form of Haplophragttioides pnsillus Collins. There were 37 species of ostracodes present; notable species include Papillatabairdia elongata McKenzie, Reyment and Reyment, Pterygocytlwreis sp. aff. P. velivola (Brady) and a new species of Eucythere (Rotundracythere). The fauna has some similarities

lo thai found on the Victorian coast. (The Victorian Naturalist 1 16 (6), 1999. 218-227.)

Introduction

Although the foraminiferal fauna of the from 15 metre depth in West Cove, Erith Victorian coastline is fairly well known, Island, collected by this group, was avail-

little research has been undertaken on the able for study. It consisted of a fine sand faunas of Bass Strait or of the surrounds of with only a small amount of silt-sized parti- the Bass Strait Islands. The fossil ostra- cles and with some algal fragments, broken code faunas of the coastline have recently bryozoa, small gastropods, foraminiferans been the subject of a number of papers and ostracodes. The sample had been pre- (McKenzie et al. 1990, 1991. 1993; Neil served in 70% alcohol upon collection. 1994). but the living faunas have received This note deals with the foraminiferans limited attention (Bell et al. 1995; Neil and ostracodes found near Erith Island in 1993: Yassini and Jones 1995). the Kent group; responsibility for the vari- c The Kent Group (39 29' S, 147°20* E). ous taxa lie with KNB for the foraminifer- which consists of three main islands (Deal. ans and JVN for the ostracoda. Erith and Dover) and two smaller isolated Results ones (North East and South West Islands), Foraminiferans lies approximately halfway between After staining with Rose Bengal (a proto- Wilsons Promontory and Flinders Island in plasmic stain) and washing, a total fauna Bass Strait (Fig. I). The group lies on the of 32 species of live foraminiferans and 6 Bassian Rise in water depths of about 54-64 species as dead specimens was found metres (30-35 fathoms) (Jennings 1959). (Table I. dead species marked *). With the The immediate seafloor surrounding the exception of Carterina spiculotesta islands is mainly barren sand swells but in (Carter), the other species have been previ- the more protected areas near the islands ously recorded from shallow waters around there is a rich growth of algae, sponges, the Victorian coastline (Apthorpe 1980; ascidians. sea urchins and encrusting and Bell and Druryl992: Collins 1974; Pan solitary corals (Kuiter 1981; Wiedenmeyer 1932, 1945). Comparison with Tasmanian 1989). Some aspects of the history, plants, coastal faunas is not possible as the Recent animal life and general environments of the Tasmanian faunas have not. as yet. been Kent Group are given by Jones et al. ( 1970). studied although the faunas from Port Marginson and Murray-Smith (1969) and Dalrymple and the River Tamar are similar Mullet and Murray-Smith (1967). to those of the Victorian coast (Bell 1996). During late March. 1981, a small expedi- As species descriptions and illustrations tion of SCUBA divers visited the Kent can be found in the above cited references, Group to study the marine fauna (Kuiter and in Albani 1981). One sample of bottom sediment (1979), only selected species are commented upon here.

1 Honorary Associate. Department of Natural Sciences. Haplophragmoides pusillus Collins, Museum of Victoria. GPO Box 666E. Melbourne. 1974 Victoria 3001. (Fig. 2A.B). Honorary Research Associate. Scientific and This species has been previously recorded Industrial Research Facility. La Trobe University. Bendico. Victoria 3550. from Port Phillip Bay (Collins. 1974).

218 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Fig. 1. Locality map showing position of the sample studied (W) from Erith Island.

Mallacoota Inlet {Bell and Drury 1992) in Textularia sp. (Fig. 3F). Victoria, and the River Taniar, Tasmania Many specimens oi' a small, ovate, com- (Beli 1996). The specimens from Frith pressed, biscrial textulariid were present. Island (although similar in size, shape and In side view the periphery is either chamber arrangement to typical specimens smoothly tapered or zigzag due to slightly from these other localities) differ in wall protruding chambers. It appears to be an differs composition in that the wall is composed of undescribed species. This taxon the fine quartz grains with various sized nee- from T. tubutosa Zheng in not having dle-like sponge spicules arranged roughly overhanging chambers or the domed aper- parallel to the coiling direction (Fig. 3B). tural face of that species (as figured by and they are The test surface is fairly smoothly finished. Loeblich and Tappan (1994)), Egger. It is to The difference in wall construction may be not as fistulose as T. horrida paper a reflection of the large sponge fauna in the be described in full in a forthcoming area (Wiedenmeyer 1989). This spicular on the agglutinated foraminiferan fauna of deeper waters. form of //. pusilius seems to be identical to the Victorian that described from shallow water off the Siphotextularia sp. cf. S, mestayeri Vclla, Xisha Islands, Guangdong Province, China, 1957. 1 as by Zheng (1979: 201, pi. 1. figs 10, 1 ) Several small (0.3 mm long) but typical (_ 'ribrostomoides spiculotesta. specimens of this taxon are described here. Haplophragmoides australensis Albani, The test is compressed, tapering with flat 1978. lateral faces and square edges; the walls Rare dead specimens were found in the are finely agglutinated and the aperture is a sample. This species differs from //. pusil- short slit perpendicular to the final suture. as ius in having a coarsely agglutinated test. Vella (1957) described the species hav- slit but Loeblich It has previously only been reported from ing an oblique aperlural Yassini 1994) figured specimens from New South Wales (Albani 1978; and Tappan ( and Jones 1995). the Sahul Shelf which have a perpendicu-

219 Vol. 116(6) 1999 )

Contributions

:i '~ Table 1. Lisl oi foraminiferans found at Eriti i Island ( indicates species found only as dead specimens); % given ;is percentage of live loramini feran fauna; P, indicates presence but percentage < 2%

Haplophragmoides pusilia Collins, 1974 I' M. labiosa ILansiralensis Alhani. 1978* schauinslandi (Rhumblcr, 1906) ( 'ribrobidimina polystoma M. oceanica (Cushman, 1932)

(Parker and Jones, 1865) 15% Spirillina vivipara Fihrunberg, 1 843 Clavulina tnulticamerata Buliminella elegantissima Chapman ,1909 \2% (d'Orbigny, 1839) Textularia agglutinas d'Orbigny, 1839 P Bulimina marginata d'Orbigny, 1826* T.sagimta Defrance, 1824 P B&livina sp. cf. B. pseudoplicata /sp. 15% Heron-Allen and Garland, 1930 5% Siphotextularia sp. Brizalina cacozela (Vella, 1957) P tf.S.mestoyeri Vella, 1957 P Rugobolivinella pendens (Collins 1974)* Gaudryina ccmv£xa(Karrer, 1865) I* Elphidium mace!turn Trochammina serosa Parr, 1950 P (Michel and Moll. 1798) 6% I rituMs sp. P Planulina bassensis Collins, 1974 5% Spiroloculina antillarum d'Orbigny, 1826* Patellinella inconspicua (Brady, 1884) P Quinqueloculina moynensis Glabratetla patelliformis (Brady. 1884) P Collins. 1953 P Lathellodisi orbis dimidiatus

Q, poeyanum victoriensis (Jones and Parker, 1862) I* Collins, 1974 Rosalind 193 1% anglica (Cushman. 1 3% Q, subpolygona Pan, 1943 p A*, irregularis (Rhumbler, 1906) 5% Triloculina 5* oblonga ( I (Montagu, 1803) P 'ytnbaloporetta bradyi Cushman ^ 1 /. sabutosa Collins, 1974 P Acervulina inhaerens Schultze, 1854 '/'. trigonula Lamarck. 1804 1% Cibicidella variabilis (d'Orbigny, 1826)* MHioUneUa australis Parr, 1932 8% Caricrina spiculotesta (Curler, 1877)*

Fig, 2. A, B. Haplophragmoides pusiilus, A xl20. B x600. C. Clavulina tnulticamerata, x45. I), riama'ina bassensis, xl50.

220 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

lar slit. Until this point is clarified I have Gaudrvina conve.xa (Karrer, 1865) (Fig. not made a definite specific identification. 3B). A common species in the sample: speci- Trochammina sorosa Parr, 1950 (Fig. 3E). mens show quite variable chamber shape This species was described by Parr and overlap of chambers. This species to Recent in ( 1950) from off Maria Island, east coast of ranges from the Upper Eocene

Tasmania, in depths of 122- 1 55m. Hedley the Australasian region (Burdett et al. et al, (1967) have reported it from the 1963). The 'Challenger' expedition record- intertidal zone in New Zealand, and it is ed it from East Moncouer Island, Bass known from Mallacoota Inlet, Victoria Strait (Brady 1884). (Bell and Drury 1992). The present speci- Clavniina rmlHcamerata Chapman. 1909. mens are somewhat flattened compared (Fig. 2C). with the more typical conical form. This is a common species in the sample and growth stages from just the initial tri- Cribrohniimina polystoma (Parker and angular section up to large specimens with Jones. 1865) (Fig. 3 A). nine linear chambers are present. Records This is a common live species in the of this species are from shallow waters fauna, with both the megalospheric and alonu the Victorian coast and the River mierospheric generation forms present. In Tamar (Chapman 1907: Parr 1932: Collins many cases the aperture was found to be 1974: Bell 1996). covered with sand and algal fragments which may represent collapsed feeding Miliotinella labiosa var. schaiiinslanili cysts. Later chambers may cover all of the (Rhumbler, 1906). earlier test so giving rise to a flattened. Rare specimens of this variable growing subglobular shape. form of M. labiosa occurred. Initially the This species has an interesting distribu- chambers resemble M. labiosa but the later tion: it has not been reported from chambers are straight or curved in a series Victorian shallow waters but is found in of irregular chambers. It has been recorded shallow waters of Spencer and St. Vincent from Victorian waters (Parr 1932, 1945). Gulfs. South Australia, [Cann and Gostin (Cushman. 1932) 19X5: Cann and Murray- Wallace 1986; Miiiotinella oceanica (Fig. Cann et al, 1993: who ail refer to it as C 3D. Typical specimens of this widespread mixta (Parker and Jones >|; in shore sands Pacific and Indian Ocean shallow water at Glenelg and Hardwicke Bay, South were present. Collins (1974) Australia (Parr 1932): from sediments of species it from Bass Strait and Port 550 m depth off Cape Nelson. Victoria recorded Phillip as Quinqueloculina bamgwanathi (Parr 1932): and in the Great Australian 1945, but Ponder (1974) has shown Q. Bight (Chapman and Parr 1935) in depths Parr hara^wanafhi to be a synonym of M. less than 165 m. However, none oi these oceanica. reports distinguish living from dead speci- is also known from the mens. C. polystoma Quinqueloculina moynensis Collins. 1953. Spencer Gulf (Cann Holocene of northern Rare specimens of this small, quadrate and Murray-Wallace 1986: as C. mixta) Quinqueloculina occurred. It is common in Pliocene of the Adelaide Plains and the Victorian Bass Strait beach sands (Collins Cowandilla. South Australia bore al 1974). (Howchin 1936). It has also been found in the Upper Pliocene beds at Tailem Bend. Quinqueloculina poeyanum victoriensis South Australia (pers. obs.). Parr (1932) Collins, 1974. has discussed this species in detail and This subspecies is characteristic of high showed that mixta represents the megalos- energy environments (Collins 1974). It dif- pheric generation and polystoma the fers from the low energy, sheltered environ- mierospheric generation of the same ment form. Q. poeyanum poeyanum, in hav- species. ing narrower, straighter chambers and in the narrow aperture with a long, straight tooth.

221 Vol. 116(6)1999 Contributions

Fig, 3. A. Cribrobitlimina polystoma, x45. It. Gaudryina convexa, x45, C, I). Triloculina sabulosa,

(' v I SO; I) xl20. E. Trocharnmina serosa. xlKO. K. Textularia sp., xl 10. (;. Acervulina inhaerens, II- x42 Bolivina sp. cf, fl pseudoplicata, xl80. I. Elphidium macellum, x90. .1. Triloculina trigonuldy x42. K. Kosalina irregularis, x90. L. Miliolinella oceanica, x75.

The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

Table 2. List of ostracoda found at Erith Island.

Arcacythere hornihrooki Yassini & Jones, 1995 Mckenzieartis portjackonensis (McKenzie, Baltraella keiji Yassini & Jones, 1995 1967) Bythocypris reniformis Brady, 1880 Microcythere dimorpha Hartmann, 1980 Callistocythere hermaguiensu Yassini & Munseyclla pmcaxa Yassini & Jones, 1995 Jones. 1995 Neonesides spp. CaUistocxthere dorsotuherculata Hartmann, Orlovibairdia sp. 1982 Papiflatahairdia ehmqata McKenzie, Reymenl Caltistacythere hieroglypica Yassini & Jones. & Reyment. 1990 1995 Parado.xostoma crustaecolum Hartmann. 19X0 C'afti story there keiji (Hartmann 1978) Paradoxostoma geratdtonense Hartmann. 1978 CaUistocxthere pun McKenzie. 1967 Parado.xostoma horrocksense Harlmann. 1978 Cypridiua sp. Parado.xostoma schomikovi Yassini & Jones, Cytheretta sp. 1995 Cytherura sp. Paraiu-sniea sinusaipulcnsis (Harlmann, 1979) Eucythere (Rotundrai ythcrej sp. nov. Procxtherds (Serratocxthere) densuireticidata Hemicytherura scaholmensis McKenzie, 1967 Harlmann. 1981 Kangarwa sp. cf. K. radiata Hornibrook. 1952 Pseudohemicxtheinlcis oniafissima Yassini & Keijcyoidea keiji (McKenzie. 1967) Jones, 1995 Lept'Hvthere generodubia (McKenzie. Revment Ptcrx»ocxtliereis sp. all. P. vclivola (Brady, & Reyment, 1990) IXX0)

Loxoconchella putehra McKenzie. 1967 Seimcytherura fe/mireticulata McKenzie. 1 967

Loxoeoncha australis Brady, 1880 Tasmanocxpris dietmarkexseri ( Hartmann,

Loxoeoncha cumulus (Brady. 1880) 1 979) Loxoeoncha villi McKenzie, 1967 Xestoleheris cedunaeusi\ Harlmann. 1980

Triloculina sabulosa Collins, 1974 (Fiss irregularis they are transluscenl. Parr

3C D). ( 1950) has suggested that R. angelica is The small specimens placed in this laxon only a growth form of/?, globularis and are more slender than the typical Port should possibly not be separately distin-

Phillip specimens and also the test usually guished. Collins (1974) recorded it from has fewer larger grains in its construction. Port Phillip Bay and nearby Bass Strait. The length of the neck is variable which Planulina hassensis Collins, 1974 (Fig. may be an age characteristic. 2D).

Rosalina irregularis (Rhumbler. 1906) This small species is very common in the (Fig.3K). sample, and is easily identified by its The specimens present at Erith Island are slightly convex/concave shape and evolute very similar to those figured by Rhumbler whorls; most specimens have a while last

( 19*06) and Hedley et at. (1967) from the chamber with other chambers pale brown. New Zealand intertidal zone, in having It was originally described from the normal, regular 1-2 whorls and then irregu- entrance to Port Phillip Bay (Collins 1974). larly arcuate, flattened chambers with a Rugohotivinelfa pendens (Collins, 1974}. narrow, thin peripheral rim. The rim is Only dead specimens were found in the quite fragile and often broken producing a sample. Originally described from Port ragged edge to the test. Parr (1945) had Phillip, this species is now known to be specimens, from sands at Barvvon Heads, widespread along the southern Australian which he referred to Discorhis globularis coast, ranging from Fucla, Western vat. anglica Cushman but which are very Australia, to Port Phillip Bay (Hayward similar to R. irregularis from Erith Island.. 1990) and from the River Tamar,

Rosalina anglica (Cushman, 1931 ). Tasmania (Bell 1996). The tests are usually deformed by having Acervulina inhaerens Schultze. 1854 (Fig. grown about a stem or leaf of alga or sea- 3G). grass. As used here R. anglica is restricted This is a common species frequently to specimens which have 1-2 regular whorls found attached to seagrass fronds and so and then a series of grossly deformed cham- shows a variety of shapes. bers, usually also slightly inflated. These later chambers are opaque whereas in R.

Vol. 116(61 1999 223 Contributions

Bolivina sp. el , li pseudoplicata Heron- variety of callistocytherids, There arc very Allen and Earland, t930(Fig. ^11). lew cylhcroplcronids as is characteristic ol Although the tesi surface oi the speci- shallow marine and inner shell assemblages. mens from Erilh Island show a randomly On Ihe oilier hand, there is a complete reticulate pattern they do rrol clearly show absence of hemicylherids and trachylcbcri- the i haracteristic two longitudinal ridges dids which are often very numerous in fossil oi /». pseudoplicata. The figured specimen faunas from these environments. shows incipient ridges on I he final Iwo A detailed analysis of Ihe ecological chambers only. implications of ihe fauna, and a description

of the ne w s p e c i c s o\ /: mxth c r v ( 'anemia spiculotesta (Carter, 1877). (RotUftdtacythere) is being prepared, to One specimen of ih is unusual species was accompany Ihe comparisons with assem- recovered bnl, as internally il only stained a blages from Ihe beach at Wynyard (Fossil pale pink, was questionably alive when col Bluff), Tasmania, and al Twofold Bay, lei led. The specimen has only seven cham- New Soulh Wales. bers. The wall of Hie chambers show the typical elliptical, parallel arranged, secreted Papillatabairdia elangata McKen/ic. panicles, bill no evidence of the Hal spread Reyment and Reyment, IWO (Tig. 4E). in! 1 apron as described by Loeblich and 'This species is characteristic of an esiuar-

Tappan (1955), Previous records arc all ine to inner shelf environment. Il was tropical subtropical (Loeblich and Tappan recorded by Hartmann (I97X) from a

1964), Collins (1958) recorded il from Ihe deposit of coral debris in a pool on the reed

( rreal Barrier Keel. oft Heron Island, Queensland (one specimen) as BytkOcyprts sp., and initially Ostracodes described by MeKen/ie el al, (IWO) from No distinction between live and dead the Pleistocene deposits of Goose Lagoon specimens was possible with the ostracodes Drain in southwest Victoria. Yassini and in the sample, though the one large speci- Jones ( 1995) record it from Lake Macquarie ( men oi 'ypridina sp. is stained and includes and Broken Bay in New South Wales. Its the soli pails. A total ol over 4(H) specimens occurrence in the Erith Island fauna sug- was picked, < aiapaces and separated valves gests its persistence in a cooler environ- were counted as individual specimens. Only ment, in spile of its origin in warmer identifiable broken specimens larger than Pleistocene waters and Recent occurrences MIS ot a whole valve were counted. The in warm temperate and subtropical loca- fauna comprised 37 species from a total of tions. Only one specimen was found. 2X genera (Table 2). There was a very high proportion ol carapaces (over 75%). Xestoteberis cedunaensis Hartmann. 1980. Detailed comparisons with faunas from the This is the most common species in the northern Tasmanian coast ami the south- fauna. Il has been recorded by llarlmann eastern coasi ol New Soulh Wales are not (1980); Yassini and Jones (19K7, 1995) possible here, but such a comparative study from saline lakes, lagoons and ihe inter- is in preparation. tidal /.one. Its abundance in this fauna is The fauna is typical ol a shallow marine to somewhat unusual because o\' the more mnei shelf environment, with a lew unusual marine aspect of the assemblage though il characteristics. The dominant species are may have been transported from the inter- Xestoleherifi vedunaenis, Eucythere tidal /one in Ihe Kent Group. (Rotwidratythere) sp,. Neonesidea sp- and Procythereis Laxoconcha cumulus, 'The species of (Serratacythere) densuiretic* data llarlmann, 1981 (Fig. 41). / a, where (Rotundracyrkere) is new, and ii This species is Found typically in the is unusual lo find such large numbers of this inlerlidal /.one of sheltered embaymenls genus in a fauna in this region. Oilier fea- and ihe entrance channels of coastal tures of Ihe launa include Ihe variely ol' para lagoons. Only lour specimens were found do\osiomalid species; ihe presence of the but this occurrence reinforces ihe inner species Ptetygncyttereis sp. all. /'. vetivoia shell signal of the fauna. which was described from the (lull ol

( 'arpentaria ( Yassini ct al 1993) and quite a

224 The Victorian Naturalist Contribution.

x33 Fig. 4. A. Loxoconcha cumulus, x55 B. Tasmanocypris dietmarkeyseri, x26 C. Neonesidea sp., x44 . velivola, x44 E. Papillatabairdia elongate, F, Eucythere there) (Rotundracythere) n. sp., x66 H. Paranesidea sinusaquilensis, x44 I. Procythereis (Serratocy Callistocythere keiji, densuireticulata, x44 J. Semkytherura illertu x66 K. Loxoconcha gilli, x55 L. x55 M. Munseyella punctata, x66 N. Arcacythere hornibrookU *58 (). Cytherura sp., x55.

Vol. 116(6) 1999 225 ( Ontnhiuions

Eucythere (R&tundracythere) n. sp. (Fig. Discussion

4F, G). It is not customary to present data from The second most abundant species in the just one sample. However, we feel that the fauna, Rotundracythere n. sp. differs from dearth of knowledge of the microfauna of Ihe only other Recent species of this genus, Bass Strait and some of the interesting tf. hassiana Yassini and Jones 1995, in ostracod and foraminiferan occurrences in being more sirongly ornamented and hav- this sample from Erith Island warrants ing a more rounded dorsal margin. R. reporting. hassiana is described as being 'rare in Although the Victorian shallow marine

Bass Strait' (Yassini & Jones 1995). Two foraminiferal fauna is fairly well document- species of this genus from ihe Eocene and ed that of the Tasmania)! side of Bass Strait Oligocene are figured by McKenzie et al. is almost totally unrescarched but with the {1991, 1993). The presence of the genus exception of C. polystoma, the oilier species usually suggests shallow, open, marine occur widely in Victorian shallow marine conditions, rather than the inlertidal zone faunas (see references already given); C, favoured by many other species in the polystoma has never been reported in assemblage. Victorian shallow waters nor from Bass

Strait so its occurrence is significant. It may Ncotwsidca spp. (Fig. 4C). be that currents flowing from the Great Although there are 25 specimens of this Australian Bighl eastwards (Gibbs et al. genus in the fauna, they probably represent 1986; Tomczak 1985) transport specimens more than one species, of which N. aus- from the South Australian Gulfs into Bass tralis (Chapman 1914) is the most com- Strait and they there find suitable habitats mon. The genus is generally representative near the Bass Strait Islands (it was not of shallow, open marine conditions. lound al East Moncouer Island by Ihe Loxoconcha cumulus (Brady, 1X80) [Jug. 'Challenger' expediiion (Brady 1884)). This 4A). point warrants further sampling in the shal- Loxoconcha cumulus is Ihe most com- low areas about other Bass Strait Islands.

mon of Ihe three species of the genus in the The ostracode fauna is characteristic of a

fauna. The others are /.. is austral Brady cool-water, shallow marine, or inter I i da J 1880, and L. gUli McKenzie 1967 dig. environment. Most of the commonly occur- 4K). Of the range of environments ring species of Neoncsidca and favoured by Loxoconcha in this region, L. Callistocythcrc are cosmopolitan and do not cumulus is generally found in estuaries in reflect narrow environmental constraints. association with seagrasses. Loxoconcha However, Xestolehcris ccdu/iaensis, gilli, which favours an open marine envi- although found in the intertidal zone, ronment, and /.. anstralis, lagoons, estuar- favours esluarinc or lagoonal conditions and ies and Ihe shallow shelf, are both quite Procylhcreis (Serraiocythere) densuiretiett- rare in this assemblage. lata has similar preferences. Loxoconcha cumulus, which is common in ihe assem- Pterygocytherels sp. aft. P. velivola blage, is another species favouring estuarine (Brady, 1880) (Fig. 4D). conditions in association with seagrasses. Only one specimen occurs in this assem- This range of conditions suggested by the blage. It has close affinities with ihe speci- species o\' the fauna is consistent with the mens figured by Yassini el al, (1993) from location of the sample. Ihe Gulf of Carpentaria. This genus has not been identified previously in fossil or References Albani, A.D. (I l>78>. Recent faunas from southern Australia. Recent fcrarainifera of an esiuanne enviromncni in Broken Hay, NSW. Australian Journal Callisteytherids (four species) form a sig- oj'Marin? and Freshwater Research 29, 355-398, nifieanl proportion of the assemblage. This Mbani, A I). (1979). Recent shallow waier I'oraminileridu from New Soulli Wales. Australian genus is generally indicative of shallow Marine Sciences Association Hancibctok Noj. 57 p. Apihorpe. marine conditions. The Paradoxostomaiids M, £1980). lorammileral disirilmtion in the estuarine Gippsland Lakes system* Proceetfitm the present (four species), although not numer- of Royal Society of \ wtaria$l< 207-232, ically common, also give a clear indication Bell. K. N. (1996). l-oraminit'ernn faunas of ihe River I 'amnr and IVul Dalrymple. Tasmania: A preliininan of this kind of environment. study. R& '>i'l.\ oj(the Queen Victoria Museum 102 25$ Bell, K.N. and Drury. S.R. 0992). The loranimileral

226 The Victorian Naturalist Contributions

fauna of Mallaeoota Inlet. IZasi Uippsland. Victoria, in Bass Strait. The \ U tartan Natwvfis? 9$, IS4 IS7. The \ u torian Naturalist 10M. 7-16. Loeblieh. A.R. and lappa n, II. U955). Revision ol some Bell. K.N., Burn, R, and Neil, J.V, £1995), Reeeui Recent forammiforal genera. Smithsonian Institution, foraminiferal. oslracodul ami mollusean I'atmal Miscellaneous Cotlecnvm 128. 1-37, changes in a short core Irom Corner Inlet. Victoria, 1 oebltch, A.k. ami Tap pan, II [1964). ["realise o1 77),' Vu torian Naturalist 112, 72 78 Invertebrate Paicontology. Part C, Protista 2. [he Brady, MB. | I8S4) Report on loramindera dredecd h\ R.C.Moore (edi. Geological Society of America and II M.S. Challenger Lxpedilum the during years 1873 University of Kansas Press, 2 vols 900 p. 1X76. Reportnn the Stiinttfn- Results tiff I of voyage oj opblich . A.k. and Pappan, II. [ 1994). Poraminilera o\ the

// M S. ChallftiKtr. Zoolog) 9,(2 Vols), IS 1 4, 115 pis. Sahul Shellainl Timor Sea. t'ttshman Foundation for Burden. I.D.J., Medley, R.H.. Monnbrook. N.deB, and i oraminifera! Resean h, Spa iai Publivaticui'M, 1*661,

Hurdle, i 1 >. CM. 963 Gaudryina convex** (Karrei I MeKen/ie, K.Ci. (1969), Notes on the paradoxostom 1865 i pper Eocene to Recent; an example of \aria- atidsi //; J.W.Neale (eih The Faxonomy, Morphology tion and synonymy among honuniniteia. Xcw and Zealand eeoktgy oj Ret i hi Ostracods* pp4S-66.

Journal ofScience 6, 5 1 3-530. Meken/ie. k.(i.. Reyment, k.A and Reyment, E.R. Guilt, J, II. and GoMin. V.A. (1985). Coastal planl/sedi- (1990). Pleistocene and Recent Ostracoda Irom the mem donation, sedimentary fades and forominiferal Goose Lttgooo Drain, Victoria and Kingston, South biofacies of the St. KiUla Formation ai Bon Cm lei. Australia. Bulletin oj the Geaiogh ui Institutions of the

South Australia. Transactions I I oj lh$ Royal Society of nivet tiry oj ppsala n.s l(». 1 -46. South Australia 10*, 121-142, Meken/ie, K.G-, keymeni. k.A ami Reymeui. J. II. l Cann, and Murray Wallace, CV. (19R6) Holbcene I kal Wh. Eocene-Oligocene O&trttcodti frorn South distribution and amino acid raccmisation of the benthic Australia and Vieioria. Australia. Revista E&ptfQofa ,/c

loraminder Mawilina fnitletli, norlhern Spencer Gull. PaieontafagiaG, 1 J5-175. Sooth Australia. Ah herirtga 10. 45-54, Meken/ie. K.(i.. keymem. k \ and keymeni. E.R, (1993).

i Cann. J.H., Bcjpcrip, VP. Goslin, V.A and Riu ! Eocene Osiraeoda from the Browns Creek Clays at

t (993), Contemporary benthic foraunnileta in Cull Si Browns (reek and Castle Cove, Victoria. Australia. Vincent. South Australia, and a refined Late Re\'istd isp'innhi de Pateontologia&, 75-1 16.

Plcisioeene sea-level history, Australian fourual oj Martinson, M.,\. K un\ Miirrav-Smiili. S. (,1969). Iinihei

Earth SWe/itv 40, 197-211 investigations in the Kent Group, The \ tct&rfan Chapman, F. IMnn. Recent Foraminifera of Victoria VflfMr^f5r84 !39 150

Some littoral gatherings. Journal tht Qtteketi Mullen, .1 il. and Mim.i\ Smith S (1967). Htst/oottng MicrascopicalCluh 10: 117-146. on a Bass Strati Island; jw investigation n| Dovei

Chapman, P. and Parr. W.J. (1935). iMHannnilera ami Island in the Keni ( iroup fftc * U totiati Naturalist 84. osiraeoda irom soundings made In the trawler 239-250, Neil, Bonthoipe in ihe Great Australian Bight, fournai I J.V. (1993). Comparisons between some Middle

five Royal Society ofWestt i I I tliazl, 1*7. Miocene and Recent southeastern Australian ostracode

Collins. A.C. l 1958). Great Barrier Reel Expedition assemblages, In K.G.McKen£io and P..I. Junes u-dst 1928-29, Foianiimtera. Report 6(6), 335-4 16, O&tracoda in the Earth and Life Sciences, pp 277 28R, Collins, AC. (1974), Port Phillip Surve> 195 Neil. J.V. (1994). Miocene Ostracodd of the lorannuiierida. Memoirs of the National Museum of Trachyleberidae and Henuevthendae Irom the Muddy Victoria 35, 1 61. Creek aiea. soulhwest Victoria. Memoirs pf the hi i libb c.l .. Cowdcll, R A and Longmure, A.R. 1986. Museum aj \ n torid. 54. I l Seasonal varialiou in densily patterns in relation to Parr. VV..I, (I'M?!, Vielonan ami South Ausii.ilian slial Bass Sitati cascade. Australian Journal of Marine and low-waier loi-.miuiifera. Pail I. Proceedings oj the 1-14, freshwater Research 37 21 \ Royai Sot tet\ of\ h toria 44.

Kallmann, G. (1978). Ztu Kenniius des Huliiorals de Pan, W.J, (l#45), Recent 1 orainiuilera Irom Batvvon

australischan kusien unlet he sonde re i Heads. Victoria. Proceedings oj the Royal Society oj -'' '/ Berueksichlit'utii: der Polyehaeicn uud Ostracoden. I ictoria U i

i ( Istractiden Podotnpida (i \v. Pan w J. 1 1950). Foraminifcra. British iuxtratian and Tiel Der Get Ordnung t /'' Midler. 1894 dor in>pisi;h-s!ihinipisL'lv..'h We-.iku.sle \>u Zealand Kntarcfic Resean h / tpedition !fl

J ! l|

- > Aii-.tralien- (Zwischen Derby in \orden uml Perth mi 193) Report W BiA.ol. and Bot.)5, 1 ! ,.'. '' revision Australian i M i, \fitti llunfti n dt m Hamhm j/j< hen Ponder, R.W. (1974). A ol two Zatttogim ': Wu&eum and Ittstitut 75, 63-219. Spec ies o! WilioliifH.i. Join ihll of I oiamin/l, r.tl

Harlmarm. 0. 1 1 980). Die ostracoden dci Ordnung ffi search 4, 126-1 3K,

I,. Podocopa (i.W. Mueller. 1894. dor warmicrnperieten Rhumbier, \ 1906) Foraminifercn vop Laysan und den in mill subrropiseh-rropisehen KusleruiOsehmitc der Sin! ( hathani Lnseln. Zoologist fti i lahresb* rh \hteilunft uud SudosUtUSte Australians (zwischen Ccdunu im Hystematische M,2U%0,

\\ L-sieii and Lakes Entrance mi Osten). Mittctlungen i i /,.ik. M. 1985. Bass Strait watei cascade during den Hanihurgi\chen Zonlogischen Museum uml winter I9SI.I antm ntal ShelfResearch*: 255-27S. Instttut 78*97-149. VViia, P, (1957). Studies m New Zealand Foraminifera. Hayward, R D. (1990). Taxonomy, paicoriiogcograrihy \.-ir Zealand Geological Survey, Pateantolftgii'ol and evolutionary historj ol the Bolivinellidac Bulletin 28. 6i r

I i i i linmileridai. New Zealand Geological Survey Wiedeiinieyei, 1989). DemOspongjae il'orilera) Irom PalaeontaioRix al Bulletin 63. 132 p. norlhern Bass Snail, Southern Australia. Memoir* <>/

,i \ I !-\2 , tiw Short, 50. u Rll . Hurdle, CM. and Burden. I.O.J. (1967), m oj ictoria l The marine Fauna ol New Zealand; luiertidal Vassnii. I. and Jones. B(i. il >X7). Osiraeoda in I ake

' lorarniMileia ot die Coraliittti officinalis Zone h lllawana: l.nvHi.raueiital lactors, assemhla-e . and iys

Zealand Oceanographk Inst'ttuu Vfemoh 38 86 p. lemalics. Australian Journal of M

1 ; Howcbin, W. (1936), Note , on the genlogical sections Freshwater Resean-hlft, 795 M 1 )<>S|, on the plains Vasaini. I anil Jones. B.C. || Reeeui oblained b) I Kl t>( situated Li ( oiaiiiiTiilenila and Osiraeoda Irom esluarine ami ahcll between Adelaide and Gull ' \ il. Pari -

: ol lil LTriuieiii Bore). Transdctiona of the environments on the southeastern coas! Atislralja

I <>! Prints, New Royal Ja A f) a) ! irtl iustralia, 60, 14, University WoUortgo/ie WoHongong,

, , , Jennings, IN M . 5 m. The submarine topoftraohy of South Wales'. 484 p. BMiiihisi. i. sir, in Proceedings the Royal socteft n\ Vasi I. Jones, B.G. ami Jones, MR, [1993) " of i irom ihe Gull *'i Carpentaria, northeastern f, torlan,A9 Omracods

1 406. i 73. i 1 i vi ! -iii ri i s Sent i73 i 197(1). kenbergianu M a ind Mun Smith, 1 Australia. hthca u foraniiiitlera ol Xishit Southwell Island and oiliei investigations in the Kent Zheng, S. ( 1979). The Reeeui ihe 87 344-371. Islands. Guangdong Province China Part 2. Studio I iMiup The Victorian Naturalist '. Kuitcr. K.I! II9S1). The inahorc lisdesoi the Kent Group Manna SinicaXS, 200 232.

Vol. J 16 (6) 1999 227 Naturalist Note

Bizarre Encounters with Wildlife: Observations from Around Wattle Glen

Different animal species using the one thai there was a young wallaby around, bui I

nest hollow couldn't see it. The Black Wallaby conlin

Slaj-'vvalcliiuj' a lice with a large tree hoi- ued litis behaviour, giving no indication it

low with obvious scratching around it. led was aboul lo slop. In Order not to continue lo (he discovery ol a couple of possum the disturbance I decided lo leave. While species using tins tree. The tree, which is a this was happening the dogs showed no Luge senescing Red Stimgybaik interest in the Black Wallaby and conlin Euviilypi'us macrorhynchQ was found to be ued sniffing around the tussock grasses home to a Brushiail Possum (in the hollow Poa hibillardiert. As we left the gully (I described) and a colony ol Sugar < ilideis look a palh which would have been aboul a in anolhei hollow. This live is also home lo 200 in walk up the ridge), the Black

;i colony ot feral European Honeybees. Wallaby Followed behind. The circling

Regularly watching this tree at dusk, I was behaviour ol the Black Wallaby occurred surprised to discover that the Brush tail's on two separate occasions and the dogs hollow was used annually by a pair ol were with me both limes (ihe wallaby did nesting Kookaburras (I observed this for n't follow us oul Ihe second time). I've three consecutive years). Presumably they walked this area many limes and never kit k ihe Brushiail out. This leads to a mini experienced anything like it. Character bci ol questions, Where does ihe Brushiail istically, as you would know, as soon as

Possum go? Musi il find anolhei tree hoi these animals are aware of your presence

low or docs il sleep out lor the summer? they lake oil. Mow often do birds, which use tree hoi So what does ihis mean? Is this typical lows lor nesting, cvicl arboreal mammals behaviour ov is this Black Wallaby a nut? during then breeding season? Is this the Was il the same wallaby on both occasions

Kookaburras' preferred tree hollow or is it (I'd suspect so but 1 couldn't be sure)? lias an indication oi lack of suitable tree hoi it had an encounter with dogs before which lows in the area? Nave any field naturalists stimulated Ihis behaviour? After thinking

Observed similar events? about it loi a while I wondered whether Ihe wallaby thought Ihe dogs were loves. Are

An even more bizarre enCOUrtter with ;i loves a threat lo Black Wallabies? I've Black Wallaby seen Eastern Grey Kangaroos and foxes

While walking in bushlaiul close to home I wilhin the one aiea and neither seemed realised our two knee high (kind ol !o\ interested in Ihe oilier. Once again has any looking) dogs had sneakily followed me. I one else had a smiilai encounler? didn'l send ihem home. They continued on I'd be interested in other Held naturalists wilh me into ihe base ol a gully which drains describing their bi/arre encounters will) into a dam. Il was here dial we stimulated wildlife during their wanderings. I have no some uncharaclerislic bchauoui in a Black douhl thc\ would be many and Varied. Wallaby. The Black Wallaby rapidly and repeatedly circled us (ai a radius of approxi Maria Belvedere match Ml in). It occasionally stopped and l8Siradbroke Road,

' H,,,ouli '- Vk ,0 " a ii5Sl look a series of deep biealhs (as .1 smelling the surroundings), My initial thought was

Editor's note: Regarding, the sharing ol nesl hollows, u has been reported thai Sugai Gliders sometimes share a nest hollow with Cialahs (The Bird Observer* no. 794, March I9V9, p. 9), Thank you to Virgil Hubregtse lor pointing ihis out.

--K The V k'tnrkin Naturalist Book Review

Plant Collecting for the Amateur

by T. Christopher Brayshaw

Publisher: Royal British Columbia Museum, Canada. ISBN 0-7718-9439-2,

44 /v ,., paperback.. RRP $12.95. Distributed by UttiREPS, University o( New South H ales, Sydney NSW 2052

Collecting plants is one of the most lo send specimens to for identification, enjoyable experiences for any botanist, books to aid in identification and references allowing the opportunity to get outdoors to what is legal/illegal to collect - provided and seek out and examine interesting you live in British Columbia! For the plants. The book, "Plant Collecting for the Victorian naturalist, this aspect of the book Amateur' by T.C Brayshaw (1996), pro- is o\' limited practical value and perhaps l vides a very basic yet informative guide on relegates the hook to the category of a how to get started. It includes some very really good book lo borrow from the important aspects about collecting- what to library'. collect, and how and when to collect. It Out o\' interest, the Melbourne Herbarium discusses the types of information that generally charges $10 for each identifica- should accompany any collection, which is tion, and reserves the right lo charge by the of critical importance if collections are to hour for particularly difficult specimens. retain some sort of meaning in the years to Collectors should also remember that, in come. The chapter on mounting and filing Victoria, permits are required to remove specimens gives some valuable informa any plant material from national parks and lion on ensuring collections are timeless. state forests, which limits the range o\ Brayshaw provides some good advice on material that may be available for collec- pressing and drying plant specimens, tion. including some wonderful ideas lor build- Many plants are rare or threatened in due to reductions in habitat. ing your own press and drying racks. It Australia plants turn up in some very was good to see discussion of how to deal Some rare unexpected places, ami. indeed, in many with pressing and drying some of the more cases it has been the amateur collector that tricky plant types, such as succulents and has drawn attention to these populations. plant materials with large cones or fruits. I However, for particularly interesting plants was also happy to see treatment on collec- with limited distribution, the potential for tion of non-vascular plants (mosses, liver- viable populations to be 'collected out of worts and lichens), an often neglected area existence' can he a real threat. I would botanical study. However. I don't rec- of question the need to colled apparently rare their shape ommend pressing lichens as or non-abundant plants from an area, espe- can be an important diagnostic feature. cially where the identity o\' the plant is Unfortunately, Brayshaw did not cover unknown. Amateur collectors, being curi- fungi and algae (micro or macro) and these ous, yet eternally fond of our native bush- two groups can cause difficulty lor inter- land, should be able to find plenty of ested amateurs. enjoyment in collecting and identifying the Overall. Brayshaw has written a very plains that appear numerous and abundant readable and informative little book with in an area. all the information necessary on how lo collect, preserve and file plant specimens Sharon K. Ford

IX-akin I iuiv. i ,il\ personal public herbaria. The for both and RumIi'm Campus only detraction being that the book contains 662 Blackburn Road, potentially useful information on herbaria Clayton, Victoria H68

229 Vol. 116(61 1 *>w Guidelines for Authors

Guidelines lor Authors

Submission of all Manuscripts Please iK tie that we use the desk top pub Authors may submit material in the Form lishing programme PC Quark N press ol research reports, contributions, natural which only accepts MSWord For isi notes, letter* to the editoi and hunk Windows 2, Thus, the editors would prefer reviews. Research reports end contribu the disc (required only forthe final paper) in lions must be accompanied bv -hi abstract this programme. However, we can deal with ni not more than 200 words, The abstract most PC programmes, should state the scope oi the work, give the Manuscript ( lorrecttons i>i uit [pie findings and be complete enough Authors can verily their final copy maun loi use by abstracting services, Research script before it goes to the printer A copy 1 reports and contributions will be refereed of their article as 'ready for the printer by external referees, A Research Report is will be sent ami minor final changes may a siiecincl and original scientific paper be made at this stage. written in (he traditional formal including Taxonomlc Names absliacl, inlioductuHi. methods, results and Cite uTeiences used lor lavonomic discussion. A Contribution mav consist ol names. Kclcrcnccs used by The Victorian reports, comments, observations, survey Niilw tilts! are listed at the end ol these results, bibliographies m other material guidelines. relating to natural history, The scope of a Abbreviations contribution is broad ami little defined to Italics are used for the following abbrevi

<>i rin ourage material on a wide range top ations; et ol.: pers < omrrt%\ ptrs obs : ics and in a range Ol sivles. This allows unpuht. iliidt and in press which are cited inclusion ol material mat makes a conin in the text (R.G. Brown 1994 pert, comm bution to our knowledge Oi natural lusloiy 3 May). Note that 'ssp.' is now 'subsp.' bill loi which llie traditional format of SCi Tables and I inures enttfic paper, is not appropriate, Naturalist All illustrations (including photographs) Notts are generally short, personal are considered as Figures and will be

i ,ii mints ol observations made in I he tie Id designed lit lit within a page (113 mm) or a in anyone with an interest in natural histo column (5.s mm) width. Tables must also lit iv. These may also include reports on mlo 55 mm/I 15 mm. II is iinportanl that excursions and talks, where appropriate, the legend Is clearly visible at these sizes. Latiers to the Editor must be no Longei Tor preference, photographs should be ol than 500 words. Hook Reviews are usually high quality/high contrast which will repro commissioned, but the editors also wet ducc clearly in black and white and they come enquiries from potential reviewers, may be colour slides, colour o\ black-and- Submission ojfa manuscript will he taken white prints, lino drawings, maps ami //; mean that the material has not been graphs ma\ be computoi generated or in published^ not is being considered fin black Indian Ink on stout while or tracing publication elsewhere, and that all papei .< )n the back ol each figure, write the authors agree to its submission. figure number and the paper's title in pencil

I luce copies ol the manuscript should be All figures ami tables should be referred to in provided, each including all tables ami the text ami numbered conseculivelv. Their copies of figures, Original artwork ami captions must be numbered consecutivel) photos can be withheld b\ the aulhor until (Fig, I. Til' 2, etc.) and put on a separate acceptance of the manuscript. Manuscripts page at llie cud ol (he manuscript. Tables should be typed, double spaced with wide should be numbered consecutively (Table I. margins ami pares numbered The name Table 2, etc) and have an explanatory caption and addiess of all authors should be on a at llie top. separate page to ensure anonymity lor ret I 'nits ereeing. Indicate the telephone numbei o! The International System of Units (SI the authoi who in to receive correspon units) should lie used for exact measure dent c ineni oi physical quantities.

239 The Victorian Naturalist Guidelines fp? Authots

Jourmil Style Journal titles should be quoted in full.

Authors are advised to note the layout of Leigh, J.. Boden. R. and Briggs. J. (1984), headings, tables and illustrations as given 'Extinct and Endangered Plants of in reeent issues o\' the Journal. Single Australia". ( M a c m i 1 1 a n : South spaces are used after Full stops, and single Melbourne.) quotation marks are used throughout (in Lunney, D. (1995). Bush Rat. /// "The most eases). Mammals o\' Australia', pp. 651-653. In all papers, at the first reference of a Ed. R. Strahan. (Australian Museum/ species, please use both the common name Reed New Holland: Sydney.) and binomial. However, where a lot o\' Phillips, A. and Watson, R. (1991). species are mentioned, a list (an appendix Xatithorrhoea: Consequences o( 'horti- at the end), with both common and binomi- cultural fashion". The \ 'ictarian al names, may be preferred. Lists must be Naturalist 108. 130-133. in taxonomic order using the order in which Smith. A.B. (1995). Flowering plants in they appear in the references listed below. north-eastern Victoria. (Unpublished The journal uses capitalised common PhD thesis, University of Melbourne.) names for species then the binomial in ital- Other methods of referencing may be ics, e.g. Kangaroo (Jrass Themedd friatu/ra. acceptable in manuscripts other than References research reports, and the editors should be References in (he text should cite author consulted. For further information on style, and year, e.g. Brown (1990), (Brown write to the editors, or consult the latest 1990). (Brown 1990. 1991), (Brown 1995 Victorian Naturalist or "Style Manual for tuipithl.), (Brown and Green 1990). Authors, Editors and Printers* (5th edition) (Brown and Green 1990; Blue 1990: Red (Australian Government Publishing 1990). If there are more than two authors Service: Canberra). for a paper use (Brown et ul. 1990). These Complimentary Copies should be included under References, in After publication of an article in the jour- alphabetical order, at the end oi' the text nal, five complimentary copies of that

(see below). The use of unpublished data is issue are sent to the author(s) for each only accepted if the data is held in a public paper. Authors of Naturalist Notes and institution, and the location must be cited Book Reviews will receive two compli- in the references. Pers. ohs. and />

Checking species names is the responsibility of authors. The books we would like to be used as references for articles in The Victorian Naturalist are listed below. Authors should refer to the sources used for species names in their papers. In every case, the latest edition of the book should be used.

Mammals - Menkhorst. P.W. (ed.) Kirds - Chrislidis, L. and Bowles. W. Taxonomy and Species of ( 1995). •Mammals of Victoria: (1994). 'The Distribution, ecology and conservation'. Birds of Australia and its Territories'. (Oxford University Press: South Royal Australian Ornithologists Union Melbourne.) Monograph 2. (RAOU: Melbourne,) Cogger, H. Reptiles and Amphibians Plants - Ross, J. II. (ed.) (1996). 'A (1992). Reptiles and Amphibians of Census of the Vascular Plants o\ Australia*. (Reed Books: Chatswood. Victoria*. (Royal Botanic Gardens of N.S.W., Victoria: Melbourne.) Insects - CSIRO (1991). 'The Insects of Australia: a textbook for students and

research workers'. Volumes I and II. (Y1UP: Melbourne.)

Vol. 116(6) 1999 231 The Field Naturalists Club of Victoria Inc. Reg NoA00336IlX

Established 1880 In which is incorporated the Microscopical Society of Victoria

OBJECTIVES; To stimulate interest in natural history and to preserve and protect Australian flora andfauna.

Membership is open lo any person interested in natural history and includes beginners as well as experienced naturalists.

Registered Office: FNCV. I Gardenia Street. Blackburn. Victoria 3130. Australia.

Postal Address; FNCV, Linked Bag 3, PO Blackburn. Victoria 3t30, Australia.

Phone/Fax (03) 9877 9860; International Phone/rax 61 3 9877 9860. Patron His Excellency, The Honourable James Gobbo, The Governor of Victoria Key Office-Bearers President: Dr TOM MAY, c/- National Herbarium, Bird wood Avenue, South Yarra 3141. 9252 2319

Vice Presidents: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, I Astley Street. Montmorency 3094, 9435 8406 and

Mr JOHN SEEBECK, 1 13 Arundel Road, Park Orchards 3114. AH 9876 1762 lion. Secretary. Mrs ANNE MORTON, 10 Rupicola Court. Rowville 3178. 97904)656 Hon. Treasurer: Vacant Subscription-Secretary: ENCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3 130. 9877 9860 Editor, The Vie Nut.: Mrs MERILYN GREY, 8 Martin Road. Glen Iris 3146. 9889 6223 Assist, Editor. The Vie. Nat.: Mr ALISTAIR EVANS. 2/5 Glenbrook Avenue, Clayton 3 168. 9545 6134 Librarian: Mrs SHEILA HOUGHTON, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3 1 30. AH 5428 4097 Excursion Co-ordinator: Mr DENNIS MELTZER. 8 Hareourl Avenue, Caul'ield 3162. 9523 1853 Book Sates: Dr ALAN PARKIN, FNCV, Locked Bag 3, PO Blackburn 3130. AH 9850 2617 Book Brokerage: Mr RAY WHITE, 20 Alfred Street, Essendon 3040. 9379 3602 Newsletter Editors: Dr NOEL SCHLEIGER, as above and Mr KEITH MARSHALL. 8/423 Tooronga

Road. I lawlhorn East 3 1 23. 9882 3044 ( 'onservation Coordinator: Ms NATALIE SMITH. 37 Childers Street, Kevv 3 101 . Al I 9853 1339 Group Secretaries Botany: Mr RAY MACPHERSON, 8 Jean Street. Lower Templesiowe 3107. 98504319 Geology: Mr ROB HAMSON, 5 Foster Street, McKiunon 3204, 9557 5215 Fauna Survey: Ms SOPHIE SMALL, 107 Bondi Road, Boubeach 31%. All 9772 2848 Marine Research; Mr MICHAEL LYONS, 2/18 Stonnington Place, Toorak 3142. AH 9822 8007

Microscopical: Mr RAY POWER, 36 Sehotters Road, Mernda 3754. 9717 351 1 MEMBERSHIP

Members receive The Victorian Naturalist and the monthly Eield Nat News tree. The Club organises several monthly meetings (tree to all) and excursions (transport costs may be charged). Eield

work, including botany, mammal and invertebrate surveys, is being done at a number of locations in Victoria, and all members are encouraged to participate.

SUBSCRIPTION RATES tor 2000 Add GST for 6 months b irst Member Metropolitan $40 $2.00 Concessional (pensioner/student/unemployed) $30 $ 1 .50 Country (more than 50km from GPO) $30 $1 .50 Junior (under 18) $15 $0.75 Additional Members Adult $15 $0.75 Junior $5 $0.25

Institutional Australian Institutions $55 $2.75 Overseas Institutions AU$65 $3.25 Schools/Clubs %^ $1.75

all 10% GST must be added lo subscriptions for the period from I July 2000 Send to: FNCV, Locked Bag 3. PO Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia.

Printed by Brown Prior Anderson, 5 Evans Street. Burwood. Victoria 3125.